Hovova

JOURNAL OF THE

NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB.

Conducted and published for the Club, by
BENJAMIN LINCOLN ROBINSON Editor-in-chief.

FRANK SHIPLEY COLLINS
MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD Associate Editors.
HOLLIS WEBSTER

WILLIAM PENN RICH

} Publication Committee.
EDWARD LOTHROP RAND

VOLUME 9.

1907.

Boston, Mass. | Providence, TR. T,

740 Exchange Building. Preston and Rounds Co.

Au—1$77

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. January, 1907. No. 97

RIBES VULGARE AND ITS INDIGENOUS REPRESENTA-
TIVES IN EASTERN NORTH AMERICA.

M. L. FERNALD.

THe common Red Currant (Ribes vulgare) of our gardens has
become well established along fence-rows, in roadside thickets, in
open woods near towns, and in other places where its seeds have been
easily spread, by birds and other agents, from the cultivated shrubs.
In these half-wild habitats the plant has thus far shown little or no
tendency to vary from the Old World type from which it was derived.

In low coniferous forests and mossy swamps and in subalpine
districts of New England and eastern Canada, however, where the
commonly cultivated European Ribes vulgare is as yet unknown, there
are two indigenous red currents which have been passing as identical
with or scarcely separable from the introduced plant of the gardens.
These plants have several characters in common by which they are
readily distinguished from the cultivated shrub. R. vulgare is usually
upright, bearing numerous leafy tufts more or less mingled upon the
old wood with the flower-bearing shoots. ‘The blades of the mature
leaves are 3.5 to 6.5 cm. broad, somewhat broadened upward, the
lobes mostly short-ovate, the middle one rarely broader than long.
'The pedicels are mostly smooth and glandless, in one form only
soft-pubescent. The rotate calyx is greenish-yellow, its oval lobes
abruptly narrowed below the middle and the petals are narrowly
wedge-shaped. At the base of the calyx, between the stamens and
the slightly-cleft style, there is a high but narrow obtusely scalloped
ring.’

1 As recently shown by Professor Janczewski, two European species have been pass-
ing as Ribes rubrum. One, the true R. rubrum L., with its “habitat in Sueciae boreali-
bus," has the calyx somewhat cup-shaped, brown or mottled with red and destitute
of a disk. This species so far as known to the writer is not found wild in America.
The other, R. vulgare Lam., with the flat calyx yellowish green and bearing a prominent

disk, is the common species of cultivation. (See Edouard de Janczewski, Comp. rend.
acad. franc., cxxx. 1890, 588; and Bull. Acad. Cracovie, Janvier, 1906, 3.)

2 Rhodora [JANUARY

In the indigenous shrubs of our northern forests and mountain-
slopes the stems are decumbent or loosely straggling or reclining,
often rooting freely where they touch the ground. The leafy shoots
are produced chiefly from terminal buds while the numerous racemes
appear below the leafy tips along the otherwise naked old wood. The
blades of the mature leaves are 5 to 10 em. broad, the sides nearly
parallel, the lobes-mostly broad-deltoid, the middle one usually broader
than long. The pedicels are more or less covered with reddish or
yellowish glands. The calyx is smoke-color or dull purplish, its
segments very broadly cuneate, and the petals of similar outline.
At the base of the calyx, between the stamens and the deeply-cleft
style, there is a low and broad pentagonal disk.

In all their essential characters the indigenous shrubs are uniform,
but while the plants of one region have the leaves bright green and
glabrous or glabrate upon both surfaces, those of other localities are
whitened beneath with tomentum. Whether this production of
pubescence is due to peculiarities of the soil such as have been
pointed out in the case of Ribes oxyacanthoides, var. calcicola ! it is
not now possible to state with certainty. It is, however, significant
that the only phase of the plant known to the writer from the granitic
mountains of Quebec and northern New England — Table-topped
Mountain, Katahdin, the White Mountains, etc.— is the shrub with
glabrous or glabrate leaves; plants from the humus of woodlands and
swamps where the characteristic rock is more or less calcareous have
the veins on the lower surfaces of the leaves somewhat ciliated with
inconspicuous hairs — for example, specimens from low woods and
Arbor-Vitae swamps in Rimouski County, Quebec, northern Maine
and northern Vermont; and the shrubs which have unquestionably
grown in strongly calcareous soils — specimens, for instance, from
crevices of calcareous slates at Fort Kent and at Brownville, Maine —
retain to maturity a soft coat of whitish tomentum. Most herbarium
labels unfortunately give no information upon these points and further
observations are necessary before we can state finally that the two
extremes of our indigenous red current are due to local soil-conditions.
Both in the field and in the herbarium the two plants are notably
different in aspect, the one with quite green foliage, the other with the
leaves strongly whitened beneath.

! Fernald, RHODORA, vii. 155 (1905).

NONIS PY

1907] Fernald,— Ribes vulgare 3

The shrub with the leaves whitened and permanently tomentose
beneath is the plant described by Pallas from northern Asia as Ribes
triste, and later redescribed by Maximowicz as Ribes rubrum, y sub-
glandulosum, from Siberia, Mandshuria and the colder regions of
America. ‘The other, with the mature leaves glabrous or at most
ciliate along the nerves beneath and green on both surfaces, is well
matched by Michaux's material of his R. albinervium described from
Canada (“ad amnem Mistassin”). The characteristics and distribu-
tion in eastern America of the smooth-fruited red currents may be
briefly stated as follows:—

RIBES VULGARE Lam. Suberect shrub: leaves mostly cordate,
slightly pubescent beneath or glabrate; the mature blades 3.5 to 6.5
em. broad, broadened upwards, 3-5-lobed, the lobes mostly short-
ovate: racemes spreading in anthesis, drooping in fruit, 3 to 5 (be-
coming 7) em. long: the rachis glabrous, though often glandular: the
pedicels mostly glandless: calyx yellow-green; its segments oval and
abruptly narrowed below the middle: petals narrowly cuneate: disk
between the stamens and the slightly-cleft style a high narrow ring
with round-scalloped margin: fruit plump and juicy.— Encyc. iii.
47 (1789); Janczewski, Compt. rend. acad. franç., cxxx. (1890)
588, and Bull. Acad. Cracovie, Janv., 1906, 3. R. rubrum, var.
sativum Reichb. Fl. Excurs. 562 (1830). R. rubrum, most authors,
not L. Common in cultivation and frequently escaped and estab-
lished in fence-rows, thickets and open woods. Naturalized from
Europe.

R. TRISTE Pallas. Straggling or reclining, the branches often root-
ing freely: leaves somewhat heart-shaped, the mature blades 5 to 10
em. broad, the sides nearly parallel, the lobes mostly broad-deltoid,
permanently white-tomentose beneath: racemes drooping, 3.5 to 9 em.
long: pedicels mostly glandular: calyx smoke-color to purplish; the
segments broadly cuneate or subrhombic, as broad as or broader than
long: petals broadly cuneate: disk a low broad pentagon: style deeply
cleft: fruit mostly small and hard.— Pall. in Nov. Act. Acad. Petrop.
x. (1797) 378); Janczewski, Bull. Acad. Cracovie, Janv., 1906, 3. R.
rubrum of many authors, not L. R. rubrum, var. subglandulosum
Maxim. Bull. Acad. St. Petersb. xix. 261 (1874). Cold woods,
swamps, and subalpine regions, Newfoundland to Alaska, south to
Maine and Vermont, perhaps confined to regions of pronouncedly
calcareous soil. Also in Siberia and Mandchuria.

4 Rhodora [JANUARY

Var. albinervium (Michx.) Similar, but with the leaves glabrous
or sparingly pubescent beneath when young, soon glabrate. R. al-
binervium Michx. Fl. i. 110 (1803).— More common, extending south
to Nova Scotia, central New Hampshire, southern Vermont, Michigan,
Wisconsin, etc.

GRAY HERBARIUM.

CONNECTICUT RUBI.
Wo. H. BLANCHARD.

THis paper presents some of the facts obtained and conclusions
reached by me during ten weeks spent in Connecticut searching out
and studying its Rubi, more especially its blackberries. Visits of a
week or more each were made in August, 1903, in July, 1904, and in
June and August, 1905; and five weeks in June, July, August and
September, 1906, were devoted to the work. Southington and Plain-
ville were pretty thoroughly searched and much was done in the sur-
rounding towns especially in Bristol, New Britain, Newington,
Farmington, West Hartford, Berlin and Wethersfield. ‘Trips were
taken to New London and Norwich, Stamford, Winsted, and Somers,
and numerous shorter ones were made. Mr. C. H. Bissell and Mr.
Luman Andrews of Southington, Mr. W. B. Rossberg of New Britain
and Dr. C. B. Graves of New London very kindly aided by visiting
localities with me and exhibiting specimens.

RuBus occrpENTALIS L. Black Raspberry. Abundant in all
parts of the state. It probably thrives no better anywhere than in
Connecticut, which is far enough south for it to be at home on the
highest land. ‘The fact does not seem to be generally known that this
is a comparatively southern species and is found in Northern New
England like the white oak and white pine only in favored places,
occurring rarely in the high or northern parts.

R. strigosus Michx. Red Raspberry. Abundant in all parts
of the state. While R. occidentalis is a comparatively southern plant,
R. strigosus is a northern plant and it fruits very poorly in Connecti-
cut.

1907] Blanchard,-- Connecticut Rubi 5

R. NEGLECTUS Peck (R. occidentalis X R. strigosus Austin). Purple
Raspberry. This occurs occasionally and is easily recognized when
ripe. It may be briefly described as a red raspberry growing on a
black raspberry bush. The fruit is soft and loosely held together
like the red raspberry, but there is enough black mixed with the red
in its color to make it purple. The cane is long and recurved and it
tips as readily as the black raspberry. Careful examination shows
that in all its characters it is an intergrade between R. occidentalis
and R. strigosus and I have never failed to find both of them growing
with or near it. It seems probable, however, that such proximity
of the parent species is not without exception.

R. oporatus L. Flowering Raspberry. Mulberry. Occasional
in most parts of the state but nowhere common. Rare in the south-
eastern part, frequent in some sections in the southwestern part. It
seems to prefer rocky woods and thrives among the loose stones at
the foot of ledges, but is sometimes seen in fence-row hedges in cleared
land.

R. TRIFLORUS Richardson. Rare in some places but generally
distributed. Prefers damp swampy woods.

R. cuNErFoLrUs Pursh. This species, very distinct and agreeably
constant in its characters, occurs in no other New England state.
Its dwarf growth and numerous strong hooked prickles make the
name “ankleberries” very appropriate. In southern New Jersey
I found it called “hog blackberry." The fruit is cylindrical, large
and fine-flavored. Here it is not confined to sandy soil. East of the
Connecticut River it is known to occur in but one section, namely,
the towns of Chatham, Colchester and Portland. "West of the Con-
necticut River it has been found as far north as Farmington and as
far east as Guilford. It seems to be occasional in some places and
frequent in the southwestern quarter of the state.

R. ALLEGHANIENSIS Porter. (R. nigrobaccus Bailey.) Sow-teat
Blackberry. This is the high blackberry here and is abundant nearly
everywhere. No other blackberry has such a delicious, spicy, aromatic
taste, and no other of all our wild berries except the strawberry ap-
proaches it in excellence. Its great number of drupelets makes it
very seedy. Its long, slender, tapering shape has suggested its two
most characteristic names — Sow-teat and Sheep-teat.

Odd forms of this species turn up everywhere. They seem to be
local mostly. Dr. Graves very kindly took me to the station where

6 Rhodora [JANUARY

R. nigrobaccus, var. Gravesii Fernald grows. In its immediate vicin-
ity good normal plants were seen. This variety from its yellow color,
poor fruit and general sickly appearance seems to be a pathological
variation. If these plants were removed to a more favorable home, it
seems probable that they would soon be normal.

R. ANDREWSIANUS Blanchard. Rnopnonma viii. 17 (1906). Abun-
dant near the sea, in the river valleys and on the sand plains. In these
parts of the state it largely takes the place of R. Alleghaniensis. It is
a southern species reaching its northern limits here, where it seldom
bears a good crop; but in southeastern Pennsylvania, Maryland and
Virginia, where it is the common high blackberry, the crop is abundant.
The berries are very large and are not “seedy.” Many of them are
much higher than broad; they are always loose-fruited, with large
"grains" or drupelets.

R. FLtoricomus Blanchard. Am. Bot., Nov., 1905. The area on
which this species is known to grow is the southeastern part of South-
ington and on Meriden Mountain. It is distinct enough and covers
sufficient territory to make it probable that it will be found in other
places.

R. rRoNposus BicELow. Probably occasional throughout the
state and frequent in some places. Discussed in RHopora, Nov.,
1906. Stations found: Southington on the New Britain pipe-line,
100 rds. east of Queen St., July, 1904, a single plant; Plainville at the
railroad overpass, August, 1905, a small clump; 1906, Plainville at
White Oak, Southington at Shuttle Meadow, Farmington at the bridge
and reservoir, West Hartford, Rocky Hill, near Norwich, and abundant
on Cedar Hill near the southeast corner of Cedar Hill Cemetery in
the northwest corner of Wethersfield.

R. procuMBENS, Muhl. (R. Canadensis Gray's Manual. R. sub-
uniflorus Rydberg). Running Blackberry, Dewberry. Common
throughout the state. 'This species presents numberless forms some
of which resemble R. invisus Bailey and R. Baileyanus Britton, two
species of dewberry whose status is uncertain at present. R. sub-
uniflorus Rydberg seems to be a decumbent, depauperate form of R.
procumbens. 'There is little that is constant in most of the forms of
this species and what final disposition of them botanists may make is
problematical.

R. REcURVANS Blanchard. Rnopona vi. 223 (1904) and viii. 152
(1906). Frequent, often abundant, in Central Connecticut and

1907] Blanchard,— Connecticut Rubi 7

probably found throughout. A form with thicker dark green leaves
also occurs whose status is still uncertain.

Rubus Rossbergianus, n. sp. Plants glandless, pubescent, 1 to 2
feet high, stems large at the base, recurving, 3 to 5 feet long, the
prostrate end often tipping; prickles of moderate size. Leaves large,
dark green, rather thick, 5-foliate; leaflets broad, those on old canes
remaining till fall. Inflorescence cymose, pedicels subtended by
narrow leaves; flowers large; fruit short-cylindrical 3 in. high, pro-
ductive.

New canes. Stems erect at first, 1 to 2 feet high, hard, green,
terete, glabrous and glandless, often branched, soon recurving, becom-
ing 3 to 5 ft. long, often tipping. Prickles $ to 7e in. long, slender,
straight, strong, slanted slightly backward, numerous, 20 to the inch
of stem, not noticeably in lines. Leaves large, the earlier 6 to 7 in.
long by 5 to 6 in. broad, later leaves smaller, rather thick, 5-foliate,
dark green with appressed hairs on the upper surface, lighter beneath
and very pubescent. Leaflets broad, outline entire, long taper-
pointed, finely and doubly serrate-dentate; the middle leaflet very
broad and cordate, the side leaflets broad and ovate or oval, the basal
leaflets broad and cuneate at the base. Petiole and petiolules large,
glabrous, grooved, prickles numerous, short and hooked; the petiolule
of the middle leaflet 1 in. long, the side ones one-third as long and the
basal leaflets sessile.

Old canes. Stems hard, greenish brown, badly killed back, prickles
intact. New growth consisting of short leafy branches mostly bearing
inflorescence, one to four from each old leaf-axil, 3 to 6 in. long.
Axis zigzag, slightly pubescent, prickles few, hooked. Leaves one to
three, trifoliate on the main axis, and numerous unifoliate leaves
above on the inflorescence making it rosette-shaped. Leaflets and
unifoliate leaves mostly narrow, occasionally broad, coarsely serrate-
dentate and toward the points deeply dentate; in color, texture and
pubescence like those on new canes. Inflorescence cymose, axis
short, about 8-flowered, the pedicels subtended by unifoliate leaves.
Flowers appearing June 15 or earlier 13 to 1} in. broad, petals oval,
one-half as wide as long. Fruit ripening very early short-cylindric,
about } in. high, composed of large drupelets. Edible, sweet and
sought by berry-pickers. Leaves persisting till fall.

Type station: Southington, Connecticut, 25 rods southeast of the
junction of Lazy Lane and Queen Street. Abundant in Southington

8 Rhodora [JANUARY

and the surrounding towns. Equally typical plants are abundant
in Manton, Graystone and Graniteville near Providence, Rhode
Island. Fairly representative plants were also seen in Canton,
Lexington and Palmer, Massachusetts.

This plant can be placed with the Recurvans class, and in appearance
it is intermediate between R. recurvans and R. procumbens. It differs
from R. recurvans in having thicker and dark green leaves, green
stems, a more prostrate habit, and the rosette-shaped collection of
unifoliate leaves subtending the pedicels is very noticeable.

Mr. W. B. Rossberg, whose name is associated with this species,
is a well-known local botanist of New Britain, Connecticut, who is
also an enthusiastic student of local geology.

R. sETosus Bigelow. (R. nigricans, Rydberg). Frequent in
' moist situations, borders of swamps, ponds and streams and some-
times in dry ground. Described fully in Ruopora, Nov., 1906.

Rubus semisetosus, n. sp. Plants decumbent or erect, stems mostly
round, hard, glandless, with numerous slender, often reflexed bristle-
prickles; leaves on new canes 5-foliate, narrow-ovate, approaching
obovate, rather long-pointed; fruit poor; flowers appearing late.

New canes. Stems decumbent or erect, 1 to 3 feet long generally
terete, reddish, hard, glabrous and glandless, rarely branched. Prick-
les numerous, 20 to 30 to the inch of stem, the slender or bristle-shaped
prickles often j^; in. long, perpendicular to the stem or more often very
retrorse. Leaves of moderate size, 34 to 5 in. wide, 5-foliate, not thick
but firm in texture, dull green and nearly glabrous on the upper sur-
face, paler and more or less pubescent below. Leaflets oval or often
appearing obovate, rather long taper-pointed, outline entire, serrate
and serrate-dentate, more or less doubly; the middle one about twice
as long as wide, often rounded at the base, the others much narrower
and cuneate. Petiole and petiolules grooved, nearly glabrous; slender
bristle-prickles weak and retrorse; petiole long; the petiolule of the
middle leaflet } in. long, those of the side leaflets one-third as long
and the basal leaflets sessile.

Old canes. Stems mostly decumbent, often prostrate, much killed
back, prickles greatly impaired. New growth consisting entirely
of leafy fruit-branches 4 to 6 in. long tipped with inflorescence, one
from each old leaf-axil. Axis zigzag, somewhat pubescent, bristles
few. Leaves 3-foliate or rarely a few 5-foliate, few unifoliate, leaflets
narrow; in color, texture and pubescence much like those on new

pe

1907] Blanchard,— Connecticut Rubi 9

canes. Inflorescence a short raceme; pedicels slender, pubescent,
often branched; bearing as well as the calyx a few glanded hairs or
weak bristles, one or both or neither. Flowers most often appearing
late, about 1 in. broad, petals long and narrow, two or three times as
long as wide. Fruit poor, of a few drupelets, or sometimes maturing
as fine globose berries 4 in. in diameter.

Type station: The sand plains of Plainville and Southington,
Connecticut. An abundant plant in Southern New England, growing
mostly on dry ground and especially on sandy soil.

This plant is readily distinguished from R. setosus Bigelow into
which it probably intergrades by having hard stems with comparatively
few bristles and no glands, and in having the inflorescence nearly
naked, the leaves, fruit and flowers on each being much alike.

Rubus ascendens, n. sp. Plants erect, 2 to 4 feet high, sometimes
branched, angled; prickles numerous, rather strong; glandless or
with a few glands on the inflorescence; leaves on new canes 5-foliate,
often upward-turned; leaflets long-pointed, ovate or oval; flowers
late; fruit small, often valuable.

New canes. Stems erect, 2 to 4 feet high, generally angled, green
or reddish, hard, glabrous and glandless, often branched. Prickles
numerous, 15 to 20 to the inch of stem, slender and spiny or strong
bristle-prickles, often 43; in. long with a slight backward slant. Leaves
often large, 5-foliate, of firm texture, dark yellow-green and nearly
glabrous on the upper surface, paler and somewhat pubescent, often
quite pubescent below. Leaflets ovate or oval, often broad, long
taper-pointed, outline entire, serrate or serrate-dentate; the middle
one widest and rounded often cuneate at the base, the others narrower
and cuneate. Petiole and petiolules large, grooved, slightly pubescent
with slender retrorse prickles, the petiolule of the middle leaflet about
1 in. long, the side leaflets short-stalked and the basal ones sessile.

Old canes. Stems green or green-red, prickles little impaired.
New growth consisting of leafy fruit branches, 4 to 12 in. long gener-
ally one from each old leaf-axil. Axis of branch zigzag, slender,
weakly armed, nearly glabrous. Leaves 3-foliate below, the upper
unifoliate; leaflets wide or narrow, in color, texture and pubescence
like those on new canes. Inflorescence a short raceme; pedicels
slender, pubescent, otherwise naked or on many plants clothed with
more or less weak bristles or glanded hairs one or both, with or without
subtending unifoliate leaves or bracts. Flowers appearing rather

10 Rhodora [JANUARY

late, 1 in. broad or often broader, petals narrow, twice as long as wide.
Fruit very variable, often consisting of a few drupelets, frequently
bearing profuse edible fruit, which is globose, 8 in. or over in diameter.

Type station: Southington, Connecticut, twenty rods west of the
railroad bridge over the Qunnipiac River near the Plainville line.
Abundant in Southington, Bristol, Plainville and neighboring towns
and in Southern New England generally.

This species is intended to include not only the plants which closely
resemble the type, but also many others which cannot be placed with
any species yet described. They are too large, strong, erect, and
fruitful as well as too strongly armed to be placed with R. semasetosus.
‘These characters and the general appearance of the new canes indicate
the relationship of these plants to the high blackberries especially to
small forms of R. Andrewsianus.

R. nmiserpus L. Common. The delicate forms predominate,
though some peculiar ones occur. A careful examination would
probably lead to the discovery of a great number.

Most of the Connecticut Rubi are included in the above enumeration
but in nearly all localities odd forms are to be found that cannot
easily be placed. Many of them seem to have no second station.
Of the peculiar tall forms some have considerable resemblance to
R. Canadensis L. and R. pergratus Blanchard but both of these species
are rare so far as known, though there are considerable areas in the
northeastern and northwestern parts of the state which botanists
have examined but little where the plants in question may occur in
greater number and be nearer normal.

WESTMINSTER, VERMONT.

Notes on Connecticut PrANTS.— Phaseolus perennis, Walt.
This species, which was lost sight of by our Connecticut botanists
for many years, has been reported in recent volumes of RHopora from
three stations in the southwestern section of the state. Two of these
stations are near the borders of salt marshes, while the third is adja-
cent to a "scarcely brackish” marsh. A new station, discovered by me
Sept. 28, 1906, in the town of Franklin, is of interest as showing the
species growing under different conditions, and also as extending its
range sixty miles farther toward the east. This station is twenty

1907] Knowlton,— New Stations for Massachusetts Plants 11

miles inland from Long Island Sound, and just below the brow of a
hill which rises to an elevation of five hundred feet above the sea level.
Here in a sheltered, sunny location, along the base of a low cliff, the
plant has found a congenial home and exhibits great vigor of growth,
many of the racemes being fifteen inches in length. "The station
follows the line of the cliff for several rods. >

Hierochloe borealis, Roem. & Schultes. In Connecticut this is
essentially a species of the coast, and it is seldom found elsewhere.
It occurs, however, in several bogs and meadows in Franklin, and it is
abundant in one of them. These stations are noteworthy from being
twenty miles back from the coast, in a typical hill town. Specimens
gathered here do not differ noticeably from those collected in saline
situations. In Rnopona vi. 104, this species is reported from Wil-
loughby, Vermont, where it is said to be rare.

Eatonia Dudleyi, Vasey. 'lhis species appears to be better repre-
sented in southern Connecticut than has been supposed to be the case.
In Rxopora vii. 68, I called attention to its frequent occurrence about
New Haven. It is equally frequent in southeastern Connecticut.
` On several tramps last June through Franklin and adjacent towns, I
found it in nearly every locality where one would naturally look for
Eatonia, and it was often the prevailing species of this genus. It is
not wholly confined to woodlands, for it grows in profusion in one
place beside the New London Northern Railroad, where there is
absolutely no shade, the trees having been cut away several years ago.
‘The plants at this station are robust and very pubescent.

Cuscuta compacta, Juss. This species grows along all the principal
streams of Franklin, and is by no means rare here.— R. W. Woop-
WARD, New Haven, Connecticut.

NEWLY OBSERVED STATIONS FOR MASSACHUSETTS
PLANTS.

C. H. KNowrroN.

During the past season I have made many botanical excursions
in various directions from Boston, with some very interesting results.
Messrs. William P. Rich and H. A. Purdie have been my companions
on several of these trips, and the plants mentioned below are all
represented by specimens in my herbarium, while many are also in

12 Rhodora [JANUARY

the herbarium of Mr. Rich. The following plants seem particularly
worthy of mention:

Eragrostis minor, Host. This introduced grass is very abundant
in the crevices and along the inner edge of the sidewalk, on Chandler
Street, Boston, near Castle Square. I also collected it on the Central-
ville dump in Lowell, in 1902.

Allium tricoccum, Ait. I discovered the foliage of this plant in May,
1906, in rich moist woods by Clematis brook, Waltham, near Asplenium
acrostichoides, Sw. When I revisited the station on July 7 the leaves
had withered and the flower-buds were beginning to open. There
were hundreds of plants, and the large round heads of white blossoms
were very conspicuous. The plant has also been collected in the
neighboring Beaver Brook Reservation, by Mr. R. A. Ware.

Allium vineale, L. I found a few plants of this species in the edge
of a cultivated field on Rag Rock, Woburn. It is to be hoped that
this pest will not prosper here, but remain an unusual plant.

Quercus Prinus, L. A few trees grow in sandy soil on the shore
of Little Quittacas Pond in Lakeville. It is very abundant in Sutton,
Worcester county, where it is the predominant tree in the woods
around Purgatory Chasm. It is also frequent in Webster and Dudley,
but I have not seen it near Boston.

Celtis occidentalis, L. Several trees grow in a pasture in Waltham,
near Waverley. I found them first before the leaves came out, and
visited them again the last of May, just as they were going out of
blossom. The leaves and twigs seemed much diseased from the
work of insect parasites. Small trees in better condition grow on Mt.
Tabor in Lincoln (C. H. Knowlton and E. L. Shaw).

Nasturtium sylvestre, R. Br. This rare crucifer is very plentiful
around a green-house in Natick, where it seems thoroughly established.

Potentilla fruticosa. L. One bush I have seen in a grassy swamp
in Woburn, another larger in a similar place in Amesbury. In the
northern part of Groton it grows in great profusion. This station
was given by Mr. C. W. Jenks in the Middlesex Flora.

Amphicarpaea Pitcheri, T. & G. I found this growing in consider-
able abundance at Oak Island, Revere, where it was collected by Mr.
Rich in 1893. (RHopora, i. 27.) In general appearance as well as in
several minor details it is distinctly different from the common species.
Later in the season it was found by Mr. H. H. Bartlett in great abun-
dance on Horn Pond Mt. in Woburn, only a mile or two from Mr.

1907 Knowlton,-- New Stations for Massachusetts Plants 13

Rich’s original station in Winchester. Mr. M. L. Fernald also
reports it from Rhode Island. (Rnopona, viii. 221).

Aptos tuberosa, Moench. Mr. Rich and I found very many fine
fruiting specimens of this common plant along the shores of Lake
Monponsett, Halifax. Its usual mode of reproduction seems to be
by rootstocks and tubers.

Desmodium cuspidatum, T. & G. In open woods, Horn Pond
Mt., Woburn; also in moist oak woods, Natick.

Desmodium sessilifolium, T. & G. This plant, occasional in
Connecticut and Rhode Island, was first reported in Massachusetts
from Middleboro by William Boott (1870), and from Lakeville in
1871. The Lakeville station was visited in 1899 by members of the
New England Botanical Club, and again this year by Mr. Rich and
myself. The plant is still abundant at this place, along the dry sandy
roadside near Lake Assawompsett. We also found a clump of very
large specimens in an old orchard two or three miles away, and a
large quantity further south, along the causeway between Little and
Great Quittacas ponds, in Rochester. The fruit of this species sticks
even closer than that of the common kinds, and further search would
probably show that the plant is well distributed over this flat sandy
region, where it finds its northeastern limit. Mr. John Murdoch, Jr.
tells me it is still abundant at Middleboro.

Ilex opaca, Ait. A few good trees grow in the woods at Halifax,
but no fruiting specimens were observed.

Viola arenaria, DC. I found an abundance of this in a dry clearing
in Ashburnham, Worcester county. I have never seen it in the Boston
region.

Viola sagittata, Ait. Abundant in moist sandy field, Kendal Green,
Weston. Also in a similar situation near Cambridge reservoir,
Lincoln. (C. H. Knowlton and E. L. Shaw.)

Aralia trijolia, Dec. & Planch. Moist woods, Burlington. Tophet
Swamp, Lexington.

Hydrocotyle umbellata, L. This plant, so abundant on Cape Cod,
seems even more plentiful in the northern part of Plymouth county.
Messrs. Rich, Purdie and I found the submersed form in abundance
at Indian Head Pond, Hanson. In Lakeville, at Little Quittacas
Pond, where the water had been drawn off we found a belt some
three rods wide of the terrestrial form, nearly surrounding the pond.
The rootstocks formed an interlacing network, and one shore had

14 Rhodora [JANUARY

been plowed for nearly half a mile to destroy this plant and the few
others which grew with it.

Chiogenes serpyllifolia, Salisb. A small station in the Hanson
cedar swamp. | (C. H. Knowlton and R. A. Ware).

Leucothoe racemosa, Gray. I have found one bush by the Charles
River in Natick. It is abundant in wet woods at Halifax.

Hottonia inflata, EM. The latter part of June Mr. J. W. Hunting-
ton of Amesbury showed me the station for this plant which he re-
ported in Rnopona, iii. 216. July 7 I found a few plants in a small
brook in Waltham, and the next day I came across large quantities
in the ditch beside the Willow Road, Belmont.

Lysimachia producta, Fernald. There is a fine colony of this on
the sandy shore of Silver Lake, Halifax.

Sabbatia chloroides, L. Large quantities of this in Halifax bring
the plant a little nearer to Boston than previous reports.

Asclepias obtusifolia, Mx. This plant, reported “not common"
in the Middlesex Flora, is frequent in the towns of Chelmsford, West-
ford, Dunstable, Groton and Tyngsboro, where the light glacial
gravel favors it.

Echinospermum Lappula, L. Abundant in roadside thicket,
Groton; roadside, Winchester.

Linaria genistaefolia, Mill. I found a single plant of this rare waif,
in good fruit and flower, on a railroad embankment in Groton. I do
not know of any other station in New England.

Scrophularia leporella, Bicknell. I discovered a large clump of
this well fruited, growing alone in a dry pasture at East Lexington,
August 4.

Scrophularia Marilandica, L. ‘There is a fine station for this on
Concord Hill, Lexington, from which I collected good fruiting speci-
mens Oct. 13. It was found here as early as 1903 by Miss E. L.
Shaw. This place and Oak Island are the only stations known for it
in the Boston region.

Galium boreale, L. I found some fine plants of this by a ditch in a
mowing field, near Central Square, Woburn. It grew with all the
assurance of a native, and there was no evidence of its being a garden
escape.

Bidens comosa (Gray) Wiegand. Wet roadside, Warren, Worcester
county.

Matricaria discoidea, DC. I found a fine specimen of this in

1907] Fernald,— Variations of Primula farinosa 15

Winchester early in the summer. Mr. F. G. Floyd has also a station
for this peculiar-smelling “pineapple weed" in West Roxbury.

Solidago sempervirens, L. Abundant in an open grassy swamp
in Winchester, at an elevation of about 200 feet. I have also collected
it on the East Lexington meadows.

BosroN, MASSACHUSETTS.

THE VARIATIONS OF PRIMULA FARINOSA IN
NORTHEASTERN AMERICA.

M. L. FERNALD.

Primula farinosa in its broad sense is a plant of very wide range,
the typical form occurring in northern and mountainous districts of
Eurasia and North America, while some representative of the species
is found in nearly all cooler parts of the globe, even in Antarctic South
America. The plant of eastern North America is very generally
called true P. farinosa, and in Engler's Pflanzenreich nearly all the
American plants are united by Pax and Knuth with the Eurasian
plant as P. farinosa, subsp. eufarinosa Pax, var. genuina Pax! As
shown in the Gray Herbarium, however, there is very little American
material which is clearly identical with the Eurasian type of P. farinosa.
Instead, most of the material from the northeastern United States and
adjacent British America is of two seemingly endemic varieties, while
in the Rocky Mountains is a third which may be looked for with some
confidence on the mountains of eastern Quebec. ‘These three varieties
and the Eurasian type of the species may be distinguished as follows.

* Calyx in anthesis 3-5 mm. long; involucral bracts 3.5-6 mm. long.

P. rartnosa L. Low, rarely 3 dm. high: leaves oblanceolate to
narrowly obovate, white-farinose beneath: bracts lance-attenuate:
pedicels rarely equalling the calyx: capsule 6-8 mm. long, slightly
exserted.— Sp. i. 143 (1753).— Eurasia. Rare in America: examined
only from Labrador.and Newfoundland.

Var. AMERICANA Torr. Scape 1-2.5 dm. high: leaves oblanceolate

1 Pax & Knuth in Engler, Pflanzenr, iv. Fam, 227, 83 (1905).

16 Rhodora [JANUARY

or spatulate, rather stiff, covered beneath with sulphur-yellow powder:
bracts as in the species: pedicels elongate, often 2 to 5 times as long
as the calyx: capsule 5-8 mm. long, much exserted.— FI. i. 213 (1824).
— Shores of Lakes Huron and Michigan, Ontario and Michigan.

* * Calyx in anthesis 6-8 mm. long: bracts 6-11 mm. long.

Var. macropoda, var. nov. Planta 1-4.5 dm. alta; foliis spathula-
tis vel anguste rhomboideo-ovatis longe petiolatis, subtus farinosis;
bracteis lineari- vel lanceolato-attenuatis; pedicellis elongatis (1-5 cm.
longis); capsulis 9-12 mm. longis exsertis.

Usually tall (1-4.5 dm. high): leaves from spatulate to narrowly
rhombic-ovate, long-petioled, usually white-farinose beneath: bracts
linear- or lance-attenuate, often involute in drying: pedicels mostly
elongate (1-5 em. long): capsule 9-12 mm. long, usually much ex-
serted.— LABRADOR, Battle Harbor, July 18, 1891 (Bowdoin College
Exped. no. 104): QuxEBEc, Island of Anticosti (Pursh); wet limestone
cliffs, Percé, August 17, 1904 (Collins, Fernald and Pease); banks of
the St. Lawrence R., Matane, August 7, 1904 (F. F. Forbes); lime-
stone cliffs and ledges, Bic, July 16, 1904 (Collins & Fernald), July
6-10, 1905 (Williams, Collins and Fernald), July 5, 1906 (Fernald &
Collins, no. 243 — TYPE): Nova Scorta, without locality (Mac-
Culloch); dripping cliffs, Baxters Harbor, July 10, 1900 (F. G.
Floyd): Maine, Mt. Kineo, August, 1866 (A. H. Smith), September
27, 1887 (G. G. Kennedy): KEEWATIN, a small green-leaved extreme,
below high-water mark, shore of Hudson Bay, latitude 56°, August,
1886 (J. M. Macoun): SASKATCHEWAN, Carleton House (Richardson):
ATHABASCA, “The Cascade," Athabasca R., June 15, 1892 (Elizabeth
Taylor, no. 38): Mackrnzir, Great Slave Lake (Richardson).

Var. incana (M. E. Jones), n. comb. Scapes 1-3.5 dm. high: leaves
oblong- to narrowly rhombic-ovate, short-petioled or subsessile: bracts
linear-lanceolate, obtuse or acutish: pedicels in anthesis mostly shorter
than the bracts, in fruit slightly elongated (rarely 2 or 3 em. long).—
P. incana M. E. Jones, Proc. Cal. Acad., Ser. 2, v. 706 (1895). P.
americana Rydberg, Bull. Torr. Cl. xxviii. 500 (1906).— Rocky Mts.,
Alberta to Colorado and Utah.

GRAY HERBARIUM.

Vol. 8, no. 96, including pages 225 to 246, and title page oj the volume, was
issued 24 December, 1906.

Rhbodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. February, 1907. No. 98

NOTES ON MUHLENBERGIA.
F. Lamson-ScrRIBNER.

A critical study of eastern species of Muhlenbergia as represented
by the material in the National Herbarium, has led to a somewhat
new classification of the species heretofore recognized and the segre-
gation of several subspecies and one new species. ‘The results of this
study are here presented. ;

SECTION 1. Glumes minute, the first sometimes obsolete. Muhlen-
bergia proper.

1. MUHLENBERGIA SCHREBERI Gmel. Syst. Nat. 2:171. 1791.
M. diffusa Willd. Enum. 1:81. 1809; Schreb. Gram. 2:143.
Pl. 51. 1810.

la. MUHLENBERGIA SCHREBERI curtisetosa Scribn. n. subsp.
Panicles 3-12 cm. long; spikelets 2.5-3 mm. long; glumes
unequal, the first ovate, obtuse, about 1 mm. long, the second
ovate or ovate-lanceolate, obtuse, acute or abruptly mucronate-
pointed, 1-2 mm. long; lemmas short-awned; awns 1 mm. or
less in length. Type collected by J. Wolf in Illinois in 1881.
Other specimens in the Natl. Herb.; Illinois, J. Wolf, 1882,
Champaign, Illinois, G. P. Clinton, 1892. No. 204 A. Commons
from Centerville, Delaware, apparently belongs here.

lb. MUHLENBERGIA SCHREBERI palustris Scribn. n. comb. Muhlen-
bergia palustris Scribn. U. S. Dept. Agric. Div. Agros. Bul. 11: 47.
1898. Culms filiform; sheaths naked at the throat; both glumes
manifest; awns 5-6 mm. long. Swamps, Brightwood, District
of Columbia (Type locality).

SEcTION 2. Glumes ovate, acute, much shorter than the lemmas.
(Stenocladium Trin. Fund. Agros. 117, as a section of Trichochloa.)
2. MUHLENBERGIA SOBOLIFERA (Muhl.) Trin. Gram. Unifi. 189.

18

2a.

3a.

Rhodora [FEBRUARY

Pl. 5, fig. 4. 1824. Agrostis sobolifera Muhl. in Willd. Enum. 95.
1809. Trichochloa sobolifera Trin. l. c.

MUHLENBERGIA SOBOLIFERA setigera Scribn. n. subsp. Culms.
very slender, much branched; lemmas awned; awns 1-3 mm.
long. Otherwise as in the species. Type, no. 70 J. Reverchon,
Texas, in Natl. Herb. No. 1054 J. Reverchon in Natl. Herb., also
from Texas, belongs here.
MUHLENBERGIA TENUIFLORA (Willd.) B. S. P. Prelim. Cat.
Pl. N. Y. 67. 1888. Agrostis tenuiflora Willd. Sp. Pl. 1:364.
1797. Muhlenbergia Willdenowi? Trin. Gram. Unifl. 188. 1824.
Trichochloa longiseta Trin. Fund. Agros. 117. 1820.
MUHLENBERGIA TENUIFLORA variabilis Scribn. n. subsp. Culms
smooth at the nodes, much branched above; panicles linear,
strict, erect, more rigid than in the species; spikelets 4 mm. long;
lemmas mucronate or short-awned; awns 2-3 mm. long. Type,
no. 654a Biltmore Herbarium from Chimney Mountain, Ruther-
ford, North Carolina, distributed as Muhlenbergia sobolifera.

SECTION 3. Glumes narrow, acuminate or aristate, nearly as long
as or exceeding the lemmas in length. (Acrowis Trin. Fund. Agros.
117, as a section of T'richochloa.)

4.

4a.

MUHLENBERGIA MEXICANA (Linn.) Trin. Gram. Unifl. 189.
1824. Agrostris mexicana Linn. Mant. 1:31. 1767. Tricho-
chloa mexicana Trin. Fund. Agros. 117. 1820. Muhlenbergia
polystachya Mac. & Bush. Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, 12: 79.
Pl. 12. 1902. Agrostis lateriflora Michx. Flor. Bor. Am. 1:53.
1803. Culms diffusely branched throughout from the base;
panicles numerous, 3-10 (usually about 6) cm. long, oblong-
ovoid or subpyramidal, rarely linear, the base usually enclosed
within the subtending leaf-sheath.

MUHLENBERGIA MEXICANA commutata Scribn. n. subsp.
Lemmas awned; awns 4-10 mm. long. Otherwise as in the spe-
cies. (M. sylvatica, in part of authors.) Quite distinct from
Agrostis sylvatica Torr. upon which Muhlenbergia sylvatica was
based. Specimens in Natl. Herb.: no. 171 M. L. Fernald,
1893 and nos. 528, 1894 and 522, 1896, all from Maine; no. 80
Wm. Harriot, 1901, from Ontario and no. 26,245 J. Macoun,
1901, from the same region. Other specimens from New York,
Delaware, Pennsylvania, Illinois and Minnesota. The speci-
mens from Delaware (no. 206 4. Commons) have aristate glumes.

————EE"

—

tm —À

1907] Lamson-Scribner,— Notes on Muhlenbergia 19

equalling or slightly exceeding the florets and awns of the latter
6-10 mm. long. An exact counterpart of this form, but awnless
and placed under the species, was collected by C. R. Ball at
Athens, Illinois, in 1892. The specimens from Pennsylvania
(coll. by 'T. C. Porter, 1895), with rather loose subpyramidal
panicles are exactly represented by awnless specimens collected
in Illinois by J. Wolf in 1892. The latter are referred to the
species.

5. MUHLENBERGIA FoLIOSA Trin. Gram. Unifl. 190. 1824. Tri-
chochloa foliosa Trin. Fund. Agros. 117. 1820. Agrostis foliosa
R.& S. Syst. 2:373. 1817. Agrostis filiformis Willd. Enum.
Hort. Berol. 1:95. 1809, not Sprengel 1807. Agrostis filiformis
Muhl.! Gram. 66. 1817. A. lateriflora filiformis Torr. Fl. 1: 66.
1824. Muhlenbergia mexicana filiformis Scribn. Mem. Torr.
Bot. Club. 5:36. 1894. Muhlenbergia mexicana of authors in
part. Culms branched above rarely to the base, branches elon-
gated; panicles 5-15 cm. long, narrowly lanceolate to filiform,
long-exserted, densely flowered, more or less interrupted espe-
cially towards the base.

The type of Muhlenberg's Agrostis filiformis is in his herbarium,
deposited in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and
is the species here referred to Muhlenbergia foliosa Trin. assuming
that it is identical with the Agrostis filiformis of Willdenow upon which
M. foliosa was founded. Both Willdenow and Muhlenberg note the
close affinity of this species with M. mexicana and Trinius in his later
writings (Trans. St. Petersb. Acad. VI, 6°: 278. 1841) refers M. foliosa
to that species. The habit of the plant and especially the fewer
much exserted and more elongated panicles and more densely flowered
panicle-branches serve to distinguish the species as here classified.

Agrostis frondosa Poir. Encycl. Suppl. 1:252. 1810, was considered |

by Roemer & Schultes as identical with Agrostis filiformis Willd.
'The identity of Poiret's species is now doubtful; he says of it that it
grows in Germany and resembles Agrostis mexicana Linn. in its in-
florescence.

Among the specimens in the National Herbarium referred to
Muhlenbergia foliosa are the following: nos. 524, 526 and 529 M.
L. Fernald, from Maine, no. 68 H. B. Dorner from Indiana; no.
794 E. A. Mearns from]Minnesota; nos. 1686, 1756, 1764, 1704, and
2848 P. A. Rydberg from Nebraska; no. 521 David Griffiths from

PU

20 Rhodora [FEBRUARY

Wyoming; no. 359 O. B. Metcalfe from New Mexico; nos. 26,248,

26,247 and 26,246 J. Macoun from Ontario.

5a. MUHLENBERGIA FOLIOSA ambigua Scribn. n. comb. Muhlen-
bergia ambigua Torr. in Nicollet's Rept. 164(237). 1843. M.
sylvatica Auct. in part. Lemmas awned; awns 4-10 mm. long,
Otherwise as in the species.

A specimen of the type collection of Muhlenbergia ambigua is in
the National Herbarium. Other specimens referred here are no.
26,244 J. Macoun; no. 80 Wm. Harriot; no. 525 M. L. Fernald,
1893; no. 527 M. L. Fernald, 1894. A specimen from Delaware,
collected by A. Commons in 1897, has panicles rather more closely
flowered and more rigid than usual. An awnless counterpart of
this form was collected by C. R. Ball in Ohio in 1892. "The pres-
ence of a more or less developed second floret noted in the original
diagnosis of M. ambigua, occurs in other species of this group.
5b. MUHLENBERGIA FOLIOSA setiglumis Scribn. n. comb. M.

sylvatica setiglumis S. Wats. U. S. Geol. Expl. Exped. 40th Par.
5:378. 1871. ‘‘Glumes attenuate into a scabrous bristle 24-3
lin. long; the palet with its awn about twice longer” (S. Wats.
l. e). The habit of this subspecies is entirely that of Muhlen-
bergia foliosa and the plant differs from M. foliosa ambigua only
in the awn-like prolongation of the glumes beyond the floret as in
M. racemosa. A specimen from the type collection is in the Na-
tional Herbarium, no. 1,288 S. Watson, from near Warm Springs,
Humboldt Pass, Nevada. ‘To this subspecies are referred no.
2,838 T. A. Williams from Wyoming; no. 3 Williams from
South Dakota; no. 927 Griffiths & Morris from Oregon and
no. 2 F. P. Briggs from Bradley, Maine, In Briggs’ specimen
the glumes equal or much exceed the florets in different spikelets
in the same panicle.

6. Muhlenbergia umbrosa Scribn. n. nom. Agrostis sylvatica 'Torr.
Fl. U. S. 1: 87. 1824, not Linn. 1762. Agrostis diffusa Muhl.
Gram. 64. 1817, not Host 1809. Muhlenbergia sylvatica gracilis
Seribn. Trans. Kans. Acad. Sci. 9:116. 1885, not M. gracilis
Kunth 1829.

Muhlenbergia sylvatica Torr. & Gray was based upon Agrostis
sylvatica Torrey, who changed the name from Agrostis diffusa Muhl.
because of an earlier Agrostis diffusa by Host, apparently overlooking
the much earlier Agrostis sylvatica of Linnaeus. There being no

1907] Lamson-Scribner,— Notes on Muhlenbergia 21
other name available for this very well defined species a new one,
M. umbrosa, is here proposed.

Torrey thus describes the species closely following Muhlenberg
in his diagnosis of Agrostis diffusa “Culms erect, much branched,
diffuse, smooth; stipules lacerate panicle filiform; corolla longer
than the calyx; awns three times as long as the flower." Torrey
compares the species with M. tenuiflora from which he says it differs
"jn being much branched and diffuse, the glumes are also longer and
narrower and the culms are glabrous at the nodes."

The type of this species is in Muhlenberg's herbarium in the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. It has much branched
culms with numerous filiform panicles and long-awned spikelets.
No. 205 A. Commons from Delaware and no. 461 B. Fink from Iowa,
both in the Natl. Herbarium are identical with the type. The general
aspect of the species is unlike that of either M. foliosa ambigua or
M. mexicana commutata, both of which have heretofore been referred
to M. sylvatica by authors. The panicles are more slender, the spike-
lets are less crowded and are usually pale green or straw-colored,
never violet or purplish as is usual in those subspecies.
6a. MUHLENBERGIA UMBROSA attenuata Scribn. n. subsp. Lemmas

awnless or merely mucronate-pointed. Otherwise as in the species.
Type, no. 25 E. N. Wilcox from Aurora Co., South Dakota.
No. 27 J. H. Kellogg from Missouri; no. 8096 E. S. Steele from
the District of Columbia; no. 523 M. L. Fernald from Maine,
belong here. The subspecies ranges from Maine to Dakota
and Nebraska southward to Missouri and Kansas.

A very careful study of the abundant material classified under
Muhlenbergia mexicana and M: sylvatica in the National Herbarium,
has led to the interesting conclusion that both these species present
awned and awnless forms and that the true M. sylvatica should be
limited to the Agrostis diffusa of Muhlenberg, a well marked species
quite distinct from awned forms of M. mexicana or of the restored
M. foliosa of Trinius. In the case of these latter species it was found
that every slight variation in habit in plants with awnless spikelets
could be exactly matched by awned specimens, the presence of the
awn being the only difference whatever. The natural conclusion
is that the awnless and awned plants belong to the same species and
that at best the latter (those with awned spikelets) could only be
treated as subspecies of the former. It appears also, that Muhlen-

22 Rhodora [FEBRUARY

bergia Schreberi, M. tenuiflora and M. umbrosa, all awned species,

present forms in which the awns are very much reduced and that in

the awnless M. sobolijera an awned form occurs. ‘The importance
of the awn as a character for diagnosis in this group of species has
apparently been much overestimated.

7. MUHLENBERGIA RACEMOSA (Michx.) B. S. P. Prelim. Cat. Pl.
N. Y. 67. 1888. Agrostis racemosa Michx. Fl. 1:53. 1803.
Agrostis setosa Muhl. Gram. 68. 1817. Trichochloa glomerata
Trin. Fund. Agros. 117. 1820. Muhlenbergia glomerata Trin.
Gram. Unifl. 191. 1824. This well known species ranges from
Newfoundland to Washington and British Columbia and south-
ward in the east to North Carolina and in the west to Texas
(?), New Mexico and Arizona.

7a. MUHLENBERGIA RACEMOSA RAMOSA (Vasey) Beal. Grasses N.
Am. 2:253. 1896. M. glomerata ramosa Vasey Cat. Grasses
U. S. 40. 1885. “A much branched spreading form, Illinois to
Colorado and Montana” (Vasey l. c.). "Stout, much branched
below, very leafy. Prairie regions." (Vasey Contrib. U. S.
Natl. Herb. 3: 68. 1892.) No. 397 Griffiths from South Dakota,
no. 405 B. F. Bush from Missouri, no. 2853 F. Clements from
Nebraska and no. 265 B. B. Smyth from Kansas belong here.
This is the common form in the prairie regions of the west.

7b. MUHLENBERGIA RACEMOSA violacea Scribn. n. subsp. charac-
terized by its slender simple culms usually violet or dark purple
and more or less interrupted panicles, abruptly aristate glumes
and comparatively small spikelets. ‘Type from North Hannibal,
New York, collected by O. E. Pearce 1883 without number. No.
748 E. H. Mearns from Minnesota belongs here. This subspe-
cies is less well defined than the last. Itis apparently common
in the north growing usually in bogs.

8. Muhlenbergia glabrifloris Scribn. n. sp. A slender branching
glabrous perennial 4-6 dm. high, from scaly rootstocks, with flat
erect or ascending leaves, slender strict panicles and awnless
spikelets 2.5-3 mm. long. Culms terete, very minutely scabrous
for a short distance below the nodes, soboliferous at the base;
sheaths somewhat compressed, smooth, mostly shorter than the
internodes, crowded on the branches, naked at the throat; ligule
very short, 1 mm. or less long, minutely ciliate on the edge; leaf-
blades 2-10 cm. long, 1-4 mm. wide, acute, very minutely scabrous

t.

1907] Fernald,— Rhinanthus of Quebec and New Hampshire 23

along the margins and nerves; panicles simple, 2-6 cm. long,
occasionally somewhat glomerate, the closely flowered short
branches appressed, usually partly enclosed in the subtending
leaf-sheath; pedicels scabrous, usually much shorter than the
spikelets; spikelets ovate-lanceolate; glumes lanceolate, acute
or acuminate-pointed, subequal, a little shorter than, as long as,
or a little longer than the floret, scabrous on the keel excepting
near the base; lemmas ovate or oblong, obtuse or submucronate-
pointed, scabrous on the keel and lateral nerves above, otherwise
smooth, no hairs at the base; palea ovate-oblong, obtuse, equalling
or a little shorter than the lemmas.

Type, no. 5 J. Reverchon, from Texas in the National Herbarium.
Other specimens are from Illinois, J. Wolf and E. Hall. Hall's
specimen is presumably from Athens in 1868 and was first referred to
M. sylvatica by Vasey, who later regarded it as a doubtful variety of
M. mexicana. 'The culms are branching throughout and the numer-
ous small panicles terminating the branches and partly included in
the subtending leaf-sheaths present the habit of M. mexicana, but the
plant is more slender throughout especially in its panicles, the texture
of the glumes and lemmas is much softer and the latter are perfectly
smooth at the base there being no hairs either upon the callus or on
the body of the lemma. The spikelets are rather those of a Sporo-
bolus than a Muhlenbergia but the plant evidently belongs with the
soboliferous species of the latter.

BUREAU or PLANT INDUSTRY,

U. S. DEPARTMENT OF ÁGRICULTURE,
WASHINGTON, D. C.

THE ALPINE RHINANTHUS OF QUEBEC AND
NEW HAMPSHIRE.

M. L. FERNALD.

Tue plants which have long passed in eastern America as Rhinan-
thus Crista-galli L., in part (R. minor Ehrh.), occupy two strikingly
different geographic areas. One, apparently the true R. Crista-galli
(R. minor), abounds in sterile fields and meadows, and along road-

24 Rhodora [FEBRUARY

sides and borders of thickets in eastern Quebec and Newfoundland,
chiefly near the coast, and extends thence southward along the New
England coast. The other has long been known in alpine regions
of the White Mountains, and in 1881 it was collected by Mr. John A.
Allen upon Table-topped Mountain in Gaspé Co., Quebec.

The writer has long felt that the plant of Oakes Gulf and the
Alpine Garden in the White Mountains and of Table-topped Moun-
tain in Gaspé should not be regarded as identical with the coastal
Rhinanthus Crista-galli, but not until the past summer has he had an
opportunity to test his convictions by study in the field of the alpine
plant. In August last, however, this Rhinanthus was found in pro-
fusion on cool boggy meadows and open slopes at altitudes varying
from 950 to 1125 meters, on Table-topped Mountain. It was most
abundant in meadows, where it was associated with Phlewm alpinum,
Deschampsia atropurpuresa, Juncu castaneus, Salix vestita, S. argyro-
carpa, Rubus arcticus, Pyrola grandiflora, Veronica alpina, var.
unalaschcensis, Castilleja pallida, var. septentrionalis, Gnaphalium
norvegicum, and other arctic-alpine species, with some of which it
occurs in the White Mountains. Abundant flowering and fruiting
material was secured, and notes were made from the fresh plant,
which, upon the return to the shores of the lower St. Lawrence,
showed that the alpine Rhinanthus is clearly distinct from the com-
mon coastal R. Crista-galli. A detailed study of this and of the
other species of Rhinanthus of America and of northern Europe, as
recently defined in the works of Chabert, Sterneck, and others, shows,
furthermore, that the plant of the White Mountains and of Table-
topped Mountain is apparently an undescribed species, and that it
occurs also on the coast of Labrador. This plant, from the character-
istic outline of the cauline leaves may be called

RHINANTHUS oblongifolius, n. sp. Planta 0.6-4 dm. alta viridis
basi glabra superne ad internodiorum latera pilosa simplex; foliis
caulinis quam internodia brevioribus oblongis vel in speciminibus
minoribus linearibus scabridis obtusis erenato-dentatis, dentibus latis
appressis; spicis 2-12-floris; bracteis scabris, infimis foliis supremis
similibus, mediis et superioribus triangulari-ovatis attenuatis calycem
subaequantibus laciniato-dentatis, dentibus inferioribus patulis aris-
tato-acuminatis quam superiores longioribus; calyce florifero ovato-
oblongo fructifero suborbiculato 1.3-1.9 cm. longo glabrescente, mar
ginibus ciliatis; corolla flava 1-1.2 cm. longa, tuba recta exserta; labia

superiore 3-4 mm. longa, margine inferiore convexo dentibus flavis
oblique quadrilateralibus subtruncatis 0.5 mm. longis, 1.5 mm. latis;

1907] Fernald,— Rhinanthus of Quebec and New Hampshire 25

abia inferiore 1 mm. longa flava vel raro violacea; seminibus reni-
formibus 5-6 mm. longis 3.5 mm. latis olivaceis, alis dorsalibus mem-
branaceis, ventralibus obscuris.

Plant 0.6-4 dm. high, green, glabrous at base, pilose along the sides
of the internodes above, simple: cauline leaves shorter than the inter-
nodes, oblong, or in very small specimens linear, scabrid, obtuse, cre-
nate-dentate; the teeth broad and appressed: spikes 2-12-flowered:
bracts scabrous, the lower similar to the upper leaves, the middle and
upper triangular-ovate, attenuate, about equalling the calyx, laciniate-
dentate; the lower teeth spreading, aristate-acuminate, longer than the
upper: flowering calyx ovate-oblong; fruiting suborbicular, 1.3-1.9
cm. long, glabrescent, the margins ciliate: corolla yellow, 1-1.2 cm.
long, the straight tube exserted; the upper lip 3-4 mm. long, its lower
margin convex, the teeth yellow, obliquely quadrilateral, subtruncate,
0.5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. broad; the lower lip 1 mm. long, yellow or
rarely violaceous: seeds reniform, 5-6 mm. long 3.5 mm. wide, olive-
brown, the dorsal wing membranaceous, the ventral obscure.— QUE-
BEC, common on alpine meadows and slopes, altitude 950-1125 m.,
Table-topped Mountain, Gaspé Co., August 7, 1906 (Fernald & Collins,
no. 248), August 12, 1881 (J. A. Allen): New HAMPSHIRE, “ in alpinis
Montium Alborum " (Wm. Oakes); ** White Mount. in locis humidis
alpinis cum Veronica alpina et caet," 1843 (E. Tuckerman); head of
Oakes Gulf, August 28, 1877, August 29, 1890 (E. & C. E. Faxon);
moist grassy soil, edge of Oaks Gulf, August 8, 1896 (E. F. Williams);
Lion’s Head, Alpine Garden, Mt. Washington, September 1, 1890 (E.

& C. E. Faxon). "Various specimens from the Labrador coast are
apparently referable here.

From the essentially coastal Rhinanthus Crista-galli of New Eng-
land and the Maritime Provinces R. oblongifolius is distinguished by
several characters. In the coastal plant the leaves are narrower,
lance- or linear-attenuate, and sharply serrate with more spreading
teeth; and in drying the stems and foliage become strongly blackened.
R. oblongifolius, with oblong crenate-toothed leaves, on the other
hand, retains its green color even in the old specimens of Oakes.
In R. Crista-galli the lateral teeth of the upper lip of the corolla are
about as long as broad and dark-colored; in R. oblongijolius much
broader than long and yellow. In R. Crista-galli the ventral wing
of the seed is conspicuously thickened and clearly defined; in the
seed of R. oblongijolius it is only slightly thickened and less clearly

defined.

GRAY HERBARIUM.

26 Rhodora [FEBRUARY

Is RHiNANTHUS CRISTA-GALLI AN INTRODUCED PLANT? — As
long as all our New England Rhinanthus was supposed to be R.
Crista-galli L. there was no question as to its being indigenous; its
center of distribution was thought to be among the alpine or sub-
alpine plants of the White Mountains, and its occurrence elsewhere
seemed to indicate a distribution by no means unprecedented, since
some plants found at a considerable elevation in Vermont and New
Hampshire occur along the coast of Maine, a range recalling the
distribution of the hermit thrush and some other distinctive White
Mountain birds, which breed at sea level as far to the southwest
as Casco Bay. But now that the White Mountain Rhinanthus is
found to be a distinct and new species, the character of the stations
in which the true R. Crista-galli occurs is worthy of notice. It seems
to be always in fields and pastures and along roadsides; never away
from human influence.

The writer first saw the plant at Cushing, Maine; the attention
of a farmer being called to it, as a novelty to the writer, he replied:
“Yes, it is getting to be very common now-a-days.” At Cape Rosier,
and at Eagle Island in Penobscot Bay, it was very common, but
at both places the older farmers said that it was not there in their
younger days; at Cape Rosier they called it “Mormon Weed,” as
it made its appearance at the time of the Mormon excitement, that
is, some time after 1850. It was reported to have been introduced
into Eagle Island in hay from the mainland. While the question
of its being a native or a naturalized foreigner can hardly be settled
positively, it would seem that the probabilities are in favor of the
latter theory.— F. S. Corns, Malden, Massachusetts.

ACANTHOSPERMUM AUSTRALE AT LAWRENCE, MASSACHUSETTS.—
A plant which grew last summer in a cabbage-garden in the suburbs
of Lawrence attracted attention as something unusual and an un-
successful effort was made to classify it. A specimen was sent to
the Gray Herbarium and there determined as Acanthospermum
austraiz (Loefl. Ktze., a peculiar member of the Compositae, which
is ordinarily confined to tropical regions. ‘The cabbage field where
the Acanthospermum grew had been fertilized by wool-waste from
one of the mills, and as several strange plants were seen there the
locality will be watched with interest another season.— E. 5.
ScHNEIDER, Lawrence, Massachusetts.

1907] Strong,—Dryopteris Filix-mas in Vermont. "4

FURTHER INFORMATION REGARDING THE OCCUR-
RENCE OF DRYOPTERIS FILIX-MAS IN
VERMONT.

'

MABEL A. STRONG.

On the twelfth of last August, while spending a day in the woods.
in central Vermont I had the pleasure of finding Dryopteris Filix-
mas. At first I saw only five or six clumps, containing from one to
six plants each and growing in a partially exposed place, seemingly
an old wood road or spring water course and overgrown with thin
grass, dwarfed raspberry bushes and weeds; but upon a second visit
and more careful exploration I counted over forty clumps comprising
a hundred or more plants and extending farther into the deeper
woods. ‘The whole group, so far as observed, covered an area which
one might have walked around in perhaps three minutes. The
individual ferns varied from tiny ones to magnificent specimens
waist high.

Noticeable at the edge of the deeper wood and shading some of the
ferns in question are several large butternut trees. ‘The soil is very
black and rich while the underlying and partially exposed ledges
are of a lead-colored rock. At the left side of this road or water
course is a thick growth of sapling maples, but none of the ferns.
were found there.

This wood crowns the top of a pasture hill at an elevation of about
sixteen hundred feet and has a northern exposure. It is situated
in the southwestern corner of the town of Woodstock near the Bridge-
water and Reading lines. In other words it is about six miles due
west of Hartland Four Corners, where Miss Darling discovered this.
fern over a year ago.

Growing in the midst of the area just described is one fine clump
of Dryopteris Goldiana and distributed through the woods are quanti-
ties of the finest specimens of Braun’s Holly Fern I have ever seen,
excepting those growing near the summit of Killington.

Several other species of Dryopteris are found in the immediate
vicinity, namely D. spinulosa, D. marginalis, D. noveboracensis, and
D. acrostichoides, while somewhat lower on the slope and in the open.
pasture occur Dicksonia, Adiantum, and Asplenium Filiz-foemina.

p

28 . Rhodora [FEBRUARY

A few rods farther down the road leading past this place and toward
Long Hill in Bridgewater, Miss Elizabeth Billings found the Blue
Fringed Gentian growing.

Woopstock, VERMONT.

ARCEUTHOBIUM IN THE RANGELEY Reaion.— While walking along
the line of the South Bog Railroad, in the township of Rangeley
Plantation, Maine, I passed through a considerable quantity of Black
Spruce. A few of the trees had suspicious-looking “ witches’ brooms”
on them, which proved on investigation to contain Arceuthobium
pusillum Peck. Very few of the trees, however, were thus affected.
'The nearest recorded station for this species so far as I know is in
Pleasant Ridge Township, about forty miles to the east of the one
reported here.— Jonn Munpocn, JR., Harvard Forestry Expedition.

NoTE ON CiRSIUM MUTICUM, VAR. MONTICOLA.— In the Ottawa
Naturalist, I recently described the alpine thistle of the Shickshock
Mountains, and inadvertently placed it in Cn?cus, a genus which, as
now everywhere interpreted, consists of the single species, Cnicus
benedictus, the Blessed Thistle. The plant of the Shickshock Moun-
tains should bear the name

Cirsium MUTICUM Michx., var. monticola, n. comb.— Cnicus muti-
cus, var. monticola Fernald, Ottawa Nat. xix. 166 (1905).— Explora-
tions during the past summer showed that on Mt. Albert this plant
abounds throughout the serpentine area, descending from the alpine
meadows, in the gorge of Ruisseau à la Neige, nearly to Lac au
Diable at an altitude of 550 meters; while it is apparently quite
absent from the hornblende district of the mountain. It was also
found on Table-topped Mountain, in a single alpine meadow whose
mixed soil supported Danthonia intermedia, Solidago multiradiata,
and a few other plants, which in the Shickshock Mountains have
their great development on the serpentine.— M. L. FERNALD, Gray
Herbarium.

Vol. 9, no. 97, including pages 1-16, was issued 22 January, 1907.

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. March, 1907. No. 99

ON THE
RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE ADOPTED
BY THE VIENNA CONGRESS.

INTRODUCTORY.

No subject connected with systematic botany has in recent years
been more earnestly discussed than the nomenclature question.
Indeed, the prolonged and detailed controversies regarding this mat-
ter must have been wearisome to many persons who, although inter-
ested in plants, have had no leisure or desire to go into bibliographical
technicalities. "To such persons, however, as well as to the profes-
sional taxonomist, it should be a source of gratification that a con-
siderable step has been taken toward international agreement on the
points at issue.

Before the rules and recommendations adopted by the Vienna
Botanical Congress are here presented, it may be well to advert very
briefly to the peculiar difficulties which have been involved in the
nomenclature question and to recall the circumstances of the inter-
national meeting at Vienna.

For many decades it has been almost universally felt that botanical
nomenclature should rest in a general way on the principle of priority
of publication, or in other words, that the name of a plant was the
first one assigned to it. Nearly all botanists of note have readily
assented to this general idea, but great difficulties have arisen regard-
ing the precise limitations which should be imposed upon the principle.
'Thus, botanists of past generations, including such great leaders as
the De Candolles, Bentham, the Hookers, Gray, von Martius, Eichler,
Baillon, and others, have followed the principle of priority, yet they
have made frequent exceptions based on considerations of taste and
convenience as well as practicality.

30 Rhodora [Marcu

With the expansion of the subject the difficulty of agreement on
these exceptions has increased and some recent writers have been
disposed at times to criticise rather harshly the earlier botanists for
making any exceptions whatever. It should be noticed, however,
that even the more strenuous of these reformers themselves admit
certain exceptions. ‘They have found it necessary, for instance, to
fix initial dates, and to rule out certain names as too vague in their
definition or too uncouth in their form to be accepted.

Ideas as to the best mode of establishing rules or reaching a general
agreement regarding the necessary exceptions to the bald principle
of priority have differed widely and given rise to lively controversy.
To some it has seemed best to devise an ideal system and then, with-
out much reference to the wishes or convenience of their colleagues,
to apply it in local publication. The idea of such writers has been,
if we understand it rightly, that a system of rules if devised with
sufficient care would ultimately gain adherence and be recognized
as worthy of general adoption. .

'To the vast majority, however, it has been clear that the subject
was a broad one involving much mutual sacrifice before the now
divergent usages at different botanical centres could be brought into
harmony. It was also decidedly an international question. If our
Latin botanical nomenclature has any real significance it is that
botanists of remote regions and different nations may have a common
technical language. It was therefore evident that rules devised in
one country stood exceedingly little chance of adoption in others and
that the whole question could be settled only by a patient effort at
international understanding.

In this way uniformity can be attained gradually. In the first
place it should be possible to reach agreement on some of the more
obvious rules, upon such in fact as are sufficiently evident in the pres-
ent state of botanical classification to make not only their need of
settlement but the particular way in which they should be decided,
clear to the majority of systematists of different nations. If such
general principles can be decided and the majority of botanists con-
vinced of their fairness, much will have been accomplished. Atten-
tion can then be turned to minor details on which opinions are still
widely divergent, and, as each successive matter reaches such clear-
ness as to make its solution possible by international agreement, it
can then be taken up and decided by subsequent international gather-
ings.

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 31

The great advantage of such a method of gradually getting all
nations into harmony will be evident to every thoughtful and broad-
minded person interested in botany. In fact it appears to be, if not
the speediest method imaginable, at least the most practicable —
the way, in fact, which will bring us to the desired uniformity with
the least friction, with the least feeling of injustice, and the minimum
production of needless synonyms.

For the last fifteen years there has been a growing desire for an
international meeting of representative botanists who should give
the matter of nomenclature careful consideration and come if possible
to some agreement on the fundamental rules to be followed. ‘This
feeling took definite form in the year 1900 when preliminary sessions
of such a gathering were held in connection with the Paris Congress
of botanists. At this meeting a bureau was formed for the organiza-
tion of an International Botanical Congress to be held at Vienna in
June, 1905.

A commission of forty-seven botanists, representing all the more
important countries of the world was also formed, to whom advisory
power in the arrangements for the Vienna Congress was intrusted.
This commission was well selected to include persons not merely of
high standing in systematic botany but representing the most diverse
views on nomenclature. ‘The commission worked in harmony and
special credit is due to Prof. John Briquet of Geneva, the reporter-
general, who devoted for some years much of his time to the arrange-
ments for the congress.

It was early decided that the proper basis for any new group of
rules would be the time-honored Paris Code of 1867, often called the
De Candollean Code. Botanists of the world were invited to submit
their propositions for the amendment and improvement of this code
and ample time given them for the purpose. Many responded with
carefully elaborated propositions and suggestions. Months before
the congress was called together the reporter-general published a
detailed statement, not only of all the new suggestions, which had
been received, but of all the important propositions published on the
subject of botanical nomenclature since 1867, the date of the old code.
These matters were lucidly presented in a large quarto publication
printed in parallel columns and giving an admirable means of com-
paring the different systems proposed.

Representation at the Vienna Congress was freely offered to all

32 Rhodora [MAncH
the leading botanical establishments of the world, to botanical and
natural history societies and academies, and finally to all those botan-
nists who had offered amendments to the older code. Circular after
circular was issued and it would be difficult to conceive of any expedi-
ent which was not employed to make the congress representative and
render its proceedings intelligent and thoroughly impartial.

To the great credit of our science, it may be said without reserva-
tion, that the leading botanical establishments of the world took the
congress seriously. There met at Vienna between five and six hun-
dred botanists. A week was spent in the various sessions of the
congress. During this time the systematists met daily in prolonged
and very earnest sessions for discussion and legislation on the nomen-
clature matter. They were permitted to speak in French, English,
or German, and the substance of their remarks was promptly trans-
lated into each of the other two of these languages. The meeting
was exceptionally fortunate in its chairman, Prof. Charles Flahault
of Montpellier, whose quick understanding of complicated situations,
skilful generalship of the polyglot debates, and obvious impartiality
commanded universal respect and gained general commendation.
Every opportunity for free discussion was given so far as time per-
mitted.

Several readers of RHODORA have expressed the wish that the rules
adopted by the Vienna Congress should be printed in our journal
and the English version is herewith given. The list of generic names,
which, notwithstanding technical lack of priority, it was decided to
retain, includes about four hundred names. Lack of space does not
permit the reprinting of this list in full but the names are here given
which apply to our New England flora.

It will be a matter of great interest to the readers of RHODORA to
learn that many of the leading botanical establishments of the world
have already signified either officially or unofficially their intention
to accept the Vienna rulings, indeed this acceptance has been so
general as to render divergent practice hereafter merely local and
provincial.

A question, which has been very frequently asked, is how much
change these rules will entail in current usage. It is very difficult
to give any precise answer, but, in a general way, it may be said, so
far as the Grayan nomenclature common in New England is con-
cerned, the adoption of the Vienna rules is likely to necessitate change

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 33

of 3 to 5 per cent. of generic names and between 10 and 20 per cent. of
specific names. Persons judging of this matter are specially urged to
make careful distinction between changes caused by the new rules
on the one hand and the host of alterations on the other which are
rendered necessary by new light upon plant affinities, the limitation
of species, division of confused genera, etc.— alterations which are
botanical rather than nomenclatorial in their nature.

International rules for Botanical Nomenclature chiefly of
Vascular Plants,

Chapter I. General considerations and leading principles.

Art. 1. Natural history can make rio progress without a regular
system of nomenclature, which is recognized and used by the great
majority of naturalists in all countries.

Art. 2. The prescriptions which govern the exact system of botani-
cal nomenclature are divided into principles, rules and recommenda-
tions. ‘The principles (art. 1-9, 10-14 and 15-18) are the foundation
of the rules and recommendations. The rules (art. 10-58), destined
to put in order the nomenclature which the past has bequeathed to
us, and to form the basis for the future, are always retroactive:
names or forms of nomenclature which are contrary to a rule cannot
be maintained. Recommendations bear on secondary points, their
object being to ensure for the future a greater uniformity and clear-
ness in nomenclature: names or forms of nomenclature contrary to a
recommendation are not a model to copy, but cannot be rejected.

Art. 3. The rules of nomenclature should neither be arbitrary
nor imposed by authority. They must be simple and founded on
considerations clear and forcible enough for everyone to comprehend
and be disposed to accept.

Art. 4. The essential points in nomenclature are: 1. to aim at
fixity of names; 2. to avoid or to reject the use of forms and names
which may cause error or ambiguity or throw science into confusion.

Next in importance is the avoidance of all useless creation of names.

Other considerations, such as absolute grammatical correctness,
regularity or euphony of names, more or less prevailing custom,

El

34 Rhodora [Marcu

respect for persons, etc., notwithstanding their undeniable importance
are relatively accessory.

Art. 5. No custom contrary to rule can be upheld if it leads to
confusion or error. When a custom offers no serious inconvenience
of this kind, it may be a ground for exceptions which we must however
abstain from extending or copying. Finally in the absence of rule,
or where the consequences of rules are doubtful, established custom
becomes law.

Art. 6. The principles and forms of nomenclature should be as
similar as possible in botany and in zoology; but botanical nomen-
clature is entirely independent of zoological nomenclature.

Art. 7. Scientific names are in latin for all groups. When taken
from another language, a latin termination is given them, except in
cases sanctioned by custom. If translated into a modern language,
it is desirable that they should preserve as great a resemblance as
possible to the original latin names.

Art. 8. Nomenclature comprises two categories of names: 1.
Names, or rather terms, which express the nature of the groups
comprehended one within the other. 2. Names peculiar to each
of the groups of plants that observation has made known.

Art. 9. The rules and recommendations of botanical nomen-
clature apply to all classes of the plant kingdom, reserving special
arrangements for fossil plants and non-vascular plants.’

Chapter II. On the manner of designating the nature and the
subordination of the groups which constitute the
plant kingdom.

Art. 10. Every individual plant belongs to a species (species),
every species to a genus (genus), every genus to a family (familia)
every family to an order (ordo), every order to a class (classis), every
class to a division (divisio).

Art. 11. In many species we distinguish varieties (varietas) and
forms (forma); and in some cultivated species, modifications still
more numerous; in many genera sections (sectio), in many families
tribes (tribus).

Art. 12. Finally if circumstances require us to distinguish a
greater number of intermediate groups, it is easy, by putting the

1 These special arrangements have been reserved for the Congress of 1910. They
comprise: 1, rules bearing on special points in relation to the nature of fossils or the
lower plants; 2. lists of nomina conservanda for all divisions of plants other than Phan-
erogams,

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 35

syllable sub before the name of a group, to form subdivisions of that
group. In this way subfamily (subfamilia) designates a group
between a family and a tribe, subtribe (subtribus) a group between
a tribe and a genus, etc. The arrangement of subordinate groups
may thus be carried, for wild plants only, to twenty-one degrees, in
the following order: Regnum vegetabile. Divisio. Subdivisio.
Classis. Subclassis. Ordo. Subordo. Familia. Subfamilia.
Tribus. Subtribus. Genus. Subgenus. Sectio. Subsectio.
Species. Subspecies. Varietas. Subvarietas. Forma. Individuum.

If this list of groups is insufficient it can be augmented by the inter-
calation of supplementary groups, so long as these do not introduce
confusion or error.

Example: Series and Subseries are groups which can be intercalated be-
tween subsection and species.

Art. 13. The definition of each of these names of groups varies,
up to a certain point, according to individual opinion and the state
of the science, but their relative order, sanctioned by custom must
not be altered. No classification is admissible which contains such
alterations.

Examples of inadmissible alterations are,— a form divided into varieties,
a species containing genera, a genus containing families or tribes.

Art. 14. The fertilization of one species by another, gives rise to a
hybrid (hybrida); that of a modification or subdivision of a species
by another modification of the same species gives rise to a half-breed
(mistus, mule of florists).

Recommendations.

I. The arrangement of species in a genus or in a subdivision of a genus is
made by means of typographie signs, letters or numerals. Hybrids are
arranged after one of the parent species, with the sign X placed before the
generic name.

The arrangement of subspecies under a species is made by letters or num-
erals; that of varieties by the series of greek letters a, B, y, etc. Groups
below varieties and also half-breeds are indicated by letters, numerals or
typographie signs at the author's will.

Modifications of cultivated plants should be associated, as far as possible,
with the species from which they are derived.

Chapter III. On the manner of designating each group or
association of plants.

Section 1. General principles; priority.
Art. 15. Each natural group of plants! can bear in science only

1See observation to article 9.

36 Rhodora [Marcu

one valid designation, namely the oldest, provided that it is in con-
formity with the rules of Nomenclature and the conditions laid down
in articles 19 and 20 of section 2.

Art. 16. The designation of a group by one or several names is
not for the purpose of describing the characters or the history of the
group, but that we may be understood when we wish to speak of it.

Art. 17. No one should change a name or a combination of names
without serious motives, based on a more profound knowledge of
facts, or on the necessity of giving up a nomenclature that is contrary
to rules.

Art. 18. The form, number and arrangement of names depend
on the nature of each group, according to the following rules.

Section 2, Point of departure for nomenclature; limitation of
principle of priority.

Art. 19. Botanical nomenclature begins with the Species Plan-
tarum of Linnaeus, ed. 1. (1753) for all groups of vascular plants.
It is agreed to associate genera, the names of which appear in this.
work, with the descriptions given of them in the Genera Plantarum
ed. 5. (1754).

Art. 20. However, to avoid disadvantageous changes in the nomen-
clature of genera by the strict application of the rules of Nomenclature,
and especially of the principle of priority in starting from 1753, the
rules provide a list of names which must be retained in all cases.
These names are by preference those which have come into general
use in the fifty years following their publication, or which have been
used in monographs and important floristic (floristiques) works up to
the year 1890. The list of these names forms an appendix to the
rules of Nomenclature.

Section 3. Nomenclature of the different kinds of groups.
$ 1. Names of groups above the jamily.

Recommendations. The following suggestions as to the nomenclature
of groups of higher rank than the family will tend to clearness and uniformity.
: ames of divisions and subdivisions, of classes and subclasses are
taken from one of their characters. They are expressed by words of greek
or latin origin, some similarity of form and termination being given to those
that designate groups of the same nature.

Examples: Angiospermae, Gymnospermae; Monocotyledoneae, Dicotyle-
doneae; Pteridophyta; Coniferae. Among Cryptogams old family names
such as Fungi, Lichenes, Algae, may be used for names of groups above the
rank of family.

1907] - On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 37

III. Orders are designated preferably by the name of one of their principal
families, with the ending -ales. Suborders are designated in a similar manner,
with the ending -ineae. But other terminations may be retained for these
names, provided that they do not lead to confusion or error.

Examples of names of orders: Polygonales (from Polygonaceae), Urticales
(from Urticaceae), Glumiflorae, Centrospermae, Parietales, Tubiflorae, Micro-
spermae, Contortae. Examples of names of suborders: Bromeliineae (from

romeliaceae), Malvineae (from Malvaceae), Tricoccae, Enantioblastae.

§ 2. Names of families and subjamilies, tribes and subtribes.

Art. 21. Families (familiae) are designated by the name of one
of their genera or ancient generic names with the ending -aceae.

Examples: Rosaceae (from Rosa), Salicaceae (from Salix), Caryophyllaceae
(from Dianthus Caryophyllus), etc.

Art. 22. The following names, owing to long usage, are an excep-
tion to the rule: Palmae, Gramineae, Cruciferae, Leguminosae, Gutti-
jerae, Umbelliferae, Labiatae, Compositae.

Art. 23. Names of subfamilies (subjamiliae) are taken from the
name of one of the genera in the group, with the ending -oideae. ‘The
same holds for the tribes (tribus) with the ending -eae, and for the
subtribes (subtribus) with the ending -inae.

Examples of subfamilies: Asphodeloideae (from Asphodelus), Rumicoideae
(from Rumex); tribes: Asclemadeae (from Asclepias), Phyllantheae (from
Phyllanthus); subtribes: Metastelmatinae (from Metastelma), Madiinae
(from Madia).

§ 3. Names of genera and divisions of genera.

Art. 24. Genera receive names, substantives (or adjectives used
as substantives) in the singular number and written with a capital
letter, which may be compared with our own family names. These
names may be taken from any source whatever and may even be
composed in an absolutely arbitrary manner.

Examples: Rosa, Convolvulus, Hedysarum, Bartramia, Liquidambar,
Gloriosa, Impatiens, Manihot.

Art. 25. Subgenera and sections also receive names, usually sub-
stantives and resembling the names of genera. Names of subsections
and other lower subdivisions of genera are preferably adjectives in
the plural number and written with a capital letter, or their place
may be taken by an ordinal number or a letter.

Examples. — Substantives: Frazxinaster, T'rifoliastrum, Adenoscilla, Euher-
mannia, Archieracium, Micromelilotus, Pseudinga, Heterodraba, Gymnocimum,
Neoplantago, Stachyotypus. Adjectives: Pleiostylae, Fimbriati, Bibracteolata,
Pachycladae.

Li

38 Rhodora [Marcu

Recommendations.

IV. When the name of a genus, subgenus or section is taken from the name
of a person, it is formed in the following manner:

a) When the name ends in a vowel, the letter a is added (for example
Glazioua after Glaziou; Bureaua after Bureau), except when the name already
ends in a, in which case ea is added (e. g. Collaea after Colla).

b) When the name ends in a consonant, the letters ia are added (thus
Magnusia after Magnus; Ramondia after Ramond), except when the name
ends in er, in which case a is added (e. g. Kernera after Kerner).

c) The spelling of the syllables unaffected by these finals is retained, even
with the consonants k and w or with groupings of vowels which were not
used in classic latin. Letters which are unknown to botanical latin must be
transcribed, diacritic signs are suppressed. The german 4, 6, ii become ae,
oe, ue, the French é, è and ê become generally e.

d) Names may be accompanied by a prefix, or a suffix, or modified b
anagram or abbreviation. In these cases they count as different words
from the original name. E. g. Durvillea and Urvillea, Lapeyrousea and Pey-
rousea, Englera, Englerastrum and Englerella, Bouchea and Ubochea, Gerardia
and Graderia, Martia and Martiusia.

V. Botanists who are publishing generic names show judgment and taste
by attending to the following recommendations:

a) Not to make names very long or difficult to pronounce.

b) Not to use again a name which has already been used and has lapsed
into synonymy (homonym).

c) Not to dedicate genera to persons who are in all respects strangers to
botany, or at least to natural science, nor to persons quite unknown.

d) Not to take names from barbarous tongues, unless those names are
frequently quoted in books of travel, and have an agreeable form that is
readily adapted to the latin tongue and to the tongues of civilized countries.

€) To recall, if possible, by the formation or ending of the name, the affini-
ties or the analogies of the genus.

f) To avoid adjectives used as nouns.

g) Not to give a genus a name whose form is rather that of a subgenus or
section (e. g. Husideroxylon, a name given to a genus of Lauraceae, which,
however, being valid, cannot be changed).

h) Not to make names by the combination of two languages (nomina
hybrida).

VI. Botanists constructing names for subgenera or sections, will do well
to attend to the preceding recommendations and also to the following:

a) Give, where possible, to the principal division of a genus, a name which,
by some modification or addition, calls the genus to mind (for instance, Eu
db: at the beginning of the name, when it is of greek origin; -astrum, -ella
at the end of the name, when latin, or any other modification consistent
with the grammar and usages of the latin language).

b) Avoid calling a subgenus or a section by the name of the genus to which
it belongs, with the final -oides or -opsis; on the contrary reserve this ending
for a section which resembles another genus, by adding in that case -oides
or -opsis to the name of that other genus, if it is of greek origin, to form the
name of the section.

c) Avoid taking as the name of a subgenus or section à name which is
already in use as such in another genus, or which is the name of an admitted
genus.

VII. When it is required to express a subgeneric or sectional name to-
gether with the name of the genus and the name of the species, the name of
the section is put between the others in a parenthesis. E. g. Astragalus
(Cycloglottis) contortuplicatus.

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 39

$ 4. Names of species and of subdivisions of species.

Art. 26. All species, even those that singly constitute a genus, are
designated by the name of the genus to which they belong followed
by a name (or epithet) termed specific, usually of the nature of an
adjective (forming a combination of two names, a binomial, or binary
name).

Examples: Dianthus monspessulanus, Papaver Rhoeas, Fumaria Gussonei,
Uromyces Fabae, Geranium Robertianum, Embelia Sarasinorum, Adiantum
Capillus-Veneris. Linnaeus has sometimes introduced symbols in specific
names; these must according to art. 26 be transcribed. Ex.: Scandix
Pecten-Veneris (= Scandir Pecten 9); Veronica Anagallis-aquatica (=
Veronica Anagallis 7).

Recommendations.

VIII. The specific name should, in general, give some indication of the
appearance, the characters, the origin, the history or the properties of the
species. If taken from the name of a person, it usually recalls the name of
the one who discovered or described it, or was in some way concerned with it.

IX. Names of men and women and also names of countries and localities
used as specific names, may be substantives in the genitive (Clusii, saharae)
or adjectives (Clusianus, dahuricus). It will be well, in the future, to avoid
the use of the genitive and the adjectival form of the same name to designate
two different species of the same genus [for example Lysimachia Hemsleyana
Maxim. (1891) and L. Hemsleyi Franch. (1895)].

X. Specific names begin with a small letter except those which are taken
from names of persons (substantives or adjectives) or those which are taken
from generic names (substantives or adjectives).

Examples: Ficus indica, Circaea lutetiana, Brassica Napus, Lythrum
Hyssopijolia, Aster novibelgii, Malva Tournefortiana, Phyteuma Halleri.

XI. When a specific name is taken from the name of a man, it is formed
in the following way:

a) When the name ends in a vowel, the letter 7 is added (thus Glazioui
from Glaziou: Bureau from Bureau), except when the name ends in a, when
e is added (thus Balansae from Balansa).

b) When the name ends in a consonant, the letters ii are added (thus
Magnusii from Magnus; Ramondii from Ramond), except when the word
ends in er when 7 is added (ex. Kerneri, from Kerner).

c) Syllables which are not modified by these endings retain their original
spelling, even in the case of the consonants k and w or groupings of vowels
which are not used in classic latin. Letters foreign to the latin of botanists
should be transcribed, and diacritic signs suppressed. The german i, 6, ü,
become ae, oe, ue, the french é, è, and ê become, in general, e.

d) When specific names taken from the name of a person have an adjectival
form a similar plan is adopted (Geranium Robertianum, Carex Hallerana,
Ranunculus Boreauanus, etc.)

XII. The same applies to the names of women, These are written in
the feminine when they have a substantial form.

Example: Cypripedium Hookerae, Rosa Beatricis, Scabiosa Olgae, Ompha-
lodes Luciliae.

XIII. In the formation of specific names composed of two or several
roots and taken from latin or greek, the vowel placed between the two roots

40 Rhodora [Marcu

becomes a connecting vowel, in latin 7, in greek o; thus we write menthijolia, :
salviifolia, not menthaejolia, salviaejolia. When the second root begins with
a vowel and euphony demands, the connecting vowel is eliminated (e. g.
calliantha, lepidantha). The connecting ae is legitimate only when etymology
demands (e. g. caricaeformis from Carica, may be retained along with carici-
jormis from Carex).

XIV. In forming specific names, botanists will do well to note the following
recommendations:

a) Avoid very long names and those which are difficult to pronounce.

b) Avoid names which express a character common to all or nearly all the
species of a genus.

c) Avoid names taken from little known or very restricted localities, unless
the species be very local.

d) Avoid, in the same genus, names which are very much alike, especially
those which differ only in their last letters.

e) Adopt unpublished names found in travellers’ notes and herbaria,
attributing them to the authors concerned, only when those concerned have
approved the publication.

f) Avoid names which have been used before in the genus, or in any closely
allied genus, and which have lapsed into synonymy (homonyms).

g) Do not name a species after a person who has neither discovered, nor
described, nor figured, nor in any way studied it.

h) Avoid specific names formed of two words.

i) Avoid names which have the same meaning as the generic name.

Art. 27. Two species of the same genus cannot bear the same
specific name, but the same specific name may be given in several
genera.

Example: Arabis spathulata DC. and Lepidium spathulatum Phil. are valid
as two names of Crucifers; but Arabis spathulata Nutt. in Torr. and Gray
cannot be maintained, on account of the existence of Arabis spathulata DC.,
a name previously given to another valid species of Arabis.

Art. 28. Names of subspecies and varieties are formed like
specifie names and follow them in order, beginning with those of the
highest rank. The same holds for subvarieties, forms, and slight
or transient modifications of wild plants which receive a name or
numbers or letters to facilitate their arrangement. Use of a binary
nomenclature for subdivisions of species is not admissible.

Examples: Andropogon ternatus subsp. macrothrix (not Andropogon macro-
thrix or Andropogon ternatus subsp. A. macrothrix); Herniaria hirsuta var.

diandra (not Herniaria diandra or Herniaria hirsuta var. H. diandra); forma
nanus, forma maculatum.

Recommendation.

XV. Recommendations made for specific names apply equally to names
of subdivisions of species. These agree with the generic name when they
have an adjectival form (Thymus Serpyllum var. angustifolius, Ranunculus
acris subsp. F'riesianus).

Art. 29. Two subspecies of the same species cannot have the same
name. A given name can only be used once for a variety of a given

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 4]
species, even when dealing with varieties which are classed under
different subspecies. The same holds for subvarieties and forms.

On the other hand the same name may be employed for subdivisions
of different species, and the subdivisions of any one species may
bear the same name as other species.

Examples. — The following are admissible: Rosa Jundzillii var. leioclada
and Rosa glutinosa var. leioclada; Viola tricolor var. hirta, in spite of the
existence already of a different species named Viola hirta. The following are
incorrect: Erysimum hieraciijoluum subsp. strictum var. longisiliquum and

E. hieraciifolium subsp. pannonicum var. longisiliquum — a form of nomen-
clature which allows two varieties bearing the same name in the same species.

Recommendation.

XVI. Botanists are recommended to use as little as possible the privilege
granted in the second part of article 29, in order to avoid confusion and
mistakes and also to reduce to a minimum the necessary changes of name
when the subdivisons of species are raised to specific rank or vice versa.

Art. 30. Forms and half-breeds among cultivated plants should
receive fancy names, in common language, as different as possible
from the latin names of the species or varieties. When they can be
traced back to a species, a subspecies or a botanical variety this is
indicated by a succession of names.

Example: Pelargonium zonale Mrs. Pollock.

$ 5. Names of hybrids and half-breeds (mules).

Art. 31. Hybrids between species of the same genus, or presumably
so, are designated by a formula and, whenever it seems useful or
necessary, by a name.

'The formula consists of the names or specific epithets of the two
parents in alphabetical order and connected by the sign X. When
the hybrid is of known experimental origin the formula may be made
more precise by the addition of the signs, 9 c.

'The name, which is subject to the same rules as names of species,
is distinguished from the latter by absence of an ordinal number and
by the sign X before the name.

Examples: X Salir capreola = Salix aurita X caprea; Digitalis lutea 9
X purpurea 3; Digitalis lutea (? X purpurea 9 .

Art. 32. Intergeneric hybrids (between species of different genera)
or presumably such, are also designated by a formula, and, when it
seems useful or necessary, by a name.

oa

42 Rhodora [Marcu

The formula consists of the names of the two parents, in alphabeti-
cal order.

The hybrid is associated with the one of the two genera which
precedes the other in alphabetical order. The name is preceded by
the sign X.

Examples: X Ammophila baltica = Ammophila arenaria X Calamagrostis
epigeios.

Art. 33. Ternary hybrids, or those of a higher order, are designated
like ordinary hybrids by a formula and a name.

Examples: X Salix Straehleri — S. aurita X cinerea X repens or S. (au-
rita X repens) X cinerea.

Art. 34. When there is reason to distinguish the different forms
of a hybrid (pleomorphic hybrids, combinations between different
forms of collective species etc.) the subdivisions are classed under
the hybrid like the subdivisions of species under a species.

Examples: x Mentha villosa B Lamarckii (= M. longifolia X rotundifolia).
The preponderance of the characters of one or other parent may be indicated
in the formulas in the following manner: Mentha longifolia > X rotundifolia,
M. longifolia X < rotundifolia, Cirsium supercanum X rivulare, etc. etc.
The participation of a particular variety may also be indicated. Example:
Salix caprea X daphnoides var. pulchra.

Recommendation.

XVII. Half-breeds, or presumably such, may be designated by a name
and a formula. Names of half-breeds are intercalated among the subdivisions
of a species preceded by the sign X. In the formula the names of the parents
are in alphabetical order.

Section 4. The publication of names and the date of each name or
" combination of names.

Art. 35. Publication is effected by the sale or public distribution
of printed matter or indelible autographs.

Communication of new names at a public meeting, or the placing
of names in collections or gardens open to the public, do not constitute
publication.

Examples. — Effective publication without printed matter: Salvia oxyodon
Webb and Heldr. was published in July 1850 in an autograph catalogue
and put on sale (Webb and Heldreich, Catalogus plantarum hispanicarum,
elc. ab A. Blanco lectarum, Parisiis, Jul. 1850 in folio).— Non-effective publi-
cation at a publie meeting: Cusson announced his establishment of the genus
Physospermum in a memoir read at the Société des Sciences de Montpellier
in 1773, and later in 1782 or 1783 at the Société de Médecine de Paris, but its
effective publication dates from 1787, in the Mémoires de la Soc. Roy. de
Médecine de Paris, vol. V, lre partie.

,

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 43

Art. 36. On and after January 1, 1908, the publication of names
of new groups will be valid only when they are accompanied by a
latin diagnosis.

Art. 37. A species or a subdivision of a species, announced in a
work, with a complete specific or varietal name, but without diagnosis
or reference to a former description under another name, is not valid.
Citation in synonymy or incidental mention of a name is not effective
publication, and the same applies to the mention of name on a ticket
issued with a dried plant without printed or autographed diagnosis;

Plates accompanied with analyses are equivalent to a description.
but this applies only to plates published before January 1, 1908.

Examples.— The following are valid publications: Onobrychis eubrychidea
Boiss. Fl. or. II, 546 (1872) published with description; Panax nossibiensis
Drake in Grandidier Hist. Phys. Nat. et Polit. de Madagascar, Vol. XXXV,
t. V, III, 5e part., Pl. 406 (1896), published in the form of a plate with analyses;
Cynanchum nivale Nym. Syll. fl. Eur. 108 (1854-1855) published with a refer-
ence to Vincetoxicum nivale Boiss. et Heldr. previously ‘described. Hieracium
Flahaultianum Arv.-Touv. et Gaut., published in an exsiecata accompanied
by a printed diagnosis (Hieraciotheca gallica, nos. 935-942, 1903).— The
following are not valid: Sciadophyllum heterotrichum Decaisne et Planch.
in Rev. Hortic., ser. IV, III, 107 (1854), published without description or
reference to a previous description under another name; Ornithogalum undu-
latum Hort. Berol. ex Kunth Enum. pl. IV, 348 (1843), quoted as a synonym
of Myogalum Boucheanum Kunth 1. c., the name adopted by the author, is
not a valid publication; when transferred to Ornithogalum, this species must
be called Ornithogalum Boucheanum Aschers. in Osterr. Bot. Zeitschr. XVI,
192 (1866); Erythrina micropteryx Poepp. quoted as a synonym of Microp-
teryx Poeppigiana Walp. in Linnaea X XIII, 740 (1850) is not a valid publica-
tion; the species in question, when placed in the genus Erythrina must be
called Erythrina Poeppigiana O. F. Cook in U. S. Dep. Agr. Bull. no. 25, p.
57 (1901); Nepeta Steheana Hausskn. which appears without diagnosis in an
exsiccata (W. Siehe, Bot. Reise nach Cicilien, no. 521, 1896), is not valid.

Art. 38. A genus or any other group of higher rank than a species,
named or announced without being characterised conformably to
article 37 cannot be regarded as effectively published (nomen nudum).
The mere indication of species as belonging to a new genus or of
genera as belonging to a higher group, does not allow us to accept the
genus or group in question as characterised and effectively published.
An exception is made in the case of the generic names mentioned by
Linnaeus in the Species Plantarum ed. 1., 1753, names which we
associate with the descriptions in the Genera Plantarum ed. 5., 1754
(See article 19).

Examples. — The following are valid publications: Carphalea Juss. Gen.

Pl. 198 (1789), published with a description; Thuspeinanta Dur. Ind. Gen.
Phaner., p. X (1888), published with a reference to the genus Tapeinanthus

44 Rhodora [Marcu

Boiss. previously described; Stipa L. Sp. Pl. ed. 1, 78 (1753), valid because
accompanied by a description in the Genera Plantarum ed. 5, no. 84 (1754).—
The following are not valid: Egeria Neraud (Bot. Voy. Freycinet, p. 28 (1826),
published without diagnosis or reference to a description previously made
under another name; Acosmus Desv. mentioned incidentally as a synonym
of the genus Aspicarpa Rich. by De Candolle (Prodr. 1, 583 [1824]); Zatar-
hendi Forsk. Fl. Aeg. Arab., p. CXV (1775), based only on the enumeration
of 3 species of the genus Ocimum without indication of characters.

Art. 39. The date of a name or of a combination of names is that
of their effective publication. In the absence of proof to the contrary,
the date placed on the work containing the name or combination of
names is regarded as correct. On and after January Ist, 1908, the
date of publication of the latin diagnosis only can be taken into account
in questions of priority.

Examples. — Mentha joliicoma Opiz was distributed by its author in 1832,
but the name dates from 1882 (published by Déséglise Menth. Op. in Bull.
soc. étud. scient. Angers, 1881-1882, p. 210); Mentha bracteolata Op. Seznam,
p. 65 (1852) without description, takes effect only from 1882, den it was
published with a description (Déséglise 1. c., p. 211). There is some reason for
supposing that the first volume of Adanson's Familles des Plantes was published
in 1762, but in absence of certainty the date 1763 on the title-page is assumed
to be correct. The different parts of Willdenow's Species Plantarum were
published as follows: vol. I, 1798; vol. IT, 2, 1800; vol. III, 1, 1801; vol. III,
2. 1803; vol. III, 3, 1804; vol. IV, 2, 1806; and not in the years 1797, 1799,
1800, 1800, 1800 and 1805 respectively, as would appear from the title-page
of the volumes: it is the earlier series of dates which takes effect. ^ lie
third volume of the Prodromus florae hispanicae of Willkomm & Lange,
the title-page of which bears the date 1880, was published in four parts, pp.
1-240 in 1874, pp. 241-512 in 1877, pp. 513-736 in 1878, p. 737 to the actis
1880, and it is these dates which take effect. ‘

Recommendations. Botanists will do well, in publishing, to conform to
the following recommendations:

VIII. Not to publish a name without clearly indicating whether it is
the name of a family or a tribe, a genus or a section, a species or a variety;
briefly, without expressing an opinion on the nature of the group to which
they give the name.

XIX. To avoid publishing or mentioning in their publications unpublished
names which they do not accept, — if the. persons responsible for these
names have not formally authorised their publication (see Rec. XIV, e).

XX. When publishing new names in works written in a modern language
(floras, catalogues etc.) to publish simultaneously the latin diagnoses which
will make the names valid from the point of view of scientific nomenclature. .

XXI. To give the etymology of new generic names and also of specific
names when the meaning of the latter is not obvious.

XXII. To indicate precisely the date of publication of their works and
that of the placing on sale or the distribution of named and numbered plants
when these are accompanied by printed diagnoses. In the case of a work
appearing in parts, the last published sheet of a volume should indicate the
precise dates at which the different fascicles or parts of the volume were
published, as well as the number of pages in each.

XXIII. When works are published in periodicals to require the editor
to indicate on the separate copies the date (year and month) of publication
and also the title of the periodical from which the work is extracted.

XXIV. Separate copies should always bear the pagination of the periodical
of which they form a part; if desired they may also bear a special pagination,

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 45

Section 5. On the precision to be given to names by the citation of
` the author who first published them.

Art. 40. For the indication of the name or names of a group to
be accurate and complete, and in order that the date may be readily
verified, it is necessary to quote the author who first published the
name or combination of names in question.

Examples: Simarubaceae Lindley, Simaruba Aublet, Simaruba laevis
Grisebach, Simaruba amara Aublet var. opaca Engler.

Art. 41. An alteration of the constituent characters or of the
circumscription of a group does not warrant the quotation of another
author than the one who first published the name or combination of
names.

When the changes have been considerable, the words: mutatis
charact., or pro parte, or excl. gen., excl. sp., excl. var., or some other
abridged indication, are added after the citation of the original author,
according to the nature of the changes that have been made, and of
the group in question.

Examples: Phyllanthus L. em. (emendavit) Müll. Arg.; Myosotis L. pro
parte, R. Br.; Globularia cordijolia L. excl. var. B.; etc.

Art. 42. When a manuscript name has been published and referred
to its author, the name of the person who published it should be
appended to the citation. The same rule should be followed for
names of garden origin when they are cited as “Hort.”

Examples: Capparis lasiantha R. Br. ex or apud DC.; Streptanthus hetero-
phyllus Nutt. in Torr. et Gray; Gesnera Donklarüi Hort. ex or apud Hook.

Bot. Mag. tab. 5070.

Art. 43. When, in a genus, a name is applied to a group which is
moved into another group where it retains the same rank, or to a group
which becomes of higher or lower rank than before, the change is
equivalent to the creation of a new group and the author who has
effected the change is the one to be quoted. The original author
can be cited only in parenthesis.

Examples. — Chieranthus tristis L. when moved into the pe Matthiola
becomes Matthiola tristis R. Br., or Matthiola tristis (L.) R. Br. —- Medicago

lymorpha L. var. orbicularis L. when raised to the rank of a species becomes
M praan orbicularis All. or Medicago orbicularis (L.) All.

Recommendations.
XXV. Authors’ names put after names of plants are abbreviated, unless
they are very short.

46 Rhodora [Marcu

For this purpose preliminary particles or letters that do not, strictly speak-
ing, form part of the name, are suppressed, and the first letters are given
without any omission. If a name of one syllable is long enough to make it
worth while to abridge it, the first consonants only are given (Br. for Brown);
if the name has two or more syllables, the first syllable and the first letter of
the following one are taken, or the two first when both are consonants (Juss.
for Jussieu; Rich. for Richard). When it is necessary to give more of a name
to avoid confusion between names beginning with the same syllables, the
same system is to be followed. For instance two syllables are given together
with the one or two first consonants of the third; or one of the last charac-
teristic consonants of the name is added (Bertol. for Bertoloni, to distinguish
from Bertero; Michx for Michaux, to distinguish from Micheli). Christian
names or accessory designations, serving to distinguish two botanists of the
same name, are abridged in the same way (Adr. Juss. for Adrien de Jussieu,
Gaertn. fil. or Gaertn. f. for Gaertner filius).

When it is a well established custom to abridge a name in another manner,
it is best to conform to it (L. for Linnaeus, DC. for De Candolle, St.-Hil. for
Saint-Hilaire).

In publications destined for the general public and in titles it is preferable
not to abridge.

Section 6. On names that are to be retained when a group is divided,
remodelled, transferred, or moved from one rank to another, or
when two groups of the same rank are united.

Art. 44. A change of characters, or a revision which involves the
exclusion of certain elements of a group or the addition of new ele-
ments, does not warrant a change in the name or names of a group,
except in cases provided for in article 51.

Examples.— The genus Myosotis as revised by R. Brown differs from the
original genus of Linnaeus, but the name has not been changed, nor is any
change allowable. Various authors have united with Centaurea Jacea L.
one or two species which Linnaeus had kept distinct; the group thus consti-
tuted must be called Centaurea Jacea L. (sensu ampl.) or Centaurea Jacea L.
(em. Visiani, em. Godron, etc.); the creation of a new name such as Centaurea
vulgaris Godr. is superfluous.

Art. 45. When a genus is divided into two or more genera, the
name must be kept and given to one of the principal divisions. If
the genus contains a section or some other division which, judging
by its name or its species, is the type or the origin of the group, the
name is reserved for that part of it. If there is no such section or
subdivision, but one of the parts detached contains a great many
more species than the others, the name is reserved for that part of it.

Examples. — The genus Helianthemum contained, according to Dunal
(in DC. Prodr. I. 266-284 [1824], 112 well-known species distributed in nine
sections; several of these sections have since been raised to generic rank
(Fumana Spach, Tuberaria Spach) but the name Helianthemum has been
kept for the divisions grouped round the section Euhelianthemum. — The

genus Convolvulus L. em. Jacq. was divided into two by Robert Brown in
1810 (Prodr. fl. Nov. Holl., p. 482-484), who gave the name Calystegia to one

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 47

of the genera which at that time contained only four species, and reserved
the name Convolvulus for the other genus which contained a much larger
number of species. —In the same way Salisbury (in Trans. Linn. Soc. VI,
317 [1802]), in separating Erica vulgaris L. from the genus Erica, under the
name Calluna, kept the name Erica for the large number of species left.

Art. 46. When two or more groups of the same nature are united,
the name of the oldest is retained. If the names are of the same
date, the author chooses, and his choice cannot be modified by sub-
sequent authors.

Examples. — Hooker f. and Thomson (Fl. Ind. p. 67 [1855]) united the
genera Wormia Rottb. and Capellia Bl.; they gave the name Wormia to the
enus thus formed because the last name dates from 1783 while Capellia
ates from 1825. — In case of union of the two genera Cardamine and Dentaria,
which were founded at the same time by Linnaeus (Sp. Pl. ed. 1, p. 653 and
654 [1753]; Gen. Pl. ed. 5, n. 726, 727) the collective genus must be called
Cardamine because that name was chosen by Crantz (Class. Crucif., p. 126.
[1769], who was the first to suggest the union.

Recommendations.

XXVI. Authors who have to choose between two generic names should
note the following recommendations:

1. Of two names of the same date to prefer the one which was first accom-
panied by the description of a species.

2. Of two names of the same date, both accompanied by descriptions of
spares, to prefer the one, which, when the author made his choice, included
the larger number of species.

3. In cases of equality from these various points of view to prefer the more
correct and appropriate name.

XXVII. en several genera are united as subgenera or sections under
one generie name, that subdivision which was first distinguished or described
may retain its name (ex.: Anarrhinum sect. Anarrhinum; Hemigenia sect.
Hemigenia), or be preceded by a prefix (Anthriscus sect. Eu-Anthriscus) or
followed by a suffix (Stachys sect. Stachyotypus). These prefixes or suffixes
lapse when the subdivisions are raised to generic rank.

XXVIII. When several species are united as subspecies or varieties under
a collective name, that subdivision which was first distinguished or described
may retain its name (ex.: Saxifraga aspera subsp. aspera) or bear a prefix
(Alchemilla alpina subsp. eualpina) or be designated by some customary title
(normalis, genuinus, typicus, originarius, verus, veridicus etc.). These prefixes
or terms lapse when the subdivisions are raised to specific rank.

Art. 47. When a species or subdivision of a species is divided into
two or more groups of the same nature, if one of the two forms was
distinguished or described earlier than the other, the name is retained
for that form.

Examples. — Genista horrida DC. Fl. Franc. IV. 500 was divided by Spach
B" Ann. Sci. Nat. ser. 3, II., 253 [1844]) into three species: G. horrida DC.,

. Boissieri Spach and G. Webbii Spach; the name G. horrida was rightly
kept for the earliest described form, that described and figured by Vahl. and
Gilibert.— Several species (Primula cashmiriana Munro, P. erosa Wall.)
have been separated from Primula denticulata Sm. (Exot. Bot. IT, 109, tab.
114), but the name P. denticulata has been rightly kept for the form which
Smith described and figured under this name.

48 Rhodora | [Marcu

Art. 48. When a subgenus or section or species is moved into
another genus, when a variety or other division of a species is moved
into another species, retaining there the same rank, the original name
of the subgenus or section, the first specific epithet, or the original
name of the division of the species must be retained or must be
re-established, unless, in the new position there exists one of the
obstacles indicated in the articles of section 7.

Examples. — The subgenus Aljredia Less. (Syn. p. 6, 1832) of the genus
Rhaponticum keeps its name when placed in the genus Carduus: Carduus
sect. Aljredia Benth. et Hook. fil.; the section Vaccaria DC. of the genus
Saponaria keeps its name when placed in the genus Gypsophila: Gypsophila
sect. Vaccaria Gren. et Godr. — Lotus siliquosus L. Syst. ed. 10. p. 1178
(1759) when transferred to the genus Tetragonolobus must be called Tetra-
gonolobus siliquosus Roth Tent. Fl. germ. I. 323 (1788) and not Tetragonolobus
Scandalida Scop. Fl. Carn. ed. 2, II, 87 (1772). — Betula incana L. Suppl.
p. 417 (1781) when transferred to the genus Alnus must be called pue
incana Willd. Sp. Pl. IV, 335 (1805), not Alnus lanuginosa Gilib. Exerc.
Phytol. II, 402 (1792).— Satyrium nigrum L. Sp. Pl. ed. 1, 944 (1753), when
placed in the genus Nigritella must be called Nigritella nigra Reichb. f. Ic.
Fl. Germ. et Helv. XIV, 102 (1851), not Nigritella angustifolia Rich. in Mém.
Mus. Par. IV, 56 (1818). The variety y micranthum Gren. et Godr. (Fl.
France, I, 171 [1847]) of Helianthemum italicum Pers., when transferred as
a variety to H. penicillatum 'Thib. retains its name: H. penicillatum var.
a micranthum Grosser (in Engl. Pflanzenreich. Heft. 14, p. 115 [1903]).— The
variety subcarnosa Hook. fil. (Bot. Antarct. Voy. I, 5 1847) of Cardamine
hirsuta L., when transferred as a variety to C. glacialis DC., retains its name:
C. glacialis var. subcarnosa O. E. Schulz (in Engl. Bot. Jahrb. XXXII, 542
[1903]; the citation of an earlier synonym (Cardamine propinqua Carmichael
in Trans. Linn. Soc. XII, 507 (isis) has no influence on the choice of the name
of the variety (see art. 49). In all these cases, older but incorrect combina-
tions n. give place to more recent combinations in which the rule has been
observed.

Art. 49. When a tribe becomes a family, a subgenus or a section
becomes a genus, a subdivision of a species becomes a species, or the
reverse of these changes takes place, and speaking generally when a
group changes its rank, the earliest name (or combination of names)
received by the group in its new position must be regarded as valid,
if it is in conformity with the rules, unless there exist any of the obstacles
indicated in the articles of section 7.

Examples. — The section Campanopsis R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl., p.
561 (1810) of the genus Campanula, was first raised to generic rank by Schrader,:
and must be called Wahlenbergia Schrad. Cat. hort. Goctt. (1814), not Cam-
panopsis O. Kuntze Rev. Gen. II, p. 378 (1891). — Magnolia virginiana L.
var. foetida L. Sp. pl. ed. 1, p. 536 (1753), raised to specific rank, must be
called Magnolia grandiflora L. Syst. Nat. ed. 10, p. 1082 (1759) not Magnolia
foetida Sarg. in Gard. and For. II, 615 (1889). — Mentha spicata L. var.
viridis L. Sp. Pl., ed. 1, p. 576 (1753) was raised to the rank of a species by
Hudson, and must be called Mentha spicata Huds. Fl. angl. ed. 1, p. 221
(1762) not Mentha viridis L. Sp. Pl., ed. 2, p. 804 (1763). — Lythrum inter-

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 49

medium Ledeb. (Ind. Hort Dorp. [1822]), regarded as a variety of L. Salicaria
L., must be called L. Salicaria var. gracilius Turez. (in Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscou,
XVII, 235 [1844], not L. Salicaria var. intermedium Koehne (in Engl. Bot.
Jahrb. I, 327 [1881]). In all these cases names which are in accordance with
the old law of Alphonse de Candolle must give place to older names and
combinations.

Recommendations. Authors who make the changes discussed in article
49 should note the following recommendations in order to avoid a change
of name in case of a change of rank.

XXIX. 1°. When a sub-tribe becomes a tribe, when a tribe becomes a
subfamily, when a subfamily becomes a family, ete., or when the inverse
changes occur, do not alter the root of a name but only the termination (-inae,
-eae, -oideae, -aceae, -ineae, -ales, etc.), unless, in the new position one of the
obstacles indicated in the articles of section 7, supervenes, or the new designa-
tion becomes a source of error, or there is some other serious reason against it.

20 When a section or a subgenus becomes a genus, or the inverse changes
take place, retain the old names, unless this results in two genera of plants
having the same name, or the existence of two subdivisions of the same name
in the same genus, or one of the obstacles indicated in the articles of section
7 supervenes.

3°. When a subdivision of a species becomes a species or the inverse change
occurs, retain the original epithets, unless this results in two s ecies bearing
the same name in the same genus, or two subdivisions bearing the same name
in the same species, or unless any of the obstacles indicated in section 7 super-
venes.

Section 7. On names that are to be rejected, changed or modified.

Art. 50. No one is authorised to reject, change or modify a name
(or combination of names) because it is badly chosen, or disagreeable,
or another is preferable or better known, or because of the existence
of an earlier homonym which is universally regarded as non-valid,
or for any other motive either contestable or of little import. (See
also art. 57.)

Examples. — This rule was broken by the change of Staphylea to Staphylis,
Tamus to Thamnos, Mentha to Minthe, Tillaea to Tillia, Vincetoricum to
Alexitoxicon; and by the change of Orobanche Rapum to O. sarothamnophyta,
O. Columbariae to Ò. columbarihaerens, O. Artemisiae to O. artemisiepiphyta.
All these modifications (which are contrary to Art. 50) must be rejected.—
The name Diplomorpha Meissn. in Regensb. Denkschr. ITI, 289 (1841) must
not be substituted for the generic name Wickstroemia Endl. Prodr. fl. Norfolk.,
p. 47 (1833) because of the earlier homonyms Wi(c)kstroemia Schrad. Goett.
gel. Anz., p. 710 (1821) and Wi(c)kstroemia Spreng. in Vet. Akad. Handl.
Stockh. 1821, p. 167, t. 3, for the former is merely a synonym of the genus
Laplacea Kunth (1821) and the latter of a subdivision of the genus Eupatorium
L. (1753).

ED LLnastons. See on the subject of homonyms recommendations
Vb and XIV} which suggest that cases of this kind should be avoided for the
future.

Art. 51. Every one should refuse to admit a name in the following
cases:

1. When the name is applied in the plant kingdom to a group
which has an earlier valid name.

50 Rhodora [Marcu

2. When it duplicates the name of a class, order, family or genus,
or a subdivision or species of the same genus, or a subdivision of the

same species.

3. When it is based on a monstrosity.

4. When the group which it designates embraces elements alto-
gether incoherent, or when it becomes a permanent source of confusion
or error.

5. When it is contrary to the rules of sections 4 and 6.

Examples. — 1°. Carelia Adans. (1763) is a name which was applied by its
author to a genus which had already received a valid name (Ageratum L.
[1753] (synonym); similarly Trichilia alata N. E. Brown (in Kew Bull. [1896]
p. 160) is a name which cannot be maintained because it is a synonym of T.
pterophylla C. DC. (in Bull. Herb. Boiss. II, 581 [1894]).— 2. Tapeinanthus,
a name given by Boissier to a genus of Labiatae was replaced by Thuspeinanta
by Th. Durand, because of the existence of an earlier and valid genus, Tapein-
anthus Herb. among the Amaryllidaceae (homonym). Similarly Astragalus
rhizanthus Boiss. (Diagn. Pl. Or. ser. 1, II, 83 [1843]) was renamed A. cariensis
Boiss. because of the existence of an earlier valid homonym, Astragalus
rhizanthus Royle Illustr. Bot. Himal. p. 200 (1835). — 4°. The genus Uro-
pedium Lindl. was based on a monstrosity which is now referred to Phragmo-
pedilum caudatum Rolfe. — 59. 'The genus Schrebera L. derives its characters
from the two genera Cuscula and Myrica (parasite and host) and must be
dropped; and the same applies to Lemairea De Vr. which is made up of ele-
ments taken from different families. Linnaeus described under the name of
Rosa villosa a plant which has been referred to several different species and
of which certain identification seems impossible; to avoid the confusion
which results from the use of the name Rosa villosa, it is preferable in this
case, as in other analogous cases, to abandon the name altogether.

Art. 52. The name of an order, suborder, family or subfamily,
tribe or subtribe, must be changed when it is taken from a genus
which, by general consent, does not belong to the group in question.

Examples. — If it were to be shown that the genus Portulaca does not
belong to the family Portulacaceae, the name Portulacaceae would have to be
changed.— Nees (in Hooker and Arnott, Bot. Beechey’s Voy. p. 237 [1836])
E the name T'ristegineae to a tribe of Gramineae, after the genus Tristegis

ees (a synonym of the genus Melinis Beauv.). But Melinis (Tristegis)
having been excluded from this tribe by Stapf (in Fl. Cap. VII. 313) and by

Hackel (in Oesterr. bot. Zeiteshr. LI, 464), these authors have adopted the
name Arundinelleae from the genus Arundinella.

Art. 53. When a subgenus, a section or a subsection, passes as
such into another genus, the name must be changed if there is already,
in that genus, a valid group of the same rank, under the same name.

When a species is moved from one genus into another, its specific
epithet must be changed if it is already borne by a valid species of
that genus. Similarly when a subspecies, a variety, or some other
subdivision of a species is placed under another species, its name

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 51

must be changed if borne already by a valid form of like rank in that
species.

Examples.— Spartium biflorum Desf. (1798-1800) when transferred by
Spach in 1849 into the genus Cytisus could not be called Cytisus biflorus, but
was renamed Cytisus Fontanesii, because of the previous existence of a valid
species Cytisus biflorus L'Hérit. (1789). The earliest synonym of Calochortus
Nuttallit Torr. et Gray (in Pacific Rail. Rep. IL, 124 [1855-1856] is Fritillaria
alba Nutt. (Gen. Amer. I, 222 [1818] but we cannot restore the original epi-
thet of this species, although this has been done in the Notizbl. des K. bot.
Gartens und Mus. Berl. II, 318 (1899), because there exists already a valid
species in the genus with the name Calochortus albus Dougl. in Maund Botan-
4st t. 98 (1839). :

Art. 54. “Names of genera must be rejected in the following special
cases:

1. When they are formed from a technical term borrowed from
morphology, unless they are accompanied by specific names.

2. When they express uninominal nomenclature.

3. When they are formed of two words, unless these two words
were from the first united or joined by a hyphen

Examples.— 1°. Generic names such as Lignum, Radix, Spina, ete. would
not now be admissible; on the other hand a generic name like T'uber should
not be rejected when it has been published with specific names (T'uber ciba-
rium ete.).— 2. Ehrhart (Phytophylacium [1780] and Beiträg. IV, 145-150)
made use of a uninominal nomenclature for species known at that time under
binary names (Phaeocephalum, Leptostachys, etc.). These names, which
resemble generie names, must not be confused with such and are to be rejected,
unless a subsequent author has given them the value of a generic name: for
example Baeothryon, a uninominal expression of Ehrhart's, has been applied
to a genus characterised by A. Dietrich Spec. Pl. II, 89 (1833).— 3°. Names
like Quisqualis ( a single word from the first), Sebastiano-Schaueria and Neves-
Armondia will stand.

Art. 55. Specifie names must also be rejected in the following
special cases:

1". When they are ordinals serving for purpose of enumeration.

29, When they merely repeat the generic name.

Examples.— 1°. Boletus vicesimus sextus, Agaricus octogesimus nonus.—
2°. Linaria Linaria, Raphanistrum Raphanistrum etc.

Art. 56. In the cases foreseen in articles 51 to 55, the name to be
rejected or changed is replaced by the oldest valid name in the group
in question, and in default of such a one a new name must be made.

Examples: See the examples cited under articles 51 and 53.

Art. 57. The original spelling of a name must be retained, except
in case of a typographic or orthographic error. When the difference

52 Rhodora Marcu

between two names, especially two generic names, lies in the termi-
nation, these names are to be regarded as distinct even though differing
by one letter only.

Examples: Rubia and Rubus, Monochaete and Monochaetum, Peponia and
Peponium, Iria and Iris.

Recommendations.

XXX. The liberty of making orthographic corrections must be used with
reserve, especially if the change effects the first syllable, and above all the
first letter of a name.

. Many names differ by a single letter without risk of confusion
(ex. Durvillea and Urvillea). In cases where a close approach to identity
is a source of error (ex. Astrostemma and Asterostemma in one and the same
family, Asclepiadaceae, Pleuripetalum and Pleuropetalum in - Orchidaceae)
only one, the older, of the names should be kept, in accordance with article
51, 4°.

Chapter IV. Modifications of the rules of botanical nomenclature.

Art. 58. The rules of botanical nomenclature can only be modified
by competent persons at an international Congress convened for the
express purpose.

Appendix. Various Recommendations.

XXXII. Botanists should use in modern languages latin scientific names.
or those immediately derived from them, preferably to names of another
kind or origin. They should avoid the use of the latter unless these are very
clear and in common use.

XXXIII. Every friend of Science should oppose the introduction into a
modern language of names of plants which are not already there, unless they
are derived from latin botanical names by means of some slight alteration.

XXXIV. The metric system only is used in botany for reckoning weights
and measures. The foot, inch, line, pound, ounce etc. should be rigorously
excluded from scientific language.

Altitude, depth, rapidity etc. are measured in metres. Fathoms, knóts,
miles etc. are expressions which should disappear from scientific language.

XXXV. Very minute dimensions are reckoned in p (micromillimetres,
microns, or thousandths of a millimetre) and not in fractions of a millimetre
or line, etc.; fractions encumbered with ciphers and commas are more likely
to give rise to mistakes.

. Authors are asked to indicate clearly and precisely the scale
of the figures which they publish.

XXXVII. Temperatures are expressed in degrees of the centigrade-
thermometer of Celsius. .

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 53

New ENGLAND GENERA OF WHICH THE LONG ESTABLISHED NAMES
ARE TO BE MAINTAINED NOTWITHSTANDING TECHNICAL LACK
OF PRIORITY.

(Extracted from a list of about 400 such generic names sanctioned by act
of the International Botanical Congress at Vienna.)

Names to be retained

Tragus [Hall. (1768)] Scop. (1777)

Leersia Sw. (1788)

Hierochloe [J. G. Gmel. (1747)] R.
Br. (1810)

Cynodon L. C. Rich. (1805)

Ctenium Panz. (1814)
Glyceria R. Br. (1810)
Fimbristylis Vahl (1806)

Rhynchospora Vahl (1806)
Symplocarpus Salisb. (1818)
Heteranthera Ruiz & Pav. (1794)
Luzula DC. (1805)

Smilacina Desf. (1807)

Majanthemum Web. (1780)

Lachnanthes Ell. (1816)

Belameanda Adans. (1763)
Platanthera L. C. Rich. (1818)
Spiranthes L C. Rich (1818)

Listera R: Br. (1813)
Calopogon R. Br. (1813)
Liparis L. C. Rich.
Carya Nutt. (1818)

Names to be discarded.

Nazia Adans. (1763)
Homalocenchrus Mieg (1760)
Savastana Schrank (1789)
Torresia Ruiz & Pav. (1794)
Dissarrenum Labill. (1806)
Capriola Adans. (1763)
Dactilon Vill. (1789)
Fibichia Koel. (1802)
Campulosus Desv. (1810)
Panicularia Fabr. (1763)
Iria L. C. Rich. (1805)
Iriha O. Ktze. (1891)
Triodon L. C. Rich. (1805)
Spathyema Raf. (1808)
Phrynium Loefl. (1758)
Juncoides [Moehr. ex] Adans. (1763)
Vagnera Adans. (1763)
Tovaria Neck. (1790)
Polygonastrum Moench (1794)
Unifolium [Moehr. (1736)] Adans.
(1763)
Valentinia Heist. (1763)
Heritiera J. F Gmel. (1791)
Gyrotheca Salisb. (1812)
Gemmingia Heist. (1763)
Lysias Salisb. (1812)
Gyrostachis Pers. (1807)
Ibidium Salisb. (1812)
Diphryllum Raf. (1808)
Cathea Salisb. (1812)
Leptorkis Thou. (1809)
Scoria Raf. (1808)
Hicorius Raf. (1817)
Hicoria Raf. (1838)

54 Rhodora [Marcu

Maclura Nutt.

Laportea Gaudich. (1826)

Pilea Lindl. (1821)

Arceuthobium Marsch.-Bieb. (1819)

Fagopyrum [Tourn. ex] Moench
(1794)

Suaeda Forsk. (1775)

Spergularia J. & C. Presl. (1819)

Dicentra Bernh. (1833)

Corydalis Medik. (1803)

Capsella Medik. (1792)

Erophila DC. (1821)
Physocarpus Maxim. (1879)
Sorbaria A. Br. (1864)

Tetragonolobus Scop. (1772)
Tephrosia Pers. (1807)

Oxytropis DC. (1802)
Desmodium Desv. (1813)

Amphicarpaea Ell. (1818)

Ailanthus Desf. (1789)
Nemopanthus Raf. (1819)
Shepherdia Nutt. (1818)
Bifora Hoffm. (1816)
Cryptotaenia DC. (1829)

Loiseleuria Desv. (1840)
Gaylussacia HBK. (1818)

Toxylon Raf. (1817)

Joxylon Raf. (1818)
Urticastrum Fabric. (1759)
Adicea Raf. (1815)
Razoumowsk a Hoffm. (1808)
Helxine L. (1753)

Dondia Adans. (1763)
Lerchea [Hall. (1743)] Rueling (1774)
Buda Adans. (1763)

Tissa Adans. (1763)
Capnorchis Borckh. (1797)
Bikukulla Adans. (1763)
Diclytra Borckh. (1797)
Die'ytra Cham. & Schlechtd. (1826)
Dactylicapnos Wall. (1826)
Capnoides Adans. (1763)
Cisticapnos Adans. (1763)
Neckeria Scop. (1777)
Pseudofumaria Medik. (1789)
Bursa Siegesb. Weber (1780)
Marsypocarpus Neck (1790)
Gansblum Adans. (1763)
Opulaster Medik. (1799)
Basilima Raf. (1836)
Schizonotus Lindl. (1829)
Scandalida Adans. (1763)
Cracca L. (1747, 1753)
Colinil Adans. (1763)
Needhamia Scop. (1777)
Spiesia Neck. (1790)
Meibomia Adans. (1763)
Pleurolobus J. St. Hil. (1812)
Falcata J. F. Gmel. (1791)
Savia Raf. (1808)

Pongelion Adans. (1763)
Ilicioides Dumont de Courset. (1802)
Lepargyrea Raf. (1818)
Anidrum Neck. (1790)
Deringa Adans. (1763)
Alacospermum Neck. (1790)
Chamaecistus Oeder. (1761)
Adnaria Raf. (1817)

1907] On the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature 55

Halenia Borkh. (1796)

Calystegia R. Br. (1810)

Ellisia L. (1763)

Amsinckia Lehm. (1831)
Mertensia Roth. (1797)
Pyenanthemum L. C. Rich. (1803)

Nicandra Adans. (1763)

Epiphegus Nutt. (1818)

Fedia Moench (1794)
Echinocystis Torr. & Gray (1840)
Vernonia Schreb. (1791)

Mikania Willd. (1803-1804)

Liatris Schreb. (1791)

Chrysopsis Ell. (1824)
Haplopappus Cass. (1828)
Silybum Adans. (1763)
Cnicus Gaertn.’ (1791)
Krigia Schreb. (1791)
Taraxacum Wiggers (1780)

Tetragonanthus 8. G. Gmel. (1769)
Volvulus Med k. 1791)
Macrocalyx Trew (1761)
Benthamia Lindl. (1830)
Pneumaria Hill (1764)

Furera Adans. (1763)

Koellia Moench (1794)
Pentagonia Heist. ex Fabr. (1759)
Physaloides Boehm. (1760)
Leptamnium Raf. (1818)
Mitrophora Neck. (1790)
Micrampelis Raf. (1808)

Behen Hill (1762)

Willugbaeya Neck. (1790)
Carelia Cav. (1802)

Laciniaria Hill (1762)
Psilosanthus Neck. (1790)
Diplogon Raf. (1818)
Hoorebeckia Cornelissen (1817)
Mariana Hill (1762)

Carbenia Adans. (1763)
Adopogon Neck. (1790)
Hedypnois Scop. (1772)

[1 It should be noticed that this ruling is to the effect that the name Cnicus, employed
by Linnaeus for a considerable aggregate, should be restricted, as by Gaertner, to
Cnicus benedictus and any plants regarded as congeneric with it. As a result our ordi-
nary thistles with plumose pappus may bear the name Cirsium Adans., and the species

with simple pappus the name Carduus L.

The degree to which the latter groups may

be regarded as separate genera is of course still a matter of individual opinion.— Ed.]

88. . Rhodora [Marcu

NOTES ON NEW ENGLAND HEPATICAE, —V.
ALEXANDER W. EVANS.
(Plate 73.)

Of the species noted below the first three are introduced for nomen-
clatorial reasons. ‘The paper also records additions to the hepatic
flora of each New England state except Rhode Island. ‘The majority
of these additions belong to either Lophozia or Calypogeia, one species
in the latter genus being elevated from varietal rank. For the sake
of comparison the two species of Calypogeia already known from
New England are also discussed. The reasoris for discarding the
generic name Kantia in favor of Calypogeia are stated by the writer
in another connection."

1. Ricciella Sullivantii (Aust.) comb. nov. Riccia Sullivantii
Aust. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1869: 233. Riccia fluitans, var.
Sullivantii Aust.; Underwood, Bull. Illinois State Lab. Nat. Hist.
2: 28. 1884. Riccia Huebeneriana Underw. Bot. Gazette 19:
276. 1894 (not Lindenb.). The genus Ricciella was proposed by
A. Braun in 1821? for the reception of Riccia fluitans L. and Riccia
canaliculata Hoffm., both of which are now considered forms of the
same species. It was based on the fact that the capsules protruded
from the lower surface of the thallus, instead of from the upper, as in
more typical species of Riccia. For a long time it received but*slight
recognition, although both ‘Trevisan and Dumortier accepted it with-
out question. It has also been accepted by Stephani, at first as a
genus and afterwards as a subgenus under Riccia.2 Instead, however,
of relying upon the original characters of Braun, he bases his division
on differences in the structure of the thallus. In Riccia proper, as he
defines it, the photosynthetic layer consists of rows of cells extending
at right angles to the epidermis; these are loosely connected longi-
tudinally and enclose air chambers in the form of narrow canals.
In Riecciella the air chambers are more irregular and are separated by
plates of cells. Warnstorf * adopts Ricciella as a genus on the basis of
Stephani's characterization, a procedure which seems to be entirely

! Bryologist 10: 24-30. 1907.
? Flora 4: 756. 1821.

3 Bull. de l'Herb. Boissier I. 6: 361. 1898.
4 Kryptogamenfl. der Mark Brandenburg 1: 80. 1903.

1907] Evans,— Notes on New England Hepaticae,— V 57

warranted. In addition to R. Sullivantii two other species of Ricciella
are known from New England, namely, R. crystallina (L.) Warnst.

and the type of the genus, R. fluitans (L.) A. Br. R. crystallina has

been found in Connecticut only, but the other two have been reported
from each New England state except New Hampshire.
2. Marsupella Sullivantii (DeNot.) comb. nov. Sarcoscyphus

sphacelatus, var. medius Gottsche (in part), 1860. S. Sullwantui

De Not., 1861. S. Ehrharti, var. erythrorhizus Limpr., 1876. Mar-
supella erythrorhiza Schiffn., 1901. M. media Schiffn. (as synonym),
1901.1. The 49th Article of the Vienna Rules of Nomenclature?
includes the following statement: when....a subdivision of a species
becomes a species....the earliest name received by the group in its
new position must be regarded as valid. Applying this rule to the
present species it is perfectly evident that Sarcoscyphus Sullivanti
was the earliest name received by Gottsche's var. medius of S. sphacel-
atus, upon its elevation to specific rank. The name Sullivanti? must
therefore be regarded as valid and must be retained when the species
is transferred to Marsupella. Precisely the same conclusion would
be reached by applying the American Association Code of Botanical
Nomenclature as recently revised. Specimens of M. Sullivantii
have recently been received from various localities in the White
Mountains, New Hampshire (W. G. Farlow), and from Southington,
Connecticut (Miss Lorenz). It has not yet been reported, however,
from either Vermont or Rhode Island.

3. Narpia GEoscyPrHUS (De Not.) Lindb.; Carrington, British
Hepat. 27. 1874. Jungermannia scalaris B minor Nees, Naturge-
schichte der europ. Leberm. 1: 281. 1833. Alicularia scalaris B
minor Nees, l.c. 2: 449. 1836. Jungermannia haematosticta Nees,
l. c. 2: 453 (in note). 1836. Alicularia Geoscyphus De Not. Mem.
R. Accad. Sci. di Torino II. 18: 486. f. III (1-13). 1859. Junger-
mannia Silvrettae Gottsche; G. & R. Hep. Eur. Exsic. 470. 1869
(without description). Nardia repanda Lindb.; Carrington, British
Hepat. 27. 1874 (not Jungermannia scalaris 8 repanda Hiiben. Hep.
Germ. 81. 1834). Marsupella Silvrettae Dumort. Hep. Europ. 128.
1874. Alicularia minor Limpr.; Cohn, Kryptogamenfl. von Schlesien
1: 251. 1876. Nardia haematosticta Lindb. Musc. Scand. 8. 1879.

1 For fuller references and additional synonyms see the writer’s earlier notes on
Marsupella media in Ruopora 6: 167. 1904.

2 International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature adopted by the International
Botanical Congress of Vienna 1905. Jena, 1906.

58 Rhodora [Marcu

N. insecta Lindb. l. c. Jungermannia dovrensis Limpr. Jahresb.
Schlesischen Ges. für vaterl. Cultur 61: 10. 1884. Nardia minor
Arn. Lebermoosstudien im nordl. Norwegen 39. 1892. N. Silvret-
tae Pears. Hepat. British Isles 372. pl. 172. 1901. Mesophylla
minor Corb.; Bouvet, Bull. Soc. d'Étud. Scient. d'Angers for 1902:
189. 1903. Judging from the above synonymy the specific name
haematosticta is apparently available for the present species, and
Lindberg's combination Nardia haematosticta has been rather exten-
sively adopted. Jungermannia haematosticta Nees, however, was
never effectively published by its author, according to either the
Vienna Rules or the Association Code, both of which state that inci-
dental mention of a name is not publication. The note referred to
in which the name appears is given under Alicularia scalaris B minor
and states that Nees von Esenbeck had formerly sent specimens of
this variety to his friends under the name Jungermannia haematosticta.
This cannot be considered as anything more than incidental mention,
even though the implication is made that the plant might perhaps be
regarded as worthy of specific rank. The name must therefore be
discarded, and the species must bear the later name Geoscyphus of
De Notaris, according to the 49th Article of the Vienna Rules. As
originally proposed this name had a substantive form and did not
agree in gender with the generic name Alicularia. Some of the later
writers who have used it have changed it to an adjective form, but this
course can hardly be warranted. It should also be noted that Trevisan?
published the combination Nardia Geoscyphus in the same year as
Lindberg, but apparently later in the year because Massalongo?
quotes Lindberg rather than ‘Trevisan as the author of the name.
According to Stephani? Alicularia Rotaeana De Not. (Mem. R. Accad.
Sci. di Torino II. 18: 484. f. II [1-14]. 1859) is also a synonym of
the present species? but Massalongo* considers it a form of Nardia
scalaris (Schrad.) S. F. Gray instead, and the figures of De Notaris
certainly give strong support to this latter view. Nardia Geoscyphus
was first recorded as a New England plant from specimens collected
along the Crawford Bridle Path in the White Mountains. It has

1A full description of the species under this name was published by the writer in
Proc. Wash. Acad. 2: 296. 1900. See also Ruopora 4: 209. 1902; and b: 172.
1903.

2 Rend. R. Ist. Lomb. di Sci. e Lett. II. 2: 784. 1874.

3 Ann, R. Ist. Bot. di Roma 8: (5). 1888.

1 Bull. de l'Herb. Boissier II. 2: 40. 1902.

1907] Evans — Notes on New England Hepaticae,— V 59

since been found at Franconia, New Hampshire (W. G. Farlow),
and at West Newbury, Massachusetts (Miss Haynes). 'The lowland
specimens bear leaves which are more or less bilobed and therefore
represent the Nardia insecta of Lindberg. European writers, how-
ever, do not consider this plant a distinct species at the present time.

4. LorHozIA CONFERTIFOLIA Schiffn. Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 55:
47. 1905. Mt. Katahdin, Maine (Cowles Party, 20). Determina-
tion confirmed by Schiffner. The species is apparently confined to
alpine regions, where it grows on peaty soil or on stones covered with
earth. Until the present time it was known from only four European
localities, three in Austria and one in Switzerland, and its detection in
New England is therefore of considerable interest. L. confertifolia
belongs to the ventricosa-group, and its author compares it with L.
alpestris (Schleich.) Evans and L. Wenzelii (Nees) Steph. It is
characterized by its densely tufted habit and by the fact that its leaves
are closely imbricated and concave. Its color is a dull green, more
or less tinged with brown or red. The leaves are broadly elliptical and
bifid one third or less with a lunulate to obtuse sinus and broad obtuse
or subacute lobes. The leaf-cells have small but distinct triangular
trigones and their walls are otherwise thin though often pigmented.
In the middle of the leaf the cells average about 23 u in diameter,
agreeing in this respect with the cells in L. ventricosa but being con-
siderably larger than those of L. alpestris. ‘The Maine specimens
agree closely with those distributed by Schiffner.

5. LorHoziA LOoNGIDENS (Lindb.) Macoun, Cat. Canadian Pl.
7: 18. 1902. Jungermannia porphyroleuca Y attenuata Nees,
Naturgeschichte der europ. Leberm. 2: 80. 1836. Jungermannia
longidens Lindb. Musc. Scand. 7. 1879. Streaked Mountain,
Hebron, Maine (J. A. Allen, 5). Chocorua (Whidden's Pond),
Mt. Adams and Mt. Pemigewasset, New Hampshire (W. G. Farlow).
The Chocorua specimens were determined by Schiffner. L. longidens
was first recorded as a North American species by Macoun, who
found it on wet rocks in the Smoky Mountains of Cape Breton, Nova
Scotia. It has a wide distribution in Europe and has also been col-
lected in Siberia. Schiffner considers it one of the most clearly marked
members of the ventricosa-group, but Stephani looks upon it as a
simple synonym of L. ventricosa. The writer is disposed to accept

3 See Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 56: 26. 1906. Both the present species and the fol-
lowing are here recorded from New England for the first time.

60 | Rhodora [March

the opinion of Schiffner. L. longidens grows in rather loose tufts.
and is either dull green in color or more or less tinged with brown or
yellow. Itis more delicate in texture than most of its allies, the leaf-
cells being thin-walled except for their minute trigones. The leaves
are ovate-quadrate or ovate-rectangular in outline and are bifid one
third or less with an obtuse sinus. ‘The divisions of the leaves are
narrowly triangular and acute, rarely diverging from each other to
any extent. ‘The species rarely fruits but usually develops gemmi-
parous branches which are among its most striking features. These
branches are ascending or erect and their crowded leaves are almost
transversely attached. ‘They spread obliquely from the axis but are
frequently squarrose in the outer part. The gemmae are borne in
small clusters at the tips of the lobes; they are globoid or short-
ellipsoid in form, sometimes with obscure angles, and are either
unicellular or bicellular. In color the gemmae are normally reddish
brown, but the New Hampshire specimens bear green gemmae and
Schiffner states that he has observed a similar condition among
European specimens. Probably the lack of pigmentation in these
cases is due to the fact that the plants were deeply shaded. L. longi-
dens seems to attain its best development on rocks but it also occurs.
on logs; it is apparently confined to alpine or subalpine localities.

(To be continued.)

QUERCUS PRINOIDES WILLD. VAR. RUFESCENS
VAR. NOV.

ALFRED REHDER.

Ix the spring of 1903 Mr. F. G. Floyd drew my attention to a.
peculiar shrubby Oak he had discovered the year before on the is-
land of Nantucket. I subsequently visited the island myself and
found the shrub in question in the locality indicated by Mr. Floyd.
It grows there in the low thickets of Scrub Oak consisting of Quercus
prinoides and ilicifolia and covering a large part of the higher rolling
land between Nantucket and Siasconset, but occurs only as scattered
bushes between the other Oaks. In general appearance it resembles
most the Q. prinoides, but differs in the villous and rufous or rather
fulvous pubescence which covers the under side of the leaves and

1907] Rehder,— Quercus prinoides var. rufescens. 61

the young branches. This pubescence and the locality suggested
at first sight a possible cross between Q. prinoides and ilicifolia,
but as all the other characters of the form are those of Q. prinoides,
this idea had to be abandoned; moreover, no cross has as yet been
observed between a Black and a White Oak. No mention of a Q.
prinoides with the pubescence described could be found in literature,
but in looking through the Gray Herbarium and the herbaria of the
Arnold Arboretum and of the New England Botanical Club I found
at least two specimens which undoubtedly belonged to this form, one
from Cape Cod and one from the Pine barrens of New Jersey so that
it may be considered a coast form of Q. prinoides, and as it differs
also in a few other characters from the type, it seems to deserve a
varietal designation and may be distinguished as

QvERCUS PRINOIDES Willd. var. rufescens var. nov.

A typo recedit foliis subtus non solum albo-tomentosis sed etiam ful-
vescenti-villosis praecipue secus costam mediam ramulisque hornotinis
fulvescenti-pubescentibus, foliorum lobis acutiusculis mucrone calloso.
instructis, etiam foliis obovatis quam ea formi typici omnino minoribus
et latioribus saepe undulatis.

The variety differs from the type in the leaves having beneath be-
sides the close white tomentum a woolly yellowish pubescence par-
ticularly along the m drib and in the branches being pubescent at least
when young. The leaves are generally smaller are broader and obo-
vate with acutish callous-tipped lobes and often undulate margin.

MASSACHUSETTS: Nantucket Island, between Nantucket and
Siasconset, Sept. 1902, F. G. Floyd; August 29, 1903, Alfred Rehder;

Cape Cod, Centreville, damp woods, July 14, 1903, Clara Imogene

Cheney; New Jersey: Pine barrens of Manchester, August 26,
1852, A. C. Hexamer. The following specimens must also be re-
ferred to this variety, though they are somewhat deviating from its
type. New Jersey, Pine barrens (Herb. Gray) differs in its larger
leaves; Massachusetts, Jamaica Plain, 1887, C. E. Faxon, has leaves
with a slighter villous pubescence; North Carolina, Dunsmore,
Buncombe Co., September 21, 1897, Biltmore Herb. No. 828°, has
less villous and longer and narrower leaves and comes from the moun-
tains of western North Carolina.

The typical Quercus prinoides has the generally larger and often
oblong-obovate or even oblong leaves more gradually narrowed to-
ward the apex and covered beneath with a close whitish tomentum,
which is sometimes reduced to scattered stellate hairs; the branchlets

62 Rhodora [Marcu

are glabrous. Intermediate forms between the species and the variety
are in Nantucket always associated with plants representing the type
of the variety.

ARNOLD ARBORETUM.

AN INTERESTING LOCALITY.
E. B. HARGER.

PisrAPAUG (or PAvG) Pond is a natural pond of manifest glacial
origin, about three-fourths of a mile long and a third as broad
lying at the intersection of the four towns of North Branford,
Guilford, Wallingford and Durham about twelve miles northeasterly
from New Haven, Connecticut. It is mostly within the limits of
Wallingford and Durham about one-half in each. On the east of
the pond (the Durham side), one of the characteristic trap-ridges of
the region, known as Pistapaug Mountain rises from the water's edge
more than 200 feet above the pond which itself is at an elevation of
some 400 feet above sea level. ‘To the northwest is another trap hill;
and a highway skirts closely the northern border of the pond and runs
through the pass between the two hills. Westward is a broad tract
of cleared land and to the south lie low wooded hills, where doubtless
runs the old valley now dammed with glacial drift.

In the spring of 1903 I found in the Eaton Herbarium at New
Haven a specimen of Polymnia Canadensis L., collected in 1880 by
Prof. O. D. Allen and labeled “Trap slide near Paug Pond, Durham,
“Conn.” Iimmediately formed the resolution of exploring the region,
but had no opportunity of doing so until Sept. 15, 1905. On this trip,
almost at the first sight of a “trap slide" I found the Polymnia, but
on the Wallingford side of the pond. However, on crossing to the
slopes of Pistapaug Mountain I found the plant in great abundance,
both near the foot and near the top of the talus-slope, which here
runs directly into the water. The remoteness of the locality from
houses and the extent of territory over which the plant is spread
seem to indicate that is not of recent introduction, but may be con-
sidered native to Connecticut.

Although the main object of the trip was fulfilled by the re-discovery
of Polymnia, the further results were very gratifying. At the base

1907 Harger,— An interesting Locality | 63

of the mountain, east of the head of the pond, were found two small
patches of Arenaria macrophylla Hook., the second station in the
state. Mr. Bartlett's station (RHopoRa 7: 20) is five or six miles
distant. Near the Arenaria grow Phegopteris Dryopteris Fée. and
Stellaria borealis Bigelow, and a short distance south I found a quantity
of Pyrus Americana DC. in full fruit, perhaps the most southerly
station in the state. From the pond itself I collected Bidens Becku
Torr., Potamogeton praelongus Wulf. and Heteranthera graminea
Vahl., the last in good flower. By the roadside, perhaps one-fourth
of a mile west, a colony of Cuphea viscossissima Jacq. reached the
best development that I have noted in this state.

As on the first trip I had only about two hours for exploration, the
results seemed to justify another expedition, which was undertaken,
in company with Prof. A. W. Evans, on May 30, 1906. On reaching
the station noted above for Cuphea, we found a pool near by which
was covered with a profusion of Hottonia inflata Ell. in flower. A
little farther on in a small bog we found a few plants of Epilobium
strictum Muhl., growing with a sedge, which later investigation
showed to be Carex brunnescens (Pers.) Poir., and in cleared ground
at the head of the pond, a quantity of Hieracium floribundum Wimm.
&. Grab. a species which has only recently been reported from the
state but seems to be spreading. After searching in vain for the
Arenaria I climbed the cliff to the top of the mountain, while Prof.
Evans searched for Hepaticae on the slopes. I was rewarded for the
rather stiff climb by the discovery of Carex eburnea Boott, a species
previously known from Connecticut only from the limestone region
of Litchfield County and from the neighborhood of Southington.
Later we found Lycopodium annotinum L., on the borders of a swamp
a few hundred feet north of the pond, an extension of range south-
easterly of some forty miles. Here were also Cornus Canadensis L.
and Clematis verticillaris DC. After tracing the Polymnia some
quarter of a mile northerly from the place where it was found in
September, we left the locality.

In addition to the plants noted above a peculiar gooseberry was
found on the first expedition, which, after comparison at New Haven
and at the Gray Herbarium, was thought to be Ribes lacustre Poir.,
and was so reported at the winter meeting of the Connecticut Botani-
cal Society. On collection of flowers and young fruit it proved to be a
form of R. oxyacanthoides L. peculiar in its almost spineless but

(64 > Rhodora [Marcu

densely weak-prickly or hispid semi-prostrate stems, which seldom use
more than 2-3 dm. above the ground.

OXFORD, CONNECTICUT.

POLYTRICHUM GRACILE Dicks. IN MarNE.— In one of the wooded
swamps at Middle Dam, Rangeley Lakes, Maine, there was found in
Sept., 1906, one small clump of Polytrichum with leaves resembling
those of Catharinea angustata. Prof. J. Franklin Collins, to whom
the moss was sent, determined it as P. gracile Dicks. According to
him, it is not the typical form, but agrees with one of the variations
noted in Dixon and Jameson’s Handbook of British mosses. ‘The
leaf-margins are about three times wider than in the type, and the
lamellae are only three cells high instead of four or five. Prof.
Collins has not been able to learn of any previous collection of this
species in Maine.— ELIZABETH MARIE DUNHAM.

Vol. 9, no. 98, including pages 17 to 28, was issued 25 February, 1907.

Rbodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. April, 1907. No. 100.

NOTES ON NEW ENGLAND HEPATICAE,— V.
ALEXANDER W. EVANS.
(Plate 73.)
(Continued from p. 60.)

© 6. CALYPOGEIA SPHAGNICOLA (Arn. & Perss.) Warnst. & Loeske,
Verhandl. Bot. Ver. Prov. Brandenburg 47: 320. 1905. Kantia
sphagnicola Arn. &. Perss. Rev. Bryol. 29: 26. 7. 1-8. 1902.
Cincinnulus Trichomanis, var. sphagnicola Meylan, Bull. de l'Herb.
Boissier II. 6: 499. 1906. In tufts of Dicranum Bergeri growing
in a bog; New Milford, Connecticut (4. W. E.). The present species
was first described from Swedish specimens but has since been collected
in Scotland, in Austria, in Switzerland, and apparently in northern
Germany. 'The New England plants agree closely with the type
material, and the writer's determination has been confirmed by
Maevicar. C. sphagnicola is close to C. Trichomanis but differs
from it in a number of respects and is apparently worthy of specific
rank. Even when well developed it is a small species and is pale
green in color, slightly tinged with yellow. The leaves are imbricated
and spread from the axis at an angle of about 45 degrees, which is
considerably less than in C. T'richomanis. 'They are distinctly convex,
the apex being frequently revolute, and they are usually 0.85-1 mm.
long and 0.6-0.7 mm. wide. The postical base is normally rounded
and abruptly short-decurrent, and the apex varies from obtuse to
rounded or slightly emarginate. The leaf-cells average about 40 X
27 p and develop small but distinct trigones; these are usually tri-
angular in outline with straight or concave sides but are sometimes

66 Rhodora [APRIL

more nearly circular, the sides being convex. The orbicular or ovate-
orbicular underleaves average about 0.35 mm. in length and give rise
to a great abundance of long rhizoids. They are bifid to the middle
or a little beyond with a blunt sinus and the divisions are erect or
slightly divergent and obtusely pointed. In rare instances one of the
divisions bears a blunt supplementary lobe on the outside. The
inflorescence is described as autoicous. The small size of the plants,
the angle at which the leaves spread, the distinct trigones, and the
deeply bifid underleaves usually make it easy to distinguish the species
from C. Trichomanis. Unfortunately etiolated stems are often devel-
oped in which the leaves are long-decurrent and the trigones scarcely
apparent. Such stems might be the source of considerable confusion,
if they were not always associated with normal stems in which the
true characters of the species were well shown.

7. CALYPOGEIA SUECICA (Arn. & Perss.) C. Müll. Frib. Beih.
zum Bot. Centralbl. 17: 224. 1904. Kantia suecica Arn. & Perss.
Rev. Bryol. 29: 29. f. 1-6. 1902. Cincinnulus suecicus C. Müll.
Frib. Beih. zum Bot. Centralbl. 13: 98. 1902. Cineinnulus Trich-
omanis, var. suecicus Meylan, Bull. de l'Herb. Boissier II. 6: 499.
1906. On rotten logs. Mt. Katahdin, Maine (Cowles Party, 33).
Stafford, Connecticut (G. E. Nichols). Since the original publica-
tion of this species from Swedish specimens it has been reported from
Scotland, France, Germany, Austria and Switzerland. As in the case
of C. sphagnicola, however, this is the first record for North America.
The New England specimens have been compared with a portion of the
type material with which they agree closely. C. suecica seems to be
confined to rotten logs and is often found in company with such species
as Cephalozia lunulaejolia, Riccardia latifrons and Lophozia porphyr-
oleuca. It bears a strong resemblance to C. Trichomanis but is
considerably smaller, being of about the same size as C. sphagnicola.
The leaves are convex and occasionally revolute at the apex; they
spread obliquely from the axis at about the same angle as in C. Trich-
omanis and therefore more widely than in C. sphagnicola. The
leaves are triangular-ovate in outline and their apices are very variable,
being normally rounded but frequently truncate or bidentate, both
teeth and sinus varying from acute to rounded. "The leaf-cells are
small, averaging about 30 in diameter, and in the outer part of the
leaf are characterized by distinct trigones, triangular in outline with

1 Harvey (Ruopora 5: 51. 1903) has listed these specimens as Kantia Trichomanis
from an earlier determination by the writer.

1907] ^ Evans,— Notes on New England Hepaticae,—V [67

straight or slightly convex sides. The underleaves are relatively
large and frequently imbricated, averaging about 0.45 mm. in length
and from 0.45-0.6 mm. in width. They are broadly orbicular and
bifid to the middle or beyond with an acute sinus and acute or obtuse
lobes. Sometimes the lobes are entire but it is more usual for them
to bear a blunt supplementary tooth on the outside, and occasionally
a second tooth of this character is to be observed. ‘The inflorescence
seems to be constantly dioicous. In distinguishing the species from
C. Trichomanis the small size, the variable leaves, the small leaf-cells
with trigones, and the deeply bifid underleaves afford the most trust-
worthy differential characters. The peculiar habitat of the plant
should also be kept in mind.

8. CALYPOGEIA SULLIVANTII Aust. Hep. Bor.-Amer. 74b. 1873.
Kantia Sullivantii Underw. Bot. Gaz. 14: 196. 1889. The type
material of C. Sullivantii came from Alabama but the species was
also known to Austin from New Jersey. It has since been recorded
from Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and Connecticut and the writer
has lately received specimens from North Carolina and Arkansas.
It evidently replaces the European C. arguta in North America and
is very different from the other species noted in the present paper.
Since the published descriptions are incomplete, a fuller account of
the species, with figures, may perhaps be of service.

The plants grow scattered or in very loose mats and vary in color
from a pale yellowish green in exposed localities to a deeper green in
the shade. ‘The stems are prostrate and sparingly branched. They
are somewhat flattened and show a distinction between the cortex,
which is composed of a single layer of enlarged cells, and the median
region, which is made up of a mass of smaller cells about four cells
wide and three cells thick. The cortical cells are commonly arranged
in ten longitudinal rows, four antical, four postical, and one lateral on
each side (f. 3). The postical cells are a little larger than the antical,
but the lateral cells surpass both in size, measuring from 45-70 » in
length and about 45 x in width. They give the stem the appearance
of being narrowly winged. The leaves are attached to these long
cortical cells for about three fourths their width, the line of insertion
curving at its apical end to the middle of the antical surface of the
stem (f. 4). A similar stem-structure is found in C. arguta and also in
the Hawaiian C. bifurca Aust.;' it bears a strong resemblance to the

1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1869: 223. See also C. M. Cooke, Jr., Trans, Conn. Acad,
12: 26. pl. 9, f. 1-10. 1904.

68 Rhodora [APRIL

structure of the midrib in Metzgerta and in the remarkable South
American genus Pferopsiella as described and figured by Spruce.’

The leaves are usually small and rudimentary at the base of a stem
or branch, then increase rapidly in size toward the middle and become
smaller again toward the apex. They vary from distant to loosely
imbricated and spread widely from the axis, sometimes at nearly a
right angle. In the median region, where they are most normally
developed, they are ovate to broadly ovate in outline, 0.75-1.2 mm.
long, 0.6-0.85 mm. wide, and plane or nearly so. The postical
margin is usually a little more curved than the antical and either
meets the axis at a wide angle or is short-decurrent. The leaves
‚gradually narrow out toward the apex, which is uniformly bidentate
with sharp parallel teeth separated by an obtuse to lunulate sinus. The
teeth are usually three or four cells long and two cells wide at the
base, but these numbers are subject to some variation (f. 2, 6). The
leaf-cells are large, averaging about 60 X 40 u, but there is usually
a sharp contrast between them and the lateral cortical cells, since
the long axes of the latter extend in a different direction. The walls
of the cells are either thin throughout or uniformly thickened and do
not show distinct trigones. The free walls on both leaf-surfaces are
characterized by being minutely verruculose, the walls in the other
New England species being smooth throughout.

‘The underleaves are distant and minute, measuring about 0.2 mm.
in length and 0.25 mm. in width. They are sometimes appressed to
the axis, sometimes more or less spreading and sometimes completely
reflexed and give rise to a large number of long rhizoids. They are
rectangular or trapezoidal in outline and deeply bifid with a lunulate
sinus, the divisions being more or less divergent and acute. Each
division is tipped with a hyaline papilla and bears a small and sharp
tooth, also tipped with a papilla, on the outside. The underleaves
are fairly definite in structure; each division is usually two or three
cells wide at the base and three or four cells long, and the lateral
tooth, which arises directly from the broad base, is usually composed
of a single cell (J. 8). In the basal and apical regions of the stem the
structure of the underleaves becomes somewhat simpler. ‘The inflores-
cence in C. Sullivantii is dioicous but the sexual branches afford no
differential characters of importance, and the perigynium and sporo
phyte are still unknown.

1 Hep. Amaz., et And. 390. pl. 16. 1885.

1907] | Evans,— Notes on New England Hepaticae,— V ' 69

The flattened stem with its distinct cortical layer, the bidentate
leaves, the large leaf-cells with verruculose cuticle, and the minute
underleaves with their sharp and unidentate divisions afford a com-
bination of characters which will at once distinguish C. Sullivantu
from all other known New England species. These peculiarities,
however, are all shared by C. arguta, which, although European,
has been reported from greenhouses in Philadelphia and is perhaps
to be expected in similar localities elsewhere. C. arguta is distinguished
mainly by the longer and more divergent teeth of its leaves, separated
by a broader sinus.

9. Calypogeia tenuis (Aust.) spec. nov. C. Trichomanis, var.
tenuis Aust. Hep. Bor.-Amer. 74. 1873. Kantia Trichomanis, var.
tenuis Underw.; A. Gray, Manual, Ed. 6, 713. 1890. In bogs.
Closter, New Jersey (C. F. Austin). Woodbury, Connecticut (A. W.
E.). The Woodbury specimens are in a somewhat better condition
than those distributed by Austin and may be designated the type.

Pale to bright green, growing scattered among Sphagna or forming
loose tufts: stems varying from prostrate to ascending or erect, 0.15—
0.25 mm. in diameter, cylindrical and composed of undifferentiated
cells; vegetative branches few, mostly postical but occasionally lateral:
leaves distant to loosely imbricated, slightly convex, spreading at an
angle of about 60 degrees, arching partially across the axis, ovate,
0.9-1.2 mm. long, 0.7-0.85 mm. wide, normally rounded and short-
decurrent at base but often gradually long-decurrent in poorly devel-
oped forms, margin entire or irregularly sinuate, apex rounded, obtuse
or more or less bilobed (in very rare cases even trilobed), both lobes
and sinus very variable; leaf-cells thin-walled throughout, averaging
40 X 30 u at the margin of the leaf and 50 X 40 „u in median and
basal regions, cuticle smooth: | underleaves distant, ovate or broadly
ovate, 0.45-0.6 mm. long, 0.35-0.5 mm. wide, bifid to the middle or
beyond with an obtuse sinus, divisions erect, triangular to subulate,
acute to rounded at the apex, mostly six to nine cells long and four
to six cells broad at the base, rarely bearing a blunt or sharp supple-
mentary tooth on the outside: inflorescence (so far as known) dioicous:
c^ inflorescence occupying a short branch or terminal on a somewhat
longer microphyllous branch; bracts in three to six pairs, closely
imbricated, deeply two- to four-lobed; bracteoles small, deeply bifid;
antheridia single or in pairs: @ inflorescence not seen: gemmae oval,
mostly bicellular, with a slightly thickened outer wall, borne in dense
masses at the tips of microphyllous stems or branches.

Although the present species is close to C. Trichomanis, agreeing
with it in several important respects, it can be at once distinguished
by its smaller size and more delicate habit, by its variable leaves

70 Rhodora [APRIL

showing a strong tendency to be bidentate or bilobed, and by its
deeply bifid ovate underleaves. Most of these peculiarities will also
separate it from C. fissa Raddi, the type of the genus, which is perhaps
to be expected in southern New England. This species also has more
or less bidentate leaves and deeply bifid underleaves, but the teeth
of the leaves are usually sharp, and the underleaves are considerably
broader than long.

C. tenuis is of about the same size as C. sphagnicola and grows in
similar localities. Its more widely spreading leaves and its larger
leaf-cells, destitute of trigones, will at once serve to separate it. From
C. suecica it may be distinguished by its loose habit and larger, thin
walled cells. Although C. tenuis does not agree with any of the recent
European segregations from C. Trichomanis, its detection in Europe
would not be surprising.

10. Catypogria 'TuicuowaNis (L.) Corda. The range of the
present species extends across northern Asia, Europe and North
America. 'Phroughout this wide territory it is abundant nearly
everywhere and has already been reported from each of the New Eng-
land states. In its most typical condition it is found on soil rich in
humus, either on shaded banks or in the woods. Under these circum-
stances the plants are more robust than in any of the preceding species,
the leaves often attaining a length of 2 mm. and a width of 1.5 mm.
Such leaves are imbricated and ovate, spreading from the stem at
an angle of about 60 degrees; they are either rounded or very obtuse
at the apex and at the base are straight and slightly or not at all decur-
rent. ‘The underleaves are orbicular and close together but rarely
imbricated; they attain a maximum length of about 1 mm. and are
bifid one fourth or less with rounded divisions and a shallow, usually
rounded, sinus. At the base they are more or less decurrent and are
attached by an arched line; supplementary lobes on the sides are
wanting or very infrequent. The leaf-cells average about 50 X 40 gi
but vary considerably both in form and in size. Their walls are thin
throughout or very slightly thickened and do not show distinct tri-
gones.

When the species grows on sandy soil or in very wet places some
of the characters which have just been described show themselves to
be unstable. The leaves, for example, tend to become long-decurrent
and sometimes show indications of apical teeth, while the underleaves
tend to become smaller, more deeply bifid and with sharper divisions.

1907] — Evans,— Notes on New England Hepaticae,— V 71

It is often a question whether these aberrant plants actually represent
forms of C. Trichomanis, or whether they may not be worthy of
specific recognition. ‘The tendency at the present time, as shown by
the publication of such species as C. sphagnicola, C. suecica and C.
tenuis, is to adopt the latter view, and it is probable that further segre-
gations from C. Trichomanis will be made in the near future.

11. ScAPANIA APICULATA Spruce, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. II.
4: 106. 1849. Martinellia apiculata Lindb.; Lindberg & Arnell,
Kongl. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Handl. 23*: 32. 1889. On log in
river; Chocorua, New Hampshire, August, 1906 (W. G. Farlow).
This rare species was originally collected by Spruce on the French
side of the Pyrenees, and for many years no other localities were
reported. At the present time, according to Müller, it is known
from Norway, Germany, Switzerland and Siberia, as well as from
France. He also quotes a single North American station, North
Elba, New York, where Peck? collected the plant less than ten years
ago. Chocorua is therefore the second locality recorded for North
America. The species was found, however, by Macoun, as long ago
as 1881, at Manitoba House, Manitoba, although it is not mentioned
in his Catalogue of Canadian Plants. S. apiculata is one of the few
species of the genus which grow on rotten logs. It bears a certain
resemblance to small forms of S. wmbrosa, which sometimes grows in
similar localities. In S. apiculata, however, the leaves are entire, and
their antical lobes spread obliquely instead of being suberect. Both
lobes are either acute or apiculate. ‘The leaf-cells average about 18 y
in the middle of the postical lobe and are characterized by distinct
and often conspicuous trigones. The cuticle is said to vary from
smooth to minutely verruculose, but the latter condition prevails in
American specimens. The perianth is entire at the mouth or very
slightly crenulate from projecting cells. The species frequently re-
produces by means of gemmae, which present a characteristic appear-
ance. They occur in dense masses at the tips of leaves which are
somewhat reduced in size but otherwise scarcely modified. The
gemmae themselves are oval in form and unicellular, and their walls
are deeply pigmented with brown or purple. They resemble the
bicellular gemmae found in Sphenolobus exsectus, but this species may
be at once distinguished by the smaller and often tooth-like antical

1 Nova Acta Acad. Caes. Leop. Carol. 83: 265. 1905.
2 Bull. N. Y. State Mus. 6: 178. 1899.

72 Rhodora [APRIL

lobes of its leaves, and by its smaller leaf-cells with indistinct trigones.
Apparently the nearest ally of S. apiculata in North America is S.
glaucocephala (Tayl.) Aust., which has been reported from New Eng-
land without definite stations. In this species the gemmae are usually
unicellular and are very similar to those just described. They are
found, however, on modified flagelliform shoots bearing small and
distant leaves. The normal feaf-cells are of about the same size as in
S. apiculata, but their trigones are minute and scarcely evident. On
the gemmiparous branches the cells which give rise to the gemmae
are much larger than the others and show strongly thickened walls,
but even here there are no distinct trigones. S. apiculata should be
looked for in other parts of New England, especially in mountainous
regions.

12. FnurLANIA Tamarisci (L.) Dumort. The relationship
between the present species and F. Asagrayana Mont. is so close
that it is very difficult to draw a line of demarcation separating them.
In the writer's Revision of the North American Species of Frullania,!
certain characters derived from the basal auricles of the underleaves
and from the lobules of the leaves and bracts are emphasized as dif-
ferential. In F. Tamarisci, for example, the auricles of the under-
leaves and the large stylus of the lobule are described as crispate,
while the lobules of the bracts are said to bear clusters of fine cilia
at the base instead of distinct segments. In F. Asagrayana, on the
other hand, the auricles (even when present) and the styluses are said
to be never crispate, while the basal segments of the bracteal lobules
are described as being well developed. In a recent letter Mr. S. M.
Maevicar, of Invermoidart, Scotland, has called attention to the fact
that these differential characters are by no means constant. In sup-
port of his statement he has kindly communicated specimens of a
Scotch form of F. Tamarisci in which the underleaves and the lobules
of the ordinary leaves are essentially like those in F. Asagrayana, and
in which the lobules of the bracts bear distinct basal segments. That
this form belongs to F. Tamarisci and not to F. Asagrayana is shown
by the sharply pointed leaf-lobes and by the more or less irregular
arrangement of their ocelli, the lobes in F. A sagrayana being normally
rounded at the apex and developing ocelli in a nerve-like row. Ap-
parently these slight and relative differences are all that remain to
distinguish the two species, and it becomes a question whether to

1 Trans. Conn. Acad. 10: 27. 1897.

1907] | Evans,— Notes on New England Hepaticae,—V 13

consider F. Asagrayana distinct or simply one of the extremes of a
very variable species, the other being the robust normal form of F.
Tamarisci. The first course seems to be still justifiable on account
of the fact that no European forms of F. Tamarisci are known which
exactly correspond with any of the American forms of F. Asagrayana.
F. Tamarisci is a comparatively rare species in North America, and
the following are the only New England stations known to the writer:
Prospect Harbor, Maine (Mrs. Northrop); Blackstone, Rhode Island
(J. L. Bennett); Seymour, Connecticut (4. W. E.). It has also been
reported from Massachusetts.

The following represent additions to local state floras, not included
in the preceding notes: Frullania Brittoniae, Buckfield, Maine (J.
A. Allen); Lophozia excisa, North Haven, Connecticut (A. W. E)!.;
L. porphyroleuca, Willoughby, Vermont (Miss Lorenz) and Stafford,
Connecticut (G. E. Nichols); Odontoschisma denudatum, Buckfield,
Maine (J. A. Allen); Sphenolobus minutus, Mount Mansfield, Ver-
mont (Miss Lorenz). The Maine record for Riccardia palmata and
Rhode Island records for Grimaldia fragrans, Reboulia hemisphaerica,
Riccardia sinuata, and Geocalyx graveolens, marked in the writer's
Preliminary List with the sign ‘‘—” may now be marked with the sign
“+”, the necessary specimens of these five species having been col-
lected and communicated by J. F. Collins.

'The census of New England Hepaticae now stands as follows:—
Total number of species recorded, 141; number recorded from Maine,
88; from New Hampshire, 105; from Vermont, 83; from Massachu-
setts, 81; from Rhode Island, 64; from Connecticut, 102; common
to all six states, 37.

YALE UNIVERSITY.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 73.

Calypogeia Sullivantii Aust. Fig. 1, part of stem, postical view, X 25;
Fig. 2, part of stem, antical view, X 25; Fig. 3, cross section of stem, X 55;
Fig. 4, surface view of stem, showing parts of four leaf-bases, X 55; Figs.
5, 6, apices of leaves, X 55; Fig. 7, cells from middle of leaf, X 200; Fig. 8,
underleaf, x 200. The figures were all drawn from specimens collected by
the writer at Atsion, New Jersey, and distributed in Hep. Amer. 156 (as
Kantia Sullivantii).

Calypogeia tenuis (Aust.) Evans. Fig. 9, part of stem, postical view,
X 25; Fig. 10, part of stem, antical view, X 25; Fig. 11, slender,stem, postical
view, X 25; Fig. 12, cross section of stem, X 55; Fig. 13, cells from middle
of leaf, x 200; Fig. 14, gemma, X 265. The figures were all drawn from the
type specimen.

‘These specimens have already been recorded and figured by Miss Haynes
in the Bryologist 9: 99. pl. 9, f. 10-13. 1906.

74 Rhodora [APRIL

New STATIONS FOR CHAMAECYPARIS ON Lona IsLAND, NEW
Yonk.— Professor Fernald of the Gray Herbarium has called my
attention to the fact that in Jelliffe’s Flora of Long Island the only
authority given for the occurrence of Chamaecyparis thyoides (L.)
B. S. P., on the island is a report made in 1874 by E. S. Miller and
H. W. Young who listed it as growing in Suffolk Co. In view of this
it seems worth recording that there is a good colony of the tree grow-
ing within sight of the Long Island Railroad between the stations of
Merrick and Bellmore, Nassau Co., and another just west of Amity-
ville.— Jonn TREADWELL NicHoLs, American Museum of Natural
History, New York.

AN OCCURRENCE OF CATHARINAEA CRISPA IN MaiNE.— I am
pleased to announce the discovery of Catharinaea crispa, James in
Maine, as I understand it has never before been reported from this
state, or so far northeasterly as this. It was fertile, and was found in
Camden, Maine, 44? N. lat. 69? W. long., in a pasture near the bank
of a large brook, on knolls where six years ago a growth of alders had
been cleared away. The altitude is about 200 feet. For its deter-
mination I am indebted to Mr. E. B. Chamberlain. Prof. J. Franklin
Collins, in his list of New England plants, Ruopora 8: 131, gives
only Massachusetts as definitely possessing it.— Atice L. CROCKETT,
Camden, Maine.

NOTEWORTHY Prants or SALISBURY, CONNECTICUT.— The past
season I have been able to add the following rare or unusual plants to
the list of those growing about Salisbury, Connecticut.

Aspidium simulatum Davenp. In a black spruce swamp growing
in sphagnum. Elevation 2000 ft. Quite abundant.

Pellaea gracilis Michx. A third colony of this rare fern on an
exposed boulder in a dense pine wood.

Lycopodium annotinum L. In the same swamp with the Aspidium
simulatum

Potamogeton lucens Connecticutensis Robbins. Seems to be fairly
abundant in one of the Twin Lakes.

Eleocharis olivacea Torr. One colony on the shore of a mountain
lake at an elevation of 2000 ft.

Habenaria orbiculata (Pursh) Torr. In rich woods at Lime Rock.
Not at all common.

1907] Rand,— Arceuthobium pusillum at Mt. Desert 75

Claytonia Virginica L. A number of large colonies in a hardwood
swamp.

Polanisia trachysperma T. & G. A waif from the west but growing
abundantly on the gravelly banks of the Salmonkill at Lime Rock.

Lythrum alatum Pursh. A large colony on a dry hillside not far
from Twin Lakes.

Vaccinium Canadense Richards. Found. by Mr. Weatherby of
East Hartford in one of the mountain swamps.

Polemonium Van Bruntiae Britton. Three vigorous plants in a
swamp bordering a lake. Seems to be native.

Hydrophyllum Virginicum L. In thicket along set-backs from the
Housatonic river.

Séutellaria parvula Michx. Wet meadow near Twin Lakes.
ORRA PARKER PHELpPs, Chapinville, Connecticut.

ARCEUTHOBIUM PUSILLUM AT Mr. DẸSERT.— Since the discovery
of the Dwarf Mistletoe in abundance on Isle au Haut in East Penob-
scot Bay I have seen no reason why it should not occur on Mt. Desert
as well, and have, therefore, from time to time made careful search
for it in the endeavor to extend its range eastward along the coast.
I met with no success in my examination of its most common host-
plant, the Swamp Spruce (Picea nigra Link). Witches’ brooms,
to be sure, were often met with, but all appeared due to some other
cause. I, therefore, began to think that the Island was free from this
destructive but interesting plant. In August, 1906, however, just
back of the precipitous cliff of Great Head on Frenchmans Bay a
thriving colony of Arceuthobium was found at last. At the time it
was unfortunately impossible to make careful observations of the
extent of this colony, but judging from the general appearance of the
spruces it had been long established. The host-plant here proved,
in every case observed, to be the White Spruce (Picea alba Link),
the most characteristic spruce of the rocky shores of the region.

The facts observed in regard to the dwarf mistletoe and this host
were practically the same as those mentioned by Dr. von Schrenk
as occurring under the same conditions on Monhegan Island and the
neighboring mainland, published in RHopora (ii. 2, 1900), so any
repetition is unnecessary. One observation, however, made from
these Mt. Desert specimens I speak of here because, so far as I know,

76 Rhodora [APRIL

there is no prior record of it. The influence of the parasite on its host
is well marked in various ways, as noted in the article above referred
to, and is of a decidedly stimulating character as is shown by greatly
increased growth of branchlets and leaves. In my specimens a further
effect was shown by a decided change in the odor of the spruce leaves
where this stimulated growth took place, or in other words where
the mistletoe was found. When I first noticed a sweetish balsamic
odor, far more resembling that of the Fir Balsam than that of the
White Spruce, I felt that I had mistaken the identity of the host-plant.
I found, however, that I had made no mistake, but that these White
Spruce leaves no longer retained in any marked degree the disagree-
able odor which has given the species the name of Cat, or Skunk
Spruce. This modification of odor thus produced in the host by the
parasite is very agreeable, and so marked as to be decidedly noticeable.
This fact I verified by submitting specimens to a number of persons,
all of whom reached this same conclusion. Some of them could not
be convinced that the leaves from the infected and the uninfected
trees were not those of different species. It may be added that some
species of Arceuthobium have a decidedly balsamic odor, but this
was not noticed in my specimens of A. pusillum.— EDWARD L. RAND,
Boston.

Vol. 9, no. 99, including pages 29 to 64, was issued 8 April, 1907.

A. W. Evans del.

a ee DRE ee ae ES "Um E WES T”

1-8 CaALYPOGEIA SULLIVANTII Aust.
9-14 CALYPOGEIA TENUIS (Aust.) Evans.

Plate 73

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. May, 1907. No. 101.

THE BASIS OF NOMENCLATURE FOR ALGAE.
F. S. Corus.

Reavers of the article “On the Vienna Rules of Botanical Nomen-
clature" in the March RHopora will remember that Art. 9 reads
“The rules and recommendations of botanical nomenclature apply
to all classes of the plant kingdom, reserving special arrangements
for fossil plants and non-vascular plants"; and that a footnote states
that these special arrangements have been reserved for the Congress
of 1910. The questions involved in regard to cryptogams are many
and difficult to answer, and when we consider the long and careful
work that was necessary to reach a conclusion in regard to the vascular
plants, the time before the next Congress is none too long for their
consideration. “Botanical nomenclature begins with the Species
Plantarum of Linnaeus," says Art. 19; but if one considers the quite
insignificant space given to the cellular cryptogams in this work, it
might possibly be called a “point” for starting, certainly not a “base”
for anything. The writer cannot claim any familiarity with the sub-
ject except as regards the algae, but would like to call attention to
some features of their case.

While the number of known species of flowering plants has increased
almost in geometrical ratio, the idea of a species, on the whole, remains
about the same. Some species have been found to be aggregates; with
rapidly increasing numbers of species more attention has to be given
to smaller details, but in the great majority of cases the characters by
which species are differentiated can be seen by the naked eye, or with
a pocket lens. As regards algae, not one species in a hundred can be
described so that it could be recognized without the use of the micro-
scope, usually requiring quite high powers. Of course none of these

78 Rhodora [May

could have been recognized in Linnaeus’s day, nor for a long time
afterwards. The system of classification adopted by Linnaeus
for flowering plants remained in general use until superseded by a
natural system, which in its general outlines and often in considerable
detail is accepted at present. But all through the nineteenth century
system after system was proposed for the algae, each practically begin-
ning anew, the position of genera changing with kaleidoscopic rapidity.
It is sometimes really pathetic to see with what conscientious care a
system was developed on what we now know to have been scanty
material, imperfect data, and misinterpreted observations. Occasion-
ally we find a piece of work in some limited field of which the records
have been supplemented rather than superseded by later observations ;
thus the insight of Vaucher’s Histoire des Conferves, that celebrated
its centenary four years ago, is little short of marvellous, when we
consider the scanty appliances then available; Niageli’s Gattungen
einzelliger Algen of 1848 must be referred to to-day by everyone study-
ing the unicellular algae; but Nügeli's system, like the systems of
Kiitzing and the others, was hardly more permanent than last year’s
snows. Back of the time of C. Agardh, in the earlier part of the last
century, practically no types are to be found; and though in the
Agardh herbarium, continued by the son, J. G. Agardh, we have a
most valuable collection of original specimens, we find in many cases
that more than one species, as we now know them, was included
under one name; it was impossible to distinguish them at that day,
and of course the diagnosis, giving only the characters then discerni-
ble, gives us little help as to which species should bear the name.
Evidently the basis that is suitable for the nomenclature of the Rosaceae
is not suitable for the nomenclature of the Chlorophyceae.

But is it possible to fix any one satisfactory basis for algae in gen-
eral? The more we look at it, the less likely it seems. The larger
algae, those included in the genus Fucus, were fairly well known to the
older authors, so that nearly all of the species in Turner’s Icones
Fucorum, 1808-1819, remain valid to-day; but this is by no means
the case with the species of Dillwyn’s British Confervae of 1809.
To ignore Turner’s species in the Icones would certainly be un-
wise; to identify species of Microspora or Oedogonium by Dillwyn
would be very difficult. ‘Though the idea of different starting points
for different families of algae may seem at first undesirable, it may
be the best solution of the problem; a definite proposition to that

1907] Collins,— Nomenclature for Algae 79

effect, the first proposition of the kind as far as known to the writer,
has been made by Prof. O. Nordstedt.! As Nordstedt is the highest
authority on the desmids, was a member of the Congress of Vienna,
and was appointed on the committee to take charge of the preliminary
work on non-vascular plants for the Congress of 1910, his opinions
should carry much weight. He considers in detail all the genera
and many of the species of desmids, proposed in the first half of the
last century, a chaotic assemblage. While some authors made con-
tributions of merit, there is no one work that can be considered as
at all complete to its time until we come to Ralfs, who in 1848 pub-
lished The British Desmidieae; this work gives detailed descriptions
and excellent figures of all the British forms, and has as an “ Appen-
dix;" a list of all other known species, a large part of them also with
figures and descriptions. With few exceptions all the literature of the
desmids up to 1848 was gone over by Ralfs, and references noted;
the few papers to which Ralfs does not refer have been analyzed by
Nordstedt, and while they add a few synonyms to Ralfs’s species
very little other change would have been necessary had Ralfs used
them. ‘There are a few genera in Ralfs's work which might have to
give place to older names if we could be certain where we are now
doubtful, but as after careful study of the older authors the uncer-
tainty remains and is likely to continue, Nordstedt considers that the
wisest plan will be to adopt for the desmids the rule “The nomencla-
ture begins with the British Desmidieae by Ralfs in 1848.” Asa
second rule he provides that all names used by Ralfs in Brit. Desm.
as of earlier authors, should be so quoted, but only as so attributed by
Ralfs; for instance Euastrum oblongum Grev. sec. Ralfs, Brit. Desm.

That this plan will simplify the nomenclature of the desmids is
unquestionable, and that it will cause any serious inconvenience is
unlikely. That Ralfs's monograph contains a few genera no longer
classed as desmids can occasion no trouble, nor the fact that some
of his genera have since been divided; that is merely what has always
happened with increasing knowledge and discoveries of new forms.
While in some cases Ralfs may have been misled by a faulty or hazy
description by some older author, the chance of our now correcting
this error is too small to outweigh the real gain of accepting Ralfs's
definite description and clear figure, and working from them.

1 Algological Notes 1-4, 1. The starting point of the nomenclature of Desmids.
Botaniska Notiser, 1906, p. 97.

80 . Rhodora [May

At the close of his paper Nordstedt mentions three monographs
which may be used for bases in their respective sections; for practical
work all three are now the standards, but to those who are worshipers
of priority in itself, rather than as far as it may be the most useful
means to an end, it will be rather a shock to find that these mono-
graphs date from 1888, 1893 and 1900 respectively: Gomont, Mono-
graphie des Oscillariées, 1893, and Bornet et Flahault, Revision des
Nostocacées hétérocystées contenues dans les principaux herbiers
de France, 1886-1888, have brought order where disorder reigned
before; but as Nordstedt himself notes, they seldom recognize any
species of which the authors have not examined authentic specimens;
following each genus is a list of species inquirendae. Hirn, Mono-
graphie und Iconographie der Oedogoniaceen, 1900, is a more
complete work, covering practically all known species, with full
illustrations. It should be added that in the case of the heterocysted
nostocs, Bornet and Flahault have since 1888, as a consequence of the
examination of original specimens before unseen, published a paper
changing in some few instances the names used in the Revision.
What the status of these later names would be in case of the Revision
being accepted as the beginning of nomenclature might be an inter-
esting question. j

In conclusion; the fact that Nordstedt recommends Ralfs as the
starting point for the nomenclature of desmids is in itself a strong
argument in favor of the plan, and a careful reading of his paper
will prove quite convincing, it would seem, to any one who had not
in some way prejudged the matter. It is likely that in regard to the
other groups Nordstedt's suggestions, which are put forward as prop-
ositions only and without evidence or argument, may meet with more
opposition; if so, however, it is for their opponents to propose some-
thing better.

MALDEN, MASSACHUSETTS.

1907] Flora of the Boston District, — I 81

REPORTS ON THE FLORA OF THE BOSTON
DISTRICT,— I.

OvER a year ago the New England Botanical Club decided to col-
lect information in regard to the plants growing within 25 miles of
Boston. This district was afterward extended, so that it runs north-
ward to the New Hampshire line; west to include Dunstable, Groton,
and Ayer; then southward along the Worcester county line, includ-
ing Southboro, to Bellingham, on the Rhode Island boundary; thence
eastward to the coast at Duxbury. The district thus formed is a
good geographical unit, bounded by the New Hampshire line, the
hill country of central Massachusetts, and the level sand-plain and
morainal territory of southern Bristol and Plymouth counties. It
therefore seems that it should possess a definite flora of its own, dis-
tinct in many ways from regions to the north, west and south.

The committee in charge has gathered a large amount of data in
regard to the ferns of this district, which has been condensed into the
present form for publication. This list is still regarded as a pre-
liminary one, and any additions or corrections will be welcomed.
There is especial lack of information in regard to the outlying towns
of the region, in the south and west portions.

Card-records have been received regarding the ferns of this district
from the Gray Herbarium, the Ames Botanical Laboratory, and the
herbaria of Tufts College, the New England Botanical Club, the
Boston Society of Natural History, the Appalachian Club, and the
Bridgewater State Normal School. The following individual col-
lectors have also furnished cards recording the ferns in their collec-
tions: Dr. C. A. Cheever, Hon. J. R. Churchill, J. A. Cushman,
Walter Deane, Raynal Dodge, A. A. Eaton, F. G. Floyd, T. O. Fuller,
C. H. Knowlton, A. H. Moore, C. H. Morss, A. S. Pease, George O.
Tilton, R. A. Ware and E. F. Williams.

Wherever unusual ferns have been reported, the specimens them-
selves have been examined. Special examination has been made
of the ferns in the Gray Herbarium, the Davenport collection of the
Massachusetts Horticultural Society, and the herbaria of the New
England Botanical Club and the Ames Botanical Laboratory. 'The
Committee wishes to express its indebtedness to Dr. B. L. Robinson
of the Gray Herbarium for advice and assistance in preparing this
report.

82 Rhodora [Max

POLYPODIACEAE.

POLYPODIUM.

P. vulgare L. Dry rocks and ledges, common.

PHEGOPTERIS.

P. polypodioides (L.) Fée. Damp rich woods; occasional, especially
northward.

P. hexagonoptera (Michx.) Fée. Rich open woods, not common.
All reports are from the central part of our territory.

P. Dryopteris (L.) Fée. Rich especially coniferous woods; occasional
in Essex County, but rare elsewhere; not reported south of

Needham.
ADIANTUM.

A. pedatum L. Rich deciduous woods; generally distributed, but
only locally abundant.

PTERIS.

P. aquilina L. Dry open woods and uplands, common.

WOODWARDIA.

W. virginica (L.) Sm. Wet woods and peat-bogs, sometimes in
water; frequent.

W. areolata (L. Moore. (W. angustifolia Sm.) Swamps and
wet woods; frequent within ten miles of tide-water, the stations
often extensive.

ASPLENIUM.
A. Trichomanes L. Dry ledges; frequent, but never abundant in
our range.
A. platyneuron (L.) Oakes. (A. ebenewm Ait.) Rocky soil and ledges
throughout.

Var. serratum (E. S. Miller) BSP. One specimen, collected in
Malden by Mr. George E. Davenport in 1872 and identified
by Dr. Asa Gray, is now in the Gray Herbarium; and another,
from Melrose, is in the Davenport Collection.

1907] Flora of the Boston District, — I 83

A. acrostichoides Sw. (A. thelypteroides Michx.) Rich woods; occa-
sional in the northern towns, less frequent southward.

A. Filix-femina (L.) Bernh. Usually in damp woods and shaded
places, though occasionally in drier situations; common and
varying much with the conditions of soil, moisture, and shade.
Var. angustum (Willd.) D. C. Eaton. Woods, occasional.

CAMPTOSORUS.

C. rhizophyllus (L.) Link. Granite ledges, Needham, where observed
as eirly as 1877; formerly also on Doublet Hill, Weston.

POLYSTICHUM.

P. acrostichoides (Michx.) Schott. (Aspidiwm acrostichoides Sw.)
Rocky woods, distributed here and there, but not very common.
Var. Schweinitzii (Beck) Small. (Var. incisum Gray.) Amesbury

(J. W. Huntington); Andover (A. S. Pease); Blue Hills (E. F.
Williams).
ASPIDIUM.

A. Thelypteris (L.) Sw. Swamps, common everywhere. |

Forma Pufferae (A. A. Eaton) B. L. Robinson in herb. Nephro-
dium Thelypteris, forma Pufferae A. A. Eaton. Border of
meadows, Sudbury (Mrs. J. J. Puffer). See Eaton, Fern
Bull. x, 78.

A. simulatum Davenp. Swampy woods; locally abundant; often
associated with the preceding and with Woodwardia areolata.
See Davenp. Bot. Gaz. xix. 494, 495.

A. noveboracense (L.) Sw. Low open woods, common.

A. marginale (L.) Sw. Rocky woods, common throughout. Var.
ELEGANS J. Robinson (Bull. Essex Inst. vii. 51) is a luxuriant form
with the pinnules more deeply crenate-toothed. This form not
very sharply distinguishable from the type has been found at
Ipswich (Oakes), Swampscott (J. Robinson), and Milton (F. G.
Floyd).

A. Boottii Tuckerm. Low woods, frequent.

A. cristatum (L.) Sw. Open and wooded swamps; frequent: reported

as abundant in Brockton, Easton, and in northern Essex County.

Var. Clintonianum D. C. Eaton. Wooded swamps, occasional;
not reported from open land. Not so extreme as the more
northern and western specimens.

84 Rhodora [May

A. cristatum marginale Davenp. Where swamps meet the rocky
woods, rare. First described by Mr. Davenport from northern
Essex County; Boxford, Merrimac, Salisbury, Medford, Byfield,
Brockton; see Davenp. Bot. Gaz. xix. 494, 495.

A. spinulosum (O. F. Müller) Sw. Low open woods, frequent.
Var. intermedium (Muhl.) D. C. Eaton. Rich woods, frequent.
Var. dilatatum (Hoffm.) Hook. Swampy woods, fairly plentiful

at Brockton (A. A. Eaton).

Forma anadenium B. L. Robinson. This form, characterized by
a glandless or essentially glandless indusium, includes the great-
er part of what has heretofore passed as var. dilatatum in Amer-
ica. It may be distinguished from the typical A. spinulosum
by the narrower firmer and darker brown scales of the stipes
and from var. intermedium by its broader ovate fronds and
glandless indusium. In our region it is relatively rare and
never quite so characteristic as in mountain specimens. Re-
ports indicate that it has been found in Chelsea, Dedham,
Manchester, and Woburn. i

Var. concordianum (Davenp.) Eastman. Rich swampy woodland,
Concord (Purdie & Brewster, Davenport & Purdie). See
RnHopona, vi. 31-33.

CYSTOPTERIS.

C. fragilis (L.) Bernh. Moist or wet rocks and ledges in shade;
not common, especially southward.

1 Concerning this form Dr. Robinson makes the following statement: “ Aspidium
spinulosum, var, dilatatum (Hoffm.) Hook., as it occurs in Europe, regularly exhibits a
glandular indusium, a fact substantiated by specimens and by the statements of
several critical and reliable authors, such as Moore, Milde, Christ, and others. This
European form must be regarded as the typical state of the variety. Until recently
it has been almost unknown in America. To it seems to belong, however, the plant
not long since described as Nephrodium spinulosum, var. fructuo sum Gilbert, and study
of a considerable suite of American specimens referred to Var. dilatatum shows that the
indusium is occasionally glanduliferous as in the European plant. Nevertheless, as
Prof. D. C. Eaton long ago remarked the indusium in the American Var. dilatatum is
habitually glandless, This glandless form, which is readily recognizable with a good
lens, seems never to have had a distinctive name and may therefore be called A. sPINU-
LOSUM, var, DILATATUM, forma anadenium, n. f. indusio glandulis fere vel omnino des-
tituto.— As an appropriate type-specimen for this new form I would mention a plant
collected in deciduous woods, alt. 760 m., 14 August, 1895, on Barren Mt., Elliottsville
Piscataquis County, Maine, by M. L. Fernald, no, 426 (type in hb, Gray; cotypes in
several public and private herbaria). Forma anadenium is widely distributed in Atlantic
North America, chiefly in mountainous regions."

i

1907] Flora of the Boston District,— I 85

ooo

WOODSIA.

ilvensis (L.) R. Br. Exposed dry ledges, occasional.
obtusa (Spreng.) Torr. Shaded ledges; scattered stations through-
out.

DICKSONIA.

. Ipunctilobula (Michx.) Gray. (D. pilosiuscula Willd.) Moist soil

in open places and light shade; common.

ONOCLEA.

. sensibilis L. Damp woods and meadows, abundant.
. Struthiopteris (L.) Hoffm. Moist soil, usually in shade; rare;

not reported south of Boston.

LYGODIUM.

. palmatum (Bernh.) Sw. Low thickets, rare. Carlisle, Concord,

Dover (1883, 1884), Saugus (1885), Newton; the last three
stations probably extinct.

OSMUNDA.

. regalis L. *Swamps, wet woods, and lake shores; common.
. Claytoniana L. Somewhat less common than the following species.
. cinnamomea L. Swamps and low woods, common. The formal

var. FRONDOSA Gray is occasionally found with the typical form.

OPHIOGLOSSACEAE.
OPHIOGLOSSUM.

. vulgatum L. Moist fields and pastures, local.

BOTRYCHIUM.

. simplex E. Hitchcock. Low woods; Amesbury, Byfield, Easton,

Salisbury, W. Newbury.

. lanceolatum (Gmel. Angstr., var. angustisegmentum Pease &

Moore. Low woods, rare; stations occasionally large. See
Rhodora, viii. 229.

. ramosum (Roth) Aschers. (B. matricariaejolium A. Br.) Low

woods; Amesbury, Dedham, Natick, Needham, Salisbury, W.
Newbury.

86 Rhodora [May

B. obliquum Muhl. Old fields and pastures; occasional, and locally
abundant.

Var. elongatum Gilbert & Haberer. Georgetown (Mrs. C. S. N.
Horner, specimen in hb. N. E. Bot. Club, also in the Davenport
Collection).

Var. dissectum (Spreng.) Clute. Old fields and pastures, frequent.

B. ternatum (Thunb.) Sw., var. intermedium D. C. Eaton. Old
fields, pastures, and rarely in woods; frequent.
B. virginianum (L.) Sw. Rich woods, occasional.

A. K. Harrison,
(Chairman)
F. F. FORBES, Committee on local flora
C. H. KNowLTON,
R. A. WARE.

PRELIMINARY LISTS OF NEW ENGLAND PLANTS,— XX.
SPARGANIACEAE.!

M. L. FERNALD and A. J. EAMES.

[The sign + indicates that an herbarium specimen has been seen; the
sign — that a reliable printed record has been found.]

Sparganium americanum Nutt.
x var. androcladum (Engelm.)

Fernald & Eames

angustifolium Michx. .

diversifolium Graebner

" br var. acaule (Beeby)
Fernald & Eames

eurycarpum Engelm.

fluctuans (Morong) Robinson .

lucidum Fernald & Eames

minimum Fries

simplex Hudson

+] + +++
++ +++ +++ +V.
+++ + Mass,
+ RI
+ +++ +++ + Conn.

Tr

++ +++ 4+4++ Me.

1 Printed in RHopoRA as supplementary material.

1907] Fernald & Eames,— Lists of New England Plants,— XX 87

NOTES UPON THE ABOVE LIST.

Sparganium fluctuans (Morong) Robinson. For detailed discus-
sion see RHopona, vii. 60 (1905).

Sparganium simplex Hudson has been reported from all the New
England states, but it is very doubtful if it occurs as far south as
Massachusetts. Most of the plants of southern New England so
reported have proved to be either S. americanum, S. diversifolium
or its var. acaule, or S. lucidum. The New England plants which
have been passing as S. simplex may be distinguished as follows.

SPARGANIUM SIMPLEX AND ITS NEW ENGLAND ALLIES.

* Pistillate heads or branches of the inflorescence strictly axillary.
+ Mature fruits dull: stigma 1-2 mm. long.

S. AMERICANUM Nutt. Stoutish, 3-7 dm. high: leaves deep
green, dorsally carinate, 6-12 mm. broad: bracts divaricate or
arcuate-ascending, the lowest 0.8-2.2 dm. long: inflorescence
simple: pistillate heads 2 to 5, all axillary, sessile or nearly so, in
fruit 1.8-2.6 cm. in diameter: tepals with dilated and rounded
erose summits; their bases closely investing the stipe of the carpel:
mature fruits brownish, fusiform; the narrowly ellipsoid or sub-
cylindrie body 5-6 mm. long, 2-3 mm. thick; the beak (including
the stigma) 2.5-4 mm. long, about equalling the slender stipe.— Gen.
ii. 203 (1818). S. simplex, var. Nuttallii Engelm. in Gray, Man.,
ed. 5, 481 (1867); Morong, Bull. Torr. Cl. xv. 79 (1888). S. simplex
of many Am. auth., not Hudson. S. angustifolium Graebner in
Engler., Pflanzenr. iv. no. 10, 16, in part (1900), not Michx. 5$.
Nuttallii Engelm. according to Graebner, |. c. (1900). S. ameri-
canum, var. N uttallii Graebner, |. c. (1900). S. simplex, var. ameri-
canum. Farwell, Ann. Rep. Mich. Acad. Sci., vi. 202 (1904).— Bogs
and muddy shores, New Brunswick to Iowa and Virginia; also in
eastern Asia.

Var. androcladum (Engelm.), n. comb. Inflorescence bearing from
its lower axils 1 to 3 weak branches: leaves often broader (rarely
2 em. broad): lowest bract 1.5-5 dm. long.— S. simplex, var. andro-
cladum Engelm. in Gray, Man., ed. 5, 481 (1867). S. ramosum
Chapm. Fl. 443 (1860), not Huds. S. androcladum Morong, Bull.
Torr. Cl. xv. 78 (1888); Graebner in Engler, Pflanzenr, iv. no. 10,
15 (1900).— Similar places, more common, Newfoundland to Minne-
sota, south to Florida and Missouri.

+ + Mature fruits lustrous: ‘stigma 2.5-4 mm. long.

S. lucidum, n. sp. Planta 7.5-9 dm. alta; foliis 5-12 mm. latis,
erectis, firmis et haud pellucidis, valde carinatis, inflorescentiam sim-

88 Rhodora’ [May

plicem vel ramosam multo supereminentibus, capitibus vel ramis
plane axillaribus; bracteis patente ascendentibus, infima 2.5—4 dm.
longa; capitibus femineis sessilibus vel infimis pedunculatis, ad
maturitatem circiter 3 cm. diametro; tepalis ad stipitem | affixis,
ligulatis, apice dilatatis et rotundis, subintegris vel erosis; costa
media prominente et in apice suo incrassata; fructubus maturis lucidis,
olivaceo-brunneis, breviter stipitatis, corpore subterete, 5-6 mm. longo,
2-3 mm. crasso; stylo subulato-filiforme, 5-7 mm. longo, parte lineare
stigmatica adunca, 2.5—4 mm. longa.

Plant 7.5-9 dm. high: leaves 5-12 mm. broad, erect, firm and
opaque, strongly carinate, much overtopping the simple or forking
inflorescence: the heads or branches strictly axillary: bracts spread-
ing-ascending, the lowest 2.5-4 dm. long: pistillate heads sessile,
or the lowest peduncled, in fruit about 3 cm. in diameter: tepals
attached to the stipe, ligulate, with dilated and rounded sub-entire
or erose tips; the midrib prominent and thickened at its apex:
mature fruits lustrous, olive-brown, short-stipitate; the subterete
body 5-6 mm. long, 2-3 mm. thick: style subulate-filiform, 5-7 mm.
long; the linear stigmatic portion hooked, 2.5-4 mm. long. — Mass-
AcHUSETTS, small pond, Medford, July 29, 1860 (Wm. Boott);
muddy shore of Half-way Pond, Barnstable, August 23, 1888
(W. Deane): PENNSYLVANIA, ditches, Philadelphia, September, 1876
(I. C. Martindale): tutors, without station (S. B. Mead): Mis-
SOURI, Springfield, September 1, 1893 (J. W. Blankinship in hb.
Deane).

* * One or more of the pistillate heads supra-axillary.

+— Erect plants of shores and swamps: leaf-blades of uniform texture, some-
what translucent and reticulated under a lens.

S. DIVERSIFOLIUM Graebner. Erect, stoutish, 3-6 dm. high:
leaves delicate, cellular-reticulated on both sides, 4-9 mm. wide,
with a broad scarious margin toward the base: bracts strongly
ascending, the lowest 2-5 dm. long: inflorescence mostly simple,
rarely with 1 or 2 weak branches: pistillate heads 2 to 4, chiefly
sessile, the lower remote and supra-axillary, in fruit 2-2.5 em. in
diameter.— Graebner in Sehrift. naturf. Ges. Danzig, N. F., ix. (1895)
335, t. 8, fig. 1, and in Engler, Pflanzenr, iv. no. 10, 21, fig. 4 F.
(1900). S. simplex in great part of Am. auth., not Hudson.— East-
ern Quebec to South Dakota, Connecticut and Illinois and probably
southward; also in Europe. Passing to

Var. acaule (Beeby), n. comb. Dwarf, 1-3 dm. high: leaves and
bracts comparatively narrow; the lowest strongly ascending bract
1-3 dm. long: pistillate heads 1.5-2 cm. in diameter, usually crowded.
— S. simplex, var. acaule Beeby in Macoun, Cat. Can. Pl. ii. 367
(1890). S. diversifolium, proles nanum Graebner in Engler, Pflan-
zenr. iv. no. 10, 21 (1900). S. nanum Fries according to Graebner,
l. c. (1900).— Newfoundland to Iowa and West Virginia.

1907] Fernald & Eames,— Lists of New England Plants,— XX 89

4— + Strictly aquatic: leaf-blades reticulated beneath, opaque above.

++ Fruits rather abruptly slender-beaked: leaf-blades 1.5-4 mm. broad:
stigma rarely over 1.2 mm. long.

S. ANGUSTIFOLIUM Michx. Slender aquatic: stems 3-12 dm.
long: leaves exceedingly long and narrow, opaque: bracts com-
paratively short, slightly dilated at base, the lowest 0.5-3 dm. long:
inflorescence simple, at the surface of the water: pistillate heads 1
to 3, sessile or peduncled (the lowest peduncle rarely 9 cm. long),
in fruit 1.3-2 em. in diameter: fruits 1.5-2 mm. thick, drab, with
reddish-brown bases.— Fl. ii. 189 (1803); Graebner in Engler,
Pflanzenr. iv. no. 10, 16, in part (1900). S. simplex, var. angusti-
jolium Engelm. in Gray, Man., ed. 5, 481, (1867). S. affine Macoun,
Cat. Can. Pl. ii. 71 (1888), perhaps also of Schnitzlein, Nat. Pfl.
Typh. 27 (1845).— Ponds and slow streams, Newfoundland to
Alaska, south, especially among the mountains, to Connecticut, New
York, Colorado and California; ascending in alpine ponds to an
altitude of 1140 m. on Table-top Mountain, Gaspé, and to 3500 m.
in Colorado. Perhaps also in Eurasia (S. affine Schnitzlein).

++ ++ Fruits gradually acuminate: leaf-blades 4—9 mm. broad: stigma 1.5-
2 mm. long.

S. SIMPLEX Hudson. Coarser, and in our region strictly aquatic:
stems 3-10 dm. long: bracts somewhat dilated at base, the lowest
1-4 dm. long: inflorescence usually simple, elongated: pistillate
heads 2 to 4, mostly supra-axillary, the lowermost long-peduncled,
in fruit 2-2.5 cm. in diameter: fruit 1.5-2.5 mm. thick.— Fl. Angl.
ed. 2, 401 (1778); Am. auth. in small.part only; Graebner in Engler,
Pflanzenr. iv. no. 10, 16 (1900).— Newfoundland to British Colum-
bia, south to Maine, northern Vermont, Lake Superior region, Colo-
rado, Utah, and California; also Eurasia.

Var. MULTIPEDUNCULATUM Morong. Heads aggregated, mostly
pedunculate, subcorymbose.— Bull. Torr. Cl. xv. 79 (1888); Graeb-
ner in Engler, Pflanzenr. iv. no. 10, 17 (1900). S. multipedunculatum
Rydberg, Bull. Torr. Cl. xxxii. 598 (1905).— From the Mackenzie
River to Colorado and California; to be expected in northern New
England and adjacent Canada.

SUGGESTIONS FOR SPECIAL OBSERVATIONS.

Sparganium angustifolium Michx. should be sought in the ponds
and lakes of northwestern Rhode Island.

S. diversifolium Graebner may be sought in northwestern Rhode
Island, and its var. acaule should be looked for there and in central
and western Massachusetts.

90 Rhodora [May

S. fluctuans (Morong) Robinson may be expected in the larger
ponds and lakes of northwestern Rhode Island.

S. lucidum Fernald & Eames, as yet known only from eastern
Massachusetts, Pennsylvania, Illinois and Missouri, is probably in
Rhode Island and Connecticut.

S. minimum Fries may be confidently sought in clear cold streams
of northern New Hampshire.

S. simplex Huds. is apparently rare in northern and central Maine
and northern Vermont, but it should be sought in all the larger lakes
of northern New England.

GRAY HERBARIUM.

CAUSES OF VARIATION IN COLOR IN SOME RED
ALGAE.

WILLIAM A. TERRY.

For many years past I have noticed a marked difference in color in
specimens of red algae from different localities; this is specially
noticeable in Dasya elegans (Mart.) Ag.; plants from South Beach,
a mile or more east of the entrance to New Haven harbor, always
drying a sepia brown, while those from below Woodmont, some miles
west, dry a dark purple, and those from Fort Hale, inside the harbor,
show a bright crimson pink color. These differences are constant,
and have shown themselves so for many years. My specimens are
taken, when possible, directly from the rocks on which they grow;
they are generally procured by wading at lowest tide, but sometimes
from a boat by means of a sharp-edged scraper with a long handle.
Such specimens are much deeper in color than those from shallow
water. When broken from their holdfasts they change rapidly in
color, in a few hours showing a decided tinge of brown. All these fine
red seaweeds, if mounted in salt water, lose their characteristic color
from the concentration of the salt, and become more or less black. To
obviate this as much as possible, I lay out and cleanse the plant in a
dish of salt water, then transfer on the cardboard to a mounting board
in fresh water, rapidly place and lift out of the water, drain slightly
and place in driers which are changed frequently until dry. In this

1907] Robinson,— Scientific Name of the Osage Orange 91

way much of the original color remains in some species; others obsti-
nately persist in turning black when drying. The different behavior
of plants apparently quite similar led me to make some experiments
last November, which gave me new light on the question. I found
most beautiful plants of the delicate Callithamnion of a most brilliant
rosy color growing in deep water on the reef at Woodmont, and was
much disappointed to find them losing their color in drying. I had
used sometimes the city water and sometimes water from the shallow
wells of the region in mounting, and I found a slight difference in
favor of the city water; I then experimented with rain water, with
marked success. It was evident that the mineral dissolved in the
ordinary water was sufficient to destroy the color in drying.

The rocks on which the seaweeds grow at South Beach are red
granite. The beach contains a large amount of red sand, sufficiently
heavy to be easily separated from the quartz sand by washing. A
superficial examination seems to show zircon and garnet, and a
mineralogist to whom I sent a sample said that it contained about
two per cent of monazite. The rocks on which the red Dasya grows
at Fort Hale are trap. The purple Dasya at Woodmont grows on a
curious shale or slate, that suggests the vicinity of magnesian lime-
stone. It is penetrated by fresh water springs from the mainland,
the water containing iron and lime.

THE SCIENTIFIC NAME OF THE OsAGE ORANGE.— The Osage
Orange, although it has borne in the past a variety of scientific names,
appears to have no designation which is in accord with the Vienna
Rules. These legitimize the generic name Maclura of Nuttall but
necessitate the restoration of the earlier specific name of Rafinesque.
The needed binomial and its synonymy are as follows:—

Maclura pomifera (Raf.), n. comb.

Ioxylon pomijerum Raf. Am. Monthly Mag. ii. 118 (1817).

Maclura aurantiaca Nutt. Gen. ii. 233 (1818).

Broussonetia tinctoria Spreng. Syst. iii. 901 (1826) in part, not

HBK. ;

Toxylon aurantiacum Raf. Med. Fl. ii. 268 (1830).

T. Maclura Raf. New Fl. N. A. iii. 43 (1836).

Toxylon pomiferum Sarg. Silv. vii. 89 (1895).

B. L. Rosinson.

92 Rhodora [May

ALCHEMILLA PRATENSIS FOUND AT WESTFORD, MASSACHUSETTS.—
Some months ago I noticed a plant at Westford, Massachusetts, which
I identified as an Alchemilla. To be quite sure of the determination
I sent a specimen to the Gray Herbarium, but even there a positive
specific identification could not be made until some identical specimens
from Nova Scotia had been forwarded to Dr. Buser, of Geneva, a well
known specialist on the genus. Dr. Buser pronounced the plant
A. pratensis F. W. Schmidt. I am informed that this European
species has become well established and abundant in several parts of
Nova Scotia, but seems not to have been noticed in New England. It
is therefore suggested that its occurrence at Westford, however casual,
is of sufficient interest to be recorded in order that botanical collectors
may be on the outlook for other New England stations. The species
was found in a neighbor's back yard, where chickens were kept, and
the most natural supposition is that the seed was introduced with
chicken-feed. There were in all five individuals, one large and the
others apparently recent seedlings from it. Although the flowers are
small and inconspicuous the species is an attractive one, and in our
flora it will be pretty easily recognized by its orbicular deeply cordate
and shallowly 7-9-lobed leaves.— EmiLy F. FLETCHER, Westford,
Massachusetts.

Vol. 9, no. 100, including pages 65 to 76 was issued 30 A pril, 1907,

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. ; June, 1907. No. 102.

THE OLDER TYPES OF NORTH AMERICAN VIOLETS.— I.
E. BRAINERD.

AN earnest effort has been made to ascertain what specific types
were before the older students of Viola when they published their
American species. The task is indeed a difficult one, as the type
specimen is usually not extant, and the description often brief and
inadequate. In some instances it would seem that the problem must
be abandoned as insoluble. But as we get a clearer knowledge of
our plants in the field, and learn to distinguish specific differences
from fluctuating variability, we may hope also to make progress in
identifying the older specific names. Fortunately, absolute proof
is not necessary; if we can get nothing better, we may be content
with a reasonable degree of probability.

V. oBLIQUA Hill (Hortus Kew. 1769.) In the judgment of many
students of the genus, this, the oldest name for one of our cordate-
leaved violets, though published with a figure, is hopelessly vague.
A species so ill-defined that Pursh could think that V. blanda was
intended, Schweinitz that it stood for V. cucullata, and LeConte that
it might be V. rotundifolia, — not to speak of its recent interpretation
as V. papilionacea and V. affinis,— must surely be discarded as past
recognition.

The status of the three allied species, V. cucULLATA, V. PAPILIONA-
CEA and V. AFFINIS, is much alike, and they may be best discussed
together. It is now less than a decade since Prof. Greene put forth
his interpretation of these old species, which for over sixty years had
been merged into one. We could wish that the proof were more
positive as to what Aiton, Pursh, and LeConte had before, them,
when giving these several names; but recent students of Viola seem

94 Rhodora [JUNE

convinced that the weight of evidence sustains Prof. Greene’s con-
clusions. Aiton’s statement regarding V. cucullata, that the lateral
petals are longer than the spurred petal, is to me a strong indication
that we have correctly identified his species. Schweinitz had a most
distinct and accurate conception of the plant, but unfortunately re-
garded it as V. obliqua Hill. LeConte used instead, for the very
same plant, the far less ambiguous name of Aiton, V. cucullata; but
he gave V. papilionacea only varietal rank, and separated from these
his V. affinis with such hesitancy, as not to carry conviction. "Too
near the preceding," (V. cucullata), he says, “I can find no distinctive
characters except the shorter peduncles and the broader sepals."
Yet he strangely overlooks a better mark of difference, expressly
stated in his descriptions, that in V. cucullata the spurred petal is
generally naked and glabrous, (superiore [petalo] ut plurimum nudo,
glabro); while in V. affinis it is generally villous, (superiore ut pluri-
mum villosa). After all, as Greene remarks, LeConte's drawing,
still extant, is the best evidence as to what plant he had in mind.

When, however, Torrey and Gray published the first fascicle of their
North American Flora, in July, 1838, V. papilionacea and V. affinis
were cited as mere synonyms of V. cucullata; and there the matter
rested till recent years. How may we account for the wide divergence
between this judgment and that of to-day? Is it not due largely to
the fact that formerly this group of plants were studied only in their
vernal state? The three species under discussion are small stemless
herbs; in spring we see nothing above ground but half-grown leaves,
and scapes bearing single flowers, all much alike. Only in late sum-
mer are marked specific characters developed; then the mature leaves,
the apetalous flowers, their peduncles, sepals, capsules and ripe seeds,
all reveal striking differences. The plants in petaliferous flower
furnished to the early botanists only vague, hardly definable hints of
specific distinetness; even 'lorrey and Gray could see no notable
differences. But when the growing plants are at hand in late sum-
mer, a child can be taught to distinguish the species.’
© Viota soRoRIA Willd. was published in 1806 in the Hortus Beroli-
ensis with a detailed description and an excellent plate (no. 72). It

1 Dr. Gray in later years was doubtless influenced in the reduction of violet species
by his knowledge of the numerous intergrading forms, that connect the extreme types
of the cucullata-sagittata group. Whether he thought this due to recent interbreeding,
or not, it would support his conception of a ** most polymorphous ” species,

1907] Brainerd,— Older Types of North American Violets 95

is therefore surprising that it was so constantly misinterpreted or
ignored, until correctly understood in the Illustrated Flora (1897).
The description calls for a stemless, violet-flowered plant, with cordate
leaves pubescent beneath and on the petioles. The only two species
in eastern North America combining these characters are the one to
which Dr. Britton has applied the name V. sororia, and the northern
V. septentrionalis. The latter is quite unlikely to have reached
Berlin; and furthermore its vernal leaves in outline and aspect do not
answer as well to the Willdenow plate, as do those of the Britton plant.
The confusion of the older botanists regarding Willdenow's V. sororia
may be due in part to a palpable blunder in his description, for he
calls the spurred petal bearded, and the lateral petals smooth. I
say ‘palpable blunder’ for there is not a known violet in eastern
North America that bears such a flower. Through some error of
observation or of memory (not without parallel) Willdenow located
the beard on the wrong petal.

The first misapplication of the name V. sororia was made by Nut-
tall, who quotes it as a synonym of V. villosa Walt. Nevertheless.
after describing his V. villosa var. cordifolia, he somewhat inconsist-
ently remarks, that this latter “is decidedly the V. sororia figured in
the Hortus Berolinensis, although the leaf is said to be pubescent
beneath instead of above." Schweinitz, Torrey and LeConte per-
petuate in one form or the other the error of Nuttall.

The genuine V. sororia Willd. was, however, too common a plant
not to have been noticed under some name. The oldest synonym
is the V. asarifolia of Pursh This was based upon a plant of low
rich woods, collected in the Carolinas by Catesby in 1724,— still to
be seen at Oxford in hb. Sherard. A tracing made by Prof. Fernald
shows it to be a summer specimen having large tall leaves, and bear-
ing cleistogamous flowers and an immature capsule on peduncles
less than two inches long. It is so unlike the form ordinarily seen in
vernal flower, that Pursh, though recognizing V. sororia Willd., makes
the Catesby plant another species;— a blunder made by more than
one botanist, who has thought to get an adequate notion of a violet
by studying it only when in petaliferous flower. Pursh adds the
naive remark, “I have seen this species several times in Virginia,
but generally without flowers; which has been the reason that no
specimen was in my collection."

1 Supplement to Flora, ii. 734, 1814.

96 Rhodora [JUNE

LeConte also recognized the plant under two different names. It
is (1) his V. cucullata var. y, as both his description and one of his
figures clearly show; and (2) “V. asarifolia Pursh,” perplexingly
said to have very large villous leaves, short peduncles scarcely over
an inch and a half long [aestival conditions], a naked glabrous spurred
petal, and for habitat Canada and northwestern New York. [? sc.
and southward.]

In recent years Willdenow's plant has been variously disposed of;
Mr. Witmer Stone regards it as a form of V. palmata dilatata Ell.;
and for Prof. Greene it has furnished material for at least four new
species,— V. laetecaerulea, V. cuspidata, V. nodosa, and V. Dicksonii.

V. viLLosa Walter. This name was applied by the older American
botanists to two quite distinct species. Elliott and LeConte, who
were intimately acquainted with the plants of Walter's region, under-
stood him to refer to a violet, found only south of Virginia, chiefly
in pine-barrens,— densely and finely pubescent throughout,— a spe-
cies allied to V. fimbriatula, and published in 1898 by Prof. Greene
as V. Carolina. But Nuttall, and after him Schweinitz and Torrey,
applied the name to a violet that grows on dry slopes among decidu-
ous trees from southern New York to Georgia, chiefly along the
eastern foothills of the Appalachian Mountains,— a. small species
allied to V. papilionacea,— marked by somewhat rigid silvery pubes-
cence on the upper surface of the leaf, though elsewhere glabrous.
Which of these two plants is the V. villosa of Walter? That it is the
first of the above described species, can be shown I think beyond a
reasonable doubt. I would present the three following points for
consideration.

1. Walter tells us in his preface that nearly all the species in his
Flora Caroliniana were found in a tract that might be bounded by a
line of fifty miles. His house and the botanical garden, in which he
was buried, were on the banks of the Santee River, near the middle
of the great tide-water plain of the southern Atlantic States. No
specimen of the upland plant, V. villosa of Nuttall, has ever been found
in this tract or within a hundred miles of the home of Walter. But
the other species, as I can testify after a recent visit, is here most
abundant; frequent colonies occur along the old Charlestown road
from Eutawville to the Walter plantation; it was seen on railway
embankments and even in the streets of towns like Summerville.
'The plant could hardly have escaped the observation of Walter;
and if noted in his Flora, it was surely under the name V. villosa.

1907] Brainerd,— Older Types of North American Violets 97

2. This descriptive term better characterizes the plant of the low-
lands than that of the uplands. 'The pubescence of the former is,
indeed, rather short for the precise use of the word ‘villosa’; but it is
dense and soft, that of the petioles and peduncles being, as Prof.
Greene puts it, “almost plushy." Mr. Pollard also says of it in Small’s
Southern Flora, “petioles usually densely villous." But of the upland
plant Prof. Greene remarks, “the accepted V. villosa is not villous;
it is rather stiffly hirsutulous."

3. The opinions of Elliott and of LeConte are entitled to great
weight regarding the point in question. Through the kindness of
Prof. Paul M. Rea, the Curator of the Charlestown Museum, I had
the privilege of examining the specimens of Viola in the Elliott her-
barium, and found the plant that he had labelled V. villosa Walt. to
be the species of the coastal plains. LeConte, than whom no botanist
in the first half of the last century more diligently studied and more
accurately discriminated the perplexing forms of Viola in the Atlantic
States, is most emphatic in applying Walter’s name to the plant of
the coastal region, and not to the plant of the northern uplands.
“When V. villosa is misunderstood,” he justly remarks, alluding
to Nuttall and Torrey, “it is simply by authors who have never seen
it." LeConte’s description of the two species as well as his accurate
figures, now in the possession of Prof. Greene, confirm these conclu-
sions. This interpretation of V. villosa was adopted in Torrey and
Gray’s No. Am. Flora, in 1838, and is the one maintained in all the .
many editions of Eaton’s Botany published after 1830.

The true V. villosa Walt. has the unique habit of bearing apetalous
flowers and fruit in the winter and early spring, before bearing petal-
iferous flowers. Much of the autumn foliage remains green through
the winter, and specimens that I collected the last week in March had
abundance of ripe seed but no petaliferous flowers. In no. 31 of
Greene and Pollard's distribution of No. Am. Violaceae are to be seen
both flowering and fruiting specimens of this species, collected March
30 and April 19; but the fruit is from cleistogamous flowers and was
evidently obtained on the earlier date, the flowers on the later.

The other species, that is currently passing as V. villosa, will need

1 It should be understood that both these authors are here speaking of V. Carolina,
apparently not suspecting it to be Walter’s V. villosa.

2“ Cum V. villosa confusa, auctoribus duntaxat quibus nunquam visa." Ann, N. Y.
Lyceum, ii. 144,

98 Rhodora [JUNE

to have a name of its own, and I would designate it by a similar epithet
descriptive of its upper leaf-surface :—

Viola hirsutula, nom. nov. (V. villosa Nutt. and recent authors,
not Walter; V. sororia LeConte and Eaton, not Willdenow).

V. villosa var. cordifolia Nutt. has been a source of more or less
confusion. Judging from the very full description in both Nuttall
and Schweinitz, it was probably based on a hybrid between V. hirsu-
tula and V. papilionacea, found in “dry woods on the banks of the
Schuylkill near Philadelphia." Such a hybrid, from two stations
now within the limits of that city, I have had growing for two seasons.
'The plants were found in company with the two above named species,
possess intermediate characters, and show much impaired fertility.
But their hybrid origin is positively demonstrated by the behavior
of their seedlings, which presented last summer, in strikingly diverse
forms, the divergent characters of the parents. For example, some
seedlings had the small leaves of V. hirsutula, others the large leaves
of V. papilionacea; some bore purple capsules like V. hirsutula,
others light green capsules like V. papilionacea; some produced the
pale yellow seeds of V. hirsutula, others the almost black seeds of
V. papilionacea. This bybrid has also been collected by Mr. W.
DeW. Miller in Plainfield, N. J.; and by Prof. House in the District
of Columbia, and was published by him in Rnopona viii. 121, as V.
papilionacea X villosa. It should rather be designated :—

V. hirsutula X papilionacea. (V. villosa, var. cordifolia Nutt.;
V. cordifolia Schweinitz; V. villosa, var. cordata Torr., Flora i. 252,
1824; the change in varietal name being plainly an inadvertence.)

MippLEBURY CoLLEGE, Middlebury, Vermont.

CATHARINAEA MACMILLANI.

Epwarp B. CHAMBERLAIN.
(Plate 74.)

IN the spring of 1906 Miss A. L. Crockett of Camden, Maine, sent
the writer a small package of mosses. On account of other duties,
the specimens were not examined closely at the time. Last Novem-
ber, however, when the subject was again taken up, it was found that

1907] Chamberlain,— Catharinaea Macmillani 99

one packet contained fruiting material of a Catharinaea which seemed
totally unlike any species described in the current manuals. The
plant was conspicuous by its small size, stiff erect habit, and its crisped,
closely inrolled leaves. Microscopic study showed it to differ from
the other species of the genus in its papillose leaves with numerous,
large lamellae. By comparison with specimens at the New York
Botanical Garden, the specimen was determined as Catharinaea
Maemillani, a species described in 1903 by Prof. J. M. Holzinger
from sterile plants collected at Ortonville, Minnesota. This deter-
mination has since been verified by Prof. Holzinger. Search in the
herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden brought to light several
specimens from the herbarium of the late C. F. Austin, which in all
essential characteristics agreed with the plant in question. Some of
these specimens bore a manuscript name, which shows that Austin had
already noticed the peculiarity of the plant.

'The plants show some variation in size, and in the number and
height of the lamellae; but are at once distinguishable by the papil-
losity of the leaves and lamellae, a character which seems to be unique
in the genus. Since the original collection was sterile, and the char-
acterization of the species brief, it seems best to publish here a full
description, drawn from the fruiting specimens collected by Miss
Crockett, and verified by comparison with a fragment from the origi-
nal collection. The species is most closely related to Catharinaea
angustata, Brid., of which it might be regarded as a derivative due
to exposed conditions. My thanks are especially due to Mrs. E. G.
Britton, Prof. Holzinger, and Prof. J. F. Collins for assistance in
the study of the specimens.

CATHARINAEA MacMtLLANI, Holzinger. Minn. Bot. Studies. Ser.
3: Part II: 120. (1903). JDoecious, archegonia in the axils of
the inmost comal leaves. Gametophyte 2-2.5 cm. high, dull olive or
reddish green, brownish below. Stems erect, simple or branched
from near the base, naked or with a few rhizoids below. Lowest
leaves scale-like and feebly developed, gradually larger and forming
irregular rosulate tufts above, patent when moist, crisped and some-
what spirally contorted when dry, oblong-linear, 2-3 X 0.5 mm.,
not sheathing at the base, slightly undulate in the upper third, with
2-3 oblique rows of strong dorsal teeth, acute, often ending in a spiny
point. Margin of two rows of linear, thickened cells in two layers,
serrate in the upper third, the teeth double and becoming more promi-
nent toward the apex. Costa stout, semiterete, about one fifth the
median width of the leaf, percurrent or nearly so, composed in cross-

100 Rhodora [JUNE

section of a dorsal row of thick-walled, papillose cells, two stereid
bands separated by a double row of median guides, and a ventral
row of larger cells from which arise 5-9 lamellae. Lamellae minutely
crenulate in side view, 6-10 cells high, terminal cell wall not notice-
ably thickened, but usually with 2-3 low papillae. Leaf-cells round-
hexagonal above, strongly chlorophyllose, becoming more hyaline
and rectangular below, median cells 12-16 x in diameter, somewhat
moniliform in section, usually with 1-3 low papillae on each sur-
face. Sporophyte, usually solitary, occasionally two. Seta 30-50
mm. long slender, smooth, brownish. Capsule 1.5-2.5 X 0.5-0.7
mm., cylindrie, tapering slightly at the base, erect, straight or slightly
curved, smooth, areolation rectangular below with the lateral walls
much thickened, five or six rows of the cells at the orifice quadrate
and incrassate, darker colored. Operculum convex, rostrate, beak
at times three-quarters as long as the urn, deep red. Calyptra cucul-
late, equalling urn, rough at the apex. Peristome nematodontoid,
of 32 linear, acute, papillose teeth, from a basal membrane one third
the total height, central portion red, margin pale and minutely crenu-
late, attached by apices to the epiphragm.

Plate 74, figures 1-9.

Illustration: Holzinger, loc. cit. pl. 19.

Habitat: dryish, sterile soil, often in large turfs.

Distribution: Ortonville, Minn., J. M. Holzinger, 1901. (type).
Camden, Maine, 4. L. Crockett, No. 163. 1903. North Haven,
Conn., G. E. Nichols, 1907. Camden, N. J., Parker. Closter, N.
J., C. F. Austin. Salina Co. Missouri, 1890, C. H. Demetrio.

New York Crrv.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 74.

Fig. 1. Plant in dry condition, natural size.

Fig. 2. Portion of a moistened plant, X 6.

Fig. 3. Leaves from upper, median, and lower parts of the stem, X 12.
Fig. 4. Apex of leaf from back, X 25.

Fig. 5. Areolation of upper margin, median leaf, X 225.

Fig. 6. Areolation of basal margin, median leaf, X 225.

Fig.7. Outline median cross-section of leaf, X 50.

Fig. 8. Detail of same cross-section, X 225.

Fig. 9. Portion of peristome, X 50.

1907] Cushman,— New England Species of Pleurotaenium 101

A SYNOPSIS OF THE NEW ENGLAND SPECIES OF
PLEUROTAENIUM.

JOSEPH A. CUSHMAN.
(Plate 75.)

Waite the New England desmids have had much less attention
given to them than has been given to those of the British Isles, there
are nevertheless ten species of Pleurotaenium known from New Eng-
land. ‘There are but nine species of Pleurotaenium given in Wests’
British Desmids. Four of our species have not been reported from
the British Isles. The species are all comparatively large and con-
spicuous and are easily distinguished from one another. ‘They fall
naturally into three groups. The majority of the species of the genus
have straight sides or in certain cases slightly undulate. ‘The species
of the second group including P. nodosum and P. constrictum have
definite enlarged portions or annulations. The third group is repre-
sented by the single species P. verrucosum, which has the surface
divided into rectangular areas in more or less distinct rings. Our
species with their several varieties are given below and their distri-
bution in New England as far as known. The records followed by an
exclamation point are those from which specimens have been seen
by the writer. In most points the recent monograph of the Wests
has been followed. A key to the New England species is given here,
based in part upon that of the Wests.

PLEUROTAENIUM Nägeli, 1849.

Cells cylindrical, circular in end view, sides straight or somewhat
sinuate; semicells with a basal inflation and often with secondary
ones distally, apex truncate, usually with a ring of tubercles; chloro-
plasts several, in irregular longitudinal bands parietally arranged.

KEY To THE New ENGLAND SPECIES OF PLEUROTAENIUM.

I. Cells cylindrical or slightly attenuated, end view circular, sides nearly
straight or very slightly sinuate toward the base of the semicell, or evenly
curved from base to apex, not prominently sinuate and without a thickened
surface pattern.

102 Rhodora [J UNE

1. Apices furnished with a ring of tubercles.
A. Cells broadest at or near base of semicells.

a. Cells 10-15 times as long as wide 1 " . P. coronatum.
b. Cells 6-9 times as long as wide . i . ; P. truncatum.
c. Cells 15-18 times as long as wide. à : . P. Ehrenbergit.
B. .Cells broadest in middle of semicells. . s . P. subgeorgicum.

2. Apices usually without tubercles.
A. Cells of medium size, basal inflation not usually prominent.
P. Trabecula.
B. Cells very large, basal inflation prominent. P. maximum.
II. Cells with a surface pattern of quadrilateral thickenings, ends circular.
P. verrucosum.
III. Cells with a few broad constricted areas, sides very sinuate.
P. constrictum.
IV. Cells with rings of nodules, end view sinuate-stellate. P. nodosum.

PLEUROTAENIUM conoNATUM (Bréb.) Rabenh., Flor. Europ. Algar.,
III, 1868, p. 143; Docidium coronatum Bréb., in Ralfs, Brit. Desm.,
1848, p. 217, Pl. XXXV, f. 6; Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 49, PI.
XI, f. 9-10. Cells large, 10-15 times as long as wide, gradually
attenuated from base to apex, prominent basal inflation, sides undu-
late, apex truncate with 6-8 blunt tubercles. Length 340-575 y;
breadth at base 34-63 x; apex 27-40 u.— Me.: Bridgeton! N. H.:
Noone's Station!; Pudding Pond, North Conway! Mass.: Lake
Quinsigamond, Worcester (Stone); Plainville! Randolph! Bridge-
water!

P. CORONATUM var. FLUCTUATUM West, Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot., Vol.
XXIX, 1892, p. 118, Pl. XIX, fig. 11. Cells considerably larger
than in the typical form, 12-14 times as long as broad, sides of semi-
cells undulate for their entire length. Length 850-900 s; breadth
at base 65-72 u; apex 46-50 & — N. H.: Intervale! Mass.: Lake
Watuppa, Fall River! This is one of the largest of our desmids and
is easily visible without a lens. It is not common.

P. coRoNATUM var. NODULOSUM (Bréb.) West, Jour. Linn. Soc.
Bot., Vol. XXIX, 1892, p. 119. Docidium nodulosum Bréb. in Ralfs,
Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 155, Pl. XXVI, fig. 1. Semicells with the basal
inflation and apical tubercles much reduced. Length 560 u; breadth
at base 65 u; apex 46 j.— Mass.: Amherst (W. West); Salem (Bailey).
R. I.: Wainskut pond, North Providence (Bailey). I have not found
this variety myself in New England although it has several times been
reported by others. The measurements are given from an Ohio speci-
men which was typical.

1907] Cushman,— New England Species of Pleurotaenium 103

P. TRUNCATUM (Bréb.) Niig., Gatt. Einz. Alg., 1849, p. 104. Closte-
rium truncatum Bréb. in Chev., Micr., 1839, p. 272. Docidiwm trun-
catum Bréb. in Ralfs, Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 156, Pl. XXVI, fig. 2;
Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 48, Pl. IX, figs. 6 & 7. Cells large, 6-9
times as long as wide, decidedly attenuated towards the apex, 11-15
apical tubercles, their bases depressed below the actual end of the semi-
cell; cell wall coarsely punctate. Length 450-520 ji; breadth 53-80 x;
apex 37-45 u.— Me.: Orono (Harvey, W. West). Mass.: Pondville!
Carver’s Pond, Bridgewater! This does not appear to be common
in New England, as it has appeared in but two of the many lots of
material examined. It seems to be common in the British Isles,
however, and has a wide distribution elsewhere.

P. EHRENBERGII (Bréb.) DeBary, Conj., 1858, p. 75. Docidium
Ehrenbergii Bréb. in Dict. Univ. Hist. Nat., 1844, Vol. V, p. 93.
Cells of medium size, 15-18 times as long as wide, somewhat atten-
uated towards the apices, a basal inflation and one or two additional
ones above it; apices with 7-9 tubercles, cell wall punctate. Length
350-496 u; breadth 21-32 s; apex 12.5-19 j.— Mass.: Tewksbury
(Lagerheim)! Randolph! Halifax! Lake Watuppa, Fall River! Nan-
tucket! Although this is the most frequent species of the genus in
the British Isles according to the Wests, in New England there are
other species that occur more frequently.

P. EHRENBERGII var. ELONGATUM West, Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot.,
Vol. XXIX, 1892, p. 119. Cells narrow and much elongated, about
25 times longer than the diameter. Length 573-660 4; breadth
25-30 u; apex 19-22 4.— N. H.: Pudding Pond, North Conway!
Mass.: Halifax!

P. EHRENBERGIT var. UNDULATUM Schaarschm., Magyar Tudom.
Akad. Math. s. Termeszettud. Kozlemenyek., Vol. XVIII, 1882,
p. 278, PI. I, fig. 21. Cells larger than in the typical form and with the
sides undulate throughout their length. Length 496 w; breadth 25 x;
apex 15 j.— N. H.: Pudding Pond, North Conway!

P. TnRABECULA (Ehrenb.) Nüg., Gatt. Einz. Alg., 1849, p. 104,
Pl. VI, fig. A. Closterium Trabecula Ehrenb., Beitr. zur Kentniss
der Organis. der Infus., 1830, p. 62. Docidium Trabecula Wolle,
Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 48, Pl. IX, figs. 2-4, Pl. XII, figs. 1-7. Cells
large, 9-19 times as long as wide, sides of semicells nearly straight,
apices rounded truncate, usually without tubercles. Length 320-
620 u; breadth at base 25—44 p; apex 23-27 p.=— Me.: Orono (Har-

104 Rhodora [JUNE

vey); Kittery, common! N. H.: North Woodstock! Noone’s Station!
Mass.: Near Salem (Bailey); Amherst (W. West); Reading! Plain-
ville! Carver's Pond, Bridgewater! Long Pond, Tewksbury! Nan-
tucket!

P. 'TRABECULA forma GRANULATUM G. S. West, Jour. Bot., Vol.
XXXVII, 1899, p. 113, Pl. CCCXCVI, fig. 6. “Cell wall distinctly
and irregularly granulate.” Length 505 p; breadth at base of semi-
cells 34 x; apex 28 y.— N. H.: Mt. Moosilauke!

P. 'TRABECULA forma CLAVATUM (Kütz.) W. & G. S. West, Bot.
Trans. Yorks. Nat. Union, Vol. V, 1902, p. 58. Docidium clavatum
Kütz. in Ralfs, Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 156, Pl. XXVI, fig. 3; Wolle,
Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 48, PL IX, fig. 8. “Cells about 12 times longer
than their diameter; semicells slightly tumid and subclavate." Length
360 u; breadth at base, 31 x; apex 25 j.— Mass.: West Bridgewater!

P. ''RABECULA var. RECTUM (Delp.) W. & G. S. West, Brit. Desm.
Vol. I, 1904, p. 212, Pl. XXX, figs. 9-10. Pleurotaenium rectum
Delp., Mem. R. Accad. Scienze di Torino, ser. 2, Vol. XXX, 1877,
p. 129, Pl. XX, figs. 8-11. Cells smaller than the typical, 12-15 times
as long as wide. Length 250 4; breadth at base of semicells 18.5 p;
apex 15 j.— N. H.: North Woodstock! Mass.: North Eastham (F.
S. Collins)!

P. suBGEOoRGICUM Cushman, Ruoponma, Vol. VII, 1905, p. 117,
Pl. LXI, fig. 4. Cells large, 12-15 times as long as wide, semicells
widest at a point more than midway from the isthmus, thence taper-
ing gradually to either end; basal portion with several inflations,
remaining portion of the sides smooth; apex truncated, with a crown
of 10 bluntly rounded tubercles. Length 600-700 u; breadth at base
30-35 u; at middle of semicells 45-58 «u; apex 25-30 j.— N. H.:
North Woodstock!

P. Maximum (Reinsch) Lund., Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Scient. Upsala,
ser. 3, Vol. VIII, 1871, p. 89. Docidium maximum Reinsch, Spec.
Gen. Alg., 1867, p. 140, Pl. XX. C, figs. 1-2. D. Archeri Wolle,
Desm. U. S., ed. II, 1892, p. 51, Pl. XII, fig. 2. Cells large, 14-18
times as long as wide; apices truncate with rounded angles; promi-
nent basal inflation. Length 600-850 4; breadth at base 40-55 pn;
apex 22-30 4.— Me.: Orono (W. West). Mass.: Amherst (W. West).

P. inpicum (Grun.) Lund., Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Scient. Upsala,
ser. 3, Vol. VIII, 1871, p. 90. Docidium indicum Grun., Desmid.
Banka, 1865, p. 13, Pl. II, fig. 18. Length 630 u; breadth at base

1907] Cushman,— New England Species of Pleurotaenium 105

21 m; apex 16 j.— Mass.: Tewksbury (Lagerheim). This species
rests upon this record and could not be verified although many of the
records of Lagerheim have been gone over by the writer from some
of the material from which Lagerheim took his desmids. For the
present it must remain as a single record.

P. constrictum (Bail.) Wood, F. W. Algae N. Am., 1873, p. 121.
Docidium constrictum Bail. in Ralfs, Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 218, Pl.
XXXV, fig. 7. Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 50, PI. XI, fig. 2. Cells
large, 12-15 times as long as wide, very slightly attenuated from base
to apex; a prominent basal inflation and three or four others in each
semicell; apices truncate with a peripheral ring, usually 8 large
bluntly pointed tubercles, membrane evenly punctate; basal inflation
occasionally with small plications, usually 8 in number. Length 435-
560 p; breadth at base 40-50 m; apex 25-32 jL.— N. H.: Laconia,
scarce, (Wests); Pudding Pond, North Conway! Mass.: Tewks-
bury (Lagerheim). R. I.: Worden’s Pond, North Providence (Bailey).

P. noposum (Bail) Lund., Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Scient. Upsala,
ser. 3, Vol. VIII, 1871, p. 90. Docidium nodosum Bailey in Ralfs,
Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 218, Pl. XXXV, fig. 8. Wolle, Desm. U.S.,
1884, p. 50, Pl. XI, figs. 11-12, Pl. XII, fig. 20. Cells large, 7-10
times as long as wide, semicells with rings of nodules, usually four
in number including the basal ring and equidistant, 6-8 nodules in
each ring; apices dilated, with a ring of 6-8 tubercles. Length 300—
460 u; breadth at base 40-70 4; apex 28-40 j.— Me.: Orono (Har-
vey). N. H.: Laconia (Wests); Pudding Pond, North Conway!
Intervale! Noone's Station! Mass.: Near Salem (Bailey); Lake
Quinsigamond, Worcester (Stone); Carver's Pond, Bridgewater!
R. L: Wainskut Pond, North Providence (Bailey). 'Phis seems to
be one of the commonest species of the genus in New England. It
is rare in the Dritish Isles.

P. verrucosum (Bail.) Lund., Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Scient. Upsala,
ser. 3, Vol. VIII, 1871, p. 6. Closterium verrucosum Bail., Am. Jour.
Sci., n. s. Vol. I, 1846, p. 127, fig. 4. Docidium verrucosum Bail. in
Ralfs, Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 218. Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 52,
Pl. X, figs. 4-5. Cells of medium size, about 10- TES long as wide,
semicells with straight sides, slight inflation at the base, cell wall with
13-15 rings of irregularly quadrilateral areas, the last ring distally
more elongated than the others. Length 490-169 4; breadth at base
30-40 p; apex 22-30 u.— N. H.: Pudding Pond, North Conway, fre-
quent! Mass.: Mt. Everett (Wolle). R. I.: Near Providence (Bailey).

106 Rhodora (JUNE

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 75.

Fig. 1. Pleurotaenium coronatum (Bréb.) Rabenh., x 351.

Fig. 2. » truncatum (Bréb.) Nig. (after W. & G. S. West)
X 310.

Fig. 3. - Ehrenbergii (Bréb.) DeBary, X 350

Fig. 4. " Trabecula (Ehrenb.) Nig., X 350.

Fig. 5. " subgeorgicum Cushman, x 350.

Fig. 6. " constrictum (Bail.) Lund., X 350.

Fig. 7. s nodosum (Bail) Lund., x 350.

Fig. 8. A verrucosum (Bail. Lund., x 350.

STREPTOPUS OREOPOLUS A POSSIBLE HYBRID.—- In April, 1906, I
described from the alpine region of Mt. Albert, Gaspé Co., Quebec,
as Streptopus oreopolus! a plant which in some ways combined char-
acteristics of S. amplexifolius and S. roseus, but in its deep claret-
colored perianth was unlike either. The original description was
based upon simple or subsimple alpine specimens, and at that time
the plant was known only from a limited area on Mt. Albert.

During the summer of 1906, however, Professor J. Franklin Collins
and the writer found Streptopus oreopolus in company with S. am-
plexifolius and S. roseus abundant along alpine brooks on the northern
hornblende slopes of Mt. Albert, and in extreme abundance every-
where on alpine meadows and in the open park-like subalpine forests
of the granitic tableland of Table-top Mountain. In fact, on Table-
top Mountain S. oreopolus impresses one as perhaps the most abun-
dant plant of the cool slopes and alpine meadows, always more abun-
dant than S. roseus and S. amplexifolius, maintaining its slightly
ciliate-hispid stems and leaves (pronouncedly less ciliate than in S.
roseus) and its attractive flowers, in form and structure like those of
S. amplexifolius but always a deep claret-purple in color.

Since the fruit of this local plant of the Gaspé mountains was still
unknown we took special interest in examining daily, through our
four weeks’ residence in the alpine areas, the colonies of Streptopus.
The result of a very close observation of the plants over an area of
about one hundred square miles was that, while both S. roseus and S.
amplexifolius were found to mature abundant fruit, not a single plant
of S. oreopolus could be found with even a vestige of good fruit. In

1 Ruopora, viii, 70 (1906).

1907] Josselyn Botanical Society 107

fact, all the plants examined had merely dry shriveled and hollow
ovaries. This uniform sterility of S. oreopolus throughout its known
range suggests that it may not be a self-perpetuating species; yet, if
this should prove to be the case, the profusion of the plant throughout
the area and the constancy with which it maintains its characteristic
pubescence and the color of its perianth is indeed remarkable. It is
of course possible that the sterility of the plants in 1906 was exceptional
and due perhaps to the extremely dry weather during early summer,
the valley of the lower St. Lawrence experiencing a drouth quite
unprecedented in that ordinarily cold and humid region, or that it
depends for fertilization upon some insect which was affected by the
adverse season; but the abundant fruiting of S. roseus and S. am-
plewifolius indicates that the unusual dryness had no adverse effect
upon those species.

It is worth recording that in the mountains of Gaspé Streptopus
amplexifolius and S. roseus, as well as S. oreopolus, show a great
variation in size. All three plants in rich subalpine woods become
very tall and branched, often 1 m. or more in height, but in alpine
situations they are much reduced, the simple or subsimple stems 2 or

3 dm. high.— M. L. FERNALD, Gray Herbarium.

THE THIRTEENTH ANNUAL MEETING OF THE JOSSELYN BOTANICAL
Society will be held at Oxford, Maine, from Monday to Saturday,
July 1-6, 1907, inclusive. The headquarters of the society will be
at the Belmont Lodge Hotel, Oxford. Boats upon Thompson Lake
will be at the disposal of the party and it is planned to make one all
day excursion upon the lake. An opportunity will also be given to
visit the famous orchid swamps at Hebron. To secure the favorable
rates given below, it is absolutely necessary to know immediately how
many members will attend. You are requested, therefore, to com-
municate your plans to the undersigned at once, whether planning to
attend or not. Reduced rates of 1$ cents per mile have been secured
on the Maine Central Railroad, and its is expected that a similar rate
will obtain upon the Grand Trunk Railroad. Hotel Rates: One or
two in room $2.00 per day.— Epwarp B. CHAMBERLAIN, 38 West
59th Street, New York City.

108 Rhodora [JUNE

THIRTEENTH ANNUAL FIELD MEETING OF THE VERMONT BoTANI-
CAL AND Brrp Cruzs will be held at No. Pownal, Vt. on Tuesday and
Wednesday, July 2 and 3. Headquarters will be at Hotel Glenwood,
where the members and their friends will assemble on the evening of
July 1. Tuesday, July 2, will probably be given to exploring the cliff
region of Pownal Center. Wednesday, J uly 3, will be devoted to the
bog regions of the river valley. ;

There are three routes which may be taken by the Vermont mem-
bers in reaching No. Pownal, as follows,

Route 1, via Bellows Falls, Brattleboro, Greenfield, No. Adams, No.

Pownal.

Route 2, via Rutland, No. Bennington, Hoosac Junct., No. Pownal.
Route 3, via Rutland, Castleton, Eagle Bridge, No. Pownal.

Members taking Route 2, upon reaching No. Bennington may
choose between going via Hoosac Junct. to No. Pownal, or via Ben-
nington, Petersburg Junct., to No. Pownal, or may transfer at
Bennington to electric car.

Electric cars now run through Pownal from Hoosac Junct. Wil-
liamstown and Bennington. Rates at Hotel Glenwood, $1.00 per
day.— D. S. CARPENTER, Sec'y Arrangements, Middletown Springs,
Vt.

(Vol. 9, no. 101, including pages 77-92, was issued 3 June, 1907.)

Rhodora Plate 74

P

'-
Sansa]

i

UOCr WwW
Q
NS
AN

OW
Q
X
LS
ap

OOS
ws

6 MJ

CS

9
OO

T
"

DO OKY

wowace
SR

GOGH D

)
Y
A
U

E. B. Chamberlain del.
CATHARINAEA MACMILLANI. Holtz.

Plate 75

Rhodera

ane e
COCOCOCO

feum eu;
e anasa

SS
HOC

LJ,

J. A. Cushman del,
New ENGLAND SPECIES OF PLEUROTAENIUM

TRbooora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. July, 1907. No. 103.

SOME NEW OR LITTLE KNOWN FORMS OF NEW
ENGLAND TREES.

ALFRED REHDER.

Tae following descriptions of some little known varieties and forms
of trees are presented here chiefly for the purpose of drawing the
attention of collecting botanists to these variations. Trees and partic-
ularly the more common trees are often passed by by botanists, and
therefore are usually not well represented in our collections, a fact
that makes it difficult to trace the frequence of unexpected forms.
We have still much to learn even in a so comparatively well explored
region as New England in regard to the distribution of certain varieties
and the frequence of the occurrence of certain forms of trees. That
forms like the virgate form of the Red Spruce and the cut-leaved
forms of Sumach due to spontaneous mutation may occur repeatedly
and independently, has been shown by the observation made in
Europe on allied species. We also may be on the look out for similar
forms in other species or genera.

Picea mariana var. brevifolia comb. nov.— P. brevifolia Peck,
Spruces of the Adirondacks, 13 (1897); Britton, Ill. Flor. 3: 496
fig. 122a (1898); Man. 34 (1901); Brotherton, Amer. Gard. 21: 201,
2 fig. (1900).— P. nigra var. brevifolia Rehder, Bailey's Cycl. Am.
Hort. 3: 1334 (1901).

Differs from the type chiefly in its smaller glaucous leaves. It is a
small tree, rarely exceeding 10 m. in height with a narrow spire-like
head of irregular outline; leaves 4-12 mm. long, stout, obtuse or
mucronate, glaucous; cones 1.2-2.5 em. long, the scales with erose
margins; seeds 2 mm. long, with wings 4—5 mm. in length.

This variety is credited by Britton to Vermont, but I fail to find

110 Rhodora [JuLy

in the herbariums consulted any specimens from this state. There
are, however, the following specimens from Maine and New Hamp-
shire which are referable to this variety. Marine: Bangor bog,
Orono, July 20, 1892, M. L. Fernald; Somerset Co., peat bog, Flag-
staff, Aug. 19, 1896, M. L. Fernald; Piscataquis Co., Mt. Ktaadn, July
8, 1900, J. R. Churchill. New HaMrsurnEe: summit of Thorn Mtn.,
Jackson, Oct. 4, 1896, C. E. Faxon. Picea mariana var. brevifolia in-
habits chiefly mountain bogs and is distributed outside of New England
to Ontario, northern New York and Michigan. The low prostrate
form of the exposed tops of high mountains described by Peck as P.
brevifolia var. semiprostrata, will probably also be found in New Eng-
land. A form similar in habit and in the size of leaves and cones
which I found on top of Mt. Mansfield in Vermont is apparently a low
form of the true P. mariana, as it has dark green leaves.

Picea rubra forma virgata comb. nov.— Picea mariana '* monstrous
form" Gard. & Forest 8:45 fig. (1895).— Picea rubens “form”
Sargent, Sylv. N. Am. 12:33 (1898).— Picea nigra var. virgata
Rehder; Bailey’s Cycl. Am. Hort. 3: 1334 (1901).

Differs from the type by the long and slender branches entirely
destitute of branchlets.

MassaACHUSETTS: on the base of Mt. Hopkins near Williams-
town, one plant found by Mr. George Walker and specimens with a
photograph sent by Samuel F. Clarke in 1894 to the Arnold Arboretum.

A very peculiar looking Spruce and interesting as a parallel form
to P. Abies f. virgata (P. excelsa var. virgata Caspary), Schlangenfichte
(Snake-Spruce), found in quite a number of localities in central and
northern Europe, particularly in Norway. A comparison of the
figure given in Garden & Forest (l. c.) of the “snake” form of P.
rubra and of the figures of P. Abies f. virgata published by Carrière
(Rev. Hort. 1854: 102) and by Schübeler (Viridarium Norwegicum
1:411, fig. 69. 1886 and Gartenfl. 1: 521. 1887) show that there
is hardly any difference in habit between these forms of the two
species. It may be reasonably expected, that other plants of this
form of P. rubra will be discovered in time, as the European Snake-
Spruce also has been found many times, usually only in single
plants which undoubtedly originated independently by mutation,
and sometimes in colonies; in the latter case they were probably
seedlings of a single mother tree. The offspring of the Snake-Spruce
represents partly the true snake form and partly forms intermediate

1907] Rehder,—Some Forms of New England Trees 111

between this form and the type of the species; such was at least the
case in a number of seedling plants I saw in the park at Reinhardts-
brunn in the Thuringian Mountains. Trees propagated by graft-
ing are planted occasionally in European gardens. Picea rubra f.
virgata may now likewise be found in some gardens, for Prof. S. F.
Clarke stated in a letter to Prof. C. S. Sargent, that Mr. G. Walker
made cuttings of this Spruce. A grafted plant of this form lived in
the Arnold Arboretum for years but died unfortunately a few years
ago.

BETULA LENTA L. forma laciniata f. n.— Betula lenta “form”
Sanford, RHopora 4:53. (1902.)

A typo differt folis inciso-lobatis, lobis utrinque 6-9 argute ser-
ratis, inferioribus circa 1 cm. longis apicem versus decipientibus et
in serraturas angustas acuminis transeuntibus.

Differs from the type by the incisely lobed leaves. Leaves 6-8
cm. long, subcordate or truncate at the base, long acuminate on
each side with 6-9 ovate-lanceolate, sharply serrate and acuminate
lobes, the lower ones about 1 cm. long and gradually passing into
the sharply serrate apex.

New Hawrsuime: New Boston, Aug. 1901, S. N. F. Sanford
(Herb. Gray) and July 31, 1902, E. W. Morse, (Herb. Arnold Arbore-
tum).

This is interesting as a parallel form to the Old World Betula
pendula f. dalecarlica (L.) C. K. Schneider and Betula alba var. urticifolia
Regel, both of which have been repeatedly found wild in Scandinavia.
Of the form here described only a single tree of about 12 feet height
has been found by Mr. Sanford near New Boston at an altitude of
about 1200 feet as'stated by him in the article referred to above.
Judging from his description as well as from the specimens the tree
possesses ornamental qualities which would make its introduction
into our gardens desirable. This could be easily accomplished by
grafting and this would be done at the Arnold Arboretum, if branches
were sent late in fall or during the winter to this institution.

FAGUS GRANDIFOLIA Ehrh. forma pubescens Fernald & Rehder, f. n.

A typo differt foliis subtus tota facie pilosis sed marginem versus
saepe glabrescentibus, ad venas villosis.

Differs from the type in having the under side of the leaves short-
pubescent, but toward the margin often glabrescent and the veins
covered with a villous pubescence, not with long silky hairs.

112 Rhodora [JuLy

Massacuusetts: South Braintree, May 30, 1907 and Bee Hill near
Williamstown, June 28, 1904, Alfred Rehder. Rope Istanp: Tiver-
ton, Aug. 1879, C. S. Sargent. In cultivation at the Arnold Arboretum
and also in Germany: Muskau (Silesia), Arboretum, July 23, 1901,
Alfred Rehder.

The specimen from Rhode Island approaches the southern form
by its very broad leaves and the somewhat shorter prickles. The
specimens from the Arnold Arboretum from Muskau, which lack the
fruits, are more densely pubescent than the other specimens and. very
like the pubescent form of the southern variety, but the foliage is that
of the northern form.

Though the American Beech is usually considered a very homo-
genous species, the comparison of a large amount of material from
the whole range of the species shows that this is not the case and that
some authors, particularly the younger Michaux, have shown a very
good judgment in distinguishing a northern and a southern Beech and
that furthermore the description by some old authors as Aiton and
Willdenow of the leaves as tomentose or pubescent beneath was quite
correct as regards the technical meaning of these words and did not
refer to the silky hairs of the young leaves. My attention was first
drawn to these variations when I found several years ago a pubescent
form in cultivation in Germany. As I recently consulted the Gray
Herbarium with the intention to pursue the matter further, I learned
from Professor Fernald that he also had made investigations in this
respect, the results of which proved almost identical with the con-
clusions I had reached.

The distinction of the two geographical varieties with pubescent
and glabrous forms presents no difficulties, but the nomenclature
seems somewhat complicated. During the nomenclatural unrest
of the two last decades the names F. americana, F. atropunicea, and
F. latifolia, combinations based on older trinomials, had been sub-
stituted for the well known F. ferruginea by various American authors,
but according to the Vienna rules the oldest binomial available is F.
grandifolia of Ehrhart, which is one year older than Aiton's F. ferru-
ginea. By this nomenclatorial change we avoid the rather awkward
situation that a very rare form should constitute the type of this widely
distributed American tree, for F. ferruginea Aiton is apparently based
on one of the hitherto almost unknown pubescent forms of the Beech.
This is shown by the description ‘‘foliis subtus tomentosis" in Hortus

1907] Rehder,— Some Forms of New England Trees 113

Kewensis and still more conclusively by the manuscript of Solander
for Aiton's Hortus Kewensis, where the habitat is quoted as “Habi-
tat in Marylandia, Jones, in Pennsylvania Math. Hultgren." The
specimen collected by Math. Hultgren in Pennsylvania in 1781 is
still in the herbarium of the British Museum and has according to
Mr. E. G. Baker, to whom we are indebted for a copy of the manu-
script description and a tracing of the specimen, the leaves densely
and softly pubescent beneath. From the published description how-
ever, it seems as if the species were based on Lee's cultivated plant.
Ehrhart's F. grandifolia represents apparently the northern form.
It was described from cultivated plants and Miinchhausen’s F.
americana latifolia and Duroi’s F. sylvatica c. americana latifolia
based also on cultivated plants quoted as synonyms; these were
probably of the same origin as Lee’s plant, which is, according to
Loudon's description and the figure of his F. ferruginea var. latifolia,
the northern form and also according to a specimen in the herbarium
of the Arnold Arboretum collected at Kew and labeled F. ferruginea var.
latifolia (C. Lee & Son). The F. Americana latifolia of Wangenheim
also represents the northern form. Thus the name F. grandifolia
Ehrh. remains with the northern variety as the type and for the south-
ern variety the first available varietal name is F. ferruginea var. caro-
liniana of Loudon. The synonymy and the description of the varieties
and forms to be distinguished may be appended here.

FAGUS GRANDIFOLIA Ehrhart, Beytr. Naturk. 3:22 (1788).— F.
Americana latifolia Muenchhausen, Hausv. 5:162 (1770); Wangen-
heim, Beytr. Forstwiss. 80, pl. 29, fig. 55, (1787).— F. sylvatica c.
Americana latifolia Duroi, Harbk. Baumz. 1: 269 (1771).— F. sylvatica
atropunicea Marshall, Arbust. Am. 22 (1785).— F. sylvatica Schoepf,
Mat. Med. Am. 140 (1757), not Linné.— F. ferruginea Aiton, Hort.
Kew. 3:362 (1789); F. A. Michaux, Hist. Arb. Am. 2:174, pl. 9.
(1812); Rafinesque, New Fl. 3: 80 (1836).— F. sylvestris, A. Michaux,
Flor. Bor. Am. 2:194 (1803).— F. sylvatica B americana, Nuttall,
Gen. 2:216 (1818); Emerson, Trees Mass. ed. 2. 180, pl. (1875).—
F. Americana Sweet, Hort. Brit. 370 (1826); Sargent, Sylv. N. Am.
9: 27, pl. 444 (1896).— F. ferruginea var. latifolia Loudon, Arb. Frut.
Brit. 3:1980. fig. 1916 (1838).— F. atropunicea Sudworth, Bull.
Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 42 (1893).— F. latifolia Sudworth, Nomencl.
Arb. Fl. U. S. 148 (1897).

'The type of the species is characterized by the long and slender

114 Rhodora [Jury

prickles, sometimes nearly 1 cm. long, of the usually ashy gray or
yellowish tomentose involucre, by the thinner texture and more yel-
lowish green color of the distinctly serrate leaves which are usually
cuneate at the base. Of the synonyms quoted above only F. ferruginea
of Michaux and of Rafinesque and F. ferruginea latifolia Loudon refer
to this variety as distinguished expressly from the southern variety. It
is distributed from Nova Scotia to Ontario and Minnesota and in the
mountains as far south as Virginia.

Forma pubescens is described above.

Var. caroliniana Fernald & Rehder, comb. nov.— F. sylvativa Walter,
Fl. Carol. 233 (1788).— F. sylvestris F. A. Michaux, Hist. Arb.
Am. 2:170, pl. 8. (1812).— F. rotundifolia Rafinesque, Atlant. Jour.
177. (1833).— F. alba Rafinesque, New. Flor. 3:80 (1836).— F.
heterophylla Rafinesque, l. c.— F. nigra Rafinesque |. c.— F. fer-
ruginea var. caroliniana Loudon, Arb. Frut. Brit. 3: 1980 fig. 1915
(1838).— F. ferruginea Chapman, Fl. S. U. S. 425 (1860).— F. ameri-
cana Small, Fl. S. E. U. S. 347 (1903).

Differs from the type in the shorter and fewer prickles of the densely
rufous-tomentose involucre; and the generally smaller fruits not exceed-
ing the involucre, the broader usually only denticulate leaves, often
subcordate at the base, at maturity of firmer texture and of a dull
dark bluish green color. The characteristic differences in the fruit
between the northern and the southern variety are well brought out
by the figures of Michaux; and Rafinesque’s description of his F.
Jerruginea as having the “female flowers with many linear smooth
bracts” shows that he, too, noticed this character. Distributed from
New Jersey to Florida and west to southern Illinois, Missouri and
Texas. In the border regions of the range of the northern and south-
ern variety intermediate forms are often found and even in southern
New England trees approaching the southern variety occur.

forma mollis Fernald & Rehder, f. n.—

Differt a varietate ` caroliniana folis subtus tota facie dense et
molliter pubescentibus.

Differs from the variety caroliniana by the densely and softly pubescent
under side of the leaves.

Froripa: Tallahassee, Leon County, Aug. 7-9, 1895 Geo. V.
Nash (No. 2339). Louisiana: New Orleans, 1832, Drummond (no.
318).

The type specimen from Florida has ovate or oval, denticulate

1907] Rehder,— Some Forms of New England Trees 115

leaves distinctly subcordate at the base, while Drummond's specimen
has elliptic-oblong leaves, cuneate at the base, and has no fruits, but
from its range it apparently belongs to the southern and not to the
northern variety. Whether the type of F. ferruginea from Pennsyl-
vania is to be referred to f. pubescens or to f. mollis which seems more
probable, must remain doubtful as long as we do not know the fruits.

Ruvs ryPHINA L. forma Lactintata Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. pt. 4:
73. (1870) as var.; Flor. Atlant. 73 (1879).

Differs from the type by the irregularly incisely dentate or incisely
lobed leaflets which are ovate-oblong to lanceolate and by the leafy
panicles. New Hampshire, near Hanover, 1846, Dr. Rickau (erro-
neously spelled Ricard by Wood). (Herb. Gray.)

Rhus typhina L. forma dissecta, nom. n.— R. typhina var. laciniata
Hort. [Manning] ex Rehder, Móller's Deutsch. Gártner-Zeit. 15: 211.
fig. (1900); Hort. ex Cowell; Bailey’s Cycl. Am. Hort. 4: 1530 (1902).
— R. hirta var. laciniata C. K. Schneider, Ill. Handb. Laubholzk. 2:
154 (1907).

Differs from the type by the bipinnately divided leaves with the
leaflets of the second order linear to linear-lanceolate and entire or
dentate or sometimes even pinnatifid.

MassACHUSETTS, locality unknown; found about 15 years ago
by J. W. Manning of Reading, Mass. and transplanted into his gar-
den.

A very striking form on account of the graceful feathery appearance
of the large (30-45 cm. long) finely dissected leaves. Its ornamental
qualities have won for it a place in many American and European
gardens particularly in more northern latitudes where the similar but
more tender R. glabra var. laciniata Carr. is not hardy enough.

A few words may be said on the specific name which this species
of Rhus has to bear. In 1892 Sudworth (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 19:
81) proposed for it the new combination R. hirta (L.), because Linné,
prior to the publication of his Rhus typhina (Cent. Plant. 2: 14.
1756; Amoen. Acad. 4:311. 1760) had named the same species
Datisca hirta (Spec. Plant. 2: 103. 1753) from an abnormal specimen
with the inflorescence reverting into leaves and with partly confluent
leaflets (see also Britton, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 18: 269). This explains
his placing the plant into an entirely wrong genus. The name R.
hirta, however, cannot be admitted, according to art. 51, 3 of the
Vienna rules of nomenclature, as it is based on a monstrosity.

116 Rhodora [JuLy

ACER RUBRUM L. var. TRIDENS Wood, Class Book Bot. 286. (1860);
Am. Bot. Flor. pt. 4:74. (1870); Flor. Atlant. 24. (1879); Sargent,
Sylva N. Am. 13:11, pl. 626 (1902).— A. rubrum var. B Torrey &
Gray, Flor. N. Am. 1:249 (1838).— A. microphyllum Pax, Bot.
Jahrb. 7: 180 (1886).— A. semiorbiculatum Pax. l. c. 181.— A. rubrum
subsp. microphyllum Wesmael, Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg. 29:29 (1890);
Schwerin, Gartenfl. 42: 166 (1893) as forma — A. rubrum subspec.
microphyllum Wesmael, |. c.; Schwerin, |. c. fig. 38, as forma; Pax,
Engler's Pflanzenreich IV. 163:38 (1902) as forma — A. tomentosum
Pax, Engler's Pflanzenreich IV. 163:38 (1902), not Desfontaines!
and excl. syn. Marshall? and Kirchner?

Differs from the type by having smaller leaves usually only 4 to 8
cm. long and obovate in outline, three-lobed at the apex and narrowed
from below the middle into the rounded base, usually very glaucous
beneath and with long-persistent pubescence, and thick and firm at
maturity. The flowers are sometimes yellow and the fruits usually
smaller.

MassACHUSETTS: near Auburndale, May 17, 1904, M. L. Fernald
& Alfred Rehder. Only one rather large tree was found. "This is
the most northern locality yet observed for the variety whose range
extends south along the Atlantic coast through Florida into eastern
Texas.

In its characteristic form the variety appears well marked, but
intermediate states are often met with and three-lobed leaves are
occasionally found on trees of the typical form and particularly on
stunted trees growing in swamps. In the south occurs a still more

1The quotation Desfontaines, Tabl. Ecol. Bot. ed. 3 (1829) 136 as given by Pax
and also in the Index Kewensis is incorrect; the name without any description
appears only in edition 1 (1804) p. 136; in the second and third edition this name
and likewise the preceding name A. coccineum is omitted and for these two names
A. eriocarpum Michaux substituted. From this it may be inferred that Desfontaines
intended the name tomentosum for A. saccharinum, but even if an herbarium specimen
should still exist and should represent the variety tridens, the name cannot be revived
as it is indisputably a nomen nudum,

?'The quotation of Marshall’s A. glaucum as a synonym of A. tomentosum appears
to be hardly more than a guess, for Marshall's very vague description does not even
clearly show whether he had A. rubrum or A. saccharinum in mind,

3 As Kirchner in his short description of Acer rubrum var. tomentosum (Arb. Muscav,
186. 1864) does not mention the most obvious character, the three-lobed leaves,
and as also Count Schwerin, who made a most careful study of the cultivated Maples,
describes and figures it as a variety with deeply five-lobed leaves (Gartenfl. 42: 165
fig. 50. 1893) chiefly distinguished by the persistent pubescence of the under side of

the leaves and the intensely red flowers, I do not think it advisable to consider
Kirchner's name as a synonym of var. tridens.

1907] Reynolds,— Flora of the Great Swamp of Rhode Island 117

extreme form in which the two lateral lobes are reduced to large
teeth, so that the leaves appear undivided and only coarsely dentate
and are then ovate to ovate-oblong in shape. To this form belong
the following two specimens: FLortpa, Chapman (herb. Gray) and
Mississippi, Enterprise May 6, 1880 (herb. Arnold Arboretum).
Considering the sporadic distribution of the variety tridens through
the range of the species and the inconstancy of its characters as is
clearly shown by a large number of specimens, one cannot consent
to its elevation to specific rank, as was done by Pax, who in his earlier
monograph distinguished even two species, A. microphyllum with
smaller leaves very glaucous beneath and with the petiole shorter
than the limb and A. semiorbiculatum with larger leaves, green (!)
beneath and with the petiole longer than the limb, each species based
apparently on a single specimen, collected by Kinn in “Am. bor."
without indication of the locality. In his later monograph he reduces
the latter species to a form of A. rubrum*and substitutes for A. micro-
phyllum the name A. tomentosum.

ARNOLD ARBORETUM.

THE FLORA OF THE GREAT SWAMP OF RHODE
ISLAND.

ERNEST SHAW REYNOLDS.

Tue Great Swamp of Rhode Island is a region which has long been
recognized by botanists as offering a very rich collecting ground, and
has often been visited by students of botany. The swamp is located
in the southern part of the state, in Washington County, close to the
junction of the town lines of Charlestown, Richmond, and South
Kingstown. The larger part lies in South Kingstown, though a part of
the western half is in the adjoining town of Richmond. It is entirely
enclosed between the parallels 41° 25’ and 41° 30’ while the meridian
71? 35' cuts the swamp area into two nearly equal portions. Excluding
the part south of Worden's Pond, the swamp area covers about six
square miles, which is the largest tract of land in Rhode Island bearing
a swamp flora.

118 Rhodora [JuLy

There are, in Washington County, at least fifty large and small
swamps, and many more lakes and ponds. A large number of these
are located in the glacial drift, which covers large areas in the state,
and their origin can undoubtedly be traced to the glacial period.
The topographical features surrounding the Great Swamp are espe-
cially favorable to the development of a swamp. West and northwest
of the region, the land is well elevated above the level of Narragansett
Bay, and the soil, Gloucester stony loam,’ is porous and easily drained.
The soil north and east of the swamp is of glacial origin and the land
also well elevated. To the south there is a combination of soils, some
of glacial origin, and some derived from the country rock. ‘The
elevations here are not so marked as on the other sides. The swamp
itself, therefore, is in a basin at least a hundred feet lower than the
surrounding country, and often more. Within the Great Swamp
area there are two hills, a little over one hundred and fifty feet in
height, which partly traverse the swamp in a north and south direction,
thus offering a ready means of entering the area. On the southern
edge is Worden's Pond ninety four feet above sea level and at no
point more than a few feet deep. Its total length is not over two
miles, and it is a little less than a mile and a quarter wide. Passing
through the swamp, and entering the pond from the north are two
streams, the larger called the Chipuxet River. Cutting the western
half into two nearly equal divisions and serving as a boundary between
the towns of South Kingstown and Richmond, is the Usquepaugh River,
which eventually empties into the Pawcatuck River. Swampy land
extends on both sides of these rivers for a mile and a half north of the
Great Swamp proper.

The records of former botanical work done in this area are rather
scattered and difficult to obtain. The most valuable data of course,
are from the collections of Olney and Bennett which are largely in the
Brown University Herbarium. Besides these there are scattered
specimens from the collections of George Hunt, W. W. Bailey, J. W.
Congdon and George A. Leland, all of whom have made trips into the
swamp at rare intervals. There is no systematic record so far as known
to me, of the flora of the Great Swamp region, and only occasional
reference is made to it in Bennett’s list of Rhode Island Plants, when
he includes it in his reference to “South Kingstown.” In two of Mr.

1 See Soil Survey of R. I. by F. E. Bonsteel and E. P. Carr, Washington, 1905.
i

1907] Reynolds,— Flora of the Great Swamp of Rhode Island 119

Olney's field note-books which are now in the possession of the Brown
University Herbarium, there are notes of three trips into the swamp.
These are recorded as occurring in 1846 and 1847. Without doubt
other trips were made, but no more records were found. ‘There are
none of Mr. Bennett's notes accessible except his list already mentioned.
In a letter recently received from the Hon. J. W. Congdon of Seattle,
Washington, who formerly collected extensively in the swamp region,
there are some interesting notes of his recollections of the area. Most
of the plants he mentions were collected also by the writer last summer.
He speaks of the relative abundance of Habenaria ciliaris and H.
blephariglottis as well as of Gaylussacia dumosa. Besides these he
gives a list of the Utricularias he has found there, namely Utricularia
biflora, clandestina, gibba, cornuta, resupinata, and subulata. Growing
in the muddy part of Worden's Pond were Orontium aquaticum
Lachnanthes capitata, Xyris caroliniana, Sabbatia chloroides, Lobelia
Dortmanna, Juncus militaris, Rhynchospora macrostachya, and R.
jusca. Mr. Leland has also kindly furnished me with a list of a few
plants which he has from that area: — Linum usitatissimum, Utri-
cularia intermedia, U. inflata, Polygonum acre, P. dumetorum var.
scandens, P. Careyi, P. hydropiperoides, Vaccinium pallidum, and V.
atrococcum.

During the latter part of August, 1906, the writer was able to make
eight trips into the swamp from different directions as briefly indicated
below: —

1. The marshy land on the west side of the Chipuxet River about
a half a mile south of the Narragansett Pier R. R.

2. The corresponding swamp east of the Chipuxet near Larkin's
pond.

3. The swamp between the Shickasheen River and the N. Y.
N. H. & H. track, for a couple of miles south of the Kingstown station.

4. A similar region west of the Shickasheen River.

5. 'The portion of the swamp lying between the two hills already
mentioned.

6. Astrip of swamp land including the Fighting Ground and south
of that to the Shickasheen River.

7. The northeast corner of Worden's Pond, and the swamp near by.

8. Portions of the pond itself and of the eastern shore.

It is difficult to determine the exact distribution of plants in an area

1:908

120 Rhodora [JuLy

which, like the Great Swamp, is largely at the same level throughout.
Thus the one hundred foot contour line marks in general the strictly
swampy area, and Worden’s Pond, which drains the swamp, is only
ninety four feet above sea level, so that there is a dip of less than ten
feet from north to south. There are, however, certain features which
aid us in the matter. There are at least two important streams which
pass through the swamp, the Chipuxet river, and the Shickasheen
immediately west of the main railroad. This gives two different types
of water areas viz. running and semi-stagnant, which of course merge
imperceptibly into one another. A third type includes the two ponds,
Worden’s and Larkin’s, which have a flora different in certain ways
from either of the other two types. The temperature of the water was
noticeably warmer in the swamp than along the river courses. Cer-
tain plants, though included in the swamp area, show a decided
tendency to seek the drier portions, such as Lespedeza frutescens and
Rhexia Virginica. The latter of these seemed to grow more luxuri-
antly, as a rule, in the wetter situations though the individuals were

markedly fewer in number than in drier places. On the other hand
many plants were decidedly attracted to the free water courses. A
few such plants were Lobelia cardinalis, Lycopus Virginicus and
notably Bidens laevis. The latter grew so abundantly along the
streams of colder water that its dark foliage clearly marked them.
The majority of the plants grow between the higher land and the
rivers, seeming to prefer the open sunny places. The Droseras are
in the less soggy parts and grow oftentimes on the dead Sphagnum.
Sarracenia purpurea, Xyris caroliniana and X. flexuosa as well as a
host of others inhabit these localities.

It is an interesting matter to find that, even in this formation, which
is usually supposed to be especially favorable to monocotyledonous
plants, aside from Carex the number of species is only about a third
of the total number of Phanerogams found in the swamp. Hence

veven in the most favorable locations the Monocotyledons are outnum-
bered more than two to one. A large part of the swamp is heavily
wooded. This is especially true of the area included between the
Chipuxet River and the easternmost hill already mentioned. Here
the deciduous trees predominate, though there are several groves of
evergreens also. Rhododendron maximum grows in great luxuriance
in this portion of the swamp.

In the following list of plants collected in the Great Swamp during

1907] Reynolds,— Flora of the Great Swamp of Rhode Island 121

August, 1906, no name has been admitted if an authentic specimen
was found in any of the Rhode Island Herbaria examined. Hence
only about half of the plants collected are here recorded. A specimen
of each species is in the writer's herbarium, and duplicates of the
majority are also in the Brown University Herbarjum.

Prants Nor HITHERTO RECORDED IN THE GREAT SWAMP FLORA.

Dryopteris noveboracensis (L.) Gray. Spiranthes gracilis (Bigel.) Beck.

= simulata Davenp.

= spinulosa (Retz.) Kuntze.

^ Thelypteris (L.) Gray.
Lycopodium complanatum L.

x lucidulum Michx.

i obscurum L.
Sparganium americanum Nutt.
Sagittaria Engelmanniana J. G. Smith.

E latifolia Willd.
Calamagrostis ^ cinnoides
Scribn.
Glyceria canadensis (Michx.) Trin.
obtusa (Muhl.) Kuntze.
‘Dulichium arundinaceum (L.) Britton.
Eriophorum virginicum L.
Fimbristylis capillaris (L.) Gray.
Arisaema triphyllum (L.) Torr.
Xyris flecuosa Muhl.
Eriocaulon septangulare L.
Pontederia cordata L.
2i " var. lancifolia Mo-
rong.
Juncus brevicaudatus (Engelm.) Fer-
nald.
Juncus canadensis J. Gay.
“ marginatus Rostk.
* — pelocarpus E. Mey.
* — tenuis Willd. var. Williamsu
Fernald.
Medeola virginiana L.
Trillium cernuum L.
» undulatum Willd.
Hypoxis erecta L.
Cypripedium acaule Ait.
Habenaria blephariglottis(Willd.) Torr.
" clavellata (Michx.) Spreng.
i psycodes (L.) Gray.

(Muhl.)

Goodyera pubescens (Willd.) R.,Br.
Myrica asplenijolia L.
Boehmeria cylindrica (L.) Willd.
Polygonum arifolium L.

t pennsylvanicum L.
Persicaria L.

i sagittatum L.

" punctatum Ell.
Lychnis alba Mill.
Spergula arvensis L.
Nymphaea odorata Dryand.
Nuphar advena (Soland.) R. Br.
Coptis trifolia (L.) Salisb.
Drosera intermedia Haynes.

“rotundifolia L.

Baptisia tinctoria (L.) R. Br.
Medicago sativa L.
Trijolium hybridum L.
Desmodium canadense DC.

d: ciliare (Muhl.) DC.
K paniculatum (L.) DC.
É rigidum DC.

Lespedeza capitata Michx.
i jrutescens (L.) Britton.
Oxalis corniculata L.
Polygala Nuttallii T. & G.
e polygama Walt.
Euphorbia maculata L.
Rhus copallina L.
Hypericum boreale (Britton) Bicknell.
, canadense L.

E gentianoides (L.) BSP.

d maculatum Walt.
^ virginicum L.
Viola pedata L.

Chamaenerium angustifolium (L.)
Scop.

122 Rhodora

Oenothera biennis L.
Kneiffia pumila (L.) Spach.
Aralia hispida Vent.
Cicuta bulbifera L.
maculata L.
Sium cicutaefolium Gmel.
Cornus Amonum Mill.
Clethra alnifolia L.
Chimaphila umbellata (L.) Nutt.
A maculata (L.) Pursh.

Rhododendron nudiflorum (L.) Torr.

Kalmia latifolia L.
Lysimachia quadrifolia L.
Bartonia virginica (L.) BSP.
Asclepias pulchra Ehrh.
Verbena hastata L.
Scutellaria lateriflora L.
Brunella vulgaris L.
Koellia virginiana (L.) Mac M.
Lycopus americanus Muhl.

* virginicus L.
Mentha arvensis L.

PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND.

(JULY

Ilysanthes attenuata (Muhl.) Small.

" gratioloides (L.) Benth.
Gerardia paupercula (Gray) Britton.

ox purpurea L.
Plantago aristata Michx.
Cephalanthus occidentalis L.
Galium asprellum Michx.
Viburnum cassinoides L.

T dentatum L.
Campanula aparinoides Pursh.
Lobelia cardinalis L.

“ inflata L.
Vernonia noveboracensis (L.) Willd.
Chrysopsis falcata (Pursh) El.
Solidago odora Ait.

S puberula Nutt.

' ulignosa Nutt.
Anaphalis margaritacea (L.) B. & H.
Leontodon autumnale L.
Hieracium Gronovii L.

yji scabrum Michx.

THE RETROGRADE COLOR VARIETIES OF
GRATIOLA AUREA.

HARLEY HARRIS BARTLETT.

AT Winter Pond in Winchester, Massachusetts, occurs one of the
most typical examples of what Blankinship designates in his “‘ Plant-
formations of Eastern Massachusetts" as the ** Sand-Pond Margin
Formation." Its flora is here unusually well developed, containing
in addition to the plants enumerated by Blankinship about twenty
others, equally characteristic of the formation. One of these, Gratiola
aurea Muhl., occupies considerable areas of the low, gravelly shore,
frequently to the almost complete exclusion of other plants. It occurs
here not only in its typical golden-yellow-flowered form, but also in
two well marked color forms the flowers of which are respectively
honey-yellow and white.

1907] Bartlett, — Retrograde Color Varieties of Gratiola aurea 123

Two published references to these forms have been found, the earlier
of them, in John Robinson's **Flora of Essex County, Massachusetts,"
to the effect that “There is a white variety of this species which grows
in Bowler Swamp, Lynn," the other, in Dame and Collins's ‘Flora of
Middlesex County, Massachusetts," to the effect that ‘‘The white
variety has been found at Winchester by W. H. Manning; both the
white and light yellow varieties at Westfield, by Dr. Swan." In the
Gray Herbarium there is a sheet of specimens collected by Dr. Swan
in a swamp near Lowell, Mass., on which is written, in Dr. Gray's
hand,— “Gratiola aurea vars. Ordinary golden-yellow. Pale yellow!
White-flowered! in small quantity."

The two forms, as observed at Winter Pond, are absolutely distinct,
without intermediates linking them either to the parent form or to
each other. They occur in pure colonies, several of which have been
under observation for three years, during which time they have been
visited at various dates between July Ist and Sept. 15th, an interval
which practically covers the flowering period of the species. Never
has the honey-colored form been found in a white colony, nor vice
versa, although this might be expected to happen occasionally through
the casualties of seed dispersal.

The forms may be named: Gratiola aurea f. helveola f. nov. a forma
typica recedit floribus albogilvis, corollae limbo quam tubo pallidiore.
— Type (in Herb. Gray) collected by Dr. C. W. Swan at a swamp
near Lowell, Mass. Gratiola aurea f. leucantha f. nov. a forma typica
floribus clare albis differt.— Type (in Herb. Gray) Bartlett 820, Winter
Pond, Winchester, Mass., 7 July 1907.

'The significance of these forms (retrograde varieties of de Vries)
as throwing light upon the origin of specific distinctions is clear at
once when the flower-color of the other American species of $ Gratio-
laria is examined. (The often purple-flowered $ Sophronanthe may
be left out of consideration on the ground of its great habital diversity.)
We find: I) Species with golden-yellow flowers, — G. aurea Muhl.,
G. Torreyi Small and G. pusilla Torr. II) Species with flowers
merely yellowish, the limb often white or whitish,—G. gracilis Benth.,
G. floridana Nutt., G. virginiana L., G. viscosa Schwein., G. Drum-
mondii Benth. G. ramosa Walt. and G. ebracteata Benth. III) Species
with white flowers, — G. sphaerocarpa Ell. and G.macrantha Chapm.

F. helveola corresponds to the second section in the.above grouping,
f. leucantha to the third. The golden-yellow color of the first group

124 s Rhodora [Jury

is the resultant of two yellow elements, by the loss of which, either
together or singly, retrogression may take place.

"MEETING OF THE JosseLYN BoranicaL SocrETY.— The thir-
teenth field meeting of the Josselyn Botanical Society of Maine
was held at Oxford, Maine, from July Ist to 6th. Owing to var-
ious circumstances, there was a very small attendance, but those
present found ample material to reward their efforts. The localities
of especial interest were the low woods and sandy plains surrounding
Whitney Pond, the rocky wooded shores of Thompson Lake, and the
extensive arbor-vitae swamps in the town of Norway. The local
botanists were very kind in pointing out localities of special interest;
Mr. George R. Howe of Norway placing on exhibition his large collec-
tion of gems, insects, and other objects of natural history, as well as
guiding the party on the trip to the Norway bogs. Mr. W. L. Bacon
showed a large collection of the ferns of the region, including many
of more than local interest.

A list of all the flowering plants and ferns seen or collected has been
kept, and will be published later; the following list, therefore, repre-
sents only the plants of unusual interest. On the sand-plain near
Whitney Pond large patches of Lupinus perennis, L., were found with
Corylus Americana, Walt. and Convolvulus spithamaeus, L. This is
the first undoubted station for the Lupine in Maine, the record pre-
viously depending upon a report in the first edition of the Portland
Catalog, (1868). Stations for Aspidium cristatum clintonianum, D.
C. E., Habenaria blephariglottis, Torr., Medicago denticulata Willd., and
Erodium cicutarium, L'Her., were found in Oxford; on the Norway
trip, Cystopteris bulbijera, Bernh., Cyprepedium spectabile, Salisb.,
Habenaria hyperborea, R. Br., and Arceuthobium pusillum, Peck.
were found in abundance. The Dwarf Mistletoe was also found in a
bog in Casco, Cumberland Co., with Woodwardia Virginica, Smith,
and two plants of Habenaria macrophylla, Goldie, were secured in
Otisfield.— Epwarp B. CHAMBERLAIN, Cumberland Center, Maine.

Vol. 9, no. 102, including pages 93 to 108 and plates 74 and 75 was
issued 29 June, 1907.

c NE

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. August, 1907. No. 104.

A PARTIAL LIST OF CONNECTICUT DIATOMS WITH
SOME ACCOUNT OF THEIR DISTRIBUTION IN
CERTAIN PARTS OF THE STATE.

WILLIAM A. TERRY.

CONNECTICUT is rich in diatoms, both in quantity and variety, and
fossil deposits are abundant, both of fresh water and marine. The
very ancient deposits like those of Virginia and Maryland cannot be
expected here, as the great ice sheet during glacial times swept all such
as may have existed into the sea, but the time since then has been
sufficient for the accumulation of a vast store of material of which
very little has ever been investigated. I have found eleven fresh
water deposits in Bristol, varying in size from a few rods in diameter
to many acres; one in the northern part of the town, ‘‘No. 11," covers
fifteen acres and possibly much more. The diatomaceous stratum
of these deposits is generally three to four feet below the surface, and
in the larger deposits averages about two feet in depth, but in No. 11
it is of unknown depth; I have material from ten and a half feet
below the surface, showing about seven feet of diatoms to this point;
it is especially interesting as it contains numbers of the beautiful
Cyclotella antiqua W. Sm., which is very rare in this country; all
correspondents to whom I have sent it report that they had never
seen it before. Dr. Ward sent me a slide with this label from Prof.
H. L. Smith’s collection which is in his possession, but the forms
shown were not the same. The specimens from which Van Heurck
made his drawings for his Synopsis must have been very inferior to
the Bristol specimens in beauty.

In New Britain Mr. W. R. Stone discovered a fossil deposit in which
I found a new Stauroneis, the outline of which resembled that of .

s

126 Rhodora [AvavsT

Navicula amphirhyncus Ehrenb., but exhibited an oblique stauros.
This might appropriately have been called obliqua, but as Gregory
had appropriated this name for an entirely different and much smaller
form, I named it S. nova britannica, and it was so published in Dr.
Bigelow’s Observer. Gregory’s form was not strictly a Stauroneis;
it Was a very small stauroneiform Scoliopleura, and its stauros was
not oblique. This New Britain Stawroneis is the most rare species
of which I have any knowledge; Mr. Stone’s original gathering con-
tained some hundreds, perhaps thousands of specimens, but on sub-
sequent investigation no more could be found; they were probably
confined to a very thin stratum of the deposit which was not identified,
and further exploration is difficult if not impossible as the ground is
covered with buildings. .

Connecticut waters also are rich in living diatoms, and recent
deposits abound. Nearly every lake and pond has its bottom covered
with a soft ooze, which is filled with diatoms and is often two or more
feet in thickness. The margins of rivers, ditches in the marshes, and
the bottoms of small streams and rills in springy mountain pastures,
furnish them in abundance. A small stream in a marshy pasture on
Fall Mountain in Bristol has an abundant colony of the large variety
of Stauroneis acuta W. Sm., many times larger than the type of Wm.
Smith. I have a slide sent me by Prof. H. L. Smith which he assured
me was part of the original gathering from which 'T'uffen West made
the drawing of S. acuta for Smith's British Diatomaceae; this is the
same as the Pleurotaenium acutum of other authors, and is distinctly
different from the large Bristol Stawroneis. In the colony I find
another Sfauroneis which is quite remarkable; it is longer and more
cylindrical than the other species, has a broad stauros and rounded
ends with a large saucer-shaped pseudonodule near each end of the
upper valve but none on the lower valve. Next to the New Britain
Stauroneis this is the most rare of all our species of diatoms. They
may be gathered in hundreds from a space of about thirty feet on this
brook, but they are so much outnumbered by other species with them
that it is difficult to find them after they are collected; I have found
a single specimen in each of three widely separated ponds in Bristol,
but they are known nowhere else. Dr. Ward named this species
Stauroneis Terryi. ln another small stream on Fall Mountain, Mr.
W. C. Richards found a colony of Navicula elliptica Kütz., notable
for abundance and size of individuals.

,

1907] Terry,— Partial List of Connecticut Diatoms 127

In five different ponds in Bristol I have found an abundance of a
new Surirella, and in one of these ponds it is the predominating form.
It is about the size of S. gracilis A. Schm., but not so alate, and with
rounded ends, costa distinct, reaching the median line, which is
strongly marked; most specimens have a slight spiral twist. It occurs
in two types, one greatly elongated. The living frustules are some-
times covered with coarse granulations that do not come off in the
acid treatment, but are removed by the soda. Prof. H. L. Smith
wrote me “This Surirella is certainly new and much more deserving
of a specific name than many others." Dr. Ward named it Surirella
Terryi. I have found this species abundant in one small pond in
New Britain and in one at Leete’s Island, but in all other localities
known to me it is extremely rare. In Birge’s Pond in Bristol are
countless numbers of a very peculiar abnormal form of Surirella. It
is a double frustule in which the two inner valves are grown together
with a perforation through the center where the protoplasm of the
two cells joins. This opening is sometimes a mere raphe or cleft,
more often it is a long narrow slit with smooth edges, but generally
it is a large irregular orifice with corrugated sides. This peculiarity
is most abundant in Surirella elegans Ehrenb., but frequent in S. cardi-
nalis Kitton, and occasional, in S. splendida (Ehrenb.) Kütz. I found
it first in S. striatula Turpin in an artificial culture of material from
West River, New Haven. Mr. Richards brought me mud from a
pond in Wallingford, in which I found it abundant in S. saxonica
Auersw.; I have seen it in S. tenera Greg. and S. fastuosa Ehrenb.,
and have found it in Plymouth and in Derby. An illustrated de-
scription was published in Tempére’s Micrographe Préparateur.!

Nearly every marsh with a level surface covers a deposit of diatoms,
and the salt marshes of the Connecticut shore are no exceptions. All
of these that I have examined lie above a marine deposit, which
generally appears like clay, but always contains diatoms and is some-
times quite rich. The ancient channel of Leete's Island from Great
Harbor on the south around to Shell Beach on the north, is one im-
mense mass of marine deposit, in some places fifty feet thick. When
the railroad crossing it was changed from a trestle to an embankment,
the pressure of the great bank of earth forced out the marine mud

1 W. A. Terry, Sur un étrange mode de développement chez le genre Surirella, Le
Micrographe Préparateur, Vol. XIII, p. 57, 1905.

128 Rhodora [AuGuST

below it which rose up in-great banks on each side of the railroad.
All this material contained diatoms, and some of it was very rich,
especially in number and rarity of species. I dug up material from
about twelve feet below the surface, and found a stratum rich in the
beautiful Surirella Febigerii Lewis and other rare kinds. One pound
of this earth furnished diatoms enough to make several thousand
slides, each slide containing thousands of diatoms. The marine
deposit in these marshes is sometimes near the surface, and is thrown
out in digging ditches, and always in quantities in preparing the
foundations for the abutments of bridges. From the earth thrown
out in digging a post-hole for a fence on the margin of the marsh near
Branford Station I procured a supply of Campylodiscus echineis
Ehrenb. The Quinnipiac marshes are large, and along their western
margin is a series of clay pits from which the tide water is kept out by
dikes. The diatomaceous deposit here is of no great thickness but has
a very interesting collection of species. At Davis pit the clay is
covered by a layer of sand, upon which rests a stratum of alluvium,
which contains fresh water diatoms exclusively; these are mostly
decayed and broken, those entire being chiefly Navicula lata Bréb.,
with a few of the large Stauroneis acuta and Navicula Semen Ehrenb.
Upon the alluvium is a mass of loam containing the roots and stumps
of trees with their trunks and branches beside them, the whole covered
with the marine deposit, which extends upward through about four
feet of coarse peat.

At many places along the Connecticut shore the ancient marine
deposit projects through the bank of sand forming the beach, and is
visible at low tide, the huge bank of sand being a superficial structure
cast up by the sea and resting upon the ancient deposit. All these
salt marshes were once open water, and the sea is now coming back
upon them and swallowing up the land. Some of the pond holes in
these marshes are deep, with a bottom of soft mud; these are often the
remains of former open water, and are always rich in diatoms, fre-
quently very different from those of the neighboring waters. Here
is the home of the large Pleurosigma balticum, the very large Amphi-
prora pulchra Bail, the larger type of Surirella striatula, Scolio-
pleura, Amphora, and a variety of rare forms.

In a pond hole of the marshes of Morris Creek I found a new
Pleurosigma, quite large, in Morris Creek another, not quite so large.
On the rocks near the tide gate were masses of Melosira Borreri Grev.,

: 1907] Terry,— Partial List of Connecticut Diatoms 129

looking in the water like enormous sponges, but collapsing when
gathered into a rope of harsh feeling filament, about two feet long,
which held great numbers of other diatoms, among them another
new Pleurosigma, quite small. I sent all three to Tempére, he passed
them on to Peragallo, who published illustrated descriptions of them
in his monograph ! which is now the accepted standard for Pleuro-
sigma. Peragallo named the largest one P. Terryanum, the second
P. Americanum, and the third P. paradoxum. He describes the first
as having the outline of P. strigilis W. Sm., but the striation of P.
balticum; the second having the outline of P. elongatum W. Sm.,
but striation of P. decorum W. Sm.; and the third was named P.
paradoxum because the least approximate of its series of striae was the
most difficult to resolve. I afterwards found P. Terryanwm more
abundant and larger in a broad ditch at Quinnipiac, and in a pond
at Leete's Island. Its natural habitat is in brackish water fed by
fresh water springs and too nearly fresh to support P. balticum. With
this is often found P. elongatum, and also the robust type of Surirella
striatula and a peculiar variety of Navicula permagna (Bail.) Ehrenb.
The normal type of N. permagna is abundant in Oyster River, Wood-
mont. The species of Pleurosigma are found with it at Leete's Island,
and also a remarkable colony of Navicula maculata Bail., which occurs
here in great abundance, and in three distinct types; the largest is
extremely rare elsewhere, the second found occasionally along the
Connecticut shore, and the third and smallest is the most common.
I have it from the New Jersey shore and from Cuxhaven, North Sea.
A much smaller variety but with coarser puncta is found in Alabama.
The typical P. Terryanum is the largest Pleurosigma that I find in
Connecticut; P. Americanum is abundant in tidal creeks; in the
marsh on the West Haven side of West River, on the muddy slop-
ing bank of a ditch, I have seen at low tide a brown film about two
feet wide and a hundred feet long, which consisted almost entirely
of living frustules of P. Americanum. P. paradoxum is most abun-
dant in Morris Creek, occasional elsewhere. Morris Creek is also the
habitat of Actinocyclus Barkleyi (Ehrenb.) Grun., which is living here
in abundance. I have it also in considerable numbers from the Thames
river above Norwich in material sent me by Mr. G. R. Lumsden of
Greenville.

1 Peragallo, Monographie du genre Pleurosigma, Le Diatomiste, Vol. I.

130 Rhodora [AucUsT -

At Branford I find Ditylum Brightwellii (West) Grun.; the draw-
ings in books show this with long central spine with abrupt termination,
without finish; the Branford specimens have a longer spine terminating
in a knob or ball, which indicates that the specimens from which the
figures were made were broken. Nitzschia scalaris (Ehrenb.) W. Sm.
grows abundantly in the brackish water of many of the pond holes
of the salt marshes. Pond’s Point at Milford is a rounded projection
where the southward trend of the shore changes abruptly to west.
'The beach is composed of large cobblestones and boulders upon a
coarse gravel. On its southern margin is visible at low tide a bank
of fossil mud, which is firm enough to resist the action of the waves,
and is being gradually uncovered as the mass of stones is driven back
by storms. A stratum near the upper part of this bank is very rich
in diatoms, showing an unusual combination of marine and brackish
water forms of more than one hundred species. Coscinodiscus,
Actinoptychus, Triceratium, Amphitetras, Eupodiscus, with a dozen
species of Pleurosigma occur, while the abundance of the brackish
water form of Surirella striatula and Navicula permagna, with Scolio-
pleura, Amphora, Amphiprora and Nitzschia scalaris (Ehrenb.) W. Sm.
show this mud to have once formed the bottom of a pond hole in the
marsh; the fresh water spring that fed it still flows over it, and can be
seen at low tide. The pressure of the great bank of stones which
rested upon it during the time it was being driven over by the sea has
crushed to fragments most of the delicate species, but enough remain
to show conclusively its character. The marine species mentioned
above can be found generally in deep water all along the Connecticut
shore, while the different varieties of Navicula lyra Ehrenb. and the
Pleurosigmas are most abundant in shallow water. I have P. inter-
medium W. Sm. abundant in the deep water of Clinton, and the very
rare Navicula Lewisiana Grev. in shallow water at Bridgeport. P.
balticum is the most abundant species of the genus, and has many
varieties, the largest being found in the salt marshes, the normal type
in coves and bays, and the smallest in deep water. P. affine Grun.
is the most universally distributed being found everywhere along the
shore but not generally in great abundance. It is very often mistaken
for P. angulatum W. Sm., although striation is very different. P.
angulatum is frequent but local. A ditch in the Quinnipiac marshes
through which flows at low tide a strong stream of nearly fresh water
is carpeted with a dense growth of Biddulphia levis Ehrenb., and near

1907] Terry,— Partial List of Connecticut Diatoms 181

this is a colony of large and very active Bacillaria paradoxa (Gmel.)
Grun. Another colony of this species in Morris Creek marsh, although
in constant motion, was covered with a parasitic growth of Lepto-
thrix, and was accompanied by numerous rapidly revolving filaments
of Spirulina.

In fresh water the most abundant genus is Pinnularia W. Sm.; it
is found in quantities almost everywhere. Next to this in numbers
is the genus Sfauroneis, then Cymbella, Surirella, Navicula, and
numerous filamentous forms. Although these genera are represented
in nearly every pond, yet each pond shows a combination characteristic
of itself, and types of the same species vary greatly in the different
ponds. In several ponds in Bristol Surirella elegans is very large and
sometimes much elongated; in Plymouth it is smaller and much
shorter in proportion; in Highland Lake, Winsted, beautifully typical
specimens of S. nobilis W. Sm. are abundant, and in several ponds in
Connecticut Navicula peripunctata Brun abounds; Prof. Brun
founded the species on specimens in mud from Crane Pond, Grove-
land, Massachusetts, but it is more plentiful in Bristol and in Leete’s
Island. Van Heurck states that Achnanthidium flexellum (Kiitz.)
Bréb. is rare; it is abundant in two of the Bristol fossil deposits. He
also gives Fragilaria Harrisonii Grun as very rare; this grows abun-
dantly in Bristol. Dr. Ward found a new diatom in one of my slides
from the Connecticut shore, which Cleve named Caloneis Ward.
Mr. O. E. Shaffer sent a find of Nitzschia to Europe from Port Town-
send, Puget Sound, and Cleve named this N. Shafferi; I had previously
found this nearly twenty vears ago at Morris Creek, and reported it
at the time in the Amer. Micr. Journal as N. curvula. I find Isthmia
nervosa Kütz. in nearly évery deep water sounding from off the Con-
necticut shore, but do not believe that it grows here; it is probably
brought in by ocean currents from warmer waters.

List or SPECIES.

The arrangement of this list is that of De Toni, Sylloge Algarum,
and the nomenclature for the most part follows that work. Names
given as synonyms are those that have been used by the writer either
in published notes or with material distributed. Species marked
with a star were founded on Connecticut material.

Navicula nobilis (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Common.

132

Rhodora ` [AvausT

Navicula var. dactylus (Ehrenb.) VH. (N. dactylus Kütz.) Abun-

[11

dant everywhere.
gigas (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Common.
major Kütz. Abundant everywhere.
viridis (Nitzsch) Kütz. Abundant everywhere.
cardinalis Ehrenb. Frequent, local, Bristol.
yarrensis Grun. Occasional.
divergens (W. Sm.) Ralfs. Frequent, local, Bristol.
longa (Greg.) Ralfs. Frequent.
lata Bréb. Frequent.
borealis (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Frequent, local, Bristol.
directa Ralfs. Occasional.
Brebissonii Kütz. Frequent, local, Bristol.
Tabellaria Kütz. Frequent, local.
gibba (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Frequent, local, Bristol.
Legumen Ehrenb. Occasional.
polyonca Bréb. Frequent.
peregrina (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Common.
semen Ehrenb. Frequent, local, Bristol.
zostereti Grun. Rare, Morris Creek.
rhyncocephala Kütz. Occasional.
cancellata Donk. Frequent, local, Fort Hale.
fortis (Greg.) Grun. Occasional.
digito-radiata (Greg.) Ralfs. Occasional.
distans (W. Sm.) Ralfs. Occasional.
brasiliensis Grun. Frequent.
crabro (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Frequent.
interrupta (Bail.) Kütz. Frequent.
didyma Ehrenb. Common.
bombus (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Occasional.
Smithii Bréb. Frequent.
fusca (Greg.) Ralfs. Frequent.
advena A. Schm. Occasional.
elliptica Kütz. Occasional.
“ var. oblongella (Nàg.) VH. (N. oblongella Näg.)
Occasional.
lyra Ehrenb. Locally abundant.
pygmaea Kütz. Local.
Jorcipata Grev. Occasional, New Haven Harbor.
caribaea Cleve. Occasional, New Haven Harbor.
approximata Grey. Occasional, New Haven Harbor.
irrorata Grev. Occasional.
praetexta Ehrenb. Occasional.
Hennedyi W. Sm. Occasional, Leete’s Island.
clavata Greg. Occasional.
polysticta Grev. Occasional, New Haven Harbor.
hibernica O'M. Occasional.

TURN me
teat fit

1907]

Navicula
é&

Terry,— Partial List of Connecticut Diatoms 133

aspera Ehrenb. Occasional.
californica var. campeachiana Grun. Occasional.
circumsecta Grun. Occasional.
tuscula Ehrenb. Rare, local, Bristol.
erucicola (W. Sm.) Donk. Local.
palpebralis Bréb. Occasional.
Fischeri A. Schm. Occasional.
arabica Grun. Occasional.
humerosa Bréb. Frequent.
tumescens Grun. Common.
marina Ralfs. Occasional.
pusilla W. Sm. | Local, Quinnipiac.
latissima Greg. Rare.
kamorthensis Grun. Rare, Stony Creek.
cuspidata Kütz. Frequent, local, Bristol.
sphaerophora Kütz. Rare, local, Bristol.
serians (Bréb.) Kütz. Frequent, local, Bristol.
jormosa Greg. Frequent.
permagna (Bail.) Edw. Occasional; abundant at Wood-
mont. .
elegans W. Sm. Occasional.
limosa Kütz. Occasional.
iridis Ehrenb. Common. i
* var. Amphigomphus (Ehrenb.) VH. (N. amphi-
gomphus Ehrenb.) Local.
* — var. producta (W. Sm.) VH. (N. producta W. Sm.)
Occasional.
* var. amphirhynchus (Ehrenb.) De Toni. (N. amphi-
rhynchus Ehrenb.) Local.
firma Kütz. Common.
Hiteheockii Ehrenb. Rare, local, Bristol.
liber W. Sm. Occasional.
americana Ehrenb. Rare, local, Bristol.
bacillum Ehrenb. Local.
Powellii Lewis. Occasional.
columnaris Ehrenb. Common.
esox (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Occasional.
Sillimanorum (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Rare, local, Bristol.
*parallela Castr. Rare, Bristol.
dilatata Ehrenb. Common.
delawarensis Grun. Local, Quinnipiac.
interposita Lewis. Frequent.
amphipleuroides Grun. Rare.
Bartleyana Grun. Occasional.
diploneis var. obliquus Brun. Occasional.
maculata Bail. Occasional; abundant at Leete’s Island.
peripunctata Brun. Occasional; abundant in Bristol.

134 Rhodora [AvausT

Navicula *theta Cleve. Local, Quinnipiac.

E *tubulosa Brun. Occasional.
Caloneis *Wardii Cleve. Occasional.
Diploneis *didyma var. obliqua Brun. Occasional.
Libellus rhombicus (Greg.) De Toni. (Navicula rhombica Greg.)
Rhovconers trinodis (W. Sm.) Grev. (Navicula trinodis W. Sm.)

Rare, Bristol.

Stauroneis phoenicenteron (Nitzsch) Ehrenb. Abundant everywhere.
gracilis W. Sm. Frequent.
Gregoryi Ralfs. Occasional.
spicula Hickie. Rare, Quinnipiac.
salina W. Sm. Common along shore.
^ Stodderi Lewis. Rare, Bristol.
*nova britannica Terry. Rare; only in New Britain.

i *Terryi Ward. Exceedingly rare; only in Bristol.
Pleurostauron acutum (W. Sm.) Ralfs. (Stauroneis acuta W. Sm.)

Common.
Pleurosigma angulatum (Quek.) W. Sm. Frequent, local.
var. aestuarii (Bréb.) VH. Occasional.

elongatum W. Sm. Frequent.
H " var. gracile Grun. Occasional.
strigosum W. Sm. Rare, Clinton.
naviculaceum Bréb. Rare.
intermedium W.Sm. Rare, Clinton.
nubecula W. Sm. Rare, Clinton,
" latum Cleve. Rare.
jormosum W. Sm. Occasional.
hypocampus W.Sm. Frequent, local.
decorum W. Sm. Locally abundant.
E littorale W. Sm. Rather rare.
balticum (Ehrenb.) W. Sm. Frequent, local.
simile Grun. Rare, Leete’s Island.
attenuatum W.Sm. Frequent, local.
Wansbecki? Donk. Frequent.
acuminatum (Kütz.) Grun. Rather rare.
strigile W. Sm. Occasional.
: affine Grun. & Cleve. Common all along the shore.
*paradoxum Per. Occasional, Morris Creek.
5 Brebissonii Grun. & Cleve. Frequent.
*Terryanum Per. Local, Quinnipiac, Leete’s Island.
Spencerüi (Quek.) W. Sm. Frequent, local.

var. curvulum (Kütz.) Grun. Rare, Quinni-

[11

piac.

jasciola W. Sm. Frequent.

scalproides Rab. Rare.

eximium (Thw.) Grun. & Cleve. Occasional.
*americanum Per. Abundant, Morris Creek, New Haven.

1907] Terry,— Partial List of Connecticut Diatoms 135

Pleurosigma subsalinum Per. Rare, Leete's Island, Milford.
Gyrosigma *Temperii Cleve. Occasional.
Scoliopleura latestriata (Bréb.) Grun. Frequent.
3 *var. Amphora Cleve. Rare, Morris Creek.
m tumida (Bréb.) Rab. Frequent.
Frustulia rhomboides (Ehrenb.) De Toni. (Navicula rhomboides
Ehrenb. Frequent.
* P var. saxonica (Rab.) De Toni. (Navicula
crassinervia Bréb.) | Occasional.
Lewisiana (Grev.) De Toni. (Navicula Lewisiana Grev.)
Rare, Bridgeport only.
"^ viridula (Bréb.) De Toni. (Schizonema viridulum Rab.)
Rare.
Dickiea crucigera (W. Sm.) De Toni. (Schizonema crucigerum W.
Sm.) Rare, Quinnipiac.
Brebissonia Boeckii (Kütz.)Grun. (Navicula Boeckii Bréb.) Occa-
sional; abundant in Thames River.
Mastogloia *gibbosa Brun. Occasional.
undulata Grun. Occasional.’
Amphiprora lepidoptera Greg. Frequent.
var. pusilla (Greg.) VH. Frequent.
maxima Greg. Locally abundant.
" alata Kütz. Frequent.
pulchra Bail. Locally abundant.
conspicua Grev. Frequent.
ornata Bail. Frequent.
Plagiotropis vitrea. (W. Sm.) Grun. (Amphiprora vitrea W. Sm.)
Frequent.
Tropidoneis *seriata Cleve. Occasional.
a *zebra Cleve. Occasional.
C ymbella Ehrenbergii Kütz. Locally abundant.
cuspidata Kütz. Frequent.
" — affinis Kütz. Local, New Britain.
heteropleura (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Local.
gastroides Kütz. Common everywhere.
cymbiformis var. parva (W. Sm.)VH. Local, New Britain.
americana A. Schm. Locally abundant.
cistula var. maculata (Kütz.) Grun. Local, New Britain.
Encyonema caespitosum Kütz. Frequent.
g prostratum (Bail.) Ralfs. Frequent.
Amphora levis Greg. Frequent.
cingulata Cleve. Frequent.
" erebi Ehrenb. (A. cymbifera Greg.) Frequent.
" Clevei A. Schm. Frequent.
intersecta A. Schm. Frequent.
Eulensteinii Grun. Frequent; locally abundant at Milford.
proteus Greg. Frequent.

136 Rhodora [AvausT

Amphora obtusa Greg. Frequent.
a ovalis (Bréb.) Kütz. Frequent.
Gomphonema acuminatum Ehrenb. Common.
a constrictum Ehrenb. Common.
capitatum Ehrenb. Common. |
geminatum (Lyng.) Ehrenb. Common.
augur Ehrenb. (G. cristatum Ralfs.) Common.
Rhoicosphaenia curvata (Kütz.) Grun.
Cocconers scutellum Ehrenb. Frequent.
= dirupta Greg. Frequent.
Achnanthes longipes Ag. Common.
T brevipes Ag. Common.
subsessilis Kütz. Fort Hale.
*eurvirostrum Brun. Very rare, Morris Cove.
*manifera Brun. Very rare, Morris Cove. —
Achnanthidium flexellum (Kiitz.) Bréb. Rare; abundant in Bristol,
fossil.
Bacillaria paradoxa (Gmel.) Grey. Occasional near New Haven.
N utzschia granulata Grun. Occasional.
tryblionella Hantzsch. Frequent.
= 3 var. maxima Grun. Occasional.
plana W. Sm., Occasional.
marginulata Grun. Occasional.
acuminata (W. Sm.) Grun. Occasional.
circumsuta (Bail.) Grun. Frequent.
"t scalaris (Ehrenb.) W. Sm. Abundant.
angularis W. Sm. Frequent.
sigmoidea (Nitzsch) W. Sm. Frequent, locally abundant.
sigma (Kütz.) W. Sm. Common.
jasciculata Grun. Common.
E obtusa W. Sm. Occasional.
linearis var. tenuis (W. Sm.) Grun. (N. tenuis W. Sm.)
Rare, Leete's Island.
" curvirostris var. Closterium (Ehrenb.) VH. (N. Closterium
W.Sm.) Rare, West Haven.
Lorenziana Grun. Rare.
E Shafjeri Cleve. (N. curvula Terry, not W. Sm.) Very
rare, Morris Cove.
Hantzschia amphioxys (Ehrenb.) Grun. Abundant in Bristol.
i *segmentalis Brun. Rare, Morris Cove.
Surirella biseriata (Ehrenb.) Bréb. Common.
linearis W. Sm. Frequent. .
robusta Ehrenb. Frequent in Winsted.
xs splendida (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Common.
tenera Greg. Common.
elegans Ehrenb. Common.
d " — var. norvegica (Eulen.) Brun. Occasional, Bristol.

[21

“ce

ee

,

1907] Terry,— Partial List of Connecticut Diatoms 137

Surirella striatula 'Turp. Frequent, locally abundant.
x " — var. friplicata Grun. Occasional.
gemma Ehrenb. Frequent.
cardinalis Kitt. Rather rare; abundant in Bristol.
ovalis Bréb. Occasional.
s " var.angusta (Kütz.)VH. (S.angusta Kütz.) Occasional.
jastuosa Ehrenb. Frequent.
" " — var. lata (W. Sm.) VH. Frequent.
recedens A. Schm. Occasional.
Moelleriana Grun. Occasional.
gracilis A. Schm. Occasional.
Febigerti Lewis. Frequent.
constricta Ehrenb. Rare, Killingsworth.
" — *Terryi Ward. Rare, except in Bristol, New Britain and
Leete's Island.
C ymatopleura elliptica (Bréb.) W. Sm. Rare, New Britain.
solea (Bréb.) W. Sm. Occasional.
hibernica W. Sm. Rare.
marina Lewis. Rare, Clinton.
Podocystis adriatica Kütz. (P. americana Bail.) Rare.
Campylodiscus echineis Ehrenb. Common.
hibernicus Ehrenb. Frequent.
Diatoma vulgare Bory. Frequent.
elongatum var. tenue (Ag.) VH. (D. tenue Ag.) Frequent.
di hiemale (Lyngb.) Heib. | (Odontidium hiemale IKütz.) Lo-
cally abundant. |
anceps (Ehrenb.) Kirchn. Frequent.
Odontidium mutabile W. Sm. Locally abundant.
Harrisonii W. Sm. (Fragilaria Harrisonii Grun.)
Rare and local, Bristol.
Meridion circulare (Grev.) Ag. Frequent.
“ intermedium H. L. Sm. Frequent.
Synedra pulchella (Ralfs) Kütz. Occasional.
var. Smithii (Ralfs) VH. Occasional.
ulna var. danica (Kütz.) VH. (S. danica Kütz.) Frequent.
afinis Kütz. Frequent.
Ardissonia superba (Kütz.) Grun. (Synedra superba Kütz.) Occa-
sional, Leete’s Island.
Asterionella formosa Hass. Abundant in water supply.
S Raljsti W. Sm. Abundant in water supply.
Fragilaria virescens Ralfs. Common.
i capucina Desmaz. Common.
construens (Ehrenb.) Grun. Common.
Raphoneis amphiceros Ehrenb. | Frequent.
a belgica Grun. Rare, Leete's Island.
" " var. intermedia Grun. Occasional.
gemmifera Ehrenb. Frequent.

oe

[21

é4

[1j

[2j

éé

se

138 Rhodora [AvavsT

Dimerogramma minus (Greg.) Ralfs.
Surirella (Ehrenb.) Grun. (Raphoneis Surirella
Grev.) Occasional.
Plagiogramma staurophorum (Greg.) Heib. (P. Gregorianum Grev.)
Occasional, Quinnipiac.
T validum Grev. Occasional, Leete’s Island.
Licmophora flabellata (Carm.) Ag. Frequent.
Juergensii Ag. Frequent.

d tincta (Ag.) Grun. Frequent.
Tabellaria fenestrata (Lyngb.) Kütz. Common.
i floceulosa (Roth) Kütz. Common.

Grammatophora oceanica var. macilenta (W. Sm.) Grun.
Rhabdonema arcuatum (Lyngb.) Kütz. Occasional.
^ adriaticum Ixütz. Common.
Epithemia turgida (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Frequent.
gibba (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Occasional.

" “ — var. ventricosa (Ehrenb.) Grun. Frequent.
E argus (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Frequent.
- zebra (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Frequent.

musculus Kütz. Frequent.
Eunotia major (W. Sm.) Rab. Frequent.
* praerupta Ehrenb. | Frequent.
i “ var. bidens Grun. Frequent.
“ gracilis (Ehrenb.) Rab. Frequent.
“ — robusta Ralfs, including E. Diadema Ralfs. Frequent.
“ elongata Rab. Frequent.
Pseudoeunotia lunaris (Ehrenb.) Grun. (Eunotia lunaris Grun.)
Locally abundant.
: flexuosa (Bréb.) Grun. (Eunotia flexuosa Bréb.)
Locally abundant.
E flexuosa var. bicapitata Grun. Locally abundant.
Actinella punctata Lewis. Common.
Rhizosolenia styliformis Brightw. | Leete's Island.
Isthmia nervosa Kütz. Frequent.
Hemiaulus affinis Grun. South Haven.
E tubulosus Brun. Occasional.
Odontella aurita (Lyng.) Ag. (Biddulphia aurita Bréb.) Frequent.
i turgida (W. Sm.) VH. Frequent.
Biddulphia pulchella Gray. Frequent.
Tuomeyi (Bail.) Roper. Occasional.
Denticella mobiliensis (Bail.) Grev. (Biddulphia Baileyi W. Sm.)
Rare.
di rhombus Ehrenb. (Biddulphia rhombus W. Sm.) Fre-
quent.
Eunotogramma laeve Grun. Occasional.
Terpsinoe musica Ehrenb. | Occasional.
i americana (Bail.) Ralfs. Occasional.

1907] Terry,— Partial List of Connecticut Diatoms 139

Amphitetras antediluvianus Ehrenb. Frequent.
Triceratium alternans Bail. Occasional.
É flavum Ehrenb. Frequent.
Lithodesmium undulatum Ehrenb. Leete’s Island.
Syndendrium diadema Ehrenb. Occasional.
Periptera tetracladia Ehrenb. Occasional.
Pyxilla baltica Grun. Frequent; locally abundant, Leete's Island.
Ditylium Brightwellii (West) Grun. including D. inaequale Bail.,
D. tetragonum Bail., and D. trigonum Bail. Very rare,
Branford only.
intricatum (West) Grun. Very rare, Branford.
Auliscus pruinosus Bail. Frequent.
s sculptus (W. Sm.) Ralfs. Common.
T caelatus Bail. Occasional.
Macraéanus Grev. Occasional.
Pseudoauliscus radiatus (Bail.) Rattray. Rare, Leete’s Island.
Cerataulus levis (Ehrenb.) Ralfs. (C. polymorphus VH. Biddulphia
levis Ehrenb.) Frequent.
Eupodiscus Rodgersii Ehrenb. Rare, Leete's Island.
argus Ehrenb. Frequent.
Stephanop yxis turris (Grev.) Ralfs. Occasional, New Haven.
* var. intermedia Grun. (S. appendiculata var. inter-
media Grun.) Occasional.
» jerox (Grev.) Ralfs. Occasional, Milford.
p corona (Ehrenb.) Grun. Occasional.
Stephanodiscus niagarae Ehrenb. Rare.
Actinocyclus crassus VH. Frequent.
Raljsii (W. Sm.) Ralfs. Frequent.
“ Barkleyi (Ehrenb.) Grun. Abundant, Morris Cove.
" Ehrenbergit Ralfs. Frequent.
tenuissimus Cleve. Rare, Morris Cove.
[ subtilis (Greg.) Ralfs. Rare, Morris Cove.
triradiatus Roper. Rare, Leete's Island.
Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrenb. | Frequent.
3 nitidus Greg. Frequent.
symbolophor us Grun. Occasional.
subtilis Ehrenb. Rare, local.
marginatus Ehrenb. Occasional.
radiatus Ehrenb. Frequent.
concinnus W. Sm. Frequent.
gigas Ehrenb. Rare, Leete’s Island.
asteromphalus Ehrenb. Frequent.
oculus-iridis Ehrenb. Frequent.
apiculatus Ehrenb. Frequent.
Lysigonium moniliforme (Mull. Link. (Melosira Borreri Grev.)
Locally abundant.
varians (Ag.) De Toni. (Melosira varians Ag.) Abun-
dant.

sé

ce

[2j

140 Rhodora [AuGuUST

Gallionella nummuloides (Dillw.) Bory. (Melosira nummuloides Ag.)
Frequent.
Melosira undulata (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Frequent.
sculpta (Ehrenb.) Kütz. Common.
coronata Grun. New Haven.
octogona Grun. Frequent.
Paralia sulcata (Ehrenb.) Cleve. Rare, Leete’s Island.
Cyclotella antiqua W. Sm. Very rare, Bristol only.
a striata (Kütz.) Grun. Silver Sands.
^ Kuetzingiana Thw. Frequent.
Podosira dubia (Kütz.) Grun. Occasional.
Hyalodiscus subtilis Bail. Occasional.
7 stelliger Bail. Occasional.
Actinopt ychus undulatus (Bail.) Ralfs. Common.
velatus Ehrenb. Occasional.

oe

oe

BRISTOL, CONNECTICUT.

THE GENUS SUAEDA IN NORTHEASTERN AMERICA.

M. L. FERNALD.

THE genus Suaeda has long been for the American botanist a source
of much confusion and difficulty, in part because it consists of unat-
tractive plants of saline soils which are generally ignored by collectors,
in part because of the very indefinite conception of the true Suaeda
maritima of Europe — the species about which our studies, at least
of the eastern coast forms, must largely center. It has long been
known to many New England botanists that we have on our north-
eastern coast more than the single species alloted to this region in
Gray's Manual; and the two species described and figured (as Dondia)
in Britton. & Brown's Illustrated Flora satisfactorily cover only the
forms which occur on the salt marshes and sea beaches from southern
New England southward. On the coast of Maine are other forms
which in habit, flowering-season, and fruit-characters are unlike the
plants of the more southern shores.

During the summer of 1898 Mr. J. C. Parlin and the writer spent a
day (July 23) upon Wells Beach and the adjacent marshes in southern
Maine. At that time a small depressed Suaeda (no. 1) with short
subeylindric dark green leaves was in mature fruit. Another depressed

1907] Fernald,— Genus Suaeda in Northeastern America 141

and very slender plant (no. 2) with longer semicylindrie very glaucous
foliage was in flower and with occasional mature seeds. A third but
scarce plant (no. 3), then beginning to fruit, had much coarser purple-
tinged ascending and slightly branching stems, and the leaves only
slightly glaucous. ‘Two other species not then in flower were common
— one an erect or ascending profusely branched green plant (no. 4)
a foot or two high, the elongate-linear leaves not glaucous; the other
a depressed plant (no. 5), at that time showing no trace of flowering,
generally with the coarse stems and slender leaves purplish. Late
in the following September additional collections and field notes were
made about Wells Beach by Miss Kate Furbish. The two slender
depressed plants (nos. 1 & 2) which had been in fruit nearly two
months earlier were, at the time of these later observations, over-ripe
or quite shrivelled, and the tall erect very branching plant (no. 4)
was in mature condition, but the coarse decumbent plant (no. 5)
with its green or generally claret-colored stems and leaves was barely
in fruit. Its habit, however, and the very dense elongate-spicate
inflorescences distinguished it superficially from the other plants
near which it grew. An exhaustive study of the Suaedas of eastern
Massachusetts recently made by Mr. Wm. P. Rich has shown that
two forms — the tall late-fruiting species (no. 4) and the ascending
plant (no. 3) noted as scarce on Wells Beach — are generally dis-
tributed along the Massachusetts coast, while a third plant, the slender
depressed very glaucous form (no. 2) occurs on the North Shore.

A detailed examination of these five plants shows that besides their
marked habital characters and their different fruiting seasons, at least
four of them possess good differential characters in their calyces and
seeds, These five New England plants divide themselves naturally
into two groups — the first, with the sepals thickened and strongly
carinate upon the back, including the two late-flowering plants (nos.
4 & 5); the second group, with the sepals thinner and rounded or
very slightly carinate upon the back, including the three plants (nos.
1, 2, and 3) found fruiting in late July. The former group includes
the plants now generally passing as Suaeda linearis (Ell) Moq.
(Dondia Americana Britton in part); and the three plants with the
sepals more rounded on the back are included under Suaeda mari-
tima (L.) Dum. (Dondia maritima Druce).

In order to make a satisfactory disposition of these forms it is
necessary first to gain a clear conception of the European Suaeda

142 Rhodora [AucvsT

maritima. This unfortunately is not easily accomplished. The
specimens distributed as this species from European herbaria are
very different from one another, and, like the American plant, they
are probably a confusion of several distinct things. The descriptions
too are confusing. When one refers, however, to the original descrip-
tion of the Linnaean Chenopodium maritimum, upon which Suaeda
maritima was founded he finds an indication that the name belongs
to the plant which of late has been so called in America. At least,
judging from an excellent photograph secured by Dr. B. L. Robinson
of the specimen preserved at the British Museum, the plant first cited
by Linnaeus (the Hortus Cliffortianus specimen) is our bushy-branched
plant with large calyces and the achenes 2 mm. broad. The maturer
specimens in the Linnaean Herbarium, as photographed by Dr.
Robinson, seem also to be like the plant of Hortus Cliffortianus.
This species is fortunately the plant represented in the plates cited by
Moquin in his description of Chenopodina maritima a vulgaris in
DeCandolle's Prodromus. These plates are two ' and they represent
a plant well known in our herbaria both from Europe and America.
In habit, color, calyx and seed it is closely matched by the third form
mentioned from Wells Beach, and found very generally on the Atlantic
coast of America.

Our conception of Suaeda linearis (Ell.) Moq. has also been very
confused. From his description Elliott’s Salsola linearis is apparently
a tall erect freely branching plant (no. 4) which is common on the
Atlantic coast from southern Maine to Texas. Elliott cited, however,
as synonyms two plants — Salsola salsa? Michaux and C henopodium
maritimum. Walter — neither of which seems clearly identified with
the “nearly erect....much branched" plant which he described.
The erect bushy plant with the flowers “spiked” and with the sepals
"angled on the back," as described by Elliott, has small seeds, rarely
1.5 mm. broad. The portion of Walter's specimen of Chenopodium
maritimum preserved in the Gray Herbarium shows a plant apparently
not distinguishable from the common Suaeda maritima of Europe
and our northeastern coast. The fragment has the large flowers
subtended by leaves which are much longer than in the commoner
tall southern plant with its “spiked” flowers, the larger sepals are not
distinctly carinate, and the large seed (2 mm. broad) is not different

1 Oeder, Fl. Dan. iii, t. 489 (1770); Sm. Engl. Bot. t. 633 (1799).

GV. rS
iiic s io vie A

1907] Fernald,— Genus Suaeda in Northeastern America 143

from that of the European Chenopodium maritimum. Moquin in his
monograph of the Chenopodiaceae transferred the tall plant to Suaeda,
as S. linearis, following very closely Elliott's description. In DeCan-
dolle's Prodromus, however, he states that the seeds are a line long,—
the size of those in Walter's plant and in the common S. maritima,
but much larger than in the common southern plant which closely
matches Elliotts and Moquin's original descriptions. This large-
seeded plant, with the leaves of the flowering branches usually elon-
gated and with thin rounded sepals was accepted by Dr. Watson in
his early studies of the group as true Suaeda linearis Moq. (Salsola
linearis Ell), and the small-seeded plant with, carinate sepals, de-
scribed by Elliott was treated as a variety of the species, var. ramosa,
though later, in the 6th edition of Gray's Manual, he considered
the common erect plant with small seed true S. linearis.

Under his Suaeda linearis, var. ramosa, Dr. Watson apparently
without hesitation included as a synonym Salsola salsa Michaux,
from the mouth of the St. Lawrence, a plant which had been included
with hesitation by Moquin and others under Suaeda linearis. From
the original Michaux material it is impossible to determine with
certainty the exact identity of that plant; but that it is the same as
the erect branching small-seeded Suaeda linearis (var. ramosa Wats.)
of the southern coast is open to serious doubt. So far as exploration
on the Maine coast and the lower St. Lawrence has shown, the tall
small-seeded S. linearis rarely occurs east of the mouth of the Kennebec,
nor has it been collected in the maritime provinces of Canada. In
fact, north of Cape Anne the three species (excepting the local S.
linearis of southern Maine) which we know are low plants of procum-
bent or at least wide-spreading or loosely branching habit. Michaux
supposed the lower St. Lawrence plant to be the European Salsola
salsa, and his primary descripion might well be that of the Old World
plant; but in the accompanying observation he states that his Amer-
ican specimen differs from the European in its more slender sub-
decumbent habit and more crowded flowers. The Michaux plant
was soon distinguished by Persoon from the erect Salsola salsa as a
variety, “p? americana, humilior, subdecumbens, flor. confertioribus.’””

1' A. SALSOLA que maritima circa Hdvre de Grace et Dieppe incolit, in eo tantum
differt, quod humilior sit et subdecumbens, floribus confertioribus."— Michx. Fl. i. 174
(1803).

? Pers, Syn. i. 296 (1805).

144 Rhodora [AvausT

Subsequently the Michaux plant, as already stated, has been doubt-
fully placed by Moquin and others under the more southern Suaeda
linearis, and by Dr. Watson it was included as a synonym under his
tall erect but later discarded var. ramosa. And more recently, in the
Illustrated Flora, Dr. Britton has taken up for the well-known Atlantic
coast plant with ''stem erect, strict, 1?—3? tall" the name used by
Persoon to designate a “low subdecumbent” plant; and regarding
Michaux's subdecumbent plant from the lower St. Lawrence as iden-
tical with the more southern erect species, he makes the new combina-
tion Dondia Americana (Pers.) Britton.

In the summer of 1903 the writer examined the Michaux type and
at that time made the note: “ Loosely branching Suaeda, very immature,
but from the crowding of the flowers seems to be the same as the
Norwood Cove and Wells Beach species of late September and Octo-
ber." This plant of Norwood Cove and Wells Beach (no. 5 of the
preceding notes) is well characterized not only by its late fruiting and
subprostrate habit but by its densely crowded flowers on spiciform
branches, its very irregular calyx, and its rich claret-color in autumn;
and it is apparently the plant intended by Persoon as Salsola salsa,
var. americana.

The northeastern maritime Suaedas as understood by the writer
may be classified as follows —

* Seed 2 mm. broad.

SUAEDA MARITIMA (L.)Dumort. Comparatively low, 0.5—4 (rarely
5 or 6) dm. high, ascending or depressed, subsimple or with spreading-
ascending or decumbent subsimple branches, often even forming
depressed mats 5 dm. or less in diameter: leaves usually more or less
glaucous, linear, acute or obtusish, semicylindrie, flat above, convex
beneath, 5 cm. or less long; those of the flowering branches slightly
shorter than the others and much exceeding the 1—4 axillary flowers:
sepals pale-green, rounded or obscurely keeled on the back: seed red-
brown or black.— Fl. Belg. 22 (1827); Moq. Ann. Sci. Nat. xxiii.
308 (1831), and Chenop. Enum. 127 (1840). S. maritima a vulgaris
Moq. Chenop. Enum. 128 (1840). 5S. linearis Watson, Proc. Am.
Acad. ix. 87 (1874) in part; Wats. & Coult. in Gray, Man. ed. 6, 435
(1890) in part; not Moq. Chenopodium maritimum L. Sp. 221
(1753); Oeder, Fl. Dan. iii. t. 489 (1770); Walter, Fl. Car. 111 (1788);
Sm. Engl. Bot. ix. t. 633 (1799). Atriplex maritima Crantz, Inst.
i. 208 (1766). Salsola maritima Poir. Encyc. vii. 291 (1806). Scho-
beria maritima C. A. Meyer in Ledeb. Fl. Alt. i. 400 (1829). Cheno-

1907] . Fernald,— Genus Suaeda in Northeastern America 145

podina maritima Moq. in DC. Prodr. xiii. pt. 2, 161 (1849). C. mari-
tima, a vulgaris Moq. l. c. Dondia maritima Druce, Ann. Scot.
Nat. Hist. (1896) 42; Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl. i. 585, t. 1394 (1896).—
Common on wet marshes along the coast from Anticosti to Connecti-
cut, and occasionally southward to Louisiana. Eurasia.

Walter's specimen of his Chenopodium maritimum from the Caro-
lina coast is not readily distinguished from this, though his descrip-
tion is cited by Elliott under Salsola linearis. On the Massachusetts
coast and southward the ascending bushy form of the plant prevails,
but from Ipswich northward along the coast of Maine and Eastern
Canada it often gives way to a more depressed and usually more
glaucous plant, which, however, cannot be clearly separated from the
other form. Apparently the same forms in the British Isles have a
distribution parallel with this, for, according to Syme “the erect
variety is more common in the south, the procumbent in the north;
but it is scarcely possible to draw any line of demarcation between
them" (Engl. Bot. ed. 3, viii. 4.).

* * Seed 1.25 to 1.5 mm. broad.
4— Sepals rounded on the back, not carinate.

S. Richii. Stems procumbent, forming mats 5 dm. or less across
(often fruiting when only 1 cm. or so long): leaves dark green, not at
all glaucous, linear to linear-oblong, bluntish, subcylindric, dorsally
compressed, the lower 1.5 cm. or less in length; those subtending the
fascicles of flowers broader and shorter (4 or 5 mm. long): seed black.
— Common on salt marshes and in damp spots at the edge of the beach,
Wells, Maine, Aug., 1892 (Anne E. Perkins), Sept. 16, 1895 (Walter
Deane), July 23, 1898, TYPE (J. C. Parlin & M. L. Fernald), Sept.
1898 (Kate Furbish); also on Great Cranberry Isle, Maine, Aug. 30,
1892 (E. L. Rand), and at Cutler, Maine, Aug. 27, 1902 (M. L. Fernald).
A very distinct species, in its procumbent habit suggesting the depressed
form of S. maritima, but, in the field, quickly distinguished by its
short blunt dark (not glaucous) green foliage, as well as its small
seed. From the other small-seeded species, S. linearis, it is distin-
guished by its procumbent habit and short blunt leaves, as well as by
the rounded (not carinate) sepals. Unlike any other American plant, |
this Suaeda in habit strongly suggests S. microsperma (C. A. Meyer)
Fenzl, but that Asiatic plant has much smaller seeds, and the sepals
cucullate-carinate.

This procumbent small-seeded plant of the Maine coast is named
for William Penn Rich, a discriminating student of salt marsh vege-
tation, who in April, 1898, pointed out in the herbarium of Mr. Walter
Deane the peculiarities of the species here described.

146 Rhodora [AvausT

4— + Sepals (or some of them) carinate on the back.
++ Stems procumbent: 1 or 2 sepals more cucullate-carinate than the others.

S. americana (Pers.) n. comb. Stems procumbent, the branches
2 or 3 dm. long, only the abundant flowering ones ascending: lower
leaves linear, acute, about 2 cm. long; those of the densely-flowered
ultimate branches broader and much shorter: one or two ‘sepals
usually much more cucullate-carinate than the others: entire plant
generally becoming, in the autumn, a rich crimson-lake or claret-color.
— Salsola salsa? Michx. Fl. i. 174 (1803), not L. S. salsa, B.? americana
Pers. Syn. i. 296 (1805). Dondia americana Britton in Britton &
Brown, Ill. Fl. i. 584, merely as to name-bearing synonym (1896).—
Salt marshes, maturing from late September to November. Known
only from the original Michaux material from the lower St. Lawrence,
and from two stations on the coast of Maine,— Norwood Cove, South-
west Harbor, September 18, 1892 (M. L. Fernald) and Wells Beach,
late September, 1898 (Kate Furbish); but in its very procumbent
habit, dense subspicate inflorescence, and generally irregular calyx,
apparently a very distinct species.

++ ++ Stems erect or ascending: sepals equally carinate.

S. tinearis (Ell) Moq. Erect or ascending, 2 to 9 dm. high,
profusely branched; the slender branches ascending or sometimes
wide-spread, but not procumbent: leaves narrowly linear, dark green
(not glaucous), 4 cm. or less long, those of the slender elongated
flowering branches much shorter: sepals equally carinate.— Chenop.
Enum. 130 (1840); Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. ix. 87 (1874), at least in
part; Wats. & Coult. in Gray, Man. ed. 6, 435 (1890), in part ; Chapm.
Fl. ed. 3, 406 (1897). S. linearis, var. ramosa Wats. l. c. (1874),
excluding syn. Salsola salsa Michx. & S. salsa, var. americana Pers.
S. maritima 'Torr. (Sueda) Fl. N. Y. ii. 141 (1843); Gray, Man. 377
(1848); not Dumort. Chenopodium maritimum Pursh, Fl. 195
(1814), not L. Salsola linearis Ell. Sk. i. 332 (1817). C henopodina
linearis Moq. in DC. Prodr. xiii. pt. 2. 164 (1849). C. maritima Gray,
Man. ed. 2, 366 (1856); Chapm. Fl. 378 (1860); not Moq. Dondia
Americana Britton in Britt. & Brown, Ill. Fl. i. 584, t. 1393 (1896),
excluding syn. Salsola salsa, var. americana Pers.— On the seacoast,
chiefly in dryish sand or at the borders of marshes, from Maine to
Texas; rare east of the Kennebec.

GRAY HERBARIUM.

—— is

"ZA

1907] Bartlett,— Flower Color of the American Diervillas 147

FLOWER COLOR or THE AMERICAN DrERvILLAS.— The change in
flower color which follows pollination in the Asiatic species of Dier-
villa § Weigela is often cited as a striking case of adaptation to pol-
lination by bees. In all but one of the Weigelas the flowers are at
first white or merely roseate-tinged, but after pollination they change
quickly to deep rose or carmine, in which condition they remain
fresh for some length of time, serving to attract bees to the shrub.
Only the white flowers are visited for honey, however. Among the
American species of Diervilla, which belong to a section of the genus
distinguished from $ Weigela by the smaller yellow flowers, the
corresponding phenomenon seems to have been recorded only by
Mrs. Dana. In “How to know the Wild Flowers" she says of Dier-
villa Lonicera Mill. (D. trifida Moench): “The lower lobe of the
corolla is crested and more deeply colored than the others, thus advis-
ing the bee of secreted treasure. .... When the blossom has been
despoiled and at the same time fertilized, for the nectar-seeking bee
has probably deposited some pollen upon its pistil, the color of the
corolla changes from a pale to a deep yellow...." Other observers
have noticed that the flower of this species is not always “light yel-
low” or “honey yellow," but have apparently ascribed the differences
to specific variability.

In shady woods the change in Diervilla Lonicera is not very notice-
able, but in dry localities where the growth of the shrub is stunted,
as for example on Mt. Chocorua, N. H., and on the summit of Great
Blue Hill, near Boston, the flowers become deep scarlet. The lip is
the first part to show signs of change and it remains always of a deeper
hue than the rest of the corolla, becoming, on Blue Hill, almost
maroon. At the Arnold Arboretum, where all the American Dier-
villas are cultivated under moderate conditions of shade and moisture,
fresh flowers were compared with Ridgway’s standard color scale and
the following changes noted. In D. Lonicera Mill. the corolla is at
first citron yellow. The lip changes to poppy red and the other lobes
to scarlet. In D. rivularis Gattinger the change is from yellow to a
lightly suffused, dull poppy red, most intense on the lip. In D.
sessilifolia Buckley the citron yellow corolla changes to cadmium
yellow except on the lip, which becomes orange. D. splendens
Carriére, which Mr. Rehder is inclined to consider a hybrid between
D. Lonicera and D. sessilifolia, changes from canary yellow to pale
orange, with an orange lip. In this character, as well as in its time

148 Rhodora [AvavsT

of flowering, it resembles the latter of its supposed parents.— H. H.
BARTLETT, Gray Herbarium.

MACLURA POMIFERA (Rar. SCHNEIDER.—In the May issue of
Ruopora (ix. 91) I noted the fact that the Osage Orange, a common
hedge plant of the Middle West and an occasional escape from cultiva-
tion in New England, should according to the Vienna Rules of nomen-
clature bear the name Maclura pomijera. I was not aware at the time
that this particular combination had been used in print. "Through the
kindness of Mr. Alfred Rehder of the Arnold Arboretum I learn that
the binomial Maclura pomifera was published about a year earlier in a
short supplement of the first volume of C. K. Schneider's detailed
Illustriertes Handbuch der Lauholzkunde (i. 806). — B. L. ROBINSON,
Gray Herbarium.

Vol. 9, no. 103, including pages 109 to 124, was issued 12 August, 1907.

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. September, 1907. No. 105.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE GRAY HERBARIUM OF HARVARD
UNIVERSITY.— NEW SERIES, NO. XXXV.

THE SOIL PREFERENCES OF CERTAIN ALPINE AND
SUBALPINE PLANTS.

M. L. FERNALD.

THE floras of alpine and subalpine districts are especially attractive
to the field-botanist. The flowers of such regions are as a rule more
showy in proportion to the size of the plants than in the lowland forms;
while on mountain summits and slopes are found many species quite
unknown in the habitable districts. And, owing to the steepness and
exposure of the slopes, the plants of alpine and subalpine situations
are ordinarily found in picturesque and even inaccessible localities :—
on the faces of cliffs, in rock-crevices, or on talus-slopes formed from
the overhanging cliffs. In this characteristic, of growing primarily on
soils derived from the rock in place, our alpine plants are strongly
contrasted with the most familiar vegetation of the lower and more
habitable regions of New England, New York, and eastern Canada,
a vegetation which is found on more or less mixed or transported
soils — in our region chiefly of alluvial or glacial origin.

Aside from the somewhat unique habitat of many plants of high
mountains and cliffs and their interest as species unknown or rarely
seen in the lowland, these alpine plants present to the student of geo-
graphic botany a problem of peculiar fascination. In most cases their
known distribution is seemingly very erratic. The typical plants
of these regions, instead of occurring over broad and continuous areas
of eastern Canada and the United States, are found in only a few
very isolated situations; and not until they reach the high-northern
districts of polar America or other boreal regions do they occur exten-
sively or in closely contiguous large areas. Empetrum nigrum, for
instance, the Crow-berry or Curlew-berry, is a characteristic trailing

150 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

shrub at the very highest points of the Adirondack, Green, and White
Mountains, on the naked-topped mountains of Maine, on Mt. Albert
and Table-top Mt. in Gaspé, on the rocks of Mt. Desert Island and
the adjacent coast of Maine, New Brunswick and Nova Scotia;
thence along the coast of Nova Scotia and the outer coast of Newfound-
land to Labrador. About the Gulf of St. Lawrence it is somewhat
local and usually confined to cold bogs or occasional cliffs. In other
words, south of the St. Lawrence Empetrum nigrum is isolated in its
distribution, occurring only on the higher mountain-summits and
on cold coastal rocks or bogs. North of the St. Lawrence, however,
it becomes one of the commonest of plants, ‘ abundant throughout the
semi-barren and barren regions of the [Labrador] peninsula, growing
freely on the coast and inland,"' and according to Delabarre it is
“the most abundant phenogamous plant of Labrador." West of the
Labrador Peninsula and Baffin Land it grows, according to Macoun,
“along the north shore of Lake Superior, and at Port Arthur,....
Thence it takes a northwesterly direction and is found in peat bogs,
on exposed rocks along the shores, and on barren grounds to the
Pacific Ocean and Arctic Sea."? From the Arctic it extends south-
ward along the Coast Range to the region of Sitka, and very locally
on cliffs to the coast of northern California. It is also on the moun-
tains of southern British Columbia, and locally in Washington; and
it grows in arctic-alpine regions of Eurasia. Rubus Chamaemorus,
the Baked-apple of the coastal region of eastern Maine, southern New
Brunswick and Nova Scotia, is also on the higher White Mts. of New
Hampshire and the adjacent high peaks of western Maine, but un-
known on other New England mountains; locally on bogs of Temis-
couata and Rimouski Counties, Quebec, and on Table-top Mt. in
Gaspé. From these isolated areas south of the St.. Lawrence it extends
northward along the outer coast of Newfoundland, and from the north
shore of the St. Lawrence “everywhere throughout Labrador to beyond
the tree limit" *; through Arctic and subarctic regions to Alaska,
coming south along the Coast Range to the region of Sitka. Many
other characteristic plants of the isolated alpine or colder areas of

1 Low, Report on Explorations in the Labrador Penninsula: Geol. Surv. Can., Ann.
Rep., n. s. viii. 40 L. (1896).

2 Delabarre, Bull. Geogr. Soc. Phila. iii. no. 4, 190 (1902).

3 Macoun, Cat. Can. Pl. i. 458 (1886).

4 Low, 1] c. 38 L. (1896).

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 151

Maine and New Hampshire are, like Empetrum nigrum and Rubus
"Chamaemorus, the common plants of Labrador and other subarctic
and arctic regions of America. Another large group of isolated
species is well represented by Dryas Drummondit, one of the com-
monest and most showy plants of the ledgy shores and gravelly
beaches of the Gaspé Peninsula and of Anticosti Island. This
beautiful shrub, so common in Gaspé and Anticosti, is quite unknown
elsewhere east of the Rocky Mts. There, however, it is found
throughout the System from northwestern Montana northward, along
alpine rivers to the shores of the Arctic Sea.'

When, on the other hand, we examine the detailed distribution of
the plants which characterize the low altitudes, or at least the every-
day inhabited portions of New England and eastern Canada, a very
different situation is found. ‘The most familiar plants of these regions,
instead of occurring only at few and remote highly specialized stations,
are of general or continuous distribution over broad and easily defined
areas. Thus, to cite a few. typical illustrations, Clematis virginiana
occurs along streams from the Baie des Chaleurs to Georgia, and west
to Lake Winnipeg and the Mississippi valley. Anemonella thalictroides
is common in dry woods from southern New Hampshire westward to
southern Ontario and Minnesota, south to Maryland, and in the
upland country to western Florida. Viola conspersa? occurs very
generally in alluvial woods and thickets or in wild meadows from
southern Gaspé and eastern New Brunswick west to the Great Lake
region, south to Maryland, West Virginia and southern Indiana, and
locally along the mountains southward. Ilex monticola grows in rich
woods of the Alleghanies from northern Alabama northward across
Pennsylvania, and locally to the Taconic Mountains of southwestern
Massachusetts and the hill-country of western New York. Aster
subulatus in its general distribution follows the coastal marshes from
New Hampshire to Florida. These five species of Clematis, Anemon-
ella, Viola, Ilex, and Aster, illustrate very fairly the general and con-
tinuous distribution of a large proportion of our plants of the north-
temperate regions.

The isolation above indicated of the alpine and subalpine plants in
New England, Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and Quebec (as well as
on the Adirondack Mts. and in other cold areas of New York, on the

1 See Macoun, Cat. Can. Pl. i. 132 (1883).
? Viola conspersa Reichenb. (V. canina L., var. Muhlenbergii Trautv.).

152 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

north shore of Lake Superior, and at other similar points) is of course
due in part to the fact that we have in this large district only a limited
number of regions in which the climatic conditions are comparable
with those of the Arctic. And the occurrence in exposed or frigid
situations of Mt. Washington or along the Gaspé rivers of such isolated
species as Empetrum nigrum, Rubus Chamaemorus and Dryas Drum-
mondii is one of the strong links of evidence which has convinced
botanists of the inevitableness of the conclusions long ago reached
by Hooker, Gray, and others, that it is “difficult to account for these
facts, unless we admit Mr. Darwin's hypotheses, first, that the existing
Scandinavian flora is of great antiquity, and that previous to the glacial
epoch it was more uniformly distributed over the polar zone than it
is now; secondly, that during the advent of the glacial period this
Scandinavian vegetation was driven southward in every longitude,
and even across the tropies into the south temperate zone; and that
on the succeeding warmth of the present epoch, those species that
survived both ascended the mountains of the warmer zones, and also
returned northward accompanied by aborigines of the countries they
had invaded during their southern migration. Mr. Darwin shows
how aptly such an explanation meets the difficulty of accounting for
the restriction of so many American and Asiatic arctic types to their
own peculiar longitudinal zones, and for what is a far greater difficulty,
the representation of the same arctic genera by most closely allied
species in different longitudes."'!

Practically every newly explored alpine district or cliff-region of
New England and eastern Canada furnishes its addition to the already
extensive list of polar and high-northern species which are isolated
south of the St. Lawrence; and to-day we know in this area, between
Long Island Sound and the mouth of the River St. Lawrence, more
than four hundred such Pteridophyta and Spermatophyta, a list which
would be significantly increased by the addition of the lower groups
of plants. But the discovery of a few additions to this very long list
of arctic-alpine and high-northern plants south of the St. Lawrence,
however interesting it always proves, is, in view of the extensive data
already amassed, only of minor importance compared with the greater
problem of determining the reasons for this isolated distribution.

1J. D. Hooker, Outlines of the Distribution of Arctic Plants: Trans. Linn. Soc,

xxiii. pt. 2, 253 (1861). See also Darwin, Origin of Species, Chap. XI; Gray, Am,
Journ. Sci. Ser. 2, xxxiv. 144 (1802).

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 153

For several years the writer has realized that, in the available in-
formation on the occurrence of these plants, a most important factor
is missing; and since 1893 much of his field-observation has been
directed toward a possible solution of the problem. During the past
fourteen summers he has examined over thirty of the mountains of
New England and eastern Canada which support more or less pro-
nounced arctic-alpine floras; the cold cliffs of the Maine coast at
various points from York to Cutler; the shores of the Bay of Fundy
and the southern and eastern coasts of Nova Scotia at remote points;
the coast of northeastern New Brunswick and of the Gaspé Peninsula;
and the sea-cliffs of the south shore of the St. Lawrence westward to
Temiscouata County, Quebec. The studies of these areas and of
many river cliffs of northern Maine and eastern Quebec, supplemented
by the detailed collections of other botanists and their publications
upon the floras of various cliffs and alpine summits, especially of the
White and Green Mountains, have furnished the basis for the conclu-
sions here to be presented. In the explorations of the past few sum-
mers the writer has had the enthusiastic coóperation of Professor J.
Franklin Collins, without whose ever ready ingenuity at “roping”
difficult cliffs, it would have been impossible to secure many of these
observations.

One of the first impressions gained in botanizing on Willoughby
Cliffs or in Smuggler's Notch or on the sea-cliffs of Bic or of Percé, for
instance, then on Mt. Washington or Katahdin or Table-top Mt.,
and then on Mt. Albert, is that alpine floras are very dissimilar. "This
difference has often been remarked. Dr. A. J. Grout, for example,
in describing an ascent of Mt. Washington through Tuckerman’s
Ravine, says:

“After a climb of about two hours we came into "Tuckerman's
Ravine proper where the alpine plants began to appear. This reminds
one strongly of the Smuggler’s Notch ravines, on a much larger scale
and the path to the summit zigzags back and forth over towering
cliffs similar but less abrupt. One of the most striking things to me
was the difference in the flora here and elsewhere on Mt. Washington
and that of Smuggler’s Notch and Mt. Mansfield. Here in Tucker-
man’s Ravine were Salix phylicifolia both sexes, Alnus alnobetula
[A. erispa] and a number of more common alpine plants, but no
Pinguicula, neither of our alpine Saxifrages, nor did I see any of our

*

154 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

rare alpine ferns; no Artemisia Canadensis, Arenaria hirta [A. verna,
var. propinqua], Hedysarum or Astragalus. However this deficiency
was atoned for by the bright yellow Arnica Chamissonis [A. mollis],
strongly resembling a dwarf sunflower; Oxyria digyna, whose very
looks seemed to say: ‘a near relative of our sorrel’; Gnaphalium
supinum, which one could easily mistake for our common G. uligi-
nosum; Phleum alpinum that looks just like dwarfed timothy; Salix
argyrocarpa in fine fruit, and a form called a hybrid between this and
S. phylicifolia. Besides these more striking forms, we also collected
here Veronica alpina, Sibbaldia procumbens, Loiseleuria procumbens,
Epilobium alpinum, and Geum radiatum [G. Peckii}.” *

Later, at a meeting of the Torrey Botanical Club, Dr. Grout con-
trasted the flora of the Smuggler’s Notch region of Mt. Mansfield;
where “are found Dryopteris [Aspidium] fragrans, Woodsia glabella
and W. alpina, Pellaea gracilis [Cryptogramma Stelleri], Polystichum
Braunii, Asplenium viride, Blephariglottis grandiflora [Habenaria
fimbriata], Saxifraga oppositifolia, S. Aizoön, and S. autumnalis
[S. aizoides], Astragalus Jesupi LA. Blakei], Hedysarum Americanum
[H . boreale], Draba incana [D. stylaris], Arenaria verna [var. propinqua],
Pyrola minor, Gentiana acuta [G. Amarella, var. acuta), Castilleja
acuminata [C. pallida, var. septentrionalis], Erigeron hyssopifolius,
Solidago Virgaurea, vars. and that choicest of beauties and wonders,
the insect-eating Pinguicula vulgaris” ;? with that of the summit-ledges,
where are found “ Polygonum viviparum, Comandra livida, Viburnum
pauciflorum, Salix Uva-ursi, Vaccinium caespitosum, V. uliginosum,
Vitis-Idaea, Nabalus [Prenanthes] Boottii and Diapensia”;? and in
the abstract of this address, as published, the concluding paragraph
reads: “A comparison of the flora of this region and that of Mt.
Washington, brings out the fact that here are several northern plants
not found at the loftier elevation of the Mt. Washington region,
although the conditions there are more severely alpine and supposedly
more favorable. None of the saxifrages mentioned above can be
found in the White Mountain region, but another alpine species, S.
rivularis, occurs there. ‘This is only one of several cases hard to
account for, on a theory of a residual flora, as the regions are so near
to each other and the conditions are so similar." ?

1 A, J. Grout, Plant World, ii. 116 (1899).
2 A. J. Grout, as reported by N. L. Britton, Torreya, ii. 47 (1902).

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 155

Had the plants of Smuggler's Notch and of Mt. Washington been
further compared with the flora of the great alpine tableland of Mt.
Albert in Gaspé the contrast would have been quite as marked, for
on that broad expanse of bare summit and cafion-walls the character-
istic plants are unlike those either of Mt. Washington or of Smuggler's
Notch, and in their stead we find extensive areas of Adiantum pedatum,
var. aleuticum, Festuca altaica, Salix desertorum, Arenaria arctica,
Statice sibirica, Solidago decumbens, Artemisia borealis, and many
other plants which are unknown elsewhere south of the St. Lawrence.

If, however, comparison is made of the floras of Smuggler’s Notch
and of Willoughby Cliffs, many sea-cliffs of Bic and the north coast of
Gaspé, the mountain- and sea-cliffs of Percé, the cliffs of certain spurs
abutting on the northwestern edge of Table-top Mountain, and various
river-cliffs in northern Maine, New Brunswick, and the interior of
the Gaspé Peninsula; we shall find a remarkable similarity in their
floras. In fact, of the 29 distinctively cliff or subalpine plants of
Smuggler’s Notch all but the local Astragalus Blakei are known
from the sea-cliffs of Bic and the Gaspé coast, the river-cliffs of the
Gaspé interior, or the northwestern abutments of Table-top Moun-
tain; while on the neighboring cliffs of Willoughby only 18 of the 29
notable Smuggler’s Notch species are found, though a few others are
there present. Furthermore, on the more northern and ordinarily
more exposed cliffs of the Gaspé mountains and coast many additional
plants are associated with those of Smuggler’s Notch and of Willoughby
Cliffs; but on none of these areas (except Table-top Mt. discussed
below) is there a noteworthy identity with the alpine flora of Mt.
Washington.

When, on the other hand, we compare the characteristic alpine
flora of Mt. Washington and the adjacent White Mountains with
that of Mt. Katahdin or the great alpine tableland (15 miles long, by
3 or more miles wide) of Table-top Mountain, or the coastal cliffs of
eastern Maine, we find a striking similarity in these floras. Some of
these areas support one or more plants not known in either of the
others, but on these three great mountain areas the characteristic
species are identical, while several of them occur on the coast of eastern

1 Carex capitata, Geum Peckii, Saxifraga rivularis, and Euphrasia Williamsii on Mt.
Washington; Carex Grahami, C. saxatilis, C. katahdinensis, and Saxifraga stellaris, var.
comosa on Katahdin; Phegopteris alpestris, Asplenium cyclosorum, Cerastium cerastioides,
Petasites vitifolia and P. trigonophylla on Table-top Mountain.

156 Rhodora

[SEPTEMBER

Maine and adjacent New Brunswick, on the highest of the Adirondacks,
and on several lesser mountains of New England and New Bruns-
wick not here enumerated.

Furthermore, at the exposed summits of Mt. Mansfield and of
Camel’s Hump in Vermont, where the distinctive plants of Smuggler’s
Notch are mostly unknown, the following alpine and subalpine plants
are found:

Lycopodium Selago L., var. appressum
Desv.
Agrostis borealis Hartm.
Calamagrostis Pickeringii Gray.
Deschampsia atropurpurea |. (Wahl.)
Scheele.
Hierochloe alpina (Sw.) R. & S.
Poa laxa Haenke.
Carex brunnescens Poir.
"* Michauriana Boeckl.
“ rigida Good., var.
(Torr.) Boott.
Scirpus caespitosus L.
Juncus filiformis L.
" trifidus L.
Luzula parviflora Desf.
Salix balsamifera Barratt.
* phylicifolia L.
Uva-ursi Pursh.
Alnus crispa (Ait.) Pursh.

Bigelowii

“ee

Betula alba L., var. minor (Tuckerm.)
Fernald.

Comandra livida Richardson.

Polygonum viviparum L.

Arenaria groenlandica (Retz.) Spreng.

Amelanchier oligocarpa (Michx.)
Roem.

Potentilla tridentata Ait.

Empetrum nigrum L.

Ledum groenlandicum Oeder.

Vaccinium caespitosum Michx.
» uliginosum L.

canadense Kalm.

pennsylvanicum Lam., var.

angustifolium (Ait.) Gray.
Vitis-Idaea L., var. minus
Lodd.

Solidago Virgaurea L., var. alpina
Bigel.

Prenanthes Boottii (DC.) Gray.

Of these 32 alpine and subalpine plants of the high summit-areas
of the Green Mountains, plants which are quite different from the
distinctive species of the Smuggler's Notch cliffs, 29 are common
species of Mt. Washington, Katahdin, and Table-top Mountain;
and the remaining 3, although as yet unknown from Table-top, are
familiar plants of Mt. Washington and others of the White Mountains,
of Katahdin, and even of some of the minor mountains of Maine.

As already remarked, the characteristic plants of the great tableland
of Mt. Albert are, so far as known, unique in our flora; and, judging
from our very limited knowledge of certain botanically unexplored
mountains it is possible that upon them still other alpine or subalpine
floras exist. Nevertheless, admitting that there are still highly promis-
ing mountains and cliffs within our boundaries whose plants are quite
unknown to us, we already have sufficient data to point out three very

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 157

clearly defined floras which are quite absent from certain alpine and
subalpine areas, but as positively the distinctive plants of certain others.

In the accompanying table is shown the known distribution south
of the St. Lawrence and east of the Great Lake region and western
New York of 258 alpine and subalpine Pteridophyta and Spermato-
phyta. This list includes a large proportion of the New England spe-
cies, but owing to the lack of sufficiently accurate knowledge of the
distribution of certain alpine plants (especially in eastern Canada) they
are for the present omitted. Many other species belonging to such per-
plexing genera as Calamagrostis, Poa, Salix, Epilobium, Campanula,
Solidago, Aster, etc., must await more detailed study before they can
be satisfactorily identified.

It should be borne in mind that, in the preparation of these tables
of distribution, only the alpine and subalpine habitats have been
included, i. e., the localities in which the plants occur upon soils in
place, either upon summit-ledges and upper slopes or on exposed
cliffs and talus. In a few cases plants may be present in the bogs or
swamps of a given region, but unknown in the rock-habitats. Such
species are Rubus Chamaemorus and Menyanthes trifoliata, for in-
stance, abundant in certain bogs along the lower St. Lawrence, but
apparently unknown from the adjacent sea-cliffs and consequently
not included from them in the table.

In tabulating the distribution of plants of regions which are not
known to the writer from personal observation, it has not always been
possible to secure full data, and many plants which are probably
present in these localities are necessarily left unchecked. Some of
the members of the Pinaceae, for example, are undoubtedly upon the
cliffs of Smuggler’s Notch, but the published lists of plants of that
region have naturally laid more emphasis upon the localized species
than upon those which are common throughout the Green Mountains,
and the presence of many of the latter may be only assumed.

Of the 258 plants whose alpine and subalpine distribution is here
tabulated, many species, it will be noticed, are confined very definitely
to certain alpine areas, and are quite unknown from certain others.
These areas which are characterized by distinctive floras fall into three
major groups, and a fourth or minor group (of a single area) supporting
a flora which embraces to a striking degree a mixture of plants which
are otherwise confined very exclusively to one or the other of two of
the major groups of areas.

158

Rhodora

[SEPTEMBER

TABLE I, SHOWING THE DISTRIBUTION SOUTH OF THE RIVER
Sr. LAWRENCE OF 258 ALPINE AND SUBALPINE PLANTS.
Group I la I III
Slo lalale] |i js jets
za :S[Sl4z2!s£| E
NAMES OF PLANTS EE E | EIE Ble PS E
zgas2ó53||55S35|5$.2B5|s
TlH S/O]. | Ol FAS] IEEE 20D Ic:
SOF MAS RIZfn Fn es oo aie
Lycopodium Selago L., var. appressum Desv. J+ + + ++ + +]+ ES
var. patens (Beauv.) Desv. + +++
alpinum L, +1 +
sitchense Ruprecht | +++ H2
annotinum L., var. pungens Desv. Tp LER
Selaginella selaginoides (L.) Link ^ + +/+ + T oL
Adiantum pedatum L., var. aleuticum Rupr. +
Cryptogramma densa (Brack.) Diels +
Stelleri (Gmel.) Prantl : +) +) +) +) +/+) +
Phegopteris alpestris (Hoppe) Mett. | + | | |
Robertiana (Hoffm.) A. Br. +) +)
Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. +i) E TCI
montana (L.) Bernh. . + E 4
Asplenium viride Huds. nM t + ++ ++ 4
cyclosorum (Rupr.) Fernald * +
Polystichum Lonchitis (L.) Roth | | + +
scopulinum (Eaton) Maxon +
Aspidium fragrans (L.) Sw. + Tb +] +] +
Woodsia glabella R. Br. dele |e | | H ae
alpina (Bolton) S. F, Gray 4 4| el | | tl +
oregana D. C. Eaton EE
scopulina D. C, Eaton | | +
Larix laricina (DuRoi) Koch l4 + + + t +
Picea mariana (Mill.) BSP. TT TII MH -+ | 4E m
canadensis (Mill.) BSP. +++ [4+ 4 4447) +4 4+ 4.4 4/4]4+
Abies balsamea (L.) Mill. tit tl tl +i +) T 4-40 4T T TT TT
Juniperus communis L., var. montana Ait. | | +) +1+
Hierochloe alpina (Sw.) R. & S. E er ex erus MEN iere 3: E de E
Phleum alpinum L. ig +] 4- + | +} tie
Agrostis borealis Hartm. . ++4+4+ + +]+ +) +) cT
Calamagrostis Pickeringii Gray fe | de | of be
Langsdorfii (Link) Trin. ++ +++ m EIE
hyperborea Lange | de] de i+] d
purpurascens R. Br. 1 . eee
Deschampsia atropurpurea (Wahl. ) Scheele SLIESJESES *[-* |
caespitosa(L.) Beauv., var. alpina Vasey »

*AsPLENIUM Cyclosorum (Rupr.) comb, nov.

Russ, Reich, iii

1 2 3. etc.

. 41 (1845).
For notes see page 165.

Athyrium cyclosorum Rupr. Beitr. Pflanzenk,

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 159
' TABLE I —continued.
Group I Ia II III
| la
D .l'o es
g| els ail. SE
mak arai F- Ae = 18 a A ye
EEEN e C s |3/&|.:
ARARA DU EE S/x|z
NAMES OF PLANTS S22 54 2 Shia wis e| ema
-/ 81/2/1315) 6 (SIS] wl sie! vl
SO BM Alsi Azia ealas
Danthonia intermedia Vasey : +
Trisetum melicoideum (Michx.) Vasey +++ + +
Poa alpina L. +E + +l el +] elt
laxa Haenke +++ + + hell
Sandbergii Vasey +/+
Festuca altaica Trin. =
rubra L., var. prolifera Piper ; Tc | 4-
ovina L., var. brevifolia (R. Br.) Hack. ar M +
Scirpus caespitosus L. ++ 4 4+)+ 4+ 4+]4]+ Js +
pauciflorus Lightf. | | Hil 44
Eriophorum callitrix Cham. + +/+ | | +h
Chamissonis C. A. Meyer . SE =
var albidum (F. Nyl.) Fernald +
Rynchospora capillacea Torr. as | i
Carex lagopina Wahl. | | + |
canescens L. : TT | d TR i
var. subloliacea Laest. +) + +) +/+ |
brunnescens Poir. +++ +++ 444+ | | Cu uia iu
stellulata Good. HHH FE | E 0-1]
obtusata Lilj. | 3-| +
Backii Boott | | Tal
capitata L. . +
scirpoidea Michx. EE ++] +i+iti t+ + + +i+t
deflexa Hornem. "HESE eae eo
concinna R. Br. +/+) +4) +4) +
eburnea Boott tr rx ee
bicolor All. l4 [4
vaginata Tausch + 4 debi Ps
capillaris L. : : ES ote |
var. elongata Olney + ++ +++ +/+
paupercula Michx. : +
var. irrigua (Sm.) Fernald ++ + ++i +i +
limosa L. + + BE +
rariflora Smith d TS
rigida Good. ie | +
var. Bigelowii (Torr. ) Boott + +) +) 4+) + ++ | +
lenticularis Michx. i TTL +i ti tit | |
atrata L., var. ovata Boott- ++ +]4+]4+ Tb arb +) +/+
alpina Sw. Popa iat

160

Rhodora

TABLE I—continued.

[SEPTEMBER

NAMES OF PLANTS

Carex oligosperma Michx.
Grahami Boott
saxatilis L. nou ET
var. miliaris (Michx.) Bailey
Michauxiana Boeckl.
pauciflora Lightf.
Juncus filiformis L.
trifidus L.
castaneus Smith
alpinus Vill.
Luzula parviflora Desv.
spicata (L.) DC.
var. tenella Meyer
confusa Lindeb.
Tofieldia palustris Huds. .
glutinosa (Michx.) Pers.
Zygadenus chloranthus Richards,
Cypripedium parviflorum Salisb,
Habenaria dilatata (Pursh) Gray
Microstylis monophyllos (L.) Lindl.
Salix vestita Pursh
Barclayi Anders. . . .
pseudo-myrsinites Anders.
argyrocarpa Anders,
desertorum Richards ,
var. stricta Anders. .
chlorolepis Fernald
glauca L.
phylicifolia L.
balsamifera Barratt
pedicellaris Pursh
Uva-ursi Pursh
herbacea L. CONEN We E
Betula alba L., var. minor (Tuck.) Fernald
glandulosa Michx.
Alnus crispa (Ait.) Pursh
mollis Fernald .
Comandra livida Richards.
Oxyria digyna (L.) Campt.
Lychnis alpina L.

Group I

la

reen Mts.

G

++ 44+

++
-+

+++ |
++

++++
-— 9.
+++++++++++

++

Katahdin.

+++++++ ++
++

Lesser Mts., Me.

Coast, Me.

Tableland, Table-top.

| N. Edge, Albert.

E

2
J.

+++++

++
+++

++t++++ +

+
++

++

t++tt¢4¢4

Willoughby.

Smuggler’s Notch.
‘St. John, R.

+ +
+ +

+++
+++

Restigouche R.

Gaspé Rivers.

Gaspé Coast.

++

+++

+++

III

| Tableland, Albert.

+++

1907]

TABLE I—continued.

Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants

161

NAMES OF PLANTS

Silene acaulis L.
Cerastium arvense L.
beeringianum Fisch.
cerastioides (L.) Britton
Sagina saginoides (L.) Britton
Arenaria arctica Stev.
sajanensis Willd.
ciliata L., var. humifusa Hornem.
verna L., var. propinqua (Richards. )
Fernald :
groenlandica (Retz.) Spreng.
Anemone parviflora Michx.
multifida Poir.
riparia Fernald
Ranunculus pygmaeus Wahl.
Allenii Robinson
Thalictrum alpinum L.
Subularia aquatica L. iN
Braya humilis (C. A. Meyer) Robinson
Cardamine bellidifolia L.,
var. laxa Lange
Draba incana L.
var. confusa (Ehrh. ) Poir.
stylaris Gay .
megasperma Fernald & Knows
pycnosperma Fernald & Knowlton
arabisans Michx. i
var. orthocarpa Fer nald& Knowlton
corymbosa R. Br.
aurea Vahl
Arabis alpina L.
hirsuta Scop.
Drummondi Gray .
Collinsii Fernald
Saxifraga nivalis L. us
stellaris L., var. comosa (Poir. ) Willd,
rivularis L.
oppositifolia L. .
Aizoon Jacq.
aizoides L.

| Green Mts.
| White Mts.

| Adir. Mts.
| Katahdin,

Group I

| Lesser Mts., Me.
|F

+

+

Coast, Me.

bie

| Tableland, Table-top.

| N. Edge, Albert.

la

+ +

| Smuggler’s Notch.

| Willoughby.

| St. John R.

II

| Restigouche R.

| Gaspé Rivers.

| Bic.

aspé Coast.

*
xc

| ¢

Table-top.

| N. W. Edge,

III

Tableland, Albert.

++

+++

162 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER
TABLE I —continued.
Grovpr I Ia II III
BEN age P
HEE Ib 3 5 E
| | | OF .lo | N-E NT
DAG E MSIMPIETISPIES bs
EEFIEME B AEREE E
NAMES OF PLANTS eirik "E s Eure IB 3
Ele ls -HICA 54 ECIE-RICAE-3 0-3 Aleta
HS B/S) 8S SIRT S178) el 3 | S\FlS
SIE IS] S/O]. ay TE iS |] S| 3 || ys
40 Fe ai alaia Fao Role
Saxifraga caespitosa L. | | | 4- | 4- |
Parnassia parviflora DC. + tI
Kotzebuei C. & S. . + + +/+
Rubus arcticus L, +]+ ae
Chamaemorus L. +) +/+) + |
castoris Fries | | ++ | |
triflorus Richards, ++ ++ 44+ 474) + 4 4/4/54 4+ 4+]+
Potentilla nivea L. | ae ae | aha abel se
Robbinsiana Oakes * I | | |
tridentata Ait. soa aod ed Oo a oe ia E + + T
palustris (L.) Scop. | 4 | 4+ |
Sibbaldia procumbens L. + + ]+
Geum Peckii Pursh re T ES
Dryas integrifolia Vahl rie"
Drummondii Richardson TEER ee,
Astragalus alpinus L. ; | | | |+] |
elegans (Hook.) Britton MO. HTC | | | | I+ +++ | |
Blum BeslestoH-.0. 5 2d wl] | +++ | | |
frigidus (L.) Gray, var. americanus | | | |
(Hook.) Watson | | +
Oxytropis campestris (L.) DC.,
var, johannensis Fernald he | ote | te |
Hedysarum boreale Nutt. | ele] tel +] I I
Empetrum nigrum L. j + Hib + + 4+ 44+ | | T
var. andinum DC. | [+++ | |^
Rhamnus alnifolia L'Her. | | | | J+] J+} [++
Viola nephrophylla Greene | ltl titi +i +]
palustris L. 23 [+] | ++ Es |
labradorica Schrank * ` | I++ ra pn ide | J+]
Shepherdia canadensis (L.) Nutt. ES Peraege se
Elaeagnus argentea Pursh POESI +| 4
Epilobium alpinum L. di EN ET
anagallidifolium Lam. | |+ Ce |
Pyrola grandiflora Radius || |-4 | | +
Ledum groenlandicum Oeder . TEE | Ben E oup
Rhododendron canadense (L.) BSP. | [++] ++ | E
lapponicum (L.) Wahl. *| |+ | 4| -bocx- || | | | T
Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desv. | | 4| 4- ++) | | E +
| | |

*V. labradorica Schrank, not V.

conspersa Reichenb. (V.

canina, var,

Muhlenbergii Gray).

nn as

ái

1907]

TABLE I

—continued.

Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants

163

NAMES OF PLANTS

Group I

Mts.
Lesser Mts., Me.

Green Mts.
White Mts.
Katahdin.

Adir.

Kalmia angustifolia L.
polifolia Wang. F de
Phyllodoce caerulea (L.) Gren. & Godr.
Cassiope hypnoides (L.) D. Don
Andromeda glaucophylla Link :
Chamaedaphne calyculata (L.) Moench
Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi (L.) Spreng. .
alpina (L.) Spreng.
Vaccinium uliginosum L.
caespitosum Michx.
ovalifolium J. E. Smith
canadense Richards,
pennsylvanicum Lam.,
var. angustifolium (Ait.) Gray
Vitis-Idaea L., var. minus Lodd. .
Oxycoccus L.
Diapensia lapponica L.
Primula mistassinica Michx.
farinosa L., var. macropoda Fernald
Statice sibirica (Turcz.) Ledeb. .
Gentiana Amarella L.,
var. acuta (Michx.)
Menyanthes trifoliata L.
Lappula deflexa (Wahlenb.) Garcke
Veronica alpina L., var. unalaschcensis C. &S
Castilleja pallida (L.) Benth., var. septens
trionalis (Lindl.) Gray
Euphrasia borealis Towns.
latifolia Pursh. .
Oakesii Wettstein .
Williamsii Robinson
Pedicularis flammea L.. Sm
Rhinanthus oblongifolius Fernald
Pinguicula vulgaris L. e
Galium kamtschaticum Steller
Viburnum pauciflorum Pylaie
Lonicera caerulea L., var. villosa (Michx. ) T.
& d. .
Valeriana sylvatica Banks : +
Campanula uniflora L.

Herder

+ ++
—++ttt
eerste

=

+++
++++
+++

Table-top.
Albert.
Smuggler’s Notch.

Tableland,

N. Edge,

Ia

=
_

III

St. John R.
Restigouche R.

Willoughby.
Bic.

te
xc

€

+++++

+++++

++ ++

+ +++

ispé Rivers.

dge, Table-top. a

`
vi)

Gaspé Coast.

N. W.E

|
|
+++ | Tableland, Albert.

+++

++++

E

|
ba
i

* V. sylvatica Banks, not V. uligihosa (T. & G.) Rydberg, which is

swamps of New England, New York, and the Great Lake region.

the plant of Arbor Vitae

164 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER
'TABLE I —continued.
Group I Ia II III
| | |
| | BEL
| | |e | =
| |2 : | | lel.
HE H ci | | ale
= -E RE oz ; fai z
IFIFINFICUM I Sals l alils
-EF-EP-RECEP-RPHI PH GI 3, -Epi i-i
NAMES OF PLANTS S223 F BR alfln BE Ss) E
SlV SiBISIigicla sio| Via Vics
HSS 828 1s]2 2455 6 ./ee]4
eEEStIsL.BESSSES.[|s
20 FSM AR ZA SE He Oso ale
| | | | i
Lobelia Kalmii L. HORDE tx | +|
Solidago decumbens Greene . dm
multiradiata Ait. +] +) +
ambigua Pursh idi
Virgaurea L., var. alpina Bigel. A + ++ ++
macrophylla Pursh, var. thyrsoidea (E.

Meyer) Fernald +/+ PES | +
bicolor L., var. concolor T. & G. | +) +/+) +/+) +/+
Aster foliaceus Lindl. TOA ee ae eae | 4 | +

puniceus L., var. oligocephalus Fer- 4 |
nald . + | + |
Erigeron acris L. g 4-H aca
var. droebachensis (0. F. M. ) Blytt. + + + ES
var. debilis Gray ES
hyssopifolius Michx. | Bed le fede | | tikiak
Antennaria neodioica Greene, | | | | eee eee
var, gaspensis Fernald ees | [+++
Gnaphalium supinum Villars |+ I | | | | |
norvegicum Gunner | FE S Ir
Achillea borealis Bongard EL In] rope Tn
Artemisia borealis Pallas . | $
var. Wormskjoldii Besser . 2
canadensis Michx. 4M 4 | fe
Petasites vitifolia Greene + |
trigonophylla Greene | | | +
Arnica mollis Hook + ale ds iud 4-2 +
chionopappa Fernald | +; jt) i+
gaspensis Fernald "A | | | 3
Senecio discoideus (Hook.) Britton. +/+
pauciflorus Pursh | j
Balsamitae Muhl. . 4} | + +
var. firmifolius Greenman | | "
Cirsium muticum Michx., var. monticola |
Perna... 45.553 | | +
Taraxacum ceratophorum (Ledeb. ) DC. | | E +) +) I4
Prenanthes Boottii (DC.) Gray . . ud +] dE | + eee roa
trifoliolata (Cass.) Fernald, | | | | oed | |
var. nana (Bigelow) Fernald +++ +++ ++ pn | | +

eee y sm

v".

»

w-— 1

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 165

1 Summits, and shores of high ponds, Adirondack Mts., New York.

? Summits, and shores of high ponds, higher Green Mts. (Mansfield, Camel's Hump,
etc.), Vermont.

3 Summit areas and ravines of the higher White Mts. (Washington, altitude 6300 feet
— 1922 meters,— Lafayette, etc.), and shores of high ponds in the White Mts, New

Hampshire.

1 Mt. Katahdin, altitude 5270 feet (1623 meters), the highest point in Maine. For
detailed account of flora see Ruopora, iii, 147-184 (1901).

5 Lesser mountains (Baldpate, Saddleback, Abraham, Bigelow, etc.), of western and
central Maine, For account of flora of Mt. Abraham see C. H. Knowlton, RHODORA,
i. 191-193 (1899); of Mt. Saddleback see C. H. Knowlton, RHODORA, V. 35-38 (1903).

9 Mt. Desert Island and adjacent islands and mainland coast, eastern Maine. See
Rand & Redfield, Flora of Mt. Desert I., Me. (1894).

7 Tableland area of Table-top Mt., a high tableland, extreme altitude 4250 feet (1296
meters), extending 15 miles or more north and south, in the western part of Gaspé Co.,
Quebec. Separated on the west from the Shickshock Mts. by the River Ste. Anne des
Monts.

8 Northern slopes and crests of Mt. Albert, a high tableland, extreme altitude 3900
feet (1195 meters), west of the River Ste. Anne des Monts, and forming the eastern end
of the Shickshock Mt. range, in Gaspé Co., Quebec. For list of plants see John
Macoun, Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. i, sec. 4, 127-136 (1883).

? Smuggler's Notch, a narrow pass shut in by cliff-walls of Mt. Mansfield and Sterling
Mt., in northern Vermont. For detailed accounts see C. G. Pringle, Am. Nat. x.
741—743 (1876); H. W. Preston, Am. Nat. xvi. 901-905 (1882); W. W. Eggleston, Bot,
Gaz. xx. 72-75 (1895); A. J. Grout, Plant. World, ii. 116-118 (1899) and Torreya, ii.
46—48 (1902). :

10 Cliffs and slides on the southwest side of Willoughby Mt., Orleans Co., Vermont. For
detailed account see G. G. Kennedy, RHODORA, vi. 93-134 (1904).

11 Cliffs and ledges of the St. John River and its tributaries, northern Maine and New
Brunswick.

Cliffs and ledges of the Restigouche River, New Brunswick and Quebec. For
account see G. U. Hay, Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. N. B. xiv. 12-35 (1890).

13 Cliffs and ledges of Little Cascapedia, Bonaventure, Grand, Ste. Anne des Monts,
and other rivers of Gaspé and Bonaventure Counties, Quebec, For account of the flora
of River Ste. Anne des Monts see John Macoun, l. c.

^ Many cliffs and headlands (conglomerate) of Bic and adjoining towns, Rimouski
Co., Quebec.

15 Sea-cliffs and mountains from Matane River to Cape Marsouin, and at other points
on the northern coast of Gaspé Co., Quebec; also Percé, Gaspé Co., Quebec. See
Macoun, l. c.

16 Narrow east and west abutments, northwest of the great tableland of Table-top Mt.,
Gaspé Co., Quebec, (See 7).

17 Tableland and exposed cafion-walls, Mt. Albert, Gaspé Co., Quebec. (See 8).

166 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

In the areas of the first group — the alpine districts of the Adirondacks -
of New York; the exposed summits of Mt. Mansfield and Camel's
Hump in Vermont; the alpine regions of the White Mts. of New
Hampshire; of Baldpate, Saddleback, Abraham, Bigelow, Katahdin,
and many lesser mountains of Maine; and of the tableland-area of
Table-top in Gaspé; as well as the cliff-coast of eastern Maine — we
find a flora many elements of which are common to all these areas,
the remaining species being absent for the most part from only one or
two. Of the 258 alpine and subalpine plants under consideration
70 (27.1 per cent.) are confined exclusively to the areas indicated as
Group I (including Ia); i. e., they are characteristic of the White Mts.,
Katahdin, or the tableland of Table-top, but are quite unknown from
the cliffs of Willoughby or of Percé, or from the tableland of Mt.

Albert. These 70 plants include such familiar species and varieties as

Hierochloe alpina. Salix herbacea.
Calamagrostis Langsdorffii. Arenaria groenlandica.
Deschampsia atropurpurea. Rubus Chamaemorus.
Poa laxa. Cassiope hypnoides.
Carex rariflora. Arctostaphylos alpina.
“ saxatilis, var. miliaris. Veronica alpina, var. unalaschcensis.
Salix phylicifolia. Rhinanthus oblongifolius.
* argyrocarpa. Solidago Virgaurea, var. alpina.
"* Uva-ursi. Prenanthes Boottii.

Of the distinctive plants of the second large group of alpine and
subalpine areas — Smuggler's Notch; Willoughby Cliffs; certain sea-
cliffs of Bie and of the north and east coasts of Gaspé; the cliffs of
certain northwestern spurs of Table-top Mt., and various river-cliffs
of northern Maine, New Brunswick and the interior of the Gaspé
Peninsula — there is likewise a very long list, 94 (36.4 per cent. of the
258 alpine plants here considered) of which are not, so far as known,
ever found associated with the plants which characterize Groups I
and III; while 11 others (4.3 per cent.) characteristic of Group I
are known outside the areas comprising this group only on the north
side of Mt. Albert which has already been noted as an anomalous
area, Group Ia. Among the most familiar plants of this large flora

(Group II) are

Cryptogramma Stelleri. Anemone multifida.
Asplenium viride. " parviflora.
Woodsia alpina. Draba stylaris.

" glabella. Saxifraga oppositifolia.

Carex eburnea. n Aizoón.

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 167

Saxifraga aizoides. Shepherdia canadensis.
Parnassia Kotzebuei. Primula farinosa, var. macropoda.
Dryas integrifolia. df mistassinica.
* — Drummondii. Gentiana Amarella, var. acuta.
Astragalus elegans. Pinguicula vulgaris.
S Blakei. Erigeron hyssopifolius.
Hedysarum boreale. Artemisia canadensis.

Although only 27 of these 105 (94 + 11) species characteristic of
Group II occur on Willoughby Cliffs and 23 of them on the cliffs of
Smuggler’s Notch, 102 of the 105 are found on the cliffs of eastern
Quebec where they are the characteristic vegetation.

The great tableland and cañon-walls of Mt. Albert, although ex-
posing many square miles of alpine region, have a comparatively
meagre flora; but the few species which there abound are of the
greatest interest to the eastern botanist, for with but few exceptions
they are quite unknown upon any other mountains or cliffs in eastern
North America. The plants which are strictly localized in the rock-
crevices and on the talus-slopes of Mt. Albert make up, so far as yet
determined, a flora of only 21 species (8.15 per cent. of the 258 alpine
and subalpine plants) but this flora includes the very distinctive
Adiantum pedatum, var. aleuticum. Arenaria ciliata, var. humifusa.
Cryptogramma densa. “ sajanensis.

Polystichum scopulinum. " arctica.
Deschampsia caespitosa, var. alpina. Statice sibirica.

Danthonia intermedia. Solidago decumbens.

Festuca altaica. Artemisia borealis.

Salix desertorum. kc " var. Wormski-
* ehlorolepis. oldii.

Lychnis alpina. Cirsium muticum, var. monticola.

The area indicated as Group Ia, the northern slopes and crests of
Mt. Albert, while supporting many plants (26) otherwise confined to
areas of Group I and several (11) otherwise known only from areas
of Group II, has by itself a scarcely noteworthy flora, only 5 plants
(1.9 per cent. of our alpine species). These plants — Carex lagopina,
Luzula spicata, var. tenella, Sagina saginoides, Ranunculus pygmaeus
and R. Allenii — are all technical species and varieties and it is not
improbable that further exploration will show them to belong pri-
marily to either Group I or II.

The plants referred to in the preceding paragraphs represent a
considerable proportion of our alpine and subalpine species and
strongly marked varieties which, when they grow upon exposed sum-
mits and slopes and cold cliffs, are confined very definitely to certain

168 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

isolated localities but are quite absent from many closely adjacent
alpine and subalpine areas in which the conditions of exposure, ex-
tremes of temperature, and amount of precipitation are seemingly the
same. Besides the three primary groups of plants which, south of the
St. Lawrence, are confined each to a single mountain or to certain
very definite mountains and cliffs, there are several secondary groups
of alpine species which are found associated with the members of each
of two of the primary groups but not the third; and a rather smaller
group of species which show no apparent selection of alpine areas.
That is to say, a few plants grow in equal abundance on Mt. Wash-
ington, Katahdin, or Table-top (Group I) and on the tableland of
Mt. Albert (Group II); others occur on the tableland of Mt. Albert
(Group IIT) and also on the cliffs of Smuggler's Notch, or of the lower
St. Lawrence, or on the northwestern abutments of Table-top Mt.
(Group II); while only a few species thrive in all these areas (Groups
I, I, and III). These facts will perhaps be more clearly brought out
by the following summary.

TABLE II.

SUMMARY OF THE KNOWN DISTRIBUTION SOUTH OF THE ST.
LAWRENCE OF 258 ALPINE AND SUBALPINE PLANTS ABOVE
ENUMERATED, SHOWING THE NUMBER OCCURRING IN THE VARIOUS
GROUPS OF AREAS.

Group. Species. | Per cent.
I | 65 25.2
Confined to a Ia | 5 19
single group II 94 36.4
Ill | 21 | 8.15
L T
I&II 12 | 4.65
Ia & II 11 | 4.3
i I&III 32 | 12.4
Occurring on two| Ta & TII 0 | 0
or more groups | JI & III 4 | 1.55
Ia, II & III 2 | 0.8
I, Ia, II & III 12 4.65
E: ! hpi
| 258 100.00

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 169

Of the species which abound on Mt. Washington, Katahdin, or
Table-top (Group I) and on the tableland of Mt. Albert (Group III)
as well, but are unknown on the coastal cliffs of Gaspé and in other
areas with an essentially identical flora (Group II) there are 32 (12.4
per cent.), of which the following are noteworthy.

Lycopodium Selago, var. appressum. Loiseleuria procumbens,

Carex canescens. Kalmia angustifolia.

" rigida, var. Bigelowii. " polifolia.
Juncus trifidus. Phyllodoce caerulea.
Betula glandulosa. Andromeda glaucophylla.
Silene acaulis. Vaccinium uliginosum.
Rubus arcticus. d canadense.

[11

Empetrum nigrum. Vitis-Idaea, var. minus.
Ledum groenlandicum. Diapensia lapponica.
Rhododendron lapponicum. Prenanthes trifoliolata, var. nana.

Twelve other plants (4.6 per cent.) unknown from the tableland
of Mt. Albert (Group III) are common to districts included in Groups
I and II; 11 species (4.3 per cent.) are common to Groups Ia and II,
but are unknown from Groups I and III; 4 (1.5 per cent.) are common
to Groups ILand III; and 2 only (0.8 per cent.), absent from areas of
Group I proper, are known from Groups Ia, II and III.

Twelve species (4.65 per cent.) are common to all the areas. These
noteworthy plants are all familiar species:

Larix laricina. Luzula parviflora.
Picea mariana. Rubus triflorus.
“ canadensis. Potentilla tridentata.
Abies balsamea. Castilleja pallida, var. septentriona-
Agrostis borealis, lis.
Carex brunnescens. Viburnum pauciflorum.
“ scirpoidea.

It is apparent from this analysis of our alpine floras that, of the 258
plants here enumerated, 185 species and varieties (65 + 5 + 94 + 21)
or 71.65 per cent. are closely restricted in their occurrence south of the
St. Lawrence each to only one of the groups of mountains, cliffs, and
alpine areas above tabulated; 61 (12 + 11 + 32 + 4 + 2) or 23.7
per cent. are known from two of the primary groups but not the third;
and only 12 or 4.65 per cent. are found on all three groups of mountains
and cliffs. Obviously, with less than 5 per cent. of our alpine and
subalpine plants showing an inclination to grow upon all our mountain
areas, but with more than 95 per cent. of the species showing a decided
preference either for one group of alpine areas or for two of the groups

170 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

but not the third, there is to be found in the characteristics of these
areas some influence or group of influences which is of fundamental
importance in the distribution of plants.

If we seek in the precipitation and exposure of such districts as the
tableland of Table-top Mt. (Group I), the northwestern escarpments
of Table-top (Group II), and the tableland of Mt. Albert (Group II),
an explanation of the very dissimilar floras of these areas we shall find
that, as we should expect, these closely adjacent slopes and summits
(the northwestern escarpments and the western edge of Table-top
only about ten miles east of the tableland of Albert) have no apparent
difference in the amount of precipitation. Nor is the exposure of
these cloud-enshrouded districts a significant factor. The flat table-
land of Mt. Albert, for instance, and its cafion-valleys with walls facing
north, south, east, and west support an essentially uniform flora;
similarly, upon Table-top a uniform flora is found upon north, south,
east, and west exposures as well as upon the level portions of the
tableland. Precipitation and exposure are, then, of only minor
importance in determining the localized distribution of our alpine
plants.

In attempting to account for the peculiarities of plant distribution
much stress has been laid of late upon the degree of fineness or coarse-
ness of soils, and their water-content. But to those intimate with the
occurrence of our alpine plants these factors, again, seem of secondary
importance. For instance, Cystopteris montana on Mt. Albert grows
in equal abundance on the firm and steep amphibolite cliffs and in
the deep, fine and saturated alluvium of mountain streams. Sela-
ginella selaginoides, abundant in the wet mossy bogs of Bonaventure
and Gaspé Counties, Quebec, is quite as much at home in the well-
drained alpine meadows or in the crevices of either wet or dry rocks,
in the latter situation merely becoming stiffer and more stocky than
in deep shade or moisture. Zygadenus chloranthus is apparently
indifferent whether it is in the crevices of sun-baked rock, on cold cliffs,
in river-alluvium or in wet bogs. Similarly, many other members
of the flora characteristic of the areas classed as Group II grow in
wet or dry, fine or coarse soils.

The distinctive plants of Groups I and III, likewise, show a remark-
able indifference to the coarseness or fineness, the dryness or satura-
tion of their supporting soils. Empetrum nigrum, Ledum gqroenlandi-
cum, Vaccinium Vitis-Idaea, var. minus, and Prenanthes trifoliolata,

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 171

var. nana, for example, seem equally at home in crevices of sun-baked
or spray-showered rock, on sandy plains, in well-drained alpine mead-
ows, and in saturated sphagnum bogs. With our alpine plants so
ubiquitous, then, in their occurrence, upon saturated, well-drained, or
dry soils, and with an apparent ability to thrive equally well in fine
river alluvium or in the crevices of a scarcely altered ledge or cliff, we
are hardly justified in depending upon these factors to explain the
distribution indicated in the preceding tabulation.

When, on the other hand, we examine the lithological character of
the regions in which these plants occur we find a very striking coinci-
dence between the soil-forming rocks of these mountains and cliffs
and the distribution of the plants which cover them.

In the first group of alpine areas specially indicated — the great
mass of the White Mountains of New Hampshire; the Adirondack
Mountains of New York; the highest summits of the Green Moun-
tains of Vermont; Baldpate, Saddleback, Abraham, Bigelow, Katah-
din, and nearly all the other naked-topped mountains of Maine; the
great tableland of Table-top Mountain in Gaspé; and Mt. Desert
Island and other parts of the exposed eastern coast of Maine — the
predominant and often the exclusive rocks are granite or gneiss (both
containing much orthoclase or potash-feldspar, and generally musco-
vite or potash-mica) or mica (muscovite)-schist,' often in close proxi-
mity, and all especially high in potassium. "The distinctive soil ele-
ment of the alpine areas constituting Group I is, then, potassium;
and on these mountains and cliffs peculiarly rich in potassie constitu-
ents we find 122 of the plants here discussed, nearly two-thirds of
which in their alpine distribution are quite unknown on the moun-
tains of Groups II and III.

When, however, we examine the second large group of alpine and
subalpine areas we shall find that their characteristie rocks differ
from those of the first group — the mountains characterized by
granite, gneiss, and mica-schist, rocks which furnished a strongly
potassic soil — in one constant point. The cliffs of Percé, of the

1 For valuable assistance in the determination of several characteristic rock-specimens
from eastern Quebec the writer is under special obligations to Professor J. E. Wolff and
his student, Mr. H. N. Eaton, Upon these determinations and the detailed reports of
members of the Geological Survey of Canada the writer has chiefly depended for the
lithological data in this article. He is also indebted for suggestions upon the soil con-
stituents of many rocks to Mr. H. H. Bartlett of the Gray Herbarium.

? For details of the mountains and cliffs of Percé see J. M. Clarke, N. Y. State Mus.,
Rep. lvii, 1. pt. 1 (Bull. 80), 133-171 (1905).

172 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

north coast of the Gaspé Peninsula,’ and of Bic ? are chiefly limestones,
calcareous sandstones, limestone-conglomerates, and calcareous slates;
the northwestern escarpments of Table-top Mt., where Salia vestita
and S. glauca, Saxifraga oppositifolia, S. Aizoon and S. aizoides, and
Primula mistassinica abound, are limestones; the river-cliffs and
ledges of many streams of eastern Quebec, northern New Brunswick
and Maine, characterized by Cryptogramma Stelleri, Asplenium viride,
Woodsia alpina and W. glabella, Carex eburnea, Tofieldia glutinosa,
Astragalus elegans, Hedysarum boreale, Shepherdia canadensis,
Primula mistassinica, Pinguicula vulgaris, Erigeron hyssopifolius,
etc., are chiefly limestones and limy slates (Silurian),* or frequently
some other rock penetrated by veins of calcite; the famous cliffs at
Willoughby where the most notable plants occur are of impure lime-
stone;? and the great cliffs of Smuggler’s Notch, unknown personally
to the writer, are said by those who are familiar with them to show

1 “On the south side of the St. Lawrence, in the counties of Gaspé and Rimouski, the
rocks of the Quebec group are unconformably overlaid by a series of calcareous strata,
which we have been accustomed to call the Gaspé limestones.” —Logan, Geology of
Canada, 390 (1863). For further details see Logan, l. c. 390-453; also Ells, Geol. Surv.
Can., Rep. of Progress for 1880-81 and —82, part D D (1883).

? “In the vicinity of Bic Harbour there is a great display of the limestone conglomerates
and the associated calcareous sandstones of groups B [Lower Silurian conglomerate
limestones], and it is to the resistance which they have offered to the destroying agencies
that have worn away the other rocks of the coast, that the formation of Bic Harbour is
due,.... In the limestone conglomerates the masses inclosed are sometimes very large;
a boulder of dark gray limestone inclosed in one of the bands at Metis was measured
and computed to weigh twelve tons; another in another part of probably the same band
measured eleven feet long by six feet broad, and was supposed to weigh upward of twenty-
five tons."— Richardson, Geol. Surv. Can., Rep. of Progr. for 1858, pp. 149, 150 (1859).
Mr. H. N. Eaton's microscopical examination of rock-samples collected by the writer
from two of the Bic headlands showed the limestone and other pebbles and boulders to
be held together by a calcareous cement.

3 “ Along the east and west flanks of Table-top Mountain, beds of dark-grey limestone
are seen which upon careful examination showed no trace of fossils, but which, on account
of their resemblance to the Levis limestones of the coast, described in former reports,
and their position in relation to these rocks, are thought to be of the same age [Cambrian].

They appear to have been lifted up by the great granite mass which forms the main
portion of Table-top Mountain, and for some distance from their contact with this mass,
they show signs of alteration, being more or less changed to a dark-grey marble, The
country occupied by these rocks is very mountainous. The ridges run east and west,
seemingly along the general strike of the rocks, and are cut by numerous brooks on both
sides of the water-shed, distant about six miles from the coast, and between it and the
Ste. Anne River.

The mountains have rounded outlines, and are well wooded, although in the vicinity
of Table-top they rise to a height of three thousand feet above the sea level, the general
height being about fifteen hundred feet."— Low, Geol. Surv. Can., Rep. for 1882-83-
84, pt. F. 15 (1884).

4 See Logan, Geol. of Canada (1863); J. W. Dawson, Acadian Geol, (1878); etc.

5 See Kennedy, RHODORA, vi. 94, 95 (1904).

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 173

distinct incrustations of lime, especially in the sheltered pockets which
are the hiding-places of Cryptogramma Stelleri. The soils of the
second primary group of alpine areas are, then, distinctly calcareous;
and on the calcareous mountains and cliffs we find 135 of the species
here under consideration,! 94 of which are apparently unknown upon
the little-caleareous but strongly potassic rocks (Group I) and upon
the tableland area of Mt. Albert which constitutes Group III.

This third primary division of our alpine districts, the tableland of
Mt. Albert, has long been distinguished among the mountains of Gaspé
as an extensive area of serpentine, a soft rock which is essentially a
hydrated magnesium silicate. The analysis of typical serpentine as
given by Dana is ‘‘silica 43.48, magnesia 43.48, water 13.04 = 100," ?
though extensive areas of massive serpentine do not reach this standard
of purity. The distinctive soil-element, then, in the third primary
division of our alpine areas is magnesium. Now, the presence in a
soil of so large an amount of magnesian compounds and the absence
of appreciable amounts of potassium and calcium produce conditions
exceedingly unfavorable to the majority of plants; and the vast ser-
pentine area of Mt. Albert appears to the unbotanical visitor essentially
destitute of vegetation. This impression of the area was well described
by Dr. A. P. Low, the discriminating Director of the Geological Survey
of Canada, who in the summer of 1883 spent some weeks in a study
of the geology of the Shickshock Mts. and of Table-top Mt. Mr.
Low says: “The top of Mt. Albert is nearly flat, and is rent by a deep
gorge on the east side, which, near its head, splits into several smaller
ones. The sides of these gorges are quite destitute of vegetation and
the bare serpentine rocks are weathered to a light buff color. On the
top of the mountain blocks of serpentine are scattered around, and are
partially covered by a thick growth of mosses [chiefly Racomitrium
lanuginosum] and lichens. Sheltered places are occupied by a stunted
growth of black spruce (Abies nigra), which rarely attains a height of
ten feet. The branches interlace near the ground and form an im-
penetrable thicket. The whole surface has a dead appearance, and
reminds one of the pictures of the moon.” ?

This vivid impression of the serpentine area of Mt. Albert is gained

1 In Europe many species have been pointed out as confined primarily to calcareous
soils. For a bibliography on this subject see Schimper, Pflanzen-Geogr. 129, 130 (1898).

? Dana, Man. Geol., ed. 4, 68 (1895).

3 Low, Geol. Surv. Can., Rep. for 1882-83-84, pt. F. 7, 8 (1884).

174 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

by all who visit it, yet upon its seemingly naked slopes, in the crevices
of the rock, and among the decomposing boulders, many plants are
spread which in the first grand view of the region make little appeal
to the eye. As already seen, 21 alpine plants are, so far as known,
found south of the St. Lawrence only on the serpentine of Mt. Albert.
Other species whose identity is still in doubt carry the number of these
distinctive plants well toward forty. Several species also (32), un-
known upon the strongly calcareous cliffs and mountains, but abound-
ing on the slopes characterized by potassic rocks — Betula glandulosa,
Empetrum nigrum, Rhododendron lapponicum, Vaccinium uliginosum,
etc.— are equally abundant on the serpentine; 6 others, — Selaginella
selaginoides, Cerastium arvense, A renaria verna, var. propinqua, etc.,—
are common to the limy rocks and the serpentine; and 12 species are
found growing in many stations upon all three groups of mountains.
It is, however, important to note that, while the coniferous trees occur
as luxuriant forest upon the north slope of Mt. Albert nearly to the
summit, reaching an altitude of 3300 feet (1000 meters), and form
extensive forests on the high tableland at 3500 to 4000 feet (1050 to
1215 meters) of Table-top Mt.; they are on the serpentine of Mt.
Albert only as scattered and uncharacteristic dwarf trees and shrubs,
and no forest of appreciable character is seen in the area above the
level of Ruisseau à la Neige at an altitude of about 1900 feet (570
meters), where the forest consists of meagre and valueless Bog Spruce
(Picea mariana). In its meagre appearance the Bog Spruce on the
serpentine of Mt. Albert is paralleled by Rhododendron lapponicum,
Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum groenlandicum, and other species,
which, having their great development on potassic rocks, are on the
serpentine of Mt. Albert very dwarfed and of a starved aspect. The
more distinctive plants of the mountain, however,— Adiantum pedatum,
var. aleuticum, Polystichum scopulinum, Festuca altaica, Lychnis
alpina, Arenaria arctica, Statice sibirica, Artemisia borealis, etc.—
are, especially in damp hollows or along water-courses, luxuriant to a
surprising degree; the stipes of the Adiantum often exceeding a foot
in length, the fronds of the Polystichum eighteen inches long, the
handsome clumps of Festuca with culms two to three feet high, and
Artemisia borealis, ordinarily only a few inches high, attaining in its
var. Wormskioldii a height of twelve or fifteen inches, with wand-like
inflorescences eight inches in length. From these observations it is
concluded that, of the large group of plants which abound upon the

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 175

potassic rocks, a few are able to grow, under protest as it were, upon
the strongly magnesian soil of Mt. Albert; but that another group of
plants, unknown upon our granitic, gneissic, and schistose mountains
or on the strongly calcareous mountains and cliffs, are not only re-
stricted to the strongly magnesian rocks, but there attain a normal
and often a luxuriant development.’

It will be remembered that on the northern edge of Mt. Albert
(Group Ia) two groups of plants are found; some species ordinarily
confined to the potassic rocks (feldspathic or micaceous), others gen-
erally known only from the strongly calcareous soils. Different sec-
tions of the northern and eastern slopes of the mountain examined
by Mr. Low showed the rock of the upper or subalpine and alpine
district to be chiefly hornblende-schist and amphibolite, with occa-
sional large areas of impure limestone, chloritic slates and schists; and
gneiss, made up chiefly of orthoclase (potash-feldspar) and hornblende ;
and as indicated by rock-specimens kindly examined microscopically

1 It is interesting, in view of the great abundance on the serpentine of Mt. Albert of
Cerastium arvense, to note that in 1887 Drs. Hollick and Britton called attention to the
fact that on Staten Island C. arvense, var. oblongifolium ‘* grows abundantly at many
places on the serpentine hills, and in no other parts of the Island”; and that an analysis
of the ash of the Staten Island plant showed it to contain `

“Silica (SiO,) à ^ : > : ; : . 39.85
Alumina and Oxide of Iron (Al, O; and Fe, Oj) . ; . 18.58
Lime (CaO) : : x s : * E e 9.35
Magnesia (MgO) . : í : ^ 19.79”

See Hollick & Britton, Bull. Torr. Cl. xiv. 45-50 (1887).

This is a remarkable amount of magnesia to be present in a plant, the average plants
of mixed soils deriving from the soil much less magnesia (See Dana, Man. ed. 4, 74).

As a rock plant, Cerastium arvense is rare in Maine, only one station, on the rocks
between Cape Cottage and the light-house at Cape Elizabeth, being known personally
to the writer; and, according to Hitchcock ‘‘Cape Elizabeth is largely composed of
talcose schist [hydrous silicate of magnesium] "— C. H. Hitchcock, Agr. and Geol. Me.,
Ser. 2, 1861, p. 162 (1861). It will be noticed that in the tables of distribution Cerastium
arvense is entered in Group I only from the eastern coast of Maine. The stations are
few, the Duck Islands, etc., and it is not improbable that the plant is there on magnesian
soil, for Hitchcock records talcose schist and serpentine as largely present along the
coast of Penobscot Bay and on some of the neighboring islands. (Hitchcock, 1. c.,
162-163).

Several other plants of low altitudes have been recorded as occurring primarily on
magnesian soils, but as yet such data in regard to North American plants is unfortunately
rare.

In Europe, two much-discussed ferns, Asplenium adulterinum Milde and A. Adiantum
nigrum, subsp. serpentini (Tausch) Heufler, are clearly demonstrated to grow only on
serpentine, and on that rock to take the places respectively of A. viride, which prefers
calcareous rocks, and A. Adiantum nigrum (typical), which is commonly on silicious soils.
— For discussion see Luerssen, Farnpfl.165-184, 275-281 (1889), also Schimper, Pflanzen-
Geogr. 103, 104 (1898). :

2 Low, Geol. Surv. Can., Rep. for 1882-83-84, pt. F. 17, 18 (1884).

176 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

for the writer by Mr. H. N. Eaton, the amphibolite of the northern
slope shows, besides hornblende and tale (a silicate of magnesium),
calcite (carbonate of lime) and a lime-soda feldspar. In the
soil of this slope, then, potassium and calcium are found in such
proportion, apparently, as to account for the presence of a few species
each of the plants (24 of the potassic rocks, 11 of the calcareous)
which ordinarily are found only on soils high in one or the other of
these two elements.

But the chief interest of the north slope of Mt. Albert is in the fact
that by far the most abundant mineral in the rocks is hornblende,
which has as its principal constituents silica, magnesia, protoxide of
iron, and lime.? Yet, so far as observed, none of the distinctive plants
of the serpentine (magnesian) area of Mt. Albert extend across to the
hornblende (also magnesian) area. This is obviously due to the
hardness and slow decomposition of the hornblende as opposed to
the softness and rapid decomposition of the serpentine, but detailed
chemical analyses of the soils and plant-ashes, now under way, by Mr.
H. H. Bartlett, will, when completed, furnish more satisfactory conclu-
sions as to the exact conditions. Similarly, many questions somewhat
outside the intended scope of the present preliminary paper have
presented themselves for solution, but before they can be appropriately
diseussed they must await more detailed field-study and the com-
pletion of many chemical analyses.

The foregoing discussion, however, of the relation of our alpine
plants to the chief soil-constituents of the rocks upon which they
grow, establishes very conclusively the fact that the alpine plants
are much more dependent upon the chemical constituents of the soil
than has been generally supposed.

! Mr. Eaton's analysis of this rock from the north crest of Mt. Albert is as follows:

“A heavy, black schistose rock containing hornblende and feldspar.

In thin section — a holocrystalline rock, composed of hornblende, plagioclase, and talc.

The hornblende constitutes the great bulk of the rock. It is very pleochoric — light
yellow, grass green, and greenish blue. Some crystals are idiomorphic, while others
are eaten into and show intergrowths with feldspar and calcite.

Feldspar is relatively abundant in allotriomorphic prisms. It is wholly plagioclase.
Twinning according to both the carlsbad and albite laws is common. The albite stria-
tions make angles of 9, 19, and 36 degrees respectively on three crystals which were
tested; proving the species to have a range between a mixture of oligoclase and andesine,
through andesine, to basic labradorite.

Tale occurs abundantly in irregular masses between the hornblende crystals, and seems
to be a product of hornblende decomposition.

The rock is an amphibolite. ”

? Dana, Man. Geol. ed. 4, 67 (1894),

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 177

Unfortunately, the data accompanying herbarium-specimens rarely
indicates anything of the soil-characters of the habitats of plants;
and, besides, these facts are not easily gained from extensive geological
maps. Yet, if we examine the sheets issued by the Geological Survey
of Canada, we shall find that in their range outside the areas specially
under consideration the plants which we have been discussing show
a selection of soils similar to that already pointed out. A few illustra-
tions will make this point more clear.

Empetrum nigrum, the Crow-berry or Curlew-berry, it will be
remembered, is one of the commonest plants of the granitic, gneissic,
and schistose mountains and coastal rocks of northern New England,
New York, and eastern Canada. Outside of this area it abounds on
the eastern coast of Newfoundland, throughout the Labrador Penin-
sula, in Baffin Land and Greenland, and more or less across the Arctic;
*along the north shore of Lake Superior, and at Port Arthur....
Thence it takes a northwesterly direction and is found in peat bogs,
on exposed rocks along lake shores, and on barren grounds to the
Pacific Ocean and Arctic Sea.”! From the Arctic it extends south-
ward along the Coast Range to the region of Sitka; it is on the moun-
tains of southern British Columbia, and very locally at isolated alpine
or coastal stations southward. Many other characteristic plants of
the eastern potassic rocks — Loiseleuria procumbens, Vaccinium
uliginosum, V. Vitis-Idaea, var. minus, Rubus Chamaemorus, etc.—
follow essentially this distribution and are unknown or of the greatest
rarity along the Rocky Mountains. Others, however, such as Sib-
baldia procumbens, are on the highest peaks of the Rocky Mountain
system as well. Another group of these species is well represented
by Vaccinium ovalifolium which, common on the potassic rocks of
Gaspé, is unknown in the Arctic regions and the Rocky Mountains;
but occurs from the Aleutian Islands to the mountains of Oregon,
also in northern Michigan and in Newfoundland and southern Labra-
dor. Still another group, represented by Arenaria groenlandica, is
confined to Greenland, Labrador, the north shore of the St. Lawrence,
the summit of Table-top, the coast of Nova Scotia near Halifax, the
coast of Maine from the Mt. Desert region to the mouth of the Kenne-
bec, the mountain-summits of northern New England and New York,
a bleak granite slope below Middletown, Connecticut, and a few iso-

1 Macoun, Cat. Can. Pl. i. 458 (1886)

178 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

lated summits to the highest peaks of the Carolinas. Various minor
modifications of these ranges might be given, but these are sufficient
to indicate the general distribution of these plants which in New Eng-
land, New York, and eastern Canada are confined to granite, gneiss,
and mica-schist.

Now, if we examine the lithological character of these areas in
which Empetrum nigrum, Sibbaldia procumbens, Vaccinium ovalifo-
lium, and Arenaria groenlandica abound, we shall find that these
plants are commonly on potassic rocks. Thus, as shown by a geo-
logical map of Canada, the ancient Archaean area occupies nearly
the whole district from Labrador to Lake Superior and the Lake of
the Woods, its western boundary thence swinging northwestward to
Lake Winnipeg, westward and northward to Lake Athabasca, Great
Slave Lake, and then north to the Arctic.! This great area is primarily
of gneiss, granites and mica-schist, rocks, it will be remembered,
which are markedly potassic; and the area of its great development,
it will be noted, is strikingly coincident with the general range assigned
by Professor Macoun to Empetrum nigrum, a plant which in Labrador
is reported by Low as “abundant throughout the semi-barren and bar-
ren regions of the peninsula, growing freely on the coast and inland," ?
and by Delabarre as "the most abundant phenogamous plant of
Labrador"? Empetrum, it will be remembered, extends along the
Coast Range from the Arctic to the region of Sitka, and locally south-
ward. It is also on the mountains of southern British Columbia,
but absent from the general Rocky Mountain area. When we again
examine the geological map of Canada, we find that the entire Coast
Range is designated as “Coast Granite," and that most of the southern
part of British Columbia (immediately north of Washington) is grani-
tic. Similarly, in the Rocky Mountains, where Sibbaldia procum-
bens and some other plants of these potassic rocks occur, the Archaean
rocks form the “backbone” of the mountains; and in northern Michi-
gan, where Vaccinium ovalifolium is found, and along the crests of,
the Alleghanies, where Arenaria groenlandica occurs, we have iso-
lated southern extensions of the great Archaean axis which is best
developed from Labrador to Lake Superior and northwestward.‘

! The boundaries of this Archaean V-shaped mass are very distinctly shown in Dana's
Manual, ed. 4, fig. 494. Note there also the isolated areas of Archaean.

? Low, Geol. Surv. Can., Ann, Rep. n. s., viii. pt. L. 40 (1896).

3 Delabarre, Bull. Geogr. Soc. Phil. iii. 190 (1902).
1 See Dana, l. c.

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 179

Furthermore, in the Maritime Provinces of Canada in which we know
only a single station for 4 renaria groenlandica (on rocks near Halifax),
granite is of only occasional occurrence, in fact it is quite unknown
on the coast between Nova Scotia and the north shore of the St. Law-
rence, In Nova Scotia, however, there are some isolated granitic
areas, one of the largest extending from Halifax Harbor to Margaret’s
Bay,! the only coastal station for Arenaria groenlandica in Canada
south of the St. Lawrence. Likewise, at the only station in Connecti-
cut for Arenaria groenlandica, the plant is said by its discoverer to
grow “on bleak granite rocks below the city [Middletown] " ?

When, however, we examine the broad range of plants which in
New England and eastern Canada are confined to strongly calcareous
rocks, we find that they have a distribution quite different in some
details from those just examined. "The range of Dryas Drummondii
— on the limy rocks and gravels of the Gaspé Peninsula, on Anti-
costi, and generally along the rivers of the Canadian Rockies — has
been noted. Many other plants show a similar range. Now, as
indicated on the recent geological map of western C anada, the general
area occupied by the Canadian Rocky Mountains is called Palaeozoic,
a general classification to cover much of the area indicated on a pre-
vious map merely as "limestone"; and in his Journal of a Boat
Voyage through Rupert's Land and the Arctic Sea, Sir John Richard-
son mentions Dryas Drummondii, Hedysarum boreale, Elaeagnus
argentea, Shepherdia canadensis, and several other plants of our
caleareous cliffs and gravels as abounding on the limestones of the
Mackenzie River? Other plants of our limestone mountains and
cliffs occur at somewhat scattered stations in Newfoundland, Labra-
dor, and Arctic America; and a few of the plants, which south of the
St. Lawrence are confined to the magnesian soils of Mt. Albert, are
also known at isolated points from Newfoundland northward.

In order to test, so far as it is possible to do so without more accurate

1 See Geological map of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick and Prince Edward Island, by
J. W. Dawson, in Acadian Geology (1878).

2 H. L. Osborn in letter to Asa Gray, May 17, 1878.

3 “ The dogwood, silvery opulaster (Elaeagnus argentea), Shepherdia, and Amelanchier
grow on banks that in Europe would be covered with gorse and broom, and the southern
Salix candida is replaced by the more luxuriant and much handsomer Salix speciosa,
which is the prince of the willow family. The Hedysarum Mackenzii and boreale flower
freely among the boulders that cover the clayey beaches; while the showy yellow
flowers and handsome foliage of the Dryas Drummondii cover the limestone debris."—
Richardson, Arct. Searching Exped. 123 (1852).

180 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

data than exists upon herbarium-labels, the conclusions above reached,
the writer has listed all the stations known to him, either from speci-
mens or authentic reports, in arctic and subarctic British America,
for fifteen of the more typical plants of the alpine districts of New
England, New York and eastern Canada. In this work he has been
greatly assisted by the map of Arctic British America and the accom-
panying notes published by Dr. G. M. Dawson.* In order to make
the test more valuable the fifteen plants whose ranges were thus
studied were selected equally from those of the three groups above
tabulated. All together 55 stations or definite regions for these fifteen
plants have been found. Of these, 7 are either not indicated on avail-
able maps or are too vaguely stated on the labels to be of service.
The remaining 48 stations are listed in the following tabulation, and
in each case the rock of the region, which could furnish the soil-ele-
ments for which the plants show distinct preferences in New York,
New England, and eastern Canada, is noted.

TaBLeE III.

SHOWING THE KNOWN STATIONS OR REGIONS, FROM NEWFOUND-
LAND TO ARCTIC BRITISH AMERICA, FOR 15 ALPINE PLANTS OF
New York, New ENGLAND AND EASTERN CANADA.

z EIE: |
Ta o/h]
Group I (Plants which, south of the St, Lawrence, are = i E | =
controlled in their Distribution by a Preponderance $ls|/E| Sk
of Potassium in the Soil.) a|S|S|B|R
z [: EET
S 8ISICIZ
Stations, and Rocks of the Region from which Potassic &ixi3|2|$
Soils could be derived, E | g| 5 3 | =
Cape Ray and Channel to White Bay, Newfoundland (Ar- |
ON 9. 10 X ll... re un + +
Despair Bay to Fogo Island, etc., Newfoundland (Archaean D J++ | -F
Southeastern Newfoundland (Archaean +) ee | a |+|+
Baie Ste. Claire, Pointe-Ouest, ete., Anticosti(granite, gneiss?) |-- | i+ +
North shore of St. Lawrence from Cap à l'Aigle to Bradore Er]
Bay, Quebec (granite, gneiss *) (09 4 r eE
Red Bay, Labrador ST a, T | | +
Sandwich Bay, Labrador (syenite®) . . . . . , . .. t|
St. Lewis Inlet, Labrador (syenite, gneiss% . . . . . . | + M

* Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. Can., Ann. Rep. n. s., ii. pt. R (1887).

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 181

TABLE III —continued.

Group I (Plants which, south of the St. Lawrence, are
controlled in their Distribution by a Preponderance
of Potassium in the Soil.)

Stations, and Rocks of the Region from which Potassic
Soils could be derived.

Eriophorum callitrix

| Arenaria groenlandica

Carex rariflora
| Rubus Chamaemorus

| Empetrum nigrum

Seal Island, Labrador (gneiss?) .
Webeck Harbor, Labrador (gneiss, syenite 8
Hopedale, Labrador (gneiss, granite ?) f
Paul's Island, Labrador (gneiss !?) j
Nain, Labrador (gneiss ) . . .
Hebron, Labrador (gneiss ?) .
Ungava Bay, Cape Chudleigh, Labrador (gneiss sy
Cumberland Sound, Baffin Land (gneiss, granite) .
Nottingham Island, Hudson Strait (gneiss, syenite *) .
Cape Prince of Wales and Ashe’s Inlet, or North Bluff, Hud: |
son Strait (gneiss '*) .
Richmond Gulf, Ungava (feldspathic argillite, gneiss, ‘ete. DE |+
Great Whale River, Ungava (gneiss !5) . ^ BT...
Lake Mistassini, North East Territory (gneiss 19) ; ee
Fort Churchill, Hudson Bay (felspathic arkose, etc. 2). I + +
Chesterfield Inlet, Hudson Bay (granite, gneiss?) . . . . Toc
+
-A

DES

eb e+ |
+ + +++ + +
T4

ee

i

Great Bear Lake, Mackenzie (granite, gneiss ?) . SIE E
Fort Resolution, Great Slave Lake, Mackenzie (granite 25) Tu |
Athabasca Plains, Athabasca (granite and gneiss ?*) 2.3 |

1 Dana indicates a “central Newfoundland range" of Archaean, and ''two other
ranges farther east," the only one shown on his map running from Despair Bay north-
eastward to Fogo Island region. On Logan's map in the Atlas accompanying the Geol-
ogy of Canada (1863) the southeastern district of Newfoundland is also indicated as
chiefly Archaean.

2 “Cette soi-disant forêt sur laquelle on marche....se trouve en quelques endroites
de la cóte, comme à la Pointe-Ouest, par example. La, la végétation se présente, en
effet, sous l’ aspect d’ un tapis serré de plantes basses (Arctostaphylos Uva-Ursi, Vacci-
nium Vitis-Idaea, Vaccinium pennsylvanicum, Ribes oxyacanthoides, Empetrum nigrum,
etc.), formé en outre de tous petits sapins et d'épicéas tourmentés. . . .Cette. plateforme
nous montre ici une succession de lits minces de calcaires argileux le plus souvent peu
fossiliféres. Notre promenade ayant lieu pendant la basse mer, nous rencontrons des
blocs erratiques, parfois nombreux et groupés dans de petites anses, parfois isolés, cà et
là, et sur lesquels nous reviendrons à propos de la période quaternaire. Presque tous
ces blocs sont formé de roches cristallines (granit, gneiss, anorthosite, etc.) "— Schmitt,
Monographie de |’ Ile d’ Anticosti, 11, 70 (1904).

3 * With the exception of a narrow border of Silurian strata on the Strait of Belle Isle,
another at the mouth of the Mingan River, and a third near the Seven Islands, with the
addition of two narrow Silurian strips running a few miles up the Murray River and the
Gouffre, the north shore of the St, Lawrence is the southern boundary of this ancient
series of deposits [Laurentian, chiefly granites and gneisses] from Labrador to Cape
Tourmente’’— Logan, Geol. Can. 47 (1863).

4 “ Looking up through the bays and harbors we can see the low conical hills of Lau-
rentian gneiss"— Packard, Lab. Coast, 281 (1891).

182 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

5“ The Laurentian rocks [at Sandwich Bay] rise into high, rugged, and broken syenitic
hummocks."— Packard, l. c. 281 (1891).

6 “ We pass St. Lewis Bay . . . .with its north shore evidently syenitic....the headlands
of syenite probably extend out from the gneiss mainland."— Packard, l. c. 137 (1891).

7“ At Seal Island the ‘Domino gneiss’ of Lieber appears, protected seaward by high
islands intermixed with low gneiss ‘ skiers?."— Packard, 1. c. 158 (1901).

8 “Cape Webuc or Harrison, which is a lofty gneiss headland, faced with syenite,”—
Packard, 1. c. 181 (1901).

9 "The island on which Hopedale is situated is of the ordinary Laurentian gneiss
which behind the mission house is curiously contorted; it is fine-grained, distinctly
banded, with veins of quartz and of granite."— Packard, l. c. 206 (1901).

10 “On going ashore at Ford's Harbour [Paul's Island], I found the gneiss to consist
of common reddish and greyish varieties.” —Bell, Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. Can., Rep.
of Progr. for 1882-83-84, p. 11 DD (1884).

11 “ The rock here [Nain] consists of a rather light grey gneiss.’’— Bell, 1. c. 12 DD.

12 ** At this mission station [Hebron], the rocks were examined and found to be common
biotite gneiss and amphibolites, intersected by trap dykes."— Daly, Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool., Harvard, Geol. Ser. V. no. 5, 216 (1902).

13 “ The rock everywhere [Ungava Bay at Port Burwell] consists of ordinary varieties
of gneiss.’’— Bell, 1. c. 18 DD (1901).

14 “Dr. Boas describes the nucleus of the mountain masses [Baffin Land] as every-
where gneiss and granite."— G. M. Dawson, Geol Surv. Can., Ann. Rep. n. s. ii, 40 R
(1887).

15 “I explored the country [Nottingham Island] to a distance of about three miles in
various directions from our anchorage, and found the rocks to consist of common varieties
of gneiss, the only exception noticed being patches of a fine-grained red syenite on both
sides of the inlet." — Bell, l. c. 28 DD (1901).

16 “ The rocks on the west side of Ashe's Inlet consist of dark grey gneiss, composed
principally of quartz and felspar in even beds....The rocks in the vicinity of the bay
[Stupart's Bay, Prince of Wales Sound] were found to consist entirely of Laurentian
gneiss."— Bell, 1. c. 21, 25, DD (1901).

17 “It [Richmond Gulf] is surrounded by high hills. On the west, sharp cliffs, formed
by the broken faces of the Manitonieck rocks [felspathic argillites], which dip toward
the sea, rise in places twelve hundred feet above the water. The south and east sides
are bounded by lower rounded hills of Laurentian and Huronian rocks."— Low, Geol.
Surv. Can., Ann. Rep. n. s., iii. 55 J (1888).

18 At the fifteen foot chute [Great Whale River] the rock is similar to the last, and
from here to the mouth of the river all the exposures examined were made up of red
and grey hornblende orthoclase gneiss, the red predominating."— Low, 1l, c. 54 J (1888).

19 “ The greater part of the shore-line here [west side of Lake Mistassini] being formed
of gneiss, perpendicular faces are wanting."— Low, l. c. viii. 68 L (1896).

20 “ The rock [at Port Churchill] is a greenish-gray even-grained, false-bedded, felspathic
arkose sandstone.’’— Tyrrell, Geol. Surv. Can., Ann. Rep. n. s. ix. 90 F (1897).

21 “ Granites and gneisses occur along the north shore of Baker Lake, and down both
shores of Chesterfield Inlet to its mouth."— Tyrrell, l. c. ix. 169 F (1897).

22 “The rocks of the southeast extremity of McTavish Bay [southeastern arm of
Great Bear Lake] are described as red granites and gneisses."— G. M. Dawson, l. c. 19.
*23' Near the easternmost [channel of Slave River], which is named John's River
(Rivière à Jean), is Stony Island, a naked mass of granite, rising fifty or sixty feet above
the water; and beyond that, to the eastward, the banks of the lake [Great Slave Lake]
are wholly primitive,"— Richardson, Arct. Searching Exped. 97 (1852).

24 “ They [Laurentian rocks] occupy most of the northern shores of Athabasca and
Black Lakes. Throughout the greater portion of the area, the rock consists of light
reddish-gray hornblende-granite, and biotite-granite or granitoid gneiss."— Tyrrell,
l. c. viii. 16 D (1896).

"In the second or barren ground district, in places where the soil is formed of the
coarse sandy debris of granite. . . .Rhododendron lapponicum, Kalmia glauca [polifolia],
Vaccinium uliginosum, Empetrum nigrum, Ledum palustre, Arbutus [Arctostaphylos] Uva
ursi, Andromeda [Cassiope] tetragona, and several depressed or creeping willows, lie
close to the soil,"— Richardson, l. c. 416 (1852).

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 183

TABLE III—continued,

[2| 14
| 8|$ 3| |n
Group II (Plants which, south of the St. Lawrence, are | j2 3 |a u
controlled in their Distribution by a Preponderance E: (B g Kc | bo
of Calcium in the Soil.) ie) 2 & E E
eccles d
28322
Stations, and Rocks of the Region from which Calcareous | = gig z E
Soils could be derived, E E E-1 E be
I<} | A
| |
Bay of Islands to Cape Norman, Newfoundland (limestone ) +| +| +
Anticosti (limestone *) : [s ds aes SRI MPE
Mingan Islands, Quebec (limestone 8) 2 ce omer A a | | | |+
Forteau Bay, Labrador (limestone ^ . : I+] I++
Chateau Bay, Labrador (basalt, trap ME t| | i+
Battle Harbor, Labrador (trap, ete.?*) . +) +] ++
Indian Harbor, Labrador (doleritic trap containing labra- | D -]
dorite) . udin PT See
Hopedale, Labrador (doleritic trap, labradorite 8) ++ RE
Pauls Island and Nain, Labrador (labradorite, gabbro, Be gt
anorthosite °?) , TIER
Kaumajet Mts., Okkak to Cape Mugford, Labrador (diabase, L2] 3 1-]
limestone?) , | |]
Torngat Mts., Hebron to Nachvak Bay, Labrador (diabase, | | |
. limestone, calespar LA +4 + ++
Ungava Bay,Cape Chudleigh, Labr ador(dolomite, limestone?) | i+) i++
Grinnell Land (limestone ?) . Pa +| |+)
Cape Sabine, Smith Sound (limestone 18) WESS «oo TM HE |
Jones Sound, Ellesmere Land (limestone '*) . + ++
Cumberland Sound, Baffin Land (Middle Laurentian rocks?!5} +/+
Cape Prince of Wales and Ashe’s Inlet, or North Bluff, Hud-
son Strait (dolomite, limestones, calespar n fe N +++
Mansfield Island, Hudson Bay (limestone WwW E ++
Foot of James Bay, Moose Factory to n House (lime-
stone !5) : + +/+
Fort Churchill, Hudson Bay (limestones 18) s o. sud un
Melville Island (limestone, calcareous sandstone 2) un m. Toc
Fort Good Hope, Mackenzie River (limestone ”) X | | +
Great Slave Lake, Mackenzie (limestone”) . . . . . ,. | UON En
|

1 “On the opposite side [of the Strait of Belle Isle], the shore of Newfoundland is
occupied by a series of limestones, apparently of Calciferous age....they stretch along
the coast for upwards of a hundred miles."— Logan, Geol. Can. 288 (1863).

These and other limestones are traced in succeeding pages and shown in the accom-
panying Atlas southward to Bay St. George.

? Anticosti Island is composed of Silurian rocks, chiefly limestones, which are dis-
cussed in detail in Logan’s Geology of Canada, Chapters x and xii. See also Schmitt,
Monographie de 1’ Ile d’ Anticosti, 65-99 (1904). In view of a very general impression
that Sphagnum does not occur in calcareous regions and of its abundance in certain
marly bogs of Gaspé Co., Quebec (see Ruopora, vii, 8), it is interesting to note the state-
ment of Sir William Logan that ‘‘the most extensive peat deposits in Canada are found
on Anticosti. Along the low lands on the south coast of the island, from Heath Point to
within eight or nine miles of Southwest Point, a continuous plain covered with peat

ons.

184 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

extends for upwards of eighty miles, with an average breadth of two miles; thus giving
a superficies of more than one hundred and sixty square miles. The thickness of the
peat, as observed on the coast, was from three to ten feet."— Logan, l. c. 783, 784 (1863).

3 “It is not until reaching the Mingan Islands, between 500 and 600 miles to the north-
eastward, that we have any of its [Calciferous formation] characteristic fossils. ... At
the Mingan Islands and on the neighboring coast, there appears an interesting extension
of this formation extending from Mingan River to Ste. Genevieve Island, a distance
of about forty-five miles. It occupies the inner range of islands and most of the
coast."— Logan, l. c. 119 (1863).

4“ Between this exposure [Mingan Islands] and Bradore Bay, the distance is about
300 miles. The shore, which is very much indented by bays and inlets, and fringed
with a multitude of islands, presents an almost continuous line of bare rock; but in
no part of it have there been observed any strata, but such as belong to the Lauren-
tian series, On the east side of Bradore Bay, which is situated near to the entrance to
the Straits of Belle Isle from the Gulf of St. Lawrence, the palaeozoic rocks again present
themselves, Resting on the Laurentian gneiss, they run along the north coast for
nearly eighty miles, with a breadth of probably ten or twelve miles....On the strike,
these yellow-weathering limestones pass in some parts into grey, compact, pure lime-
stone....In Forteau Bay, the whole mass appears to be more or less fossiliferous,"—
Logan, l. c. 287, 288 (1863).

5* At Henley Harbor [Chateau Bay] is a system of trap-rocks.... These rocks consist
of three masses of columnar basalt, capping the syenitic gneiss. It is a hard, fine, com-
pact dolerite.... West of these basaltic rocks, on the opposite side of the harbor, is à
large trap overflow forming a hill over three hundred feet high."— Packard, Lab. Coast,
285, 286 (1891).

6I am unable to find any specific statement in regard to Battle Harbor, which is
situated between Chateau Bay (5) and the great anorthosite area of St. Michael Bay.

7 * At Indian Harbor....these same rocks [‘ Domino Gneisses'] appear... . Invariably
accompanying these rocks is a doleritic trap of a peculiar mineralogical character. ...
It is composed of large crystalline masses of hypersthene and labradorite [a lime-soda
feldspar]’’— Packard, 1. c. 288, 289 (1891).

8 About an hour before we reached Hopedale, we passed a high sugar-loaf-shaped
island ‘The Beacon’....The rock was evidently that variety of syenite containing
labradorite (a lime-soda feldspar] and green hornblende."— Packard, 1. c. 197. Trap
dykes (doleritic) like those at Chateau Bay were seen at Hopedale, “in places like slightly
winding stairs or steps descending to the water’s edge, justifying the term trap applied
to this rock, which is from the Swedish trappa, meaning a series of steps or stairs."—
Packard, 1. c., 206, 286 (1891).

9 The Hopedale gneiss underlies the eastern end of Paul’s Island, but a few miles
west of Ford Harbor, it comes in contact with the famous anorthosite [a lime feldspar]
and allied gabbro whence is derived the schillerizing labradorite. ...The ‘Brave’ was
headed for Nain, passing through a long tickle walled in on either side by high cliffs of
massive gabbro for fifteen miles... .all the mainland visible thereabouts is composed
of the gabbro."— Daly, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, Geol. Ser. v. no. 5, 216-218
(1902).

10 At Mugford, ‘‘next above the light colored zone of the schists comes a series of black
slates fifty to one hundred feet thick, indurated at the contact by a conformable three
hundred-foot sheet of apparently intrusive diabase [containing labradorite]. ...On
Ogua’lik at the southwest end of the Tickle, the gneisses are overlain by an intrusive
sheet of diabase, about fifty feet in thickness, upon which are piled slates, quartzites,
limestones, and sandstones with interbedded traps."— Daly, 1. c. 220, 221 (1902).

1 Daly (l. c. 225, 226) discusses the sedimentary and intrusive rocks of this range,
which are similar to those of the Kaumajet Mts. See also Bell, Geol. and Nat, Hist.
Surv. Can., Rep. for 1882-83-84, 15 DD, etc. (1884).

“On the west shore of the first cove, from the entrance, on the south side of Nachvak
inlet, the rocks consist of a coarse-grained slaty tufa or breccia....to the south of it is a
coarse grey mica schist....In this rock, and near the slaty breccia, a vein of quartz
was found, from a foot to two feet in thickness, and holding patches of brown-weather-
ing calcspar."— Bell, 1. c. 15, 16 (1884). E

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 185

12 ** A short distance south of the station, a vein, varying from 8 to 13 inches in width,
occurs in the gneiss... . It consists of light grey dolomite [calcium-magnesium carbonate]
and white quartz....Fragments of grey, drab and yellowish limestone, with obscure
fossils, were common around the base of the hill."— Bell, 1. c. 18, 19 (1884).

13 Dr. G. M. Dawson, quoting from a paper of Fielden and De Rance, says: ''A lime-
stone formation, resembling that elsewhere so widely spread in the Arctic regions, is
described as characterizing considerable tracts on both the east and west sides of Kennedy
Channel and Smith's Sound....Carboniferous limestones were recognized in several
places along the north coast of Grinnell Land....'There would also appear to be a
strong likelihood that the limestone continues in a southeasterly direction by way of
these mountains [the United States range] across the whole of Grinnell Land '."— G. M.
Dawson, Ann, Rep. Geol. Surv, Can., n. s., ii. 51, 52 R (1887).

14 As indicated by Dawson little is known of the rocks of Ellesmere Land. The ‘‘Cape
Rawson Beds" (containing limestones], however, are known there.

15 “The southern part of Baffin Land, including Frobisher Bay and Cumberland
Sound together with Melville Peninsula, may be particularly referred to as evidently
exhibiting a considerable development of Middle Laurentian rocks [including crystal-
line limestones]."— Dawson, 1. c. 7.

16 “Among the prevailing gneiss boulders, scattered on the hills and plains, were
found several of grey dolomite....A small piece of greyish crystalline limestone was
picked up near Ashe's Inlet....Here [Eskimo Inlet, Prince of Wales Sound] I found a
good many boulders of grey and yellowish limestone on the beach. ... One of the veins
of white quartz in this locality contains purplish red calespar,....resembling some of
the banded crystalline limestones of the Laurentian series."— Bell, 1. c. 22-27.

17 “We arrived at the eastern part of Mansfield Island, about mid-way down, on the
morning of the 30th of August. Its even outline presented a remarkable contrast to
the shores of Hudson’s Strait. It resembled a gigantic ridge of gravel; but stratified
rocks, in low horizontal ledges, appeared here and there, through the debris, at different
levels....I landed at a point about the middle of the eastern shore of the island, and
found the shore very flat, with shallow water for a considerable distance out. The
rock proved to be a fossiliferous grey limestone, in rather thin horizontal beds."—
Bell, 1. c. 38.

18 * To the west and south it [shore at foot of James Bay] is almost flat, with its soil
overlying nearly horizontal beds of Silurian and Devonian limestones for about one
hundred and fifty miles inland to the Archaean country."— Low, Ann. Rep. Geol, Surv.
Can., n. s. iii. 16 J (1888).

19 “In a fissure [at Port Churchill]... .is, or was, a small outlier of an unaltered Cambro-
Silurian limestone....With the above are associated some fragments of white Silurian
limestone....In and around the old fort at the mouth of the river, are many boulders
of heavier-bedded Trenton limestone."— Tyrrell, Ann, Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., n. s. ix.
91 F (1897)

20 “ The surface of it [Table-hill, Melville Island] consists generally of sand, on which
are lying numerous masses of limestone....We had passed, during our last march, a
good deal of rich soil....and the sorrel and saxifrage (Saxifraga oppositifolia) were
more abundant than before....On the north side of this ravine large masses of sand-
stone were lying on the surface of the ground,....and we remarked on this, and several
other occasions, that the stones which were bruised by the wheels emitted a strong
odor, like that of fetid limestone when broken."— Parry, First Voyage, Journal, 177,
184-85 (1821).

?1 " At night we camped not far from the Old Fort [Good Hope]. The shale, sand-
stone, and limestone beds, continue throughout the space intervening between the
former and present sites of Fort Good Hope."— Richardson, Arct, Searching Exped.,
135 (1852).

22 “In the vicinity of the westernmost channel of the delta [of Slave River] and from
thence to the efflux of the Mackenzie, the whole southern shore of the lake is limestone "
— Richardson, l. c. 97.

t et z
T E

186 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

TABLE III—continued.

Group III (Plants which, south of the St. Lawrence,
are controlled in their Distribution by a Preponder-
ance of Magnesium in the Soil.)

| Statice sibirica (and perhaps others)

Stations, and Rocks of the Region from which Magnesian EE 28 $
Soils could be derived. = BIS E
CERERI
Falda
Coal River, Newfoundland (serpentine D +/+} +
Hopedale Islands, Labrador (trap?) . ++) [t|
Paul’s Island, Labrador (gabbro, pyroxene 2! + Tu
Nain, Labrador (gabbro *) t +|+
Kaumajet Mts., Okkak to Cape Mugford, ‘Labrador (basalt,
lavas‘) . +|/+-| +
Torngat Mts., Hebron to Nachvak Bay, Labrador (black
diorite, soapstone 5) i+
Ungava Bay, Cape Chudleigh, ‘Labrador (dolomite %) -+
Cape Prince of Wales and Ashe's Inlet, or North Bluff, Hud-
son Strait (dolomite, black mica, soapstone’). . . . . Hs Jis
Nottingham Island, Hudson Strait (dolomite $) — . . . . T

1 On Bonne Bay, “there rises to a height of between 2000 and 3000 feet, a mountain of
serpentine."— Logan, Geol. Can. 293 (1863). These serpentine mountains, as shown
on the geological map of Canada, are greatly developed southward to Port au Port Bay,
Coal River has its origin upon one of them, and its lower waters flow through another
of the serpentine areas.

2'' Trap dykes were always in the view [Islands off Hopedale]."— Daly, Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool., Harvard, Geol. Ser. v. no. 5, p. 216 (1902).

3 "The ‘Brave’ was headed for Nain, passing through a long tickle walled in on either
side by high cliffs of massive gabbro,"— Daly, 1. c. 217. “When at Nain I obtained
specimens of... .paulite, a variety of pyroxene or hypersthene [a silicate of magnesium],
which....was said to have been brought frorn Paul's Island,"— Bell, Geol. & Nat. Hist.
Surv. Can., Rep. for 1882-83-84, p. 12 DD (1884).

1''The basalt [containing crysolite, a silicate of magnesium] agglomerate, which is
also a significant part of the stratified series, is typical.’’— Daly, l. c. 221.

“Ogua’lik, Cape Mugford, the Bishop's Mitre are all part of an extensive area of slates,
sandstones, conglomerates, limestones, and, much surpassing these in thickness, lava
flows, volcanic tufts, and breccias."— Daly, Bull. Geogr. Soc. Phila. iii. 208 (1902).

5“Some dykes of close-grained, almost black diorite [black diorite usually contains
much augite, a silicate of magnesium], also cut the gneiss in the vicinity of Skynner's
Cove....I was informed that the Eskimo obtained a kind of soapstone [a hydrous
silicate of magnesium] for making their pots. in the vicinity of Skynner's Cove....
dykes [of black-looking rock] were seen all along, cutting the face of the mountain range.”
— Bell, 1. c. 15 DD.

6** A short distance south of the station (at Port Burwell, Cape Chudleigh], a vein....
oecurs in the gneiss....It consists of light grey dolomite [magnesian limestone] and
white quartz" — Bell, l. c. 18 DD.

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 187

7 “Scattered on the hills and plains [near North Bluff, Hudson Strait], were several
[boulders] of grey dolomite....and of the soft buff grey dolomite."— Bell, 1. c. 22 DD.

“On the west side of Ashe’s Inlet....some of them [veins] contain feldspar and black
mica, [magnesian]."— Bell, 1. c. 29 DD. “At Ashe's Inlet a party of Eskimo from the
eastward came on board." Among the rocks shown them “they recognized a rather
hard and inferior variety of soapstone,"— Bell, 1. c. 21, 24, 25 D D.

8 ' At a projecting point....I found some straggling veins of hard grey dolomite."—
Bell, 1 c. 29 D D.

It is not, of course, possible from the inadequate data at hand to
say with certainty that in their arctic and subarctic distribution in
British America the fifteen plants just discussed are confined to or
even occur upon the soils which have respectively a preponderance
of potassium, calcium, or magnesium; but it is clear that in the north-
ern regions from which these plants are known soils are present similar
to those upon which the plants have their best development south of
the St. Lawrence. In their southern stations, however, it is apparent
that the plants of alpine situations here considered show in most cases
a pronounced selection of habitats dependent upon the relative abun-
dance in the soil of the three important food-elements, potassium,
calcium, and magnesium. A very similar selection of soils is shown
by many plants of low altitudes; in fact, it is possible thus to analyze
the distribution of the majority of Pteridophyta and Spermatophyta
of New England and eastern Canada. It is very generally known,
for instance, that. many heaths (Kalmia, Rhododendron, Vaccinium,
ete.) occur primarily on potassic soils; and that they are rare or quite
unknown in extensive areas of limestone and can there be cultivated
with success only if provided with an imported soil free from the
abundant lime of the region. Many other plants of low altitudes or
of temperate regions, Camptosorus rhizophyllus, Pellaea atropurpurea,
Carex eburnea, etc., are best developed on if not confined to calcareous
rocks. These plants of low altitudes, Kalmia latifolia, Rhododendron
canadense (Rhodora), R. maximum, Vaccinium pennsylvanicum, Camp-
tosorus, Pellaea atropurpurea, Carex eburnea, etc., restricted in their
best development to somewhat specialized soils and ordinarily absent

1" Any open, well-drained soil which does not contain limestone or heavy clay and
has a moist and fresh subsoil will prove satisfactory [for Rhododendrons]. Where
limestone or heavy clay prevails, beds must be specially prepared and filled with suitable
soil."— A. Rehder, in Bailey, Cycl. Am. Hort. 1516, 1517 (1902).

"It is generally conceded that lime soils and manures containing lime .... are
injurious to Rhododendrons; in limestone regions it is undoubtedly advisable to sub-
stitute, for the natural soil, others which are free from this objectionable element."— B.

M. Watson in Bailey, l. c. 1519.

188 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

from certain others, occupy, in a general way, wide areas in eastern
America; and, though absent from certain localities, they may be
said to have a far more continuous range than the alpine species,
and the intervals between their more isolated outlying colonies are
not too great to be crossed by seeds and spores in the ordinary processes
of dispersal.

The alpine plants, on the other hand, are, as already noted, present
in our flora usually as small colonies isolated by hundreds or even
thousands of miles from the other known members of their species.
Dryas Drummondii, for example, one of the most abundant plants of
the Canadian Rockies, has its nearest known colonies 2000 miles away,
along the rivers of the Gaspé Peninsula and of Anticosti. Polystichum
scopulinum, abundant on steep serpentine walls of Mt. Albert, Gaspé,
is otherwise confined to mountains from Idaho to northern California,
at least 2200 miles away. Festuca altaica, the commonest grass of
Mt. Albert, is otherwise known only from Yukon, 2700 miles to the
northwest, and from the mountains of Asia. Other species, though
very isolated in their occurrence, are found at one or more points
between our New England and Gaspé mountains and the north-
western portion of the continent. Among such is Vaccinium ovali-
folium whose range has been already stated. These plants, typical
of our alpine and subalpine species, often occur, then, in such isolated
areas that it is highly improbable that they should have reached their
known localities by ordinary dispersal of seeds and spores from one
of these areas directly to another. And, in view of the fact above
pointed out, of the restriction on adjacent alpine areas of most of our
alpine plants to prevailingly potassic, calcareous, or magnesian soils,
it is at first difficult to see how these extremely fastidious plants could
have grown in close association at the close of the glacial period, as
implied by the long-accepted theory of Forbes, which was greatly
extended by Darwin, Hooker, Gray, and others.

When, however, we take into account the character of some excep-
tional stations for these alpine plants at low altitudes or in less pro-
nouncedly cliff- or rock-habitats, we get a clue to the conditions
which they presumably found in their poleward march in the wake of
the receding ice-sheet. Throughout New England and adjacent
Canada and over much of the continent westward and northwestward
there are many cold meadows and bogs or muskeags in which the
conditions are such as to support many species which abound in alpine

1907) Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 189
or high-northern regions. In hundreds of bogs of New England and
eastern Canada we find a few of the less markedly alpine plants such
as Carex pauciflora, Eriophorum callitrix, Habenaria dilatata, An-
dromeda glaucophylla, Ledum groenlandicum, ete., plants which are
typical of our sphagnous bogs and of the mountains composed of
potassic rocks. Certain bogs and meadows maintain floras of greater
variety and of very great interest, especially when we take into account
the alpine distribution exhibited by them. Caribou bog, in Crystal,
Maine, for instance, has, besides Drosera linearis, Betula pumila,
Lonicera oblongifolia, and many other plants of unusual occurrence
in New England, a few arctic-alpine species:

Rhododendron canadense (Group I)
Kalmia angustifolia (Groups I & III)
5 polifolia (Groups I & III)
Andromeda glaucophylla (Groups I

& III)
Menyanthes trifoliata (Group I)
Lobelia Kalmii (Group II)
Erigeron acris (Group II)

Eriophorum callitrix (Group I)
Carex vaginata (Group II)

* paupercula, var. irrigua (Groups

I & III)

* limosa (Groups I & III)

* pauciflora (Group I)
Tofieldia glutinosa (Group II)
Rhamnus alnifolia (Group II)
Ledum groenlandicum (Groups I &

III)

Small bogs at the mouth of the Grand River, Gaspé Co., and simi-
lar but larger bogs at the mouth of the Bonaventure River, Bona-
venture Co., Quebec, situated in strongly calcareous regions, have a
notable series of arctic-alpine plants, of which the following are con-
spicuous:

Selaginella selaginoides (Groups II
& III)
Scirpus pauciflorus (Group II)
“ egespitosus (Groups I & III,
and rarely II)
Rynchospora capillacea (Group II)
Carex vaginata (Group II)
* paupercula, var. irrigua (Groups
I & III)
* limosa (Groups I & III)
Juncus filiformis (Group I)
Tofieldia glutinosa (Group II)
Salix pseudo-myrsinites (Group II)
* balsamifera (Group I)
pedicellaris (Group I)
Comandra livida (Groups I & III)

[11

Parnassia parviflora (Group II)
Rubus arctieus (Groups I & III)
Potentilla palustris (Group I)
Empetrum nigrum (Groups I & III)
Rhamnus alnifolia (Group II)
Viola nephrophylla (Group II)
Ledum groenlandicum (Groups I &
III)
Andromeda glaucophylla (Groups I
& III)
Chamaedaphne calyculata
I & III)
Vaccinium canadense (Groups I &
III)
4 Vitis-Idaea, var. minus
(Groups I & III)

(Groups

“3 Rhodora

[SEPTEMBER

190

Vaccinium Oxycoccus (Groups I & Pinguicula vulgaris (Group II)
III) Lonicera caerulea, var. villosa (Groups

Menyanthes trifoliata (Group I) I & III)
Euphrasia latifolia (Group II) Lobelia Kalmii (Group II)

A certain boggy meadow in a sag near the western edge of Table-
top Mt. is, perhaps, the most notable of these bog-areas. ‘This
particular meadow, which lies southeast of the crest of the limy
northwestern escarpment upon whose cliffs are found many of the
plants of Group II, is so situated as to receive the drainage from
various directions. From the northwest the drainage is directly off
the calcareous slope and in part from a granitic slope; from -the
southwest comes a general seepage from a small area of serpentine;
and from the southward the drainage is off the edge of the great
granitic tableland. On account of the strong contrast between the
flora of this small meadow and the extensive meadows of the strictly
granitic district, the area was designated by Professor Collins and the
writer “the Caleareous Meadow," and it has been so indicated upon
many herbarium labels. Yet the flora of this notable meadow con-
tains many plants besides those of the calcareous alpine cliffs. The
detailed list of alpine plants there recorded includes the following:

Selaginella selaginoides (Groups II
& III)
Polystichum Lonchitis (Group II)
Phleum alpinum (Groups I & II)
Agrostis borealis (Groups I, II, &
IIT)
Deschampsia atropurpurea (Group I)
Danthonia intermedia (Group III)
Scirpus caespitosus (Groups, I, II,
& III)
Carex stellulata (Group I)
* deflexa (Group I)
*" eapillaris, var. elongata (Group
II)
“ atrata, var. ovata (Groups I,
II, & III)
Juncus castaneus (Group II)
Habenaria dilatata (Groups I & III)
Salix vestita (Group II)
* Barelayi (Group II)
* pseudo-myrsinites (Group II)
* gargyrocarpa (Group I)
“ glauca (Group II)
"* phylicifolia (Group I)

Betula glandulosa (Groups I & III)
Alnus crispa (Groups I & II)
Comandra livida (Groups I & III)
Anemone parviflora (Group II)
Arabis alpina (Group II)

Rubus arcticus (Groups I & III)

* — triflorus (Groups I, II, & III)
Pyrola grandiflora (Group II)
Phyllodoce caerulea (Groups I & III)
Vaccinium uliginosum (Groups I &

HI)

A caespitosum (Group I
and rarely II)

x ovalifolium (Group I)

Veronica alpina, var. unalaschcensis
(Group I)

Castilleja pallida, var. septentrionalis
(Groups I, II, & III)

Rhinanthus oblongifolius (Group I)

Viburnum pauciflorum (Groups I,
II, & III)

Lonicera caerulea, var. villosa (Groups
I & III)

Valeriana sylvatica (Group II)

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 191

Solidago multiradiata (Groups II & ^ Senecio pauciflorus (Group II)

IIT) Cirsium muticum, var. monticola
Aster foliaceus (Group III) (Group III)
Erigeron hyssopifolius (Group IT) Taraxacum ceratophorum (Group
Gnaphalium norvegicum (Group I) II)
Achillea borealis (Groups II & III) Prenanthes trifoliolata, var. nana
Petasites trigonophylla (Group I) (Groups I & III)

Arnica mollis (Groups I & II)

On these bogs and meadows, it will be noticed, there is a decided
mingling of the plants which on alpine rocky slopes or on cliffs are
rarely if ever found associated.

Similarly, in the valleys of rivers flowing from our higher mountain
areas fragments or seeds of alpine plants are washed down to the bot-
tom-lands where there results a mingling of the plants which are
ordinarily confined to distinct areas and soils. Thus, along the River
Ste. Anne des Monts, which receives much of the drainage from Mt.
Albert, Table-top, and the adjacent mountains, we find, on the broad
alluvial * flats" which are submerged during the freshet periods, such
plants as Vaccinium ovalifolium (Group 1), V. Vitis-Idaea, var. minus
(Groups I & IMI), Lychnis alpina (Group HT), Epilobium alpinum
(Group D) and Deschampsia caespitosa, var. alpina (Group III)
growing side by side and in equal luxuriance with Arabis alpina,
Dryas Drummondii, Erigeron hyssopifolius, Senecio discoideus, Taraxa-
cum ceratophorum, and other plants which in their rock-habitats are
confined primarily to areas of Group II.

These series of habitats, the meadows, bogs, and alluvial plains,
are alike, it will be seen, in having an extremely fine and mixed soil,
often derived from rocks of very different kinds; and it is, apparently,
the availability in these soils of the potassium, calcium, and often
the magnesium, which makes it possible for plants, which in less
favored soils are restricted to rocks high in one or another of these
elements, to grow side by side on the bogs, meadows, and alluvial
plains. Now, if we consider the condition of much of the northern
hemisphere during the period when the great ice-sheet was receding
and the arctic and subarctic plants were following in its wake, we shall
see that there were, in America for instance, measureless stretches of
country, from Long Island Sound northward, westward and north-
westward and again on the western slopes of the continent, which
were essentially identical in their character with the bogs and mead-
ows above referred to, while there also abounded far greater deposits

192 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

of mixed and water-worn “till” than now cover large portions of our
region. On these vast areas of fine and mixed soils nearly if not quite
all the polar and boreal species could find the food-element or the
combinations of elements upon which they most depended. For,
even if the newly deposited soil in a given region were derived pri-
marily from a single rock or from two rocks, a limestone and a ser-
pentine for instance, it would require the presence in the region of
only a very small quantity of another rock, a potassic feldspar for
example, to support during their northward march the plants which
require a potassic soil, as well as those which depend upon an abun-
dance of calcium or magnesium. A very vivid illustration of this fact
is contained in a recent paper by Mr. Allerton S. Cushman on “The
Use of Feldspathic Rocks as Fertilizers.” Mr. Cushman says:

“ Grinding is making surface, and it can be shown that the availa-
bility of potash in ground feldspar increases with the surface area. If
feldspar is ground so that it will pass an 80-mesh sieve, it will of
course contain a certain proportion of very fine particles, some of
which approach the limits of visibility under a powerful microscope.
If we carry on the grinding of the material from 80-mesh to 200-mesh,
the proportion of the very small particles is enormously increased,
The smallest particles which we need to consider here are those
which can be measured by a micrometer device connected with the
microscope. These smallest particles have a diameter of about 0.0001
millimeter. Now, in order to make a specific example, we will con-
sider the surface areas presented by 1 pound of feldspar in different
degrees of subdivision. First, in the form of a solid cube, then broken
down to particles that could just pass an 80- and a 200-mesh sieve,
respectively, and, finally, in the condition it would be if it were possible
to grind all the material as fine as the finest particles which occur in an
ordinary 200-mesh powder. The 1 pound of feldspar in a solid cube
would have a surface area of 29.3 square inches; particles capable
of passing an 80-mesh seive would give 8,870 square inches; particles
able to pass a 200-mesh sieve would give 24,905 square inches; and
if it were possible to reduce the powder to particles 0.0001 millimeter
in diameter, there would result a surface area of 16,460,000 square
inches.

If it were practically possible to collect 1 ton of feldspar all in the

1 U. S. Dept. Agric., Bur. Pl. Ind., Bull. no. 104 (1907).

1907] Fernald,— Soil Preferences of Alpine Plants 193

state of the finest particles, as shown above, the surface-area presented
by the ton would be enormous — in fact, it would be equal to 256,000,-
000 square feet, 5,877 acres, or more than 9 square miles." !

It is quite conceivable, then, that the polar plants, which had been
forced to find temporary homes on the potassic, calcareous, or mag-
nesian areas or the mixed soils of our more southern states and in
Mexico, found in the extensive alluvial deposits, which, after the
receding of the ice, covered much of the northern half of our continent,
a mixed soil in which they were able to spread both eastward and
westward as well as poleward; and then, as the particular soil-
element upon which they most depended gradually became exhausted
from the mixed soil and as the climate at low altitudes became increas-
ingly warmer, these plants found upon bogs, cold méadows or sheltered
alluvial shores, or upon cold cliffs and exposed mountain summits,
the only habitats in which they have been able to persist within our
temperate regions.

In areas of conglomerate rocks, it should be added, as for instance
on some of the conglomerate cliffs along the lower St. Lawrence,
where the component pebbles are of varied origin (limestones, ser-
pentine, feldspathic rocks, etc.), there is sometimes a mixture of floras
similar to that found on the bogs or meadows, and such plants as
Empetrum and Hedysarum or Zygadenus will be found occasionally
on the same cliffs. In such mixed areas it is, of course, difficult with-
out actual examination of the soil and analyses of the ash of the
plants, such as are now being made by Mr. H. H. Bartlett, to deter-
mine the controlling soil-elements.

Similarly, in the mixed soils which cover the ordinarily tillable
districts of our northern states and Canada the problem is complicated,
and in these temperate areas the preference of certain plants for one
soil or another is best seen in rock- and cliff-habitats. There is need
of close observations along these lines, and, although, in the alpine
and subalpine areas here chiefly considered, the distribution of plants
is largely controlled by the preponderance in the soil of potassium,
calcium and magnesium, it will be found that in various areas, sodium,
iron, and other elements are of equal importance in determining the
ranges of our plants.

1 Cushman, 1. c. 27, 28.

194 Hhodora [SEPTEMBER

PERIDERMIUM PYRIFORME AND ITS PROBABLE
ALTERNATE HOST.

J. C. ARTHUR.

EanLv in June of this year I received from Dr. Charles Thom a
specimen of Peridermium pyriforme Peck, collected near Storrs,
Conn., on branches of Pinus rigida Mill. This is a species rarely
seen, only three previous collections being known, and its discovery
in a locality where it can be under observation and study is a matter
of interest. The species forms numerous and conspicuous aecia on
the smaller branches, bursting out through the bark, and showing
as large white peridia filled with orange spores. The affected branches
are not much swollen by the fungus, and are usually small, less than
2.5 cm., rarely up to 5 cm. in diameter.

So far as known, all species of Peridermium on the bark of pines
are the aecial stages of corresponding forms of Cronartium. Upon
the receipt of Dr. Thom’s collection the question of the probable
telial host presented itself. In the eastern United States only two
species of Cronartium have so far been recognized: C. Quercus
(Brond.) Schroet., and C. Comptoniae Arth. In the same general
region there are also two bark forms of Peridermium on pine: P.
Cerebrum Peck, and P. pyriforme Peck. It has been proven by means
of cultures, performed independently by Dr. C. L. Shear and the
writer, that P. Cerebrum is the aecial stage of C. Quercus, and' it was
a simple inference that P. pyrijorme doubtless belongs to C. Compto-
niae.

While this information was being communicated to Dr. 'Thom, the
spores which he had sent, and which were not yet dry, were sown on
Myrica cerijera, a plant of Comptonia in good growing condition not
being available at the time. No infection was obtained by this sowing.
This negative result is without much significance, however, as no
examination was made to see if the spores germinated.

The next observations on the rust in the ficld were made July 5,
when Dr. Thom found Comptonia peregrina, growing “all around the
bases "of the affected pine trees, showing abundance of the characteristic
uredinia of Cronartium Comploniae. The spores of the Peridermium

,! See Bull. Torrey Club xxxiii, 420 (1906), where the history of these collections is
given,

1907] Record of Gratiola at Westfield, a Clerical Error 195

had now largely disappeared. Both at this time and at the earlier
visit on June 4 no examples of the Peridermium were found more than
3 dm. above the ground, and the infection was mostly on very small
trees, or on small branches near the ground.

The three previous collections of this Peridermium were also on small
branches. 'Two of them were made by Mr. J. B. Ellis at Newfield,
N. J., one in 1882 on Pinus virginiana Mill., distributed in his N.
Am. Fungi no. 1021, and the other in 1890 on P. rigida Mill. "The
third collection has little import, as it was made in the Missouri Botani-
cal Garden, and if it really belongs to this species, was doubtless
brought to the Garden on plants obtained in the eastern states. ‘The
rust on Comptonia is common in the region about Newfield, N. J.

Of the common forms of Aecidiwm and Roestelia many have been
definitely associated with their corresponding telial forms. But of
the twenty-seven known species of Peridermium in North America,
which number doubtless represents not more than half the full number
that exists, only three have yet been connected by cultures with their
telial forms, hence one element of interest in the observations of Dr.
Thom. The publication of this note is intended to supply the clue to
any one who may be fortunately situated, and inclined to undertake
cultures of this rust, which can best be made during the month of May.

PurpvuE University, Lafayette, Indiana.

Tue RECORD or COLOR VARIETIES OF GRATIOLA AT WESTFIELD,
A CLERICAL Ennon.— On page 123 of the current volume of RHODORA
it was stated that the white and light yellow forms of Gratiola aurea
had been found at Westfield, Massachusetts. Miss Emily F. Fletcher
has called our attention to the fact that this was probably a clerical
error and that the station where the plants were found was in reality
Westford, which is in Middlesex County, and not Westfield as stated.
Reference to Dame & Collins’s Flora of Middlesex County, Massa-
chusetts, shows that Miss Fletcher is quite right and that in fact the
station was Westford and not Westfield as quoted through some over-

sight.— Ep.

A PINK-PETALED Form or CLETHRA ALNIFOLIA.— Several years
ago I found on the edge of Watuppa Lake, Fall River, Massa-

196 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER

chusetts, one bush of Clethra alnifolia with pink petals. It was grow-
ing in company with a dozen or more bushes of the same species which
had the ordinary white petals. Every year since it was first observed
the pink-flowered individual has blossomed true to its color. Some
seasons it has been badly killed back by the winter; but in all cases
shoots from the root have exhibited the pink petals when they have
flowered. Finding in the botanical works accessible to me no mention
of a pink-flowered variety of this species I sent specimens to the Gray
Herbarium where further literature was consulted but no reference
to this variation of color was found. As most, if not all, works on our
flora, which mention Clethra, state that its flowers are white, it seems
worth while to put on record this attractive exception.— LOUISE
Hotmes Hanpy, Fall River, Massachusetts.

THE BULLETIN OF THE JOSSELYN BOTANICAL SOCIETY OF MAINE.—
At the thirteenth annual meeting of the Josselyn Society, held at
Oxford, Maine, from the 2nd to the 5th of July, the committee on
publications reported as follows: ‘Recommended, that the Society
issue a sheet called the Bulletin of the Josselyn Botanical Society of
Maine; that the frequency of its issue be determined by the publica-
tion committee; that the publication contain an abstract of the minutes
of the Society, with a list of the plants collected or identified at the
meeting, and such other matter of interest as the committee shall
determine.” After due consideration this recommendation was
adopted and as a result the first number of the Bulletin has been pre-
pared and issued by Dr. Dana W. Fellows and Messrs. Clarence H.
Knowlton and Edward B. Chamberlain, who constitute the present
publication committee of the society. The paper is a twenty-four
page octavo, prepared with evident care and including, besides de-
tailed reports of the proceedings of the society during its thirteenth
meeting, a list compiled by Mr. Chamberlain of the flowering plants
and pteridophytes collected or observed by the society during its
excursions in the towns of Oxford, Otisfield, and Norway, Maine.
Copies of the Bulletin, at ten cents each, can be obtained of Mr.
Edward B. Chamberlain, Cumberland Center, Maine.

Vol. 9, No, 104, including pages 125-148 was issued 31 August, 1907.

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. October, 1907. No. 106

SOME NEW GREEN ALGAE.

F. S. CODLINS.

(Plate 76.)

Tue species here noted are only in part from New England localities,
but so general is the distribution of plants of this class, that the mere
accident of locality of the original station is of little importance; any
species of the genera in question is liable to be found in any temperate
region.

Pleurococcus marinus n. sp. Cellulis sphaericis, 10—40 » diam.
cum membrana cellulari; membrana 2 » crassa; colore variante ab
auriantiaco intenso ad viridem chlorophyllaceam veram; Repro-
ductione per aplanosporas divisione repitita formatas, 8-64 in cellula;
membrana cellulari distincta et admodum crassa dum in cellula
matricali; congerie sporarum substantia gelatinosa inclusa, post solu-
tionem cellulae matricalis formam sphaericam diu servante. `

Cells spherical, 10—40 x diam., including cell wall; wall about 2 y
thick; color from deep orange to true chlorophyll green. Reproduc-
tion by aplanospores, formed by repeated division, 8-64 in a cell,
spore wall distinct and relatively thick while still in the mother cell;
mass of spores retaining the spherical form and held in a gelatinous
mass long after the disappearance of the mother cell wall.

This plant was distributed through a mass of floating algae in shal-
low pools in a salt marsh at Stover's Point, Harpswell, Maine, July,
1906. It formed so large a proportion of the mass as to give a brick-
or orange-red color to the whole, the other species being Lyngbya
aestuarii (Mert.) Liebm., Cladophora expansa Kütz., and other
forms usually found in such localities. It has been distributed as
No. 1316 of the Phycotheca Boreali-Americana. The genus Pal-
mellococcus was founded by Chodat in 1894, for the single species

1 Chodat, Materiaux pour servir à l'histoire des Protococcoidées. Bull. Herb. Boissier,
Vol. II, p. 429, 599.

198 -Rhodora [OcrosER

P. miniatus (Protococcus miniatus Kütz., Pleurococcus miniatus Nüg.),
which is not uncommon on walls and windows of greenhouses, but
whose native habitat is unknown; Chodat reports its reproduction
under ordinary circumstances to be by bipartition, rarely quadri-
partition of the cell; but in culture in pure spring water the contents
of a cell is by repeated division sometimes transformed into 16, 32 or
64 spores with delicate membrane, escaping in a mass with a gelatinous
envelop. This latter form of reproduction is the only one observed
in P. marinus, but practically all of the Harpswell material seemed to
be in some stage of this process. The color of the cell ranges from
deep orange to pure green; the largest cells were green, but cells of
this color were found of all sizes down to the smallest. The only dis-
tinction other than color was that the largest green cells had a thinner
wall than the small or moderate sized cells, either green or orange, and
that the colored cells seemed more active in spore formation. The
wall of the spore was fully developed while the wall of the mother cell
was still perfect; after the disappearance of the latter the spores
remained in a spherical gelatinous mass for a long time, until they
had increased very materially in size; colonies of 32 cells were observed,
retaining the spherical form with a diameter of 100 u. Some of the
plant was kept alive for several weeks, but not under the normal
conditions of a salt marsh pool; in this material were finally found
numerous spherical colonies, in which the contents of each cell had
divided into aplanospores of a second generation, much smaller than
any noticed in the normal condition of the plant. From P. miniatus,
P. marinus is distinguished by the larger cells, those of P. miniatus
being 3-15 p diam.; by the thicker walls of the aplanospores, and
by the totally different habitat. According to the figures of P.
miniatus in Chodat's Algues Vertes de la Suisse, fig. 80, the gelati-
nous vesicle of the spores is less regular in form in that species and
less persistent. ,

Chaetomorpha Chelonum n. sp. Filamento erecto, stricto, 12-
20 y» diam. ad basin, superne incrassato, usque ad 35 y in fronde sterili;
cellula basali ad 1 mm. longa, cellula proxima ad 10 diam., cellulis
superioribus 2-3 diam. longis; membrana cellulari crassa; cellulis
fertilibus in parte superiori filamenti ortis, ad 50 & diam., 1—4 diam.
longis, leviter aut admodum moniliformibus aut enim subglobosis;
zoosporis per aperturam in media parte cellulae ct tubum tenuissimum
exeuntibus; ramis pluricellularibus, coralloideis, e cellula basali
exeuntibus, stratum basale continuum substrato arctissime ad-
haerentem formantibus.

1907] > Collins,— Some New Green Algae 199

Filaments erect, straight, 12-20 » diam. at base, increasing in size
upwards, to 35 y» in the upper part of the vegetative plant; lower cell
up to 1 mm. long, next cell up to 10 diam. long, upper cells 2-3 diam.;
walls thick; fertile cells in upper part of the filament, up to 50 x diam.,
1—4 diam. long, from slightly moniliform to nearly globular; zoospores
escaping by an opening near the middle of the cell, through a very
short tube; basal layer a dense mass of very irregular, pluricellular,
coralloid branches, forming a dense and continuous expansion on the
substratum. On the backs of the turtles, Chrysemys marginata and
Aromochelys odorata, Walnut Lake, Oakland County, Michigan, Dr.
T. L. Hankinson.

Species of Chaetomorpha are abundant in all seas, but very unusual
in fresh water, the only species which can be considered as well known
being C. Herbipolenis Lagerh.,! which was found in a hothouse in a
botanical garden, the place of its origin being unknown. C. Hen-
ningsii Richter ? occurring in fresh water near Berlin, is uncomfortably
near the marine C. aerea, which is said to be found occasionally in
fresh water. The present species seems to be amply distinct from
C. Herbipolensis, by the smaller diameter, longer basal cell, and espe-
cially by the strongly developed basal layer, that of C. Herbipolensis
being merely an outgrowth from the membrane, while in the present
species there are distinctly branching, pluricellular filaments, which
unite to form a practically continuous layer on the substratum, the
shell of the turtle. The basal developments of the individual plants
are so closely united that the appearance is that of a continuous mem-
brane, from which arise numerous erect, bright green, straight fila-
ments, pretty uniformly increasing in size from the base to the apex.
The cell wall is thick, in the lower cell about one quarter the diameter;
the cells in the vegetative filaments are nearly cylindrical, but the
fertile cells are strongly swollen, sometimes nearly globular. ‘The
material examined having been preserved in formalin, nothing can be
said as to the finer details of the zoospores, but evidently large numbers
are formed in a cell. Emptied cells showed plainly an aperture near
the middle, the cell wall extending as a very short tube, much like
that shown for C. Herbipolensis, Pl. IX, fig. 5. Two lots of material
were received from Dr. Hankinson, one having grown on Chrysemys,
the other on Aromachys; there was some difference between the two,
the former having basal cells longer and more slender than the latter,
and fertile cells more distinctly swollen.

1 G. Lagerheim, Ueber die Süsswasser-Arten der Gattung Chaetomorpha Kütz. Ber.

Deutsch. Bot. Ges., Vol. V, p. 185, 1887.
2 P, Richter, Hedwigia, Vol. p. 70, 1893.

200 Rhodora [Ocronzn

Lagerheim, |. c., p. 201, suggests that fresh water Chaetomorpha
species should be expected in the United States, especially in Massa-
chusetts, as the algal flora here has an almost tropical character.
This characterization, which hardly seems to harmonize with the
weather of the past winter and spring, was based on his inspection
of desmids from ‘Tewksbury. ‘The occurrence of a fresh water C haeto-
morpha, even farther north than Tewksbury, is of interest.

Cladophora (Aegagropila) amphibia n. sp. Filamentis inferioribus
contortis; cellulis forma et magnitudine inaequalibus, subcylindricis,
2—5 diam. longis, 40-70 » diam., aut 1-2 diam. longis, ad 100 # diam.
in parte media incrassatis; filamentis abunde et irregulariter ramosis,
ramis similibus, filamentis ramos erectos etiam gerentibus, 30—50 p
diam., cellulis 4-8 diam. longis, subcylindricis at plus minusve irregu-
laribus, paucos ramulos breves patentes emittentibus; cellula termi-
nali obtusa vel truncata; rhizoidis incoloribus interdum a cellulis
inferioribus ortis.

Lower filaments contorted, cells of irregular form and size, subcylin-
drical, 2-5 diam. long, 40-70 p» diam., or 1-2 diam. long, swollen to
100 » diam. in the middle, freely and irregularly branched, branches
of similar character; also bearing erect branches, 30-50 y diam.,
cells 4-8 diam. long, subcylindrical but somewhat irregular, bearing
a few mostly short and patent branches; terminal cells obtuse or
truncate; slender colorless rhizoids occasionally produced from the
lower cells. On damp ground, among Salicornia, in a salt marsh,
Alameda, California, Sept. 26, 1903, W. J. V. Osterhout & N. L.
Gardner. Distributed as P. B.—A., No. 1284.

This plant forms a thin extended layer on ground covered only at
the highest tides, and has the habit of a Vaucheria. The lower part
is densely matted, the upper surface is formed by the free ends of the
erect branches. ‘These erect branches are fairly regular in form,
varying from a true cylindrieal shape about as do the filaments of a
Rhizoclonium; the basal filaments, however, are very irregular, the
cells varying from long and cylindrical to short and ovoid, or of a
triangular section, the latter apparently where a branch is starting
from a short cell; cells of larger and smaller diameters may alternate,
or there may be a series of swollen cells, giving a moniliform appear-
ance. Some of the filaments end in a large, ovoid cell, others taper to
a slender, tortuous rhizoid. In many cases the first cross wall in a
branch is quite a distance from the base, reminding one of Siphono-
cladus. ‘The cell wall is quite thick; the color is a dull green. Al-
though observed by Dr. Gardner for a long time, no indication of
Spores was seen.

1907] Collins, — Some New Green Algae 201

Vaucheria longipes n. sp. Filamentis 80-90 m diam., sparse et
irregulariter ramosis; ramo sporifero, 30-40 «u diam., sub angulo
recto exeunte, 1-6 mm. longo, antheridium terminale, cylindricum
aut paulo attenuatum, hamatum vel circinatum sustinente; oogoniis
2—4, ovoideis, subobliquis, pedicellatis, 70-85 X 35-40 yw, antheridium
superantibus; rostro 15 u longo; pedicellis 100—150 x longis, 20-30 yx
diam., sub antheridio ortis.

Filaments 80-90 u diam., oogonia and antheridia borne at the end
of a branch 1-6 mm. long, 30-40 p diam.; antheridium terminal,
cylindrical or slightly tapering, hooked or circinate; oogonia 2-4,
ovoid, somewhat oblique, pedicelled, 70-85 X 35-40 y, usually sur-
passing the antheridium; pedicels 100—150 x» long, 20-30 y diam.,
arising just below the antheridium; beak 15 » long. In a ditch by
the roadside, Ross Valley, California, Jan., 1904. N. L. Gardner.

Somewhat resembling V. geminata, but distinct by the very long
fruiting branches, at right angles to the filaments, as well as by the
more elongate oogonia, borne on longer pedicels.

V. Gardneri n. sp. Filamentis 50-70 yw diam., sparse ramosis,
ramis sub angulo recto exeuntibus, non attenuatis; chromatophoris
parvis; antheridiis plerumque solitariis, raro 2—4, et oogoniis 2—4,
raro pluribus, pedicellatis, pedicellis basi connatis, 60—100 yp longis,
15-20 u diam.; antheridii pedicello angulo recto vel subrecto posito;
pedicellis oogoniorum circumcirca positis, sub angulo 45? exeuntibus;
antheridio hamato vel circinato, ad 10 » diam. attenuato; oogoniis
plerumque sat obliquis, saepe introrsum concavis, 85-95 X 70-75 p;
plerumque antheridium superantibus; rostro circa 15 y longo.

Filaments 50—70 x diam., sparingly branched, branches issuing at a
right angle, not tapering; chromatophores small; antheridia generally
single, rarely 2-4; oogonia 2—4, rarely more; both pedicelled, pedicels
connate at the base, 60-100 u long, 15-20 p diam.; pedicel of the
antheridium at a right angle or nearly so; pedicels of the oogonia
arranged around it at an angle of about 45?; antheridium hooked or
circinate, tapering to 10 « diam.; oogonia usually quite oblique,
often concave on the inside, 85-95 X 70-75 p; generally surpassing
the antheridium; beak about 15 &long. In a small pool, Mountain
View Cemetery, Oakland, California, May 6, 1903; in a ditch by the
roadside, Berkeley, California, April 15, 1905. N. L. Gardner. Dis-
tributed as P. B.-A., No. 1288.

Forma tenuis n. forma. Filamentis 30—40 «u diam.; oogoniis et
antheridiis ut apud formam typicam, sed numeris variantibus;
antheridiis haud infrequenter 2, oogoniis 1—5.

Filaments 30—40 » diam., oogonia and antheridia as in the type,
but in varying numbers; antheridia not infrequently 2, oogonia 1—5.
In company with V. longipes.

This species is not unlike V. longipes, but the pedicels bearing the

202 Rhodora | [OcroBER

organs of fructification are placed directly on the filament, radiating
from one spot; the oogonia are much more oblique, often concave
inside. When there are two oogonia and one antheridium, there is a
certain resemblance to V. geminata; but the slender radiate pedicels
make it amply distinct; the forms with many oogonia and antheridia
are quite unlike anything else. The largest number of pedicels ob-
served in one group is twelve; four bearing antheridia, eight oogonia.
MALDEN, MAssagHusetts.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 76.

Fig. 1, Vaucheria longipes.
Fig. 2, V. Gardneri, group of four oogonia and one antheridium.
Eg S8 “ = group of two — * whe gic a

THREE PLANTS FROM MAINE.

Ora W. KNIGHT.

Durina the fall of 1906 while collecting along the shore near Otter
Cliffs, Mount Desert Island, I found a very peculiar form of Juniperus
horizontalis Moench, with lobed fruit, growing in an extensive patch
by itself, while elsewhere the typical plant prevailed. As this plant
seems worthy of a name I propose to call it:—

JUNIPERUS HORIZONTALIS Moench, forma lobata, forma nov.

Characters :— differs from J. horizontalis in having more elongate
fruit which is strongly two-, three- or even four-lobed at the apex.
The fruit when mature is pale green in color, slightly tinged with blu-
ish, or occasionally pale greenish blue. Type locality: rocky cliffs
along shore, Otter Cliffs, Mount Desert Island, Maine. Type No.
5311 O. W. K., October 3, 1906.

For two seasons I have had under observation a very peculiar
hybrid Pyrus whose exact affinities were open to some slight doubt
at first, but as the question now seems satisfactorily settled I propose
to call it:—

Pyrus Americana X arbutifolia, comb. nov.!

1[Hybrids ascribed to the same parentage have been observed in cultivation. See,
for example, Schneider, Ill, Handb, d. Lanbholzk. i, 677.— Ed.]

1907] Knight,— Three Plants from Maine 203

Shrub about 1 meter tall; foliage very variable, glabrous above,
pubescent beneath even when mature; the leaves either simple, oblong-
ovate and dentate or entire, er variously lobed, or compound and
composed of five to seven oblong-ovate leaflets with margins dentate or
entire; peduncles and pedicels pubescent; cymes decompound, fifteen-
to thirty-flowered, the flowers not appreciably different from those of
Pyrus Americana (Marsh.) DC.; fruiting pedicels and young twigs
pubescent; mature twigs glabrous, similar in color to those of Pyrus
Americana; fruit only sparingly maturing, a majority of the blossoms
not being fertilized, red, 6 mm. in diameter, not distinguishable extern-
ally from that of Pyrus Americana; the seeds very abortive, showing no
embryos in the case of several examined. Fruit ripe and falling August
12, 1906. Type locality: growing associated with supposed parents,
Bicycle Path, Bangor; flowering specimens June 9, 1905; fruit August
12, 1906. Type specimen No. 5224 O. W. K.

Along the shores of the Penobscot at Bangor, growing near the type
of Salix coactilis Fernald, is a shrub, which at certain stages of growth
I have been inclined to refer to S. coactilis although later in the season
it more nearly resembles S. cordata Muhl. After study of this peculiar
shrub for several seasons its true affinities seem well established and
I propose to call it:—

Salix coactilis X cordata, hyb. nov.

Characters:— Shrub about 2 meters tall; branchlets reddish green
to blackish and somewhat quadrangular; youngest branchlets gray
and pubescent to puberulent; leaves oblong to lance-ovate, long-
acuminate, petioled, at first reddish green to red beneath and pubes-
cent, especially on mid-rib and veins, above deeper red, pubescent on
the mid-rib at least, becoming green with age but always paler below
and remaining pubescent on mid-ribs above and below, in maturity 6
to 12 em. long, 2 to 4 em. broad, rather finely and somewhat irregu-
larly glandular-dentate; petioles pubescent even in maturity; stipules
semi-ovate, glandular-toothed, persistent on the younger branchlets,
4 to 10 mm. long; aments on short leafy peduncles, expanding with
the leaves, in anthesis 1 to 2.5 cm. long, in fruit 2 to 4 cm. long, 7 mm.
thick; scales oblong or obovate, blunt at tip, blackish, very pubescent
with silky hairs longer than blade; capsule glabrous, conic-subulate,
pedicelled, about 3 mm. long, the pedicel about 1 mm. long; style
about 1 mm. long; stigma short, two-lobed; capsules generally abor-

204 Rhodora [Ocronxn

tive, but occasionally producing one or two fertile seed. Type local-
ity: bank of Penobscot River, Bangor, May 16 and June 7, 1904.
(No. 35 O. W. K. Type). In general appearance the plant is almost
exactly intermediate between S. cordata and S. coactilis, the aments
having a marked resemblance to those of S. cordata, while in other
characters the shrub resembles S. coactilis.

Bangor, MAINE.

SALICORNIA EUROPAEA AND ITS REPRESENTATIVES
IN EASTERN AMERICA.

M. L. FERNALD.

THE annual Saltwort or Samphire of our salt marshes, which has
passed very generally under the name Salicornia herbacea, presents,
upon the coast of New England and eastern Canada, three strongly
marked tendencies to which it is here proposed to call attention. But
first we must consider briefly the nomenclatorial status of the species,
which has been recently called to mind by Messrs. Britten and
Rendle of the British Museum.!

Linnaeus, in the first edition of the Species Plantarum (1753),
enumerated four species of Salicornia, with the first of which alone we
are here concerned. This was

“1. SALICORNIA articulis apice crassioribus obtusis. europaea.

Mat. med. 8. herbacea.
Salicornia herbacea. Fl. suec. 1.
Salicornia annua. Sauv. monsp. 7.
Salicornia. Hort. cliff. 490. Roy. lugdb. 205.
B Salicornia semipervivens. Sauv. monsp. 7. fruticosa.
Kali geniculatum majus. Bauh. pin. 289.
Habitat in Europe litoribus maritimis. h ©
Conjerantur annua & sempervirens utrum specie distincta?” ?

In the 2d edition (1763) of the Species, Linnaeus entirely discarded

the name Salicornia europaea and published the name S. herbacea for

1 Britten & Rendle, Journ. Bot. XLV. 104 (1907).
? p. Sp. 3 (1753). i

1907] Fernald,— Salicornia Europaea in Eastern America 205

the annual plant, setting off as a distinct species the perennial S.
fruticosa. Subsequent authors have been inclined to follow the second
edition of the Species instead of the first, and to designate the annual
plant of both Europe and America as S. herbacea L. (1763).

The name Salicornia europaea, however, as shown not only by its
position on the page but by its italic-type, was intended by Linnaeus,
in 1753, to designate a species embracing two variations, one annual
and herbaceous, the other evergreen and fruticose; and it must, of
course, be retained for at least one of its components, although in 1763
Linnaeus himself discarded the name. In fact, in 1762, one year prior
to the publication of the name Salicornia herbacea, the annual herba-
ceous plant was clearly treated by Hudson, in his Flora Anglica, as
S. europaea, and several forms (including the fruticose plant) were
indicated without names. ‘Thus it is doubly certain that the herba-
ceous plant, clearly defined by Hudson in 1762 as S. europaea, should
retain that name instead of the later S. herbacea of Linnaeus (1763).

The plant which is usually interpreted as typical Salicornia europaea
(S. herbacea) is somewhat bushy-branched, with the ascending simple
or commonly forking spikes comparatively slender (1.5-2.5 mm. thick).
This plant is common on our Atlantic coast, from eastern New Bruns-
wick to Georgia, and it occurs in alkaline places in the interior of New
Brunswick and New York, also on the Pacific coast.

Another plant, differing somewhat from the typical Salicornia
europaea in having the elongate spikes much thicker (34.5 mm. thick)
and more commonly simple or subsimple, is represented in the her-
baria examined by several sheets from the coast of New Brunswick,
Nova Scotia, and New England, and from Salina, New York; and it
is apparently of wide distribution. 'Phis thick-spiked extreme seems
to be the plant described by Koch as S. herbacea, B pachystachya.

'The third plant is more distinct from the upright bushy-branched
Salicornia europaea, for its freely-forking branches are very lax and
often drooping, the lowermost commonly much elongated and quite
prostrate upon the ground. The plant, thus forming closely prostrate
or loosely spreading mats, is the characteristic representative of the
species about the mouth of the River St. Lawrence, and from there it
follows the coastal marshes southward as far as the entrance to the
Bay of Fundy. It also occurs in alkaline places in the Saskatchewan
region. This plant is identical with much Old World material which
is considered without question to be S. prostrata Pallas. In its best

206 _Rhodora [OcroBER

development it appears sufficiently distinct from S. ewropaea, but the
distinctions seem to be merely habital, and no characters of flower or
fruit have been found by which it can be separated from the upright
plant.

A fourth plant, known from the Valley of the Red River of the
North in Minnesota and Manitoba to central Kansas and the Rocky
Mountains, should be watched for in alkaline regions farther east.
This is the recently described Salicornia rubra Nelson, which resembles
typical S. europaea, but is easily separated by the shorter joints of the
spikes.

The distinctions and nomenclature of these four annual plants with
blunt or bluntish inconspicuous scales may be summarized as follows.

* Joints much longer than thick, conspicuously exceeding the middle flower.

S. EUROPAEA L. Erect (1-4.5 dm. high), from simple to freely
branched, the branches ascending, green, turning red in autumn;
scales obscure and very blunt, making a truncate barely emarginate
termination of the long joints of the slender (1.5-2.5 mm. thick) taper-
ing spikes; middle flower much higher than the lateral ones, shorter
than the joint; fruit pubescent; seed 1.3-2 mm. long.— Sp. 3 (1753);
Huds. Fl. Angl. 1 (1762); Britten & Rendle, Journ. Bot. XLV. 104
(1907). S. europaea (herbacea) L. Sp. 3 (1753). S. herbacea L. Sp.
ed. 2, 5 (1763); and most later authors.— Salt marshes of the coast,
New Brunswick to Georgia; interior salt springs, etc., New Brunswick
and New York; also on the Pacific coast. (Eurasia.)

Var. pachystachya (Koch) n. comb. Spikes much thicker (3-4.5
mm. thick).— S. herbacea, B pachystachya Koch, Syn. ed. 2, 693 (1844).
— Similar range, less common.

Var. prostrata (Pallas) n. comb. Branches horizontally spreading
or drooping, very soft and lax, the lowest much elongated and decumbent;
or the whole plant depressed and matted.— S. prostrata Pallas, Ill.
Pl. 8, t. 3 (1803). S. herbacea, B prostrata Moq., Chenop. Enum.
115 (1840).— Brackish or alkaline shores, Lower St. Lawrence River
to Washington County, Maine.

* * Joints about as thick as long, scarcely exceeding the middle flower.

S. RUBRA Nelson. Bushy-branched (0.5-2 dm. high), the abundant
simple or forking branches ascending, turning red in autumn; scales
broadly triangular, blunt or subacute; spikes slender-cylindric (2-3.5
mm. thick), blunt, rather closely jointed; flowers crowded, the middle

1907] Eaton, — Notes on plants of Chesterville, Maine 207

one higher than the others and usually reaching the tips of the joints;
fruit pubescent; seed 1 mm. long.— Bull. Torr. Bot. Cl. xxvi. 122
(1899).— Low alkaline places, Manitoba and western Minnesota to
central Kansas, and westward to the Rocky Mts.

GRAY HERBARIUM.

NOTES ON PLANTS OF CHESTERVILLE, MAINE.
Lintuian O. Eaton.

In addition to the interesting plants of Chesterville already reported’,
the following, perhaps worthy of note, have been found in this vicinity,
during the past few seasons. The grasses and sedges were collected
and determined by Mrs. Agnes Chase of the Department of Agricul-
ture at Washington, in the summer of 1906; the remaining plants,
unless otherwise stated, being the collections of the writer. For aid
in final identification of various species I. am indebted to Dr. D. W.
Fellows, Mr. A. A. Eaton, and Professor M. L. Fernald.

Oxalis Acetosella L., var. subpurpurascens DC. A few plants of this
variety were found in a cedar swamp, among a thick colony of the
species, by Mrs. Chase and the writer, July 3, 1906. The variety
differed from the typical O. Acetosella only in a whitish appearance
of the foliage and in the color of the petals, the latter being wholly a
purplish-pink. After identifying the plants, Mr. Fernald writes: ‘‘I
have known this variety in America only from Manchester, Vermont."

Lysimachia thyrsiflora L. Fence-row, in damp soil, July, 1906
(F. J. Keyes).

Sabbatia campestris Nutt. A single well flowered plant was found,
September, 1906, on ground left fallow for a season.

Spiranthes Romanzoffiana Cham. Roadside ditch, August, 1906.
Also found in a field, August 14, 1902, by C. H. Knowlton (See Ames,
Orchidaceae, fase. i. 139).

Scheuchzeria palustris L. Abundant on one bog, August, 1904.

Carex pauciflora Lightf. Plentiful on two bogs, July and August,
1904.

1 RHODORA, ii. 123; v. 82.

208 Rhodora [OCTOBER

Carex Backii Boott (C. durifolia Bailey).

Glyceria nervata Trin., var. stricta Scribn.

Panicum Werneri Scribn.

- tennesseense Ashe.

Phegopteris hexagonoptera Fée. A large colony on a shaded hillside,
July, 1905.

Aspidium spinulosum Swartz (typical). On a rocky hill in partial
shade, the plants evidently increasing.

SOUTH CHESTERVILLE, Maine.

THe DWARF MISTLETOE ON THE SOUTHEASTERN Coast OF MAINE.
— The recent articles calling attention to Arceuthobium pusillum at
different points in Maine prompt this note, supplementing the series of
Maine records.

The plant first came to my attention during July, 1902, at West
Jonesport, occurring rarely on Black Spruce, on the main land. Late
in July, 1904, at Cross Island, off the mouth of Machias Bay, the plant
was found in great profusion, again on Black Spruce. Here it infested
patches of limited extent, with larger patches free from infection.

On Matinicus Island, off the coast of Maine, on August 4th, 1907,
this plant was found in greater abundance and size than I have seen it
previously. It infested the small, exceedingly dense or “scrubby”
White Spruces about the Northwest Head.

I have often looked, vainly, for it about Casco Bay, yet we are now
warranted in considering that it has been shown to occur throughout
the northern, central, and eastern portions of the State.! The regu-
larity of its distribution is another question, deserving of many reports.
— ARTHUR H. Norton, Portland, Me.

1 The following records are to be found in Rnopona.
Vol. ii. 2(1900): von Schrenk — Monhegan Island, Boothbay, Linekin.
10 (1900): Fernald — Fort Kent, Upsala.
221 (1900): Arthur — Isle au Haut.
Vol. v. 49 (1903): Harvey — Mt. Katahdin.
Vol. viii. 168 (1906): Chamberlain — Pleasant Ridge.
Vol £i. 28 (1907): Murdoch — Rangeley.
75 (1907): Rand — Mt. Desert Island.
2 124 (1907): Chamberlain — Norway — Casco.
[Arceuthobium is also found in Alton and Georgetown — Eds.]

Vol. 9, No. 105, including pages 149-198 was issued 13 September, 1907.

Rhodora Plate 76
CUT

Ed

eben!

N. L. Gardner ad nat. del.
Redrawn for reproduction by
F. Schuyler Mathews.

Fig. 1. VAUCHERIA LONGIPES. Figs. 2-3. V. GARDNERI.

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. November, 1907.

No. 107.

AN ALPINE VARIETY OF HOUSTONIA CAERULEA.
ARTHUR STANLEY PEASE-AND ALBERT HANFORD MOORE.

THE striking white flowers of Houstonia caerulea in Tuckerman’s
Ravine have long attracted the attention of the numerous persons
who travel through it every year, whether botanists or not, since these
flowers form a very conspicuous part of the flora of the ravine.t The
beautiful white color of the corolla, and brilliant yellow of the throat
and upper part of the tube have for a long time led the authors to
wonder if the plant in question might not be distinct from the lowland
species. Several collections and a careful study at the Gray Her-
barium have confirmed this suspicion.

The variety of Tucke:man’s Ravine and the Alpine Garden may be
readily distinguished by the color eharacters above referred to, together
with the shape of the corolla tube. In the case of the alpine variety,
the tube tapers gradually downward from the limb to the base without
any striking differentiation into a broader and narrower portion. In
the common variety, on the other hand, there is a long, straight, much
more exserted tube, and then an abrupt, but usually narrow, funnel-
like broadening just beneath the border. The following measure-
ments, while not practicable for purposes of identification, are inter-
esting evidences of the distinctness of the two phases. A careful
series of measurements of the breadth of the corolla-tube at the widest
portion, immediately below the limb, and the total length of the tube
shows that, while individual measurements in both plants overlap, the
averages are quite different. The average width in the mountain
variety was found to be 2.04 mm. and the average length 3.41 mm.
In the lowland plant these figures were respectively 1.80 and 4.58 mm.

1Cf, G. S, Miller in Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist, xxvi, 178 (Feb. 7, 1894) foot-note, “A
very large, pale form, apparently distinct from the lowland plant,”

210 Rhodora [NOVEMBER

The average ratio in the first instance was .59 and in the second .39.

The measurements of the width range from 1.25-3 mm., those of the

length from 3-4 mm. for the new variety, but from 1-2.75 mm. and

3-6 mm. respectively for the common variety.

Houstonia caerulea is described by Linnaeus as being blue. The
ordinary lowland plant is not infrequently white, and has always a
yellow throat, but this feature is not so striking, and it has the custo-
mary corolla-tube of the Bluet. It is presumably this phase which
is referred to by Millspaugh in Flora of West Virginia, 375 (1892) as
Houstonia caerulea f. albiflora, but it is listed without description.

The authors take great pleasure in dedicating the variety, whose
characterization follows, to the late Edwin Faxon and to Charles
Edward Faxon, now connected with the Arnold Arboretum, two
brothers, whose collections of the flora of Mount Washington and
vicinity have been among the most extensive and valuable in recent
years.

HOUSTONIA CAERULEA L. var. Faxonorum Pease et Moore var. nov.
Flores candidi, faucibus flavissimis; corollae tubus sensim a limbo
usque ad basim constrictus; tubi maxima latitudo 1.25-3 mm.
(plerumque 2.04), longitudo 3-4 mm. (plerumque 3.41). Dis-
tributio in alpinis Montium Alborum.

Houstonia serpyllifolia Grah. (not Michx.) in: Bot. Mag: lv, pl. 2822
(1828). Here the above variety is clearly figured. For an il-
lustration of the type see Bot. Mag. xi, pl. 370 (1797).

Type specimen: New HawrsnuriE, Coós County, Headwall of
Tuckerman’s Ravine, Sargent's Purchase, July 29, 1907 (A. H.
Moore, no. 4047 in Herb. Moore. Co-types in Herbb. Gray,
Pease, and Bartlett).

Other specimens examined: New HawrsurnE, Coós County, Head-
wall of Tuckerman’s Ravine, Sargent’s Purchase, August 14,
1902 (A. H. Moore, no. 291) and August 28, 1907 (A. S. Pease,
no. 10732); Alpine Garden, Sargent’s Purchase, August 19, 1907
(A. S. Pease, no. 10558); Mt. Washington, within 2-300 ft. of
summit, Sargent's Purchase, August 6, 1897 (W. Deane).

CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS.

1907] Brainerd,— Mendel's Law of Dominance in Viola — 211

MENDEL'S LAW OF DOMINANCE IN THE HYBRIDS
OF VIOLA.

E. BRAINERD.

IN a recent paper! I gave some account of certain experimental
cultures of the offspring of violet hybrids. It was shown that these
seedlings diverge in a striking manner from the mother plant and from
each other, in accordance with the laws of heredity that Mendel found
to control the progeny of a hybrid. During the past summer I have
been able to trace the operation of these laws in the characters of the
petaliferous flowers of these seedlings, and in several cases have raised
a second generation of seedlings.

In these experiments it has clearly come to light, that in some par-
ticulars at least, Mendel's Law of Dominance finds illustration among
violet hybrids. 'The special instance of this that I wish to present in
detail, relates to the inheritance of color of capsules and of seeds in
V. hirsutula X papilionacea, briefly discussed in RHODORA, ix. 93,
June 1907.

'The putative parents of this hybrid differ from each other as shown
in the following table:—

V. HIRSUTULA V. PAPILIONACEA

[ habit nearly prostrate erect
| width 2-4 cm. 5-10 em.
Leaves i
| upper surface hirsutulous glabrous
petioles glabrous somewhat hairy
TRUS | color reddish purple deep violet
| spurred petal villous glabrous
( length 6-8 mm. 10-15 mm.
|
Capsules 1 color purple green
{number of seeds 20-30 50-70
length 1.6 mm. 2 mm.
— color buff dark brown ;

The offspring of the hybrid present, in the most varied manner, a
redistribution of most of these points of difference. Segregation in
leaf characters was especially well marked. The differences in size
of capsule and in number of seeds were obscured by the impairment

1 Read before sections F & G of the A, A. A. S., Dec. 27, 1906, and printed in Science
June 14, 1907.

212 Rhodora [NovemBer

of fertility, which though not as great as in many violet hybrids, was
yet in some plants sufficient to make the evidence ambiguous. Atten-
tion will be here restricted to the two points of color difference, in which
Mendelian dominance is plainly manifest.

In the hybrid from the wild the capsules are a reddish purple, like
those of V. hirsutula. The tendency to produce the green capsules
of the other parent is however present, for it appears in some of the
offspring; but in the mother hybrid it is overpowered by the conflict-
ing tendency to produce purple capsules. In Mendel’s language, the
purple color is ‘dominant,’ the green color ‘recessive.’ In like man-
ner it appears that the brown seed-color of V. papilionacea is domi-
nant over the buff seed-color of V. hirsutula. Mendel represented
dominant characters by capital letters, recessive characters by the
corresponding small letters. Following his practice, we may let A
stand for the purple capsule-color, and a for the green capsule-color;
B for the brown seed-color, and b for the buff seed-color. One par-
ent, V. hirsutula, will then be marked as A.b; the other, V. papilio-
nacea, as aB; and the hybrid resulting from their sexual union as
Aa.Bb.

The plants from the wild are presumed to have been the immediate
result of the crossing of the two species, — what are technically known
as F,’s. It may well be that they are removed one or more generations
from the original cross; but this is not of especial importance in the
present experiment, as it will be seen that these particular plants, so
far at least as respects the two color qualities under investigation, are
hybrids of exactly the same status as ‘first crosses.’

From the close-fertilized seeds of these plants I raised in 1906 11
offspring, F,’s; and in 1907, 10 offspring; in all, 21. Among these all
the four Mendelian forms were found to occur, in number and char-
acter as follows:

10 plants had purple capsules and brown seeds, apparently A.B.

E. [21 [23 [11 [11 oe buff [21 “ce AbD.
oM * . green E " brown “ i a.B.
4 [11 ce oe ce [23 buff ce a.b.

A close approximation to the theoretically required ratio of *9:3:3:1"
is to be expected only when there are several hundred individuals; but
even in the small number here shown there is a decided plurality of
A.B's.

The different forms of these capsules and their seeds are shown in

1907] Brainerd,— Mendel's Law of Dominance in Viola — 213

fig. 1, in which the purple capsules and brown seeds are shaded, and
the green capsules and buff seeds are left white.

a .B
V. papilionacea

2.—A.b? 3.—a.B? 4.—a.b!

Fig. 1.—Capsules and Seeds of Viola hirsutula X papilionacea, and ot its
Parents and Offspring.

In 1907 offspring were obtained of six different plants of the eleven
raised in 1906. In order to interpret the results, the reader who is not
familiar with the laws of Mendel, will be helped by a brief preliminary
discussion of the real nature of the four forms of F, that appear as the
product of the first sowing. As a matter of fact there are five other
forms, that masquerade under one or another of the first three forms
shown above. We are not sure, among these, in a plant with purple
capsules, but that there is also a latent tendency to produce green
capsules, kept in check in this individual plant by the dominance of
the purple tendency, but able to assert itself in some of the offspring
That is, we do not know whether the A is pure A or Aa. Simi-
larly we are not sure in a plant that bears brown seeds but that there
is also a latent tendency to bear buff seeds, repressed in this individ-
ual plant by the stronger tendency to bear brown seeds, but able to

214 Rhodora [ NoveMBER

assert itself in some of the offspring; B may be simply B or Bb; it
may be pure or hybrid. Accordingly, under form 3 above we may
have either a.B. or a.Bb; under form 2either A.b or Aa.b; and
under form 1 either A.B, A.Bb, Aa.B, or Aa.Bb. The fourth
form, a.b, is without ambiguity. These possibilities are pictured in
the following diagram, in which the latent hybridity is represented
by small crosses on capsule or seed.

STABLE
FORMS.

Average
NY frequency:
one plant
of each in
every 16.

no.3, a.B no.4, 8.b

MONO-HYBRID FORMS,
each disguised under
the form shown above it.

Average frequency:
2 plants of each
in every 16.

no.5., A.Bb—no.6, Aa.B no.7, Aa.b

DI-HYBRID FORM, always disguised as A.B.
Wi Average frequency: 4 plants in every 16.
[| €»

no.9, Aa.Bb

Fig. 2.—Color Forms in Offspring of V. hirsutula X papilionacea.

It will be seen at once that to determine the real nature of any one
of the first three of the F,’s in fig. 1, we need to grow its seeds. The
apparent forms of the six plants whose seeds were sown, and of their
offspring, are given in the following table:

Form of F, AB | AB | AB | Ab | &B | &b

Seed-number |. 940 337 339 | 334 333 338
; i ; lA.B-4 | A.B-4 | |
Forms of F, obtained, ) | A b-4 AR
and the number oft ,p | i B-3 | as

plants of each form. J | | | &b-t | NU

The plants raised from these six sowings were so few (largely from
lack of time to transplant) that the numerical results are unimportant;

1907] Brainerd,— Mendel’s Law of Dominance in Viola 215

but in no instance is there a failure to comply with the laws of Mendel.
The following points should be noted:— |

1. Inthe sowing numbered 338 all five offspring are like the parent
a.b,— have green capsules and buff seeds; a recessive character (in
this case a double recessive) must always breed true. Here we have a
new and stable form, which as a whole is unlike either of the original
species.

2. We may infer that the plant from which seeds numbered 333
were obtained was probably pure, that is, was really aB and not
a.Bb; had it been the latter, one or more of the six offspring would
probably have had buff seeds, or been a.b. Perhaps as regards cap-
sule-color 334 was also pure,— A.b and not Aa.b. If so, we should
have here in color characters complete reversions to the respective
grandparents, V. papilionacea and V. hirsutula.

3. In sowing 339, though only one seed germinated, it tells the
whole story regarding the form of the parent, — it must have been
the di-hybrid Aa.Bb, and thus exactly like the immediate parent F,.
A plant with purple capsules and brown seeds produces one with green
capsules and buff seeds; a feat to be expected of a di-hybrid, though
only once in every sixteen plants that it reproduces.

4. The proof is equally clear that in sowing 337 we have the seeds
of another di-hybrid; it throws both sorts of capsules and both sorts
of seeds.

5. In sowing 340 the result is somewhat ambiguous ;— the mother
may be either Aa.Bb or Aa.B; it could not be A.Bb or A.B.

6. 'Though three apparent A.B's were sown, none proved to be
pure or stable like no. 1 of fig. 2. But in the offspring of a di-hybrid
the chances are that only one in nine, that have the form A.B, will
turn out to be that in reality.

I much regret that the experiment was not conducted on a larger
scale; but it should be borne in mind that the object was not to
that is now quite unnecessary; but,

verify the Laws of Mendel,
conversely to prove that as these seedlings in their metamorphoses
obey the laws of Mendel, their parent was of hybrid origin. Disap-
pointed in my expectation that the artificial production of violet
hybrids would be attempted at a certain ‘biological laboratory,’ it
occurred to me over two years ago that equally valuable results might
be gotten by observing the behavior of the offspring of the supposed

216 Rhodora [ NOVEMBER

hybrids. As pointed out by Dr. McDougal,' the test of a suspected
natural hybrid may often be better made by the Method of Analysis
than by the Method of Synthesis. In the genus Viola the analytic
method has proved unexpectedly successful. Over thirty putative
hybrids have produced offspring that segregate in accordance with
Mendelian principles.

An objection recently made to the occurrence of hybrids in Viola is
based on the supposed fact “that 99 out of 100 seeds of these plants"?
are from self-fertilized flowers. This led me last June to examine
with reference to this matter plants of some eighteen species of our
stemless violets, and revealed the fact that all but two of these plants
produced seed freely from the petaliferous flowers; in some instances
over 300 such seeds were produced by a single plant? The structure
of the flower, in style stamens and petals, shows a most ingenious
arrangement to prevent self-pollination; and it is now evident that
the ovules are readily fertilized by the pollen of an allied species. The
coexistence of this habit with the opposite habit of producing in sum-
mer self-fertilized flowers is apparently the cause of the multiplicity
of forms in this group of plants. Hybridism gives rise to numerous
intergradient types; cleistogamy preserves them from further inter-
mixture more skilfully than the artificial hybridizer with his paper
bags, and permits the laws of Mendel to work out their natural results,
giving rise often to new varieties and races. The behavior of violet
hybrids and their offspring under cultivation presents many striking
illustrations of this procedure, and awakens the hope that with this
clew to guide us we may solve some of the long-standing perplexities
of the genus.

MIDDLEBURY, VERMONT.

1 Hybridization of Wild Plants, Bot. Gazette xliii. 11-44, Jan. 1907.

? Prof. E. L. Greene, Leaflets i. 214.

3 Five plants of V. nephrophylla furnished at one time from the capsulés of petaliferous
flowers 1227 ripe seeds.

1907] Cushman,— Primula farinosa, var. macropoda 217

PRIMULA FARINOSA, VAR. MACROPODA ON THE
MAINE COAST.

JOSEPH A. CUSHMAN.

WniLE I was collecting on the coast of Maine about Machias Bay
in early August my attention was called to the occurrence of a peculiar
plant said to be found at the base of the lighthouse on Libby Islands.
It was thought to have been brought there by birds which frequently
fly against the lighthouse and are killed. ‘To see what this plant might
be I visited the island with Mr. S. N. F. Sanford and found the plant
in very considerable numbers. It proved to be Primula farinosa L.,
var. macropoda Fernald. The only places where it occurred were at
the base of the lighthouse and the ground about the oil-house nearby.
At the time of collecting, the plants were in excellent fruit and cer-
tainly seemed thoroughly established. They were growing in loose
sandy loam well grassed over. From its appearance it was soil which
had been added there by grading and was not in its original position.

From the occurrence of the plants it seemed in every way probable
that the seeds were brought, as was first told us, by birds coming from
farther north. As is well known, many birds are killed by flying
against lighthouses at the various exposed points along the coast.
The very limited occurrence about the lighthouse seems to be explained
only in this way.

After visiting the island we studied the chart of the region and
decided to make a trip to Moose Peak Light on Mistake Island.
This is the outer exposed point of the northeastern chain of islands
- extending out from Jonesport. This was in the direction which birds
would probably take in migration. If the theory of the source of the
other station was true it seemed as though the plant should be found
there also. A day or two later we visited Mistake Island and were
much pleased to find the plant there though the individuals were
much fewer in number. It was growing near the light on moist grani-
tic cliffs but in considerable soil. On the same day we also landed at
Black Head on the outer part of Head Harbor Island. On the sum-
mit were found scattered specimens of the same plant. ‘These were
growing in wet grassy spots among the rocks and appeared more likely
to be indigenous than in either of the other places visited. It was
planned to visit Nash Island still farther to the southwest but time and

218 Rhodora [ NoveMBER

weather conditions prevented our doing so. In all, three stations
were discovered for this plant. These are of especial interest as the
only other New England station was Mt. Kineo, Moosehead Lake,
Maine. Although I collected on Mt. Kineo about three weeks later
and made a point of looking for this plant no trace of it was found
but I have since been informed by Dr. Kennedy that his specimens
were found at the eastern end of the cliffs at a spot I did not reach.

From our observations it would seem likely that the plant may be
found about the lighthouses still farther to the southwest along the
outer points of the Maine Coast.

Boston SOCIETY or NATURAL HISTORY.

NOTEWORTHY PLANTS COLLECTED AT ROQUE
BLUFFS, MAINE, IN 1907.

C. H. KNOWLTON.

Dvnixa the past summer I spent several days collecting in Washing-
ton County, Maine, mostly in the township of Roque Bluffs. This
lies on the coast, 16 miles from Cutler, and 22 from Mt. Desert. The
summer climate there 1s cool and very wet, because the Greenland
current washes the shore and causes frequent fogs.

The coast is lined with cliffs of voleanic rock, broken by occasional
sea-caves, estuaries and beaches. In many places heavy spruce woods
come down to the edge of the sea-cliffs, with such typical plants of the ,
northern mountain woods as Solidago macrophylla, Pursh, and Aspi-
dium spinulosum (O. F. Mueller) Sw. var. dilatatum (Hoffm.) Hook.
forma anadenium B. L. Robinson.

Back from the cliffs are numerous and extensive peat-bogs, covered

‘with Picea nigra Link., Eriophorum callitrix Chamisso, Smilacina
trijolia Desf., Empetrum nigrum L., Rubus Chamaemorus 1., Vaccin-
ium Oxycoccus L., and more common bog plants.

I have not fully explored the region, and the estuaries in particular
will probably reward further search. 'The following species already
collected, however, seem worthy of mention.

Elymus mollis Trin, is à common beach grass, growing in the same
sandy soil as Ammophila arundinacea, Hostk.,— but not so abundant.

1907] Riddle,— Notothylas orbicularis in Massachusetts 219

Iris setosa Pall. Very common within reach of spray from the sea,
but never competing with I. versicolor L., inland.

Comandra livida Richards. Very common on Johnson's Beach
bog, with Rubus Chamaemorus L., but there were no blossoms or
fruit visible (July 6). This is the first New England station at sea
level, as the other reports are from five granitic mountain tops (Mans-
field, Clinton, Saddleback, Abraham and Katahdin). It occurs at
sea level in New Brunswick and northward.

Suaeda Richii Fernald. Common along the edges of the salt marshes.

Montia Jontana L. Moist open woods, Roque Island.

Empetrum nigrum, L. var. andinum DC. Common on the top
of the sea-cliffs, in residual gravel, the branches frequently hanging
down. The typical form of the species seems to grow only in peat-
moss. (RHopora, IV, 196.)

BosroN, Mass.

NOoTOTHYLAS ORBICULARIS IN MassacHUsETTS.— On October 9,
1907, while collecting with a class in Cryptogamie Botany, on the
Wellesley College campus, I found a number of plants of Notothylas
orbicularis (Schwein.) Sulliv. The Notothylas was growing on wet
sandy soil, in company with Anthoceros, and equally abundant. Dr.
A. W. Evans has confirmed my identification of the material.

As there seem to be few specimens in herbaria, it may be worth
while to record what is known of Massachusetts stations for the plant.
Dr. Evans states that the only Massachusetts specimens, of which he
knows, were collected at Cambridge, and are in the Underwood Her-
barium. ‘There is but one specimen in the Cryptogamic Herbarium
of Harvard University, having been collected by Dr. Farlow at New-
ton, in a locality where now probably extinct. In addition to these
specimens, Dr. Evans has found Notothylas at Falmouth, Dr. Farlow
at Cambridge, and Dr. Thaxter at Waverley. In none of these cases,
however, was material preserved. ‘To these should now be added the
Wellesley locality. Specimens of this collection have been deposited
in the Herbarium of Wellesley College, in the Herbarium of Dr. A. W.
Evans, at Yale University, and in the Cryptogamic Herbarium of
Harvard University.

The records from the localities named above suggest that Noto-
thylas is probably well distributed through Massachusetts and perhaps.

220 Rhodora [NovEMBER

further north, but has been overlooked. It, therefore, seemed well
to call the attention of New England botanists to the plant, that they
may watch for it in future collecting, and give us more exact knowl-
edge of its distribution.— Lincotn Ware RIDDLE, Wellesley College,
Wellesley, Massachusetts.

REDISCOVERY or PoDOSTEMON CERATOPHYLLUS IN VERMONT.—
While erossing the West River about one fourth mile below the rail-
road station in Jamaica, Vermont, one day the past summer, my
attention was attracted by a curious sea-weed like plant which adhered
closely to the stones of the river bed, and which seemed to be abundant
over a considerable area. It being the dry season (August) some
stones bearing the plant were out of water. Upon being submitted
to the Harvard Botanical Department the plant proved to be the
river weed Podostemon ceratophyllus Michx. This plant has before
been reported from Vermont by Frost but has been placed upon the
doubtful list in the Flora of Vermont. The station is only accessible
at low water but no doubt the plant may be found at other places in
the bed of West River.— Frank Dossin, Shushan, New York.

A NEW VARIETY OF Scirpus OLNEYL.— The genus Scirpus is
somewhat remarkable for the number of its varieties with elongated
spikelets, so it was not surprising when, in Milford, Conn., Sept. 28,
1907, during an excursion of the Connecticut Botanical Society, the
writer found an additional variety of this class, which may be de-
scribed as follows:

Scirpus OLNEYI Gray, var. contortus, n. var. Some or all of the
spikelets twisted or bent, linear, elongated (1-2, rarely 2.4 em. in
length); involucral leaf prolonged (3-7 cm.) and, like the stem, not
so stout as in the species. Brackish marsh on the coast, Milford,
Conn., E. H. Eames, no. 5847. Type, in herb. Eames: co-type in
herb. Gray.

Conspicuously different from the species in the foregoing characters;
and from allied species, among other features, in the remarkable tri-
quetrous-winged stem.— E. H. Eames, Bridgeport, Connecticut.

Vol. 9, no. 106, incl uding pages 197-208 and plate 76, was issued 26 October,
1907. s

Rhodora

JOURNAL OF

THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB

Vol. 9. December, 1907. No. 108.

SOME NEW WILLOWS OF EASTERN AMERICA.
M. L. FERNALD.

REcENT explorations of the eastern portion of the Province of Quebec
have brought to light many willows which have hitherto been unknown
in eastern America. Some of these shrubs, such as Salix pseudo-
myrsinites Anders., S. Barclayi Anders., and S. fuscescens Anders.,
have been previously known only from the northwestern Provinces
or from Alaska; the unique S. Richardsoni Hook., var. Macouniana
Bebb has been known only from Hudson Bay and northern Labrador;
while some others it has been impossible to identify with any described
species or varieties.

The most abundant of these undescribed willows are two large shrubs
or small trees which abound on the terraces and banks of the St.
Lawrence at least from Matane to the River Ste. Anne des Monts,
and probably beyond, and for several miles inland in the valley of
that river. One of these trees, which in its best development is about
15 feet high, with wide-spreading branches, has the largest leaves
known to the writer in any member of the Diandrae, the mature blades
often reaching a length of 5 or 6 inches. This handsome large species
may appropriately be called

SALIX laurentiana n. sp. Frutex altus vel arbor mediocris, ramis
crassis junioribus canescento-tomentosis; foliis oblongis vel oblongo-
obovatis acutis vel breviter acuminatis junioribus dense albo-pubes-
centibus, demum supra glabris viridibus lucidis subtus glaucescentibus
6—14 cm. longis 3—4.5 cm. latis subintegris vel leviter crenatis, petiolis
gracilibus circa 1.5 cm. longis tomentosis; stipulis late ovatis de-
ciduis; amentis gracilibus pedunculatis foliis parvis 3—5 suffultis
patulis, femineis densifloris fructiferis 4-9 cm. longis 1 cm. crassis;
squamis oblongis obtusis fuscis longe pilosis; capsulis conico-subu-
latis obtusis canescento-tomentosis 5-6 mm. longis pedicellatis, pedi-

222 Rhodora [DECEMBER

cello nectarium triplo superante; stylo brevissimo, stigmatibus bifidis.

Large shrub or small widely branching tree, 2-5 m. high; branch-
lets coarse, canescent-tomentose, the pubescence slightly lustrous;
leaves oblong to oblong-obovate, at first silky-tomentose on both
surfaces, in maturity bright green and glabrate above, glabrate and
glaucous beneath, 6—14 cm. long, 34.5 em. broad, subentire or shal-
lowly crenate, acute or short-acuminate, rounded at base to the
tomentose petiole (about 1.5 em. long); stipules round-ovate, decid-
uous; aments borne upon short leafy branches, the pistillate dense,
on canescent peduncles, 4-9 cm. long, about 1 em. thick; scales
oblong, obtuse, dark brown, long-pilose; capsule conic-subulate,
blunt, canescent-tomentose, 5-6 mm. long; pedicel 1-2 mm. long,
thrice as long as the nectary; style 0.5 mm. long, the stigmas deeply
cleft.— QUEBEC, abundant on terraces and banks of the St. Law-
rence River from Matane, Matane Co., to Ruisseau Castor, Gaspé
Co., and probably eastward. Type material: in fruit, Méchins,
Gaspé Co., July 12, 1906 (Fernald & Collins, no. 202); in mature
foliage, caleareous-sandstone sea-cliffs, Tourelle, Gaspé Co., August
19-21, 1905 (Fernald & Collins).

A handsome and very characteristic large-leaved shrub or small
tree, suggesting in its foliage and tomentose branchlets S. amplifolia
Coville, of Alaska, which has slightly smaller leaves, no stipules,
thicker aments (1.5-2 em. in thickness), the ovary and capsule smooth,
and the style 3-4 mm. long. From the eastern S. glaucophylla,
which abounds along the rivers of northern Maine, New Brunswick
and Quebec, S. laurentiana is, likewise, immediately distinguished
by its tomentose capsules, as well as the aments terminating leafy
twigs instead of being sessile or subsessile upon the old wood.

The other undescribed willow which is associated on the banks of
the lower St. Lawrence with S. laurentiana, S. pellita Anders., S.
lucida, var. intonsa Fernald, and S. rostrata Richardson, has a wider
distribution than S. lawrentiana, for it has been observed in abun-
dance up the river from Matane as far as St. Fabien in Rimouski
County and it doubtless extends further west. This large shrub or
small tree, sometimes 20 feet high with trunks 6 inches 1n diameter,
is clearly an extreme variation of the common S. rostrata. In the
typical form of the species as well as in such variations as I find de-
scribed the leaves are more or less rugose and comparatively small,
the mature pedicels are from 3 to 5 mm. long, and the capsules 5 to
9 mm. long. The larger extreme of the species from the lower St.
Lawrence may be called

1907] Fernald,— New Willows of Eastern America 223

SALIX ROSTRATA Richardson, var. luxurians n. var. Arbor 2-6 m.
alta, trunce 1-1.5 dm. crasso; foliis planis non rugosis 6—10 cm. longis;
amentis femineis 2.5-3 cm. crassis, pedicellis 5-8.5 cm. longis; cap-
sulis 9—12 mm. longis.

Tree 2-6 m. high, the larger trunks 1—1.5 dm. in diameter, with
the nearly plane scarcely rugose leaves becoming 1 dm. long in
maturity; mature pistillate aments very large, 2.5—3 em. thick; pedi-
cels 5-8.5 mm. long; capsules 9-12 mm. long.— QUEBEC, abundant
on banks of the St. Lawrence from Rimouski Co. to Gaspé Co. ‘Type
material: limestone ledges, Bic., July 4—6, 1906 (Fernald & Collins,
nos. 208, 495).

Along the gravelly half-inundated margin of the River Ste. Anne
des Monts occurs an unusually attractive little shrub, its slender
smooth branches rarely more than 2 or 3 feet high and its short oblong
or suborbicular dentate leaves suggesting to the casual observer the
foliage of the common Amelanchier spicata (Lam.) C. Koch. (A.
rotundifolia Roem.) of the region, rather than that of any of our wil-
lows. Prolonged study fails to show any American willow to which
it is nearly related, but in foliage as well as in its sessile aments the
shrub very strongly suggests the little known Siberian Salix pyrolae-
jolia Ledeb. as shown in Ledebour's beautiful plate. From that
unique species the shrub of the Ste. Anne River differs in several
important characters enumerated below, and it seems sufficiently
distinct to merit the name :

SALIX obtusata n. sp. Frutex parvus, ramis gracilibus castaneis
glaberrimis; foliis oblongis vel terminalibus suborbiculatis 2-5 cm.
longis 1-3 em. latis dentato-serratis apice rotundatis basi rotundatis
vel subcordatis junioribus arachnoideis tenuissimis pellucidis pur-
purascentibus demum coriaceis glabris supra viridibus subtus pallidi-
oribus, petiolis gracilibus 5-12 mm. longis; stipulis cordatis persisten-
tibus majoribus 5 mm. longis obscure glanduloso-dentatis; amentis
sessilibus, femineis 5-20 mm. longis; squamis oblongo-ovatis obtusis
subfuscis laxe villosis; capsulis glabris conico-subulatis rufescentibus
vel flavescentibus 2-3 mm. longis breviter pedicellatis, pedicello
nectarium valde superante; stylo parvo, stigmatibus minimus bifidis.

Low slender shrub (0.5-1 m. high): branchlets slender, glossy
brown, glabrous: leaves oblong to suborbicular, 2-5 cm. long, 1-3
em. broad, closely dentate-serrate, rounded or subcordate at base,
rounded at apex, glabrous, or the youngest arachnoid-tomentose, at
first thin and purple-tinged; later coriaceous, bright green above,
slightly glaucous beneath; .petiole slender, 5-12 mm. long: stipules
cordate, persistent, the largest about 5 mm. long, obscurely glandular-

224 Rhodora [DECEMBER

dentate: aments sessile upon the old wood, the pistillate short-cylin-
dric, 0.5-2 cm. long: scales oblong-obovate, obtuse, brownish, loosely
villous: capsule glabrous, conic-subulate, reddish or yellowish, 2-3
mm. long: pedicel 0.5 mm. long, much exceeding the very short
nectary: style very short, the stigmas bifid; staminate aments not
seen.— QUEBEC, inundated gravelly bars and beaches, River Ste.
Anne des Monts, fruit July 15, 1906, mature foliage August 16, 1906
(Fernald & Collins, nos. 203, 203a).

Closely allied to and strongly simulating the Siberian S. pyrolaefolia
Ledeb. but differing in its more shallowly toothed leaves, shorter
sessile aments and very short style. The type specimens were col-
lected from characteristic low shrubs associated with a number of
other willows — S. cordata, S. pellita, S. glaucophylla, &c.— at the
frequently inundated margins of a group of alluvial islands near the
head of the Grand Rapids of the River Ste. Anne des Monts.

Salix fuscescens Anders., hitherto known only from northern and
western Alaska and the adjacent coast of Siberia, is abundant in bogs
on the serpentine tableland of Mt. Albert. It is a very attractive
creeping shrub, in foliage and other characters strongly suggesting
S. pedicellaris Pursh of our northern temperate regions (S. myrtilloides
of American authors, not L.). From the lowland species, S. fuscescens
is quickly distinguished by its usually obovate leaves, the more pubes-
cent scales of the aments, the very short thickish pedicels (barely
exceeding the scales), the long subulate nectary which is usually half
as long as the pedicel, and the definite though short style. As stated,
this attractive species is abundant in the bogs of Mt. Albert, where it
is associated with numerous other plants typical of western and north-
ern Alaska and adjacent Siberia — Eriophorum C hamissonis C. A.
Meyer, Conioselinum Gmelini (C. & S.) Coulter & Rose, Festuca
altaica Trin., &c.,—— and although many colonies have the capsules
quite glabrous as in the type of the species, others occupying extensive
areas of bog, have the capsules distinctly pilose. These shrubs with
pilose capsules seem otherwise identical with typical S. fucescens and
they may be designated

SALIX FUSCESCENS Anders., var. hebecarpa n. var. Frutex parvus,
ramis subflagelliformibus; foliis amentisque eis formae typicae simili-
bus; capsulis pilosis.

Capsules pilose; characters otherwise as in the typical form.—

QUEBEC, alpine bog, tableland of Mt. Albert, Gaspé Co., July 21,
1906 (Fernald & Collins, no. 207).

1907] Fernald,— New Willows of Eastern America 225

While studying the specimens and descriptions of Labrador willows
the writer has often wondered that Salix adenophylla should have been
described as a unique species from Labrador and that we should now
know the plant only from the sand dunes of the Great Lakes. A
careful study of Hooker's original description of S. adenophylla and
of Andersson's fuller descriptions of the type material shows that the
shrub of the Great Lakes can have no close affinity with S. adenophylla
and it is here proposed as

SALIx syrticola n. sp. Frutex altus vel mediocris laxe procumbens,
ramis crassis cinereo-tomentosis vel puberulis; foliis ovatis vel late
lanceolatis acuminatis cordatis vel subcordatis crebre glanduloso-ser-
rulatis junioribus sericeo-lanatis demum firmis viridibus opacis lanatis
vel glabratis 3-10 em. longis 2—5 cm. latis, petiolis brevibus latis
cinereo-pubescentibus; stipulis conspicuis foliaceis cordato-ovatis
glanduloso-serrulatis petiolos valde superantibus; amentis peduncu-
latis foliis patulis 3-6 suffultis, masculis 2.5—4.5 cm. longis circa 1
cm. crassis, femineis 2—4.5 demum 5-10 cm. longis 1-1.5 cm. cras-
sis; squamis oblongis fulvis valde tomentosis vel longe sericeis; cap-
sulis conico-subulatis glabris rufescentibus 5-7 mm. longis basi
rotundatis vel subcordatis pedicellatis, pedicello glabro 0.5-1 mm.
longo nectarium prope triplo superante; stylo 0.5-1 mm. longo,
stigmatibus vix bifidis.

Large straggling shrub: branchlets stout, cinereous-tomentose or
-puberulent; leaves ovate to broadly lanceolate, acuminate, cordate
or subcordate, closely glandular-serrulate, silky-lanate when young,
often becoming glabrate, in maturity firm, dull green, 3-10 cm. long,
2-5 em. broad; petioles short and broad, dilated at base, cinereous-
pubescent: stipules conspicuous, foliaceous, cordate-ovate, glandular-
serrulate, much exceeding the petioles: bud-scales cinereous-tomentose:
aments appearing with the leaves, on leafy-bracted peduncles, the
bracts 3-6, resembling the leaves; staminate aments 2.5—4.5 em.
long, about 1 em. thick; pistillate 24.5, becoming in fruit 5-10 em.
long, 1-1.5 cm. thick: scales oblong, pale brown, very densely long-
silky or tomentose: capsule conic-subulate, glabrous, rufescent,
5-7 mm. long, rounded or subcordate at base: pedicel glabrous,
0.5-1 mm. long, nearly twice as long as the nectary: style 0.5-1 inm.
long; stigmas obscurelv bifid: stamens 2, the filaments glabrous.—
S. adenophylla Bebb, The Lens, ii. 249 (1873), and in Gray, Man.
ed. 6, 485 (1890); Britton in Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl. i. 504, fig.
1203 (1896); not Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. ii. 146 (1839).— Sand dunes
and beaches along the Great Lakes. A sheet in the Gray Herbarium
from sandy shores of Lake Michigan, near Chicago, H. H. Babcock,
1880 (Bebb, Herbarium Salicum, no. 2) may serve as the type.

This handsome shrub is one of the best marked species in the group,

226 Rhodora [DECEMBER

and apparently only through his extreme caution in characterizing
new species was it allowed by Mr. Bebb to pass so long for the little
known Salix adenophylla Hook. Hooker’s species from Labrador is
still known only from the original specimens and descriptions, but so
many of the older and hitherto obscure northern species have recently
come to light that we may confidently hope soon to understand more
clearly S. adenophylla. At present our best information upon this
species is that given in the original description by Hooker and later
from the type material by Andersson. It is noteworthy that Hooker,
following the system of Barratt, placed his Labradorean S. adenophylla
immediately after S. speciosa and S. Barrattiana (two of our most
remarkable willows, with the large aments chiefly sessile at the tips
of the old branchlets) and not in the section with S. cordata to which
S. syrticola, the shrub of the Great Lake region, is clearly related.

The original description of S. adenophylla gives account of little
besides the leaves: ‘‘foliis ovatis basi cordatis acutis... . argute
serratis serraturis elongatis glanduliferis....stipulis ovato-cordatis
grosse glanduloso-serratis"; ! but that the elongate glanduliferous
serratures were sufficient in Hooker's mind to distinguish the species
is shown by his note: “I know no species like this, well marked as it
is by the copious long narrow serratures to the leaves tipped with a
gland, so that the leaf looks as if it were fringed with pedicellated
glands." ' This remarkable character of the foliage is sufficient,
even if the habitat, Labrador, were not almost convincing, to show
that Hooker's plant could not have been the same as the common
sand dune shrub of the Great Lakes; and when we refer to Andersson's
account? of the Hookerian type, we find added corroboration in the
statements of other characters: ''folia.... majora pollicem longa”
(in S. syrticola the larger are a full decimeter — 4 inches — long, and
the smallest examined are 3 em. long); the fully mature fruiting ament
**14 poll. longa" (in S. syrticola 5-10 cm. — 2-4 inches); "squamis
....glabriusculis” (in S. syrticola very densely and persistently long-
silky or tomentose); “pedicello cinereo" (in S. syrticola glabrous and
straw-colored).

GRAY HERBARIUM.

! Hook, Fl, Bor.-Am., ii, 146 (1839), ? DC, Prodr, xvi, 254 (1864).

1907] Wheeler,— New Stations for two Vermont Plants 227

New STATIONS ror Two Vermont PrANTS.— This season I found
beside the road, near the long bridge across West River, about a
mile above Townshend village, a plant which proved to be Berteroa
incana, DC. It was growing in considerable abundance in a light
sandy field.

Up to the time of the publication of the Brainerd, Jones, and Eggle-
ston's Flora of Vermont this plant had been reported from but three
stations in the state.

I have found Sisymbrium altissimum, L. in two places in Jamaica
this season: one in our strawberry field and again in a neighbor's
door-yard. Mr. Dobbin of Shushan, New York, while in town this
year, found it beside the railroad above Jamaica depot. ‘This also
seems to be one of the infrequent but increasing Vermont plants.—
Leston A. WHEELER, Jamaica, Vermont.

NEW ENGLAND SPECIES OF PENIUM.

JOSEPH A. CUSHMAN.

Species of the genus Peniwm cannot be called common in New
England although specimens are usually met with in nearly all gather-
ings of Desmids of any richness. Many of the species are inconspic-
uous and a few of them minute. Twenty-eight species are known
from the British Isles while but twelve are recorded here from New
England. Two of these are recorded here for the first time. ‘The
forms which have not been previously recorded are preceded by an
asterisk. All records for which specimens have been seen are followed
by an exclamation point. A brief synonymy is given to clear up
some of the names used in American works and to give references
to published figures. A key is given to the species recorded here,
based upon that of the Wests. Measurements and descriptions
unless otherwise stated are based upon New England specimens.

PENIUM Bréb., 1844.

Cells straight, usually cylindrical or fusiform, with or without a
slight median constriction; each semicell with a single axile chloro-

228

Rhodora [DECEMBER]

plast with radiating plates, entire at the outer edges, each chloroplast
with one or more pyrenoids, when several, in an axile series; cell wall
usually with pores.

II

KEY ro THE New ENGLAND SPECIES or PENTIUM.

Cells unconstricted, smooth.
1. Cells large, breadth 20-50 yx í ; Tet P. Libellula.
2. Cells small, breadth 10-15 p ; à i : P. Navicula..
Cells usually constricted in the middle .
1. Cell wall granulate.
A. Cell wall granulate over its entire surface.
a. Cells large, usually more than 100 (long P. margaritaceum.
b. Cells minute, usually less than 30 » long . P. cuticulare.
B. Granules restricted to the ends of the cell à : P. Clevei.
2. Cell wall striated.
A. Cells large, striations distinct, spirally arranged P. spirostriolatum.
B. Cells small, striations longitudinal and indistinct.
a. Breadth usually more than 20 p . ; P. polymorphum.
b. Breadth usually less than 20 y ; . P. phymatosporum.
3. Cell wall smooth or punctate.
A. Cells 2-4 times as long as broad.

a. Cell wall punctate : , i ; ; P. curtum..

b. Cell wall smooth í : i ^ j P. cruciferum.

B. Cell elongate, many times as long as broad A . P. minutum.
4. Cell with annulations . ; ; ; : : P. annulare.

Pentium LiBELLULA (Focke) Nordst.

Closterium Libellula Focke, Physiologische Studien, 1847, p. 58,

pl. 3, fig. 29.
Penium Libellula Nordst., Videnskab. Meddel. f. d. naturh. Foren.

E.

Jóbenhavn, 1888. p. 184; W. & G. S. West, Brit. Desm., vol. 1,

1904, p. 73, pl. 7, figs. 6, 7.

Penium closterioides Ralfs, Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 152, pl. 34, fig. 4;
Wood, Smithson. Contrib. to Knowl. No. 241, 1874, p. 109; Wolle,
Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 35, pl. 5, fig. 18.

Cells large, 43-63 times as long as wide, fusiform, no constriction,
ends subtruncate, polar vacuoles with several moving granules.

Length 186-233 i; maximum breadth 38-50 p.

N

. H.: Intervale, scarce! Pudding Pond, North Conway, common!

1907] Cushman,— New England Species of Penium 229

North Woodstock, common! Mass.: Medford! Bridgewater! East
Bridgewater! Lake Watuppa, Fall River!

PENIUM LIBELLULA, var. INTERRUPTUM (West) W. & G. S. West.

Penium closterioides, forma interrupta West, Journ. Roy. Micr.
Soc., 1892, p. 721.

Penium Libellula, var. interruptum W. &. G. S. West, Journ. Roy.
Micr. Soc., 1897, p. 479; Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 74, pl. 7, figs. 9, 10.

Smaller than the typical form, the chloroplasts divided three times
transversely, therefore in each cell four chloroplasts each containing
à pyrenoid.

Length 120-170 x; breadth 22-37 p.

N. H.: Pudding Pond, North Conway! Mass.: Pondville! Plain-
ville!

PENIUM LIBELLULA, var. INTERMEDIUM Roy & Biss.

Penium Libellula, var. intermedium Roy & Biss., Ann. Scot. Nat.
Hist., No. 12, Oct. 1894, p. 252; W. & G. S. West, Brit. Desm.,
vol. 1, 1904, p. 74, pl. 7, fig. 11.

Differs from the typical form in size, being about one half the size,
otherwise typical.

Length 124 u; breadth 22 y.

Mass.: Pondville!

PENIUM Navicuta Bréb.

Penium Navicula Bréb., Mem. d. l. soc. imp. sc. nat. Cherbourg,
vol. 4, 1856, p. 146, pl. 2, fig. 37; Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 36,
pl. 5, fig. 16; W. & G. S. West, Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 75, pl. 7,
fig. 12-15, 19.

Cells small, 34—44 times as long as wide, fusiform, no constriction,
ends broadly rounded, vacuoles with two or three moving granules.

Length 55-60 4; breadth 14 p.

Me.: Orono (W. West); Mass.: Plainville! Lake Watuppa,
Fall River!

PENIUM MARGARITACEUM (Ehrenb.) Bréb.

Closterium | margaritaceum Ehrenb., Die Infusionthierchen als

volkommene Organismen, 1838, p. 95, pl. 6, fig. XIII.

230 Rhodora [DECEMBER]

Penium margaritaceum Bréb., in Ralfs. Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 149,
pl. 25, fig. 1, a-c; Wood, Smithson. Contrib. to Knowl. No. 241, 1874,
p. 107; Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 34, pl. 5, figs. 5, 6, 11; W. &
G. S. West, Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 83, pl. 8, figs. 32-35.

Cells 7-11 times as long as wide, cylindrical, median constriction
present, ends broadly or truncately rounded, cell wall with granules
arranged in longitudinal rows, reddish or yellowish brown in color.

Length 120-240 u; breadth 17-22 u; apices 12-15 y.

Me.: Orono (Harvey), Kittery, not common! N. H.: Plymouth
(Wests); Pudding Pond, North Conway! Intervale! Vt.: (Wolle);
Mass.: Amherst (W. West); Lake Quinsigamond, Worcester (Stone);
Bridgewater! Lake Watuppa, Fall River! R. L: Wainskut Pond,
North Providence (Bailey); Conn.: (Wolle).

This is one of our most striking species and easily noted, yet cannot
be called common.

* PENIUM CUTICULARE W. & G. S. West.

Penium cuticulare W. & G. S. West, Journ. Roy. Mier. Soc., 1896,
p. 153, pl. 4, figs. 43, 44; Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 85, pl. 6, figs. 4, 5.

Cells minute, 23 times as long as wide, cylindrical, no constriction,
ends broadly and truncately rounded, cell-wall reddish brown, minutely
but irregularly papillose.

Length 22 u; breadth 9.3 y. `

Mass.: Lake Watuppa, Fall River!

Pentium CLeEvEI Lund., var. crassum W. & G. S. West.

Penium Clevei Lund. Desm. Suec., 1871, p. 86, pl. 5, fig. 11; var.
crassum W. & G. S. West, Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., 1894, p. 4, pl. 1,
fig. 5; Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 88, pl. 8, fig. 38; Cushman, Bull.
Torrey Club, vol. 32, 1905, p. 225, pl. 7, fig. 8.

Cells about twice as long as wide, lateral margins decidedly convex,
slightly constricted in the middle, ends of the cell finely granulate,
chloroplast with a single large pyrenoid. Zygospore spherical, with
numerous broad, squarely truncated processes.

Length 80-96 u; breadth 40-44 u; isthmus 38.5-40 p; breadth of
zygospore with processes 68-78 u: without processes 54—57 p.

Mass.: Pondville!

This is the only record for the zygospore of this species.

1907] Cushman,— New England Species of Penium 231

PENIUM SPIROSTRIOLATUM Barker.

Penium margaritaceum, var. punctatum Ralfs, Brit. Desm., 1848,
p. 149, pl. 25, figs. 1, d-h.

Penium spirostriolatum Barker, in Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 9, `
1869, p. 194; Wolle, Freshw. Alg. U. S., 1887, p. 22, pl. 61, fig. 19;
G. S. West, Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., vol. 34, 1899, p. 377-380; W. &
G. S. West, Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 88, pl. 9, figs. 1-8.

Cells large, about 9 times as long as wide, cylindrical, with a slight
median constriction, slightly attenuated toward the rounded apices,
transverse sutures apparent, cell wall yellowish brown, marked with
longitudinal striae, variably twisted especially near the ends of the cell.

Length 202-233 p; breadth 19-25 u; apex 15-16 p.

Me.: Orono (W. West); Mass.: Winchester! Lake Watuppa,
Fall River!

* PENIUM SPIROSTRIOLATUM, var. apiculatum var. nov.

Cells about four times as long as wide, central portion cylindrical, ,
at each end very abruptly narrowed for about one-sixth of the length.

Length 84 u; breadth 21 5; apices 11.5 y.

Mass.: Plymouth!

PENIUM POLYMORPHUM Perty.

Closterium polymorphum Perty, in Bern. Mitth. 1849, p. 28.

Penium polymorphum Perty, Kleinist Lebensf., 1852, p. 207; Wolle,
Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 36, pl. 5, fig. 12; W. & G.S. West, Brit. Desm.,
vol. 1, 1904, p. 90, pl. 9, figs. 9-11.

Cells small, about 23 times as long as wide, cylindrical with a slight
median constriction, very slightly attenuated toward the broadly
rounded apices, cell-wall with inconspicuous, longitudinal striations.

Length 50 x; breadth 20 u.

-Vt.: Charlotte (Wolle); N. H.: Pudding Pond, North Conway,
occasional! Mass.: Amherst (W. West).

PENIUM PHYMATOSPORUM Nordst.

Penium phymatosporum Nordst., Desm. Ital., 1876, p. 26, pl. 12,
fig. 1; W. & G. S. West, Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 91, pl. 6, figs.
9-11.

232 Rhodora [DEcEMBER

Cells small, about 2} times as long as wide, with a very slight con-
striction, very slightly attenuated toward the truncately rounded
apices, cell wall with delicate longitudinal striations.

Length 35-40 u; breadth 15.5-16.5 u; isthmus 13.5 p.

Mass.: Tom Nevers Pond and pond near Old North Cemetery,
Nantucket!

PENIUM curTUM Bréb.

Closterium curtum Bréb., in Desm., 1838, fase. 19, No. 901.

Cosmarium curtum Ralfs. Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 109, pl. 32, fig. 9.

Penium curtum Bréb., in Kütz., Spec Alg., 1849, p. 167; W. & G.
S. West, Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 97, pl. 10, figs. 21, 22.

Calocylindrus curtus Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 54, pl. 12, figs.
15, 16.

“Cells small, sometimes minute, a little more than twice longer
than their diameter, with a distinct median constriction; semi-cells
attenuated, sides convex, apex rounded and sometimes slightly thick-
ened; cell wall punctate; chloroplasts with about eight longitudinal

' ridges."

Length 22-60 u; breadth 10.5-32.5 u; breadth of isthmus 9.5-30 n.

Mass.: Amherst (W. West).

Personally I have not met with this species in New England. It has
been found in Massachusetts by West and in several states outside of
New England by Wolle. The description and measurements are
from the Wests’ British Desmids. 4

* PENIUM CRUCIFERUM (DeBary) Wittr.

Cosmarium ? cruciferum DeBary, Conj., 1858, p. 72, pl. 7, G, figs.
3-6.

Penium cruciferum Wittr., in Wittr. & Nordst., Alg. Exsiec. No.
482, 1882; W. & G. S. West, Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 100, pl.
10, figs. 18, 19.

Cells small, about 14 times as long as wide, with a slight median
constriction, apices broadly rounded, cell wall smooth and colorless.

Length 15.5 x; breadth 10 ji; isthmus 9.3 p.

Mass.: Lake Watuppa, Fall River, common!

PENIUM MiNUTUM (Ralfs) Cleve.

Docidium minutum Ralfs., Brit. Desm., 1848, p. 158, pl. 26, fig. 5;
Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 52, pl. 10, fig. 9, pl. 50, figs. 29-31.

1907] | Cushman,— New England Species of Penium 233

Penium minutum Cleve, Ofvers. af K. Vet.-Akad. Fórh., 1864, p. 493;
Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 35, pl. 5, figs. 19, 20; W. & G. S. West,
Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904, p. 101, pl. 10, figs. 1, 2.

Calocylindrus minutus Wolle, Desm. U. S., 1884, p. 54, pl. 5, figs.
19, 20, pl. 12, fig. 12.

Cells elongate cylindrical, 8-12 times as long as wide, with a clearly
defined median constriction, gradually attenuated to the truncate
apices, cell wall colorless, smooth or punctate.

Length 114 u; breadth 13 p.

Mass.: Lake -Quinsigamond, Worcester (Stone); ‘Tewksbury
(Lagerheim); R. I.: (Bailey).

I have not as yet found the typical form in New England. ‘The
measurements are those given by Lagerheim of a Massachusetts speci-
men.

PENIUM MINUTUM, var. ELONGATUM W. & G. S. West.

Penium minutum, var. elongatum W. &'G. S. West, Trans. Linn.
Soc. Ser. 2, Bot. vol. 6, no. 3, 1902, p. 136; Brit. Desm., vol. 1, 1904,
p. 104, pl. 10, fig. 8.

Cells much longer than in the typical form, 40 times as long as wide.

Length 372 u; breadth 9 p.

N. H.: Pudding Pond, North Conway!

PENIUM ANNULARE West.

Penium annulare West, Journ. Bot., vol. 29, 1891, p. 354, pl. 315,
figs. 5, 6; Johnson, Bull. Torrey Club, vol. 21, 1895, p. 290, pl. 239,
fig. 1.

“Penium of medium size, about 7 times as long as wide, subcy-
lindrical, with median constriction (or subconstricted), gradually
attenuated from the middle to the subtruncate apices, with distinct
annulations (about 14-22): in end view circular; cell wall colorless,
densely and irregularly punctate.” :

Length 130-177 x; breadth 20-23 y.

Me.: Scarbro’, abundant (W. West). This is the type locality.

PENIUM ANNULARE, var. OBESUM West.

Penium annulare, var. obesum West. Journ. Bot., vol. 29, 1891,
p. 354, pl. 315, fig. 7.

234 Rhodora [DECEMBER

"Variety about 3 times as long as wide, with fewer annulations
(about 9)."

Length 106 u; breadth 31-34 u.

Me.: Scarbro’, rare (W. West). Type locality.

I have not seen this species although the type locality is in Maine.
There are three other stations for this species in the United States
but it has not been found in New England since its first discovery.
The descriptions are rough translations of the originals. ‘The measure-
ments are those given by West.

Boston Society oF NATURAL HISTORY.

ERRATA.

Page 24, line 15; for atropurpuresa, Juncu read atropurpurea,
Juncus.

“54, “ 5; for Razoumowsk a read Razoumowskia.
"M UU 2: " Med k read Medik.

MW t Js oT e roai tise:

" 116, “ 8; “ microphlyllum read semiorbiculatum.
“ ]122, “ 7; “ Amonum read Amomum.

“ 124, " 27; ^" Cyprepedium read Cypripedium.

um o, AR amphirhyncus read amphirhynchus.
C-b-— S strigilis read. strigile.

* 180, “ 1; “ Dutylum read Ditylium.

“ 132, “ 1; after Navicula insert nobilis.

" 148, " 12; for Lauholzkunde read Laubholzkunde.
" 164, “ 25; for Wormskjoldii read Wormskioldii.

“ 199, “ 14; for Herbipolenis read Herbipolensis.

* ]99, “ 37; “ Aromachys read Aromochelys.

Vol. 9, no. 107, including pages 209 to 220, was issued 10 December, 1907.

1907]

Index

235

INDEX TO VOLUME 9.

New scientific names are printed in full face type.

Abies balsamea, 158, 169; nigra, 173.
Acanthospermum, .26; australe, 26,
at Lawrence, Massachusetts, 26.
Acer coccineum, 116; eriocarpum,

116; glaucum, 116; microphyllum,
116, 117; rubrum, 116, 117, subsp.
microphyllum, 116, var. tomento-
sum, 116, var. tridens, 116, 117;
saccharinum, 116; semi-orbiculatum,

116, 117; tomentosum, 116, 117.

Achillea borealis, 164, 191.

Achnanthes brevipes, 136; curviros-
trum, 136; longipes, 136; manifera,
136; subsessilis, 136.

Achnanthidium flexellum, 131, 136.

Acosmus, 44.

Acroxis, 18.

Actinella punctata, 138.

Actinocyclus Barkleyi, 129, 139; cras-
sus, 139; Ehrenbergii, 139; Ralfsii,
139; subtilis, 139; tenuissimus,
139; triradiatus, 139.

Actinoptychus, 130; undulatus, 140;
velatus, 140.

Adenoscilla, 37.

Adiantum, 27, 82, 174; Capillus-
Veneris, 39; pedatum, $82, var.
aleuticum, 155, 158, 167, 174.

Adicea, 54.

Adnaria, 54.

Adopogon, 55.

Aecidium, 195.

Agaricus octogesimus nonus, 51.

Ageratum, 50.

Agrostis borealis, 156, 158, 169, 190;
diffusa, 20, 21; filiformis, 19; foli-
osa, 19; frondosa, 19; lateriflora,
18, var. filiformis, 19; mexicana, 18,
19; racemosa, 22; setosa, 22;
sobolifera, 18; sylvatica, 18, 20;
tenuiflora, 18.

Ailanthus, 54.

Alacospermum, 54.

Alchemilla, 92; alpina, subsp. eual-
pina, 47; pratensis, 92, found at
Westford, Massachusetts, 92.

Alexitoxicon, 40.

Algae, 36, 77, 78; The Basis of Nomen-
clature for, 77; Causes of Variation

in Color of some red, 90; Red, 90;
Some new green, 197.

Alicularia, 58; Geoscyphus, 57; minor,
57; Roteana, 58; scalaris, B minor,
57, 58.

Allium tricoccum, 12; vineale, 12.

Alnus, 18; alnobetula, 153; crispa,
153, 156, 160, 190; incana, 48;
lanuginosa, 48; mollis, 160.

Alpine Rhinanthus of Quebec and
New Hampshire, 23; Variety of
Houstonia caerulea, 209.

Amaryllidaceae, 50.

Amelanchier, 179; oligocarpa,
rotundifolia, 223; spicata, 223.

America, The Genus Suaeda in north-
eastern, 140; Salicornia europaea
and its Representatives in eastern,
204; Some new Willows of eastern,
221; Variations of Primula farinosa
in northeastern, 15.

American Diervillas, Flower Color of
the, 147.

Ammophila arenaria X Calamagrostis
epigeios, 42; arundinacea, 218; X
baltica, 42.

Amphicarpaea, 54; Pitcheri, 12.

Amphiprora, 130; alata, 135; con-
spicua, 135; lepidoptera, 135, var.
pusilla, 135; maxima, 135; ornata,
135; pulehra, 128, 135; vitrea, 135.

Amphiptetras, 130; antediluvianus,
139.

Amphora, 128, 130; cingulata, 135;
Clevei, 135; cymbifera, 135; erebi,
135; Eulensteinii 135; intersecta,
135; levis, 135; obtusa, 136; ovalis,
136; proteus, 135.

Amsinckia, 55.

Anaphalis margaritacea, 122.

Anarrhinum, sect. Anarrhinum, 47.

Andromeda glaucophylla, 163, 169,
189; tetragona, 182.

Andropogon macrothrix, 40; ternatus,
subsp. macrothrix, 40.

Anemone multifida, 161, 166; parvi-
flora, 161, 166, 183, 190; riparia, 161.

Anemonella, 151; thalictroides, 151.

Angiospermae, 36.

156;

236

Anidrum, 54.

Ankleberries, 5.

Annual Field Meeting of the Vermont
Botanical and Bird Clubs, Thirteenth,
108; Meeting of the Josselyn Bo-
tanical Society, Thirteenth, 107.

Antennaria neodioica, var. gaspensis,
164.

Anthoceros, 219.

Anthriscus, sect. Eu-anthriscus, 47.

Apios tuberosa, 13.

Arabis, 40; alpina, 161,
Collinsii, 161; Drummondi,
hirsuta, 161; spathulata, 40.

Aralia hispida, 122; trifolia, 13.

Arbor Vitae, 163.

Arbutus Uva-ursi, 182.

Arceuthobium, 54, 75, 76, 208, in the
Rangeley Region, 28; pusillum, 28,
76, 124, 208, at Mt. Desert, 75.

Archieracium, 37. :

Arctostaphylos alpina, 163, 166; Uva-
ursi, 163, 181, 182.

Ardissonia superba, 137.

Arenaria, 63; arctica, 155, 161, 167,
174, 186; ciliata, var. humifusa, 161,
167; groenlandica, 156, 161, 166,
177, 179-181; hirta, 154; macro-
phylla, 63; sajanensis, 161, 167, 186;
verna, 154, var. propinqua, 154, 161,
174.

Arisaema triphyllum, 121.

- Arnica Chamissonis, 154; chionopappa,
164; gaspensis, 164; mollis, 154, 164,
191.

Aromochelys, 199, 234; odorata, 199.

Artemisia borealis, 155, 164, 167, 174,
186, var. Wormskioldii, 164, 167,
174; canadensis, 154, 164, 167.

Arthur, J. C., Peridermium pyriforme
and its probable alternate Host, 194.

Arundinella, 50.

Arundinelleae, 50.

Asclepiadaceae, 52. .

Asclepiadeae, 37.

Asclepias 37; obtusifolia, 14; pulchra,
122.

Asphodeloideae, 37.

Asphodelus, 37.

Aspicarpa, 44.

Aspidium, 83; acrostichoides, 83;
Boottii, 83; cristatum, $3, var.
Clintonianum, 83, 124, X marginale,
84; fragrans, 154, 158; marginale,
83, var. elegans, 83; noveboracense,
83; simulatum, 74, 83; spinulosum,
84, 208, var. conecordianum, 84;
var.dilatatum, 84, forma anadenium

190. 191,
161;

Rhodora

[DECEMBER

84, 218, var. intermedium, 84;
Thelypteris, 83, forma Pufferae, 83.

Asplenium, $82; acrostichoides, 12,
83; Adiantum nigrum, 175, subsp.
serpentini, 175; adulterinum, 175;
cyclosorum, 155, 158; ebeneum, 82;
Filix-foemina, 27, 83, var. angustum,
83; platyneuron, 82, var. serratum,
82; thelypteroides, $83; Tricho-
manes, 82; viride 154, 158, 166, 172,
175.

Aster, 151, 157; foliaceus, 164, 191;
novibelgii, 39; puniceus, var. oligo-
cephalus, 164; subulatus, 151.

Asterionella formosa, 137; Ralfsii, 137.

Asterostemma, 52. 5

Astragalus, 154; alpinus, 162; Blakei,
154, 155, 162, 167; cariensis, 50;
contortuplicatus, 38; elegans, 162,
167, 172; frigidus, var. americanus,
162; Jesupi, 154; rhizanthus, 50.

Astrostemma, 52.

Athyrium cyclosorum, 158.

Atriplex maritima, 144.

Auliscus caelatus, 139; Macraëanus,
139; pruinosus, 139; sculptus, 139.

Bacillaria paradoxa, 131, 136.

Baeothryon, 51.

Baked-apple, 150.

Balsam, Fir, 76.

Baptisia tinctoria, 121.

Bartlett, H. H., Flower Color of the
American Diervillas, 147; The retro-
grade Color Varieties of Gratiola
aurea, 122.

Bartonia virginica, 122.

Bartramia, 37.

Basilima, 54.

Basis of Nomenclature for Algae, 77.

Behen, 55.

Belamcanda, 53.

Benthamia, 55.

Berteroa, incana, 227.

Betula alba, var. minor, 156, 160,
var. urticifolia, 111; glandulosa, 160,
169, 174, 190; incana, 48; lenta,

forma laciniata, 111; pendula, for-
ma dalecarlica, 111; pumila, 189.

Bibracteolata, 37.

Biddulphia aurita, 138; Baileyi, 138;
levis, 130, 139; pulchella, 138;
rhombus, 138; Tuomeyi, 138.

Bidens Beckii, 63; comosa, 14; laevis,
120;

Biforia, 54.

Bikukulla, 54.

1907]

Black Oak, 61; Raspberry, 4; Spruce,
28, 208.

Blackberry, Hog, 5. i

Blanchard, W. H., Connecticut Rubi,
4.

Blephariglottis grandiflora, 154.

Blessed Thistle, 28.

Blue Fringed Gentian, 28.

Bluet, 210.

Boehmeria cylindrica, 121.

Boletus vicesimus sextus, 51.

Boston District, Reports on the Flora
of the, — I, 81. *

Botanical and Bird Clubs, Thirteenth
annual Field Meeting of the Ver-
mont, 108; Society of Maine, Bulle-
tin of the Josselyn, 196; Society of
Maine, Meeting of the Josselyn, 107,
124.

Botrychium, 85; lanceolatum, var.
angustisegmentum, 85; matricariae-
folium, 85; obliquum, 86, var. dis-
sectum, 86, var. elongatum, 86;
ramosum, 85; simplex, 85; terna-
tum, var. intermedium, 86; virgi-
nianum, 86.

Bouchea, 38.

Brainerd, E., Mendel's Law of Domi-
nance in the Hybrids of Viola, 211;
The older Types of North American
Violets,— I, 93.

Brassica Napus, 39.

Braya humilis, 161.

Brebissonia Boeckii, 135.

Bromeliaceae, 37.

Bromeliineae, 37.

Brooms, Witches', 75.

Broussonetia tinetoria, 91.

Brunella vulgaris, 122.

Buda, 54.

Bulletin of the Josselyn Botanical So-
ciety of Maine, 196.

Bureaua, 38.

Bursa, 54.

Calamagrostis, 157; purpurascens, 158;
cinnoides, 121; hyperborea, 158;
Langsdorfii, 158, 166; Pickeringii,
156, 158.

Callithamnion, 91.

Calluna, 47.

Calochortus albus, 51;

Calocylindrus curtus, 232;
233.

Caloneis Wardii, 131, 134.

Calopogon, 53.

Calypogeia, 56; arguta, 67, 69; bi-
furca, 67; fissa, 70; sphagnicola, 65,

Nuttallii, 51.
minutus,

Index

237

66, 70, 71; sueciea, 66, 70, 71; Sulli-
vantii, 67-69, 73; tenuis, 69-71,
73; Trichomanis, 65-67, 69-71, var.
tenuis, 69.

Calystegia, 46, 55.

Campanopsis, 48.

Campanula, 157; aparinoides, 122;
sect. Campanopsis, 48; uniflora, 163.

Camptosorus, 83, 187; rhizophyllus,.
83, 187.

Campulosus, 53.

Campylodiseus echineis, 128, 137;

hibernieus, 137.

Capellia, 47.

Capnoides, 54.

Capnorchis, 54.

Capparis lasiantha, 45.

Capriola, 53.

Capsella, 54.

Carbenia, 55.

Cardamine, 47; bellidifolia, var. laxa,
161; glacialis, 48, var. subearnosa,
48; hirsuta, var. subearnosa, 48;
propinqua, 48.

Carduus, 48, 55; sect. Alfredia, 48.

Carelia, 50, 55.

Carex, 40, 120; alpina, 159; atrata,
var. ovata, 159, 190; Backii, 159,
208, bicolor, 159; brunnescens, 63,.
156, 159, 169; canescens, 159, 169,
var. subloliacea, 159; capillaris,
159, var. elongata, 159, 190; capi-
tata, 155, 159; concinna, 159; de-
flexa, 159, 190; durifolia, 208;
eburnea, 63, 159, 166, 172, 187; Gra-
hami, 155, 160; Halleriana, 39; hyp-

noides, 166; katahdinensis, 155;
lagopina, 159, 167; lenticularis, 159;
limosa, 159, 189; Michauxiana,

156, 160; obtusata, 159; oligosperma,
160; pauciflora, 160, 189, 207; pau-
pereula, 159, var. irrigua, 159, 189;
rariflora, 159, 166, 180, 181; rigida,
159, var. Bigelowii, 156, 159, 169;
saxatilis, 155, 160, var. miliaris, 160,.
166; scripoidea, 159, 169; stellutata,.
159, 190; vaginata, 159, 189.

Carica, 40.

Carpenter, D. S., Thirteenth Annual
Field Meeting of the Vermont
Botanical and Bird Clubs, 108.

Carphalea, 43.

Carya, 53.

Caryophyllaceae, 37. .

Cassiope hypnoides, 163; — tetragona,.
182.

Castilleja acuminata, 154; pallida, var.
septentrionalis, 24, 154, 163, 169, 190..

238

Cat Spruce, 76.
Catharinaea, 99; angustata, 64, 99;
crispa, 74, in Maine, An Occurrence

of, 74; Macmillani, 98, 99.

Cathea, 53.

Causes of Variation in Color of some
red Algae, 90.

Celtis occidentalis, 12.

Centaurea Jacea, 46; vulgaris, 46.

Centrospermae, 37.

Cephalanthus occidentalis, 122.

Cephalozia lunulaefolia, 66.

Cerastium arvense, 161, 174, 175, var.
oblongifolium, 175; beeringianum,
161; cerastioides, 155, 161.

Cerataulus levis, 139; polymorphus,
139.

Chaetomorpha, 199, 200; aerea, 199;
Chelonum, 198; Henningsii, 199;
Herbipolensis, 199.

Chamaecistus, 54.

Chamaecyparis on Long Island, New
York, New Station for, 74; thyoides,
74.

Chamaedaphne calyculata, 163, 189.

Chamaenerium angustifolium, 121.

Chamberlain, E. B., Catharinaea Mac-
millani, 98; Meeting of the Josselyn
Botanical Society, 124; Thirteenth
Annual Meeting of the Josselyn
Botanical Society, 107.

Cheiranthus tristis, 45.

Chenopodiaceae, 143.

Chenopodina linearis, 146; maritima,
145, 146, var. vulgaris, 142, 145.

Chenopodium maritimum, 142-146.

Chesterville, Maine, Notes on Plants of,
207.

Chimaphila maculata, 122; umbellata,
122.

Chiogenes serpyllifolia, 14.

Chlorophyceae, 78.

Chrysemys, 199; marginata, 199.

Chrysopsis, 55; faleata, 122.

Cicuta bulbifera, 122; maculata, 122.

Cincinnulus suecicus, 66; Trichomanis,
var. sphagnicola, 65, var. suecicus,

Circaea lutetiana, 39.

Cirsium, 55; muticum, var. monticola,
28, 164, 167, 191, Note on 28; super-
canum X rivulare, 42.

Cisticapnos, 54.

—— ora -amphibia, 200; expansa,
197.

Claytonia virginica, 75.
Clematis, 151; verticillaris, 63;
giniana, 151.

vir-

Rhodora

[DECEMBER

Clethra, 196; alnifolia, 122, 196, A
pink-petaled Form of, 195.

Closterium curtum, 232; Libellula,
228; margaritaceum 229; poly-
morphum, 231; Trabecula, 103;
truncatum, 103; vêrrucosum, 105.

Clubs, Thirteenth Annual Field Meet-
ing of the Vermont Botanical and
Bird, 108.

Cnicus, 28, 55; benedictus, 28, 55;
muticus, var. monticola, 28.

Cocconeis dirupta, 136; scutellatum,
136. `

Colinil, 54.

Collaea, 38.

Collins, F. S., The Basis of Nomen-
clature for Algae, 77; Is Rhinanthus
Crista-galli an introduced Plant? 26;
Some new green Algae, 197.

Color of the American Diervillas,
Flower, 147.

Comandra livida, 154, 156, 160, 189,
190, 219.

Compositae, 26, 37.

Comptonia, 194, 195; peregrina, 194.

Congress, On the Rules of Botanical
Nomenclature adopted by the Vien-
na, 29.

Coniferae, 36.

Conioselinum Gmelini, 224.

Connecticut Diatoms with some Ac-
count of their Distribution in certain
Parts of the State, A partial List of,
125; Noteworthy Plants of Salis-
bury, 74; Plants, Notes on, 10;
Rubi, 4.

Contortae, 37.

Convolvulus, 37, 46, 47; spithamaeus,
124.

Coptis trifolia, 121.

Cornus Amomum, 122; canadensis, 63.

Corydalis, 54.

Corylus americana, 124.

Coscinodiscus, 130; apiculatus, 139;
asteromphalus, 139; concinnus, 139;
excentricus, 139; gigas, 139; margi-
natus, 139; nitidus, 139; oculus-
iridis, 139; radiatus, 139; subtilis,
139; symbolophorus, 139.

Cosmarium cruciferum, 232; curtum,
232.

Cracea, 54.

Crockett, A. L., An Occurrence of
Catharinaea crispa in Maine, 74.

Cronartium, 194; Comptoniae, 194;
Quercus, 194.

Crow-berry, 149, 177.

Cruciferae, 37.

1907]

Crucifers, 40.

Cryptogramma densa, 158, 167; Stel-
leri, 154, 158, 166, 172, 173.

Cryptotaenia, 54.

Ctenium, 53.

Cuphea, 63; viscosissima, 63.

Curlew-berry, 149, 177.

Currant, Red, 1.

Cuscuta, 50; compacta, 11.

Cushman, J. A., New England Species
of Penium, 227; Primula farinosa,
var. macropoda on the Maine Coast,
217; Synopsis of the New England
species of Pleurotaenium, 101.

Cyclotella antiqua, 125, 140; Kuet-
zingiana, 140; striata, 140.

Cymatopleura elliptica, 137; hibernica,
137; marina, 137; solea, ‘137.

Cymbella, 131; affinis, 135; ameri-
cana, 135; cistula, var. maculata,
135; cuspidata, 135; cymbiformis,
var. parva, 135; Ehrenbergii, 135;
gastroides, 135; heteropleura, 135.

Cynanchum nivale, 43.

Cynodon, 53.

Cypripedium acaule, 121; Hookerae,
39; parviflorum, 160; spectabile,
124.

Cystopteris, 84; bulbifera, 124; fragilis,
84, 158; montana, 158, 170.

Cytisus, 51; biflorus, 51; Fontanesii,
51.

Dactilon, 53.

Dactylicapnos, 54.

Danthonia intermedia, 28, 159, 167,
190.

Dasya, 91; elegans, 90.

Datisca hirta, 115.

Dentaria, 47.

Denticella mobiliensis, 138; rhombus,
138.

Deringa, 54.

Deschampsia atropurpurea, 24, 156,
158, 166, 190; caespitosa, var.
alpina, 158, 167, 191.

Desmids, 227.

Desmodium, 54; canadense, 121; cili-
are, 121; cuspidatum, 13; panicu-

latum, 121; rigidum, 121; sessili-
folium, 13.

Diandrae, 221. .

Dianthus Caryophyllus, 37; mon-

spessulanus, 39.
Diapensia, 154; lapponica, 163, 169.
Diatoma anceps, 137; elongatum, var.
tenue, 137; hiemale, 137; tenue,
137; vulgare, 137.

Index

239

Diatoms, 125-129, with some Account
of their Distribution in certain Parts
of the State, A partial List of Con-
necticut, 125.

Dicentra, 54.

Dickiea crucigera, 135.

Dicksonia, 27, 85; pilosiuscula, 85;
punctilobula, 85.

Diclytra, 54.

Dicotyledoneae, 36.

Dicranum Bergeri, 65.

Dielytra, 54.

Diervilla, 147; Lonicera, 147;
laris, 147; sessilifolia, 147;
dens, 147; trifida, 147.

Diervilla $ Weigela, 147.

Diervillas, Flower Color of the Ameri-
can, 147.

Digitalis lutea X purpurea, 41.

Dimerogramma minus, 138; Surirella,
138.

Diphryllum, 53.

Diplogon, 55.

Diplomorpha, 49.

Diploneis didyma, var. obliqua, 134.

Dissarrenum, 53.

Ditylium Brightwellii, 130, 139; in-
aequale, 139; intricatum, 139; tetra-
gonum, 139; trigonum, 139.

Dobbin, F., Rediscovery of Podoste-
mon ceratophyllus in Vermont, 220.

Docidium Archeri, 104; clavatum,
104; constrictum, 105; coronatum,

rivu-
splen-

102; Ehrenbergii, 103; indicum,
104; maximum, 104; minutum,
232; nodosum, 105; nodulosum,
102; Trabecula, 103; truncatum,

; verrucosum, 105.

Dondia, 54, 140; americana, 141, 144,
146; maritima, 141, 145.

Draba arabisans, 161, var. orthocarpa,
161; aurea, 161; corymbosa, 161;
incana, 154, 161, var. confusa, 161;
megasperma, 161; pyenosperma, 161;
stylaris, 154, 161, 166.

Drosera intermedia, 121; linearis, 189;
rotundifolia, 121.

Droseras, 120. À

Dryas Drummondii, 151, 152, 162, 167,
179, 188, 191; integrifolia, 162, 167,
183.

Dryopteris, 27; acrostichoides, 27;
Filix-mas, 27, in Vermont, Further
information regarding the Occur-
rence of, 27; fragrans, 154; Goldiana,
27; marginalis, 27; noveboracensis,
27, 121; simulata, 121; spinulosa,
27, 121; Thelypteris, 121.

240

Dulichium arundinaceum, 121.

Dunham, E. M., Polytrichum gracile
Dicks. in Maine, 64.

Durvillea, 38, 52.

Dwarf Mistletoe, 75, on the south-
eastern Coast of Maine, 208.

Eames, A. J., Preliminary Lists of New
England Plants,— XX, Spargania-
ceae, 86.

Eames, E. H., A new Variety of
Scirpus Olneyi, 220.

Eaton, L. O., Notes on Plants of
Chesterville, Maine, 207.

Eatonia, 11; Dudleyi, 11.

Echinocystis, 55.

Echinospermum Lappula, 14.

Egeria, 44.

Elaeagnus argentea, 162, 179.

Eleocharis olivacea, 74.

Ellisia, 55.

Elymus mollis, 218.

Embelia Sarasinorum, 39.

Empetrum, 178, 193; nigrum, 149-152,
156, 162, 169, 170, 174, 177, 178, 180—
182, 189, 218, var. andinum, 162,
219.

Enantioblastae, 37.

Encyonema caespitosum, 135; pros-
tratum, 135.

Englera, 38.

Englerastrum, 38.

Englerella, 38.

Epilobium, 157; alpinum, 154, 162,
191; anagallidifolium, 162; strictum,
63.

Epiphegus, 55.

Epithemia argus, 138; gibba, 138, var.
ventricosa, 138; musculus, 138;
turgida, 138; zebra, 138.

Eragrostis minor, 12.

Erica, 47; vulgaris, 47. |

Erigeron aeris, 164, 189, var. debilis,
164, var. droebachensis, 164; hysso-
pifolius, 154, 164, 167, 172, 191.

Eriocaulon septangulare, 121.

Eriphorum callitrix, 159, 180, 181, 189,
218; Chamissonis, 159, 224, var. al-
bidum, 159; virginicum, 121.

Erodium cicutarium, 124.

Erophila, 54.

Erysimum hieraciifolium, subsp. pan-
nonicum, var. longisiliquum, 41, sub-
sp. strietum, var. longisiliquum, 41.

Erythrina, 43; micropterix, 43; Poep-
pigiana, 43.

Euastrum oblongum, 79.

Euhelianthemum, 46.

Rhodora

[DEcEMBER

Euhermannia, 37.

Eunotia Diadema, 138; elongata, 138;
flexuosa, 138; gracilis, 138; lunaris,
138; major, 138; praerupta, 13$,
var. bidens 138; robusta, 138.

Eunotogramma laeve, 138.

Eupatorium, 49. _

Euphorbia maculata, 121.

Euphrasia borealis, 163; latifolia, 163,
190; Oakesii, 163; Williamsii, 155,
163.

Eupodiscus, 130; Rod-
gersii, 139.

Eusideroxylon, 38.

Evans, A. W., Notes on New England
Hepaticae,— V, 56, 65.

argus, 139;

Fagopyrum, 54.

Fagus alba, 114; americana, 112-114,
var. latifolia, 113; atropunicea, 112,
113; grandifolia, 112, 113, var. caro-
liniana, 114, forma mollis, 114, 115;
grandifolia, forma pubescens, 111,
114, 115; ferruginea, 112-115, var.
caroliniana, 113, 114, var. latifolia,
113, 114; heterophylla, 114; lati-
folia, 112, 113; nigra, 114; rotundi- .
folia, 114; sylvatica, 113, 114, var.
americana, 113, var. americana lati-
folia, 113, var. atropunicea, 113; syl-
vestris, 113, 114.

Faleata, 54.

Fedia, 55.

Fern, Holly, 27.

Fernald, M. L., The alpine Rhinanthus
of Quebec and New Hampshire, 23;
The Genus Suaeda in northeastern
America, 140; Note on Cirsium
muticum, var. monticola, 28; Pre-
liminary Lists of New England
Plants,—— XX, Sparganiaceae, 86;
Ribes vulgare and its indigenous
Representatives in North America,
1; Salicornia europaea and its Repre-
sentatives in eastern America, 204;
The Soil Preference of certain alpine
and subalpine Plants, 149; Some
new Willows of eastern America,
221; Streptopus oreopolus a possible
Hybrid, 106; The Variations of
Primula farinosa in northeastern

America, 15. .

Festuca, 174; altaica, 155, 159, 167,
174, 188, 224; ovina, var. brevi-
folia, 159; rubra, var. prolifera, 159.

Fibichia, 53. .

Fieus indica, 39.

Fimbriati, 37.

1907]

Fimbristylis, 53; capillaris, 121.

Fir Balsam, 76.

Fletcher, E. F., Alehemilla pratensis,
found at Westford, Massachusetts,

Flora of the Boston Distriet, Reports
on the,—I, 81; of the Great Swamp
of Rhode Island, 117.

Flower Color of the American Dier-
villas, 147.

Flowering Raspberry, 5.

Forbes, F. F., Reports on the Flora of
the Boston District, — I, 81.

Form of Clethra alnifolia, A pink-
petaled, 195.

Fragillaria capucina, 137; construens,
137; Harrisonii, 131, 137; virescens
1837.

Fraxinaster, 37.

Fringed Gentian, Blue, 28.

Fritillaria alba, 51.

Frullania, 72; Asagrayana, 72, 73;
Brittoniae 73; Tamarisci, 72, 73.
Frustulia Lewisiana, 135; rhomboides,
135, var. saxonica, 135; viridula,

135.

Fucus, 78.

Fumana, 46.

Fumaria Gussonei, 39.

Fungi, 36.

Furera, 55.

Further Information regarding the Oc-
currence of Dryopteris Filix-mas in
Vermont, 27.

Galium asprellum, 122; boreale, 14;
kamtschaticum, 163.

Galionella nummuloides, 140.

Gansblum, 54.

Gaylussacia, 54;

Gemmingia, 53.

Genista Boissieri, 47;
Webbei, 47.

Gentian, Blue Fringed, 28.

Gentiana acuta, 154; Amarella, var.
acuta, 154, 163, 167.

dumosa, 119. `

horrida, 47;

Genus Suaeda in northeastern Amer- |

ica, 140.

Geocalyx graveolens, 73.

Geranium Robertianum, 39.

Gerardia, 38; paupercula, 122; pur-
purea, 122.

Gesnera Donklarii, 45.

Geum Peckii, 154, 155, 162; radiatum,
154.

Glazioua, 38.

Globularia cordifolia, 45.

Gloriosa, 37.

Index

24]

Glumiflorae, 37.

Glyceria, 53; canadensis, 121; ner-
vata, var. strieta, 208; obtusa, 121.

Gnaphalium norvegicum, 24, 164, 191;
supinum, 154, 164; uliginosum, 154.

Gomphonema acuminatum, 136; au-
gur, 136; capitatum, 136; con-
strictum, 136; cristatum, 136; gemi-
natum, 136.

Goodyera pubescens, 121.

Graderia, 38.

Gramineae, 37, 50.

Grammatophora oceanica, var. maci-
lenta, 138.

Gratiola at Westfield, a clerical Error,
Record of Color Varieties of, 195;
aurea, 122, 123, 195, forma helveola,
123, forma leucantha, 123, The retro-
grade Color Varieties of, 122; Drum-
mondii 123; ebracteata, 123; flori-
bunda, 123; gracilis, 123; macran-
tha, 123; pusilla, 123; ramosa, 123;
sphaerocarpa, 123; Torreyi, 123; vir-
giniana, 123; viscosa, 123.

Gratiolaria, 123.

Grimmaldia fragrans, 73.

Guttiferae, 37.

Gymnocimum, ST.

Gymnospermae, 36.

Gypsophila, 48, sect. Vaccaria, 48.

Gyrosigma Temperii, 135.

Gyrostachis, 53.

Gyrotheca, 53.

Habenaria blephariglottis, 119, 121,
124; ciliaris, 119; clavellata, 121;
dilatata, 160, 189, 190; fimbriata,
154; hyperborea, 124; macrophylla,
124; orbiculata, 74; psycodes, 121.

Halenia, 55.

Handy, L. H., A pink-petaled form of
Clethra alnifolia, 195.

Hantzschia amphioxys. 136; segmen-
talis, 136.

Haplopappus, 55.

Harger, E. B., An interesting Locality,
62.

Harrison, A. K., Reports on the Flora
of the Boston District,— I, 81.

Hedypnois, 55.

Hedysarum, 37, 154, 193; america-
num, 154; boreale. 154, 162, 167,
172, 179; Mackenzii, 179.

Helianthemum, 46; italicum, var.
mieranthum, 48; penicillatum, 48,
var, micranthum, 48.

Helxine, 54.

242

Hemiaulus
138.

Hemigenia, sect. Hemigenia, 47.

Hepaticae, 63, Notes on New England,
~~ V, B5, 65.

Heritieria, 53.

Herniaria diandra, 40; hirsuta, var.
diandra, 40.
Heteranthera, 53;
Heterodraba, 37.

Hicoria, 53.

Hicorius, 53.

Hieracium Flahaultianum, 43 ; flori-
bundum, 63; Gronovii, 122; sca-
brum, 122,

Hierochloe, 53; alpina, 156, 158, 166;

oe 2k.
og Blackberry, 5.

Holly Fern, o7

Homalocenchrus, 53.

Hoorebeckia, 55.

Host, Peridermium pyriforme and its
probable alternate, 194.

Hottonia inflata, 14, 63.

Houstonia caerulea, 209, 210, Alpine
Variety of, 209, forma albiflora, 210,
var. Faxonorum, 210; serpyllifolia,
210.

Hyalodiscus
140.

Hybrid, Streptopus oreopolus a possi-
ble, 106

Hybrids of Viola, Mendel’s Law of
Dominance, in the 211.

Hydrocotyle umbellata, 13.

Hydrophyllum virginicum, 75.

Hypericum boreale, 121; canadense,
121; gentianoides, 121; maculatum,
121; virginicum, 121.

Hypoxis erecta, 121.

affinis, 138; tubulosus,

graminea, 63.

stelliger, 140; subtilis,

Ibidium, 53.

Ilex, 151; monticola, 151; opaca, 13.

Ilicioides, 54.

Ilysanthes attenuata,
loides, 122.

Impatiens, 37.

Interesting Locality, 62.

International Rules for Botanical
Nomenclature chiefly of Vascular
Plants, 33.

Ioxylon pomiferum, 91.

Iria, 52, 53.

Iriha, 53.

Iris, 52; setosa, 219; versicolor, 219.

Isthmia nervosa, 131, 138.

122; gratio-

Josselyn Botanical Society, Bulletin" of
the, 196, Meeting of the, 107, 124.
Joxylon, 54.

Rhodora

` Lawrence,

[DECEMBER]

Juncoides, 3.

Juncus alpinus, 160; brevicaudatus,
121; canadensis, 121; castaneus, 24,
160, 190; filiformis, 156, 160, 189;
marginatus, 121; militaris, 119;
pelocarpus, 121; tenuis, var. Wil
liamsii 121; trifidus, 156, 160, 169.

Juniperus communis, var. montana,
158; horizontalis, 202, forma lobata,
202.

Jungermannia dovrensis, 58; haemato-
sticta, 57, 58; longidens, 59; por-
phyroleuca, var. attenuata, 59; sca-
laris, B minor, 57, B repanda, 57;
Silvrettae, 57.

Kalmia, 187; angustifolia, 163, 169,
189; glauca, 182; latifolia, 122,
187; polifolia, 163, 169, 182, 189.

Kantia, 56; sphagnicola, 65; suecica,
66; Sullivantii, 67, 73; Tricho-
manis, 66, var. tenuis, 69.

Kernera, 38.

Kneiffia pumila, 122.

Knight, O. W., Three Plants from
Maine, 202.

Knowlton, C. H., Newly observed
Stations for Massachusetts Plants,
.ll; Noteworthy Plants collected at
Roque Bluffs, Maine, in 1907, 218;
Reports on the Flora of the Boston
District,— I, 81.

Koellia, 55; virginiana, 122.

Krigia, 55.

Labiatae, 37, 50.

Lachnanthes, 53; capitata, 119.

Laciniaria, 55.

Lamson-Seribner, see
Lamson.

Lapeyrousea, 38.

Laplacea, 49.

Laportea, 54.

Lappula deflexa, 163.

Larix laricina, 158, 169.

Lauraceae, 38.

Massachusetts,
spermum australe at, 26.

Ledum groenlandicum, 156, 162, 169,
170, 174, 189; palustre, 182.

Leersia 53.

Leguminosae, 37.

Lemairea, 50.

Leontodon autumnale, 122.

Lepargyrea, 54.

Lepidium spathulatum, 40.

Leptamnium, 55.

Leptorkis, 53.

Leptostachys, 51.

Scribner, F.

Acantho-

1907]

Leptothrix, 131.

Lerchea, 54.

Lespedeza capitata, 121;
1205121.

Leucothoe racemosa, 14.

Liatris, 55.

Libellus rhombicus, 134.

Lichenes, 36.

Licmophora flabellata, 138; Juergensii,
138; tincta, 138.

Lignum, 51.

Linaria genistaefolia, 14; Linaria, 51.

Linum usitatissimum, 119.

Liparis, 53.

Liquidambar, 37.

List of Connecticut Diatoms with some
Account of their Distribution in cer-
tain Parts of the State, 125.

Listera, 53.

Lists of New England Plants, Prelimi-
nary,— XX, Sparganiaceae, 86.

Lithodesmium undulatum, 139.

Lobelia cardinalis, 120, 122; Dort-
manna, 119; inflata, 122; Kalmii,
164, 189, 190.

Loiseleuria, 54; procumbens, 154, 162,
169, 177.

Long Island, New York, New Stations
for Chamaecyparis on, 74.

Lonicera caerulea, var. villosa, 163,
190; oblongifolia, 189.

Lophozia, 56; alpestris, 59; conferti-
folia, 59; excisa, 73; longidens, 59,
60; porphyroleuca, 66, 73; ventri-
cosa, 59; Wenzelii, 59.

Lotus siliquosus, 48.

Lupinus perennis, 124.

Luzula, 53; confusa, 160; parviflora,
156, 160, 169; spicata, 160, var.
tenella, 160, 167.

Lychnis alba, 121; alpina, 160, 167,
174, 186, 191.

Lycopodium alpinum, 158; annotinum,
63, 74, var. pungens, 158; complana-
tum, 121; lucidulum, 121; obscu-
rum, 121; Selago, var. appressum,
156, 158, 169, var. patens, 158;
sitchense, 158.

Lycopus americanus, 122; virginicus,
120, 122.

Lygodium, 85; palmatum, 85.

Lyngbya aestuarii, 197.

Lysias, 53.

Lysigonium moniliforme, 139; varians,
139.

Lysimachia Hemsleyana, 39;
leyi, 39; producta, 14;
folia, 122; thrysiflora, 207.

frutescens,

Hems-
quadri-

Index

243

Lythrum alatum, 75; Hyssopifolia, 39;
intermedium, 48; Salicaria, 49, var.
gracilius, 49; var. intermedium, 49.

Maclura, 54, 91; aurantiaca,
pomifera, 91, 148.

Macrocalyx, 55.

Madia, 37.

Madiinae, 37. `

Magnolia foetida, 48; grandiflora, 48;
virginiana, var. foetida, 48.

Magnusia, 38.

Maine, Bulletin of the Josselyn Botani-
cal Society of, 196; Coast, Primula
farinosa, var. macropoda on the, 217;
The dwarf Mistletoe on the south-
eastern Coast of, 208; in 1907,
Noteworthy Plants collected at
Roque Bluffs, 218; Notes on Plants
of Chesterville, 207; An Occurrence
of Catharinaea crispa in, 74; Poly-
trichum gracile Dicks. in, 64; Three
Plants from, 202.

Majanthemum, 53.

Malva Tournefortiana, 39.

Malvaceae, 37.

Malvineae, 37.

Manihot, 37.

Mariana, 55.

Marsupella, 57; erythrorhiza, 57; me-
dia, 57; Silvrettae, 57; Sullivantii,
57. '

Marsypocarpus, 54.

Martia, 38.

Martinella apiculata, 71.

Martuisia, 38.

Massachusetts, Acanthospermum aus-
trale at Lawrence, 26; Alchemilla
pratensis found at Westford, 92; No-
tothylas orbicularis in, 219; Plants,
Newly observed Stations for, 11.

Mastogloia gibbosa, 135; undulata,
135.

Matricaria discoidea, 14.

Matthiola, 45; tristis, 45.

Medeola virginiana, 121.

Medicago denticulata, 124; orbicularis,
45; polymorpha, var. orbicularis,
45; sativa, 121.

Meeting of the Josselyn Botanical
Society, 107, 124; of the Vermont
Botanical and Bird Clubs, 108.

Meibomia, 54.

Melinis, 50.

Melosira Borreri, 128, 139; coronata,
140; nummuloides, 140; octogona,
140; sculpta, 140; undulata, 140;
varians, 139.

91;

244

Mendel's Law of Dominance in the
Hybrids of Viola, 211.

Mentha, 49; arvensis, 122; bracteolata,
44; foliicoma, 44; longifolia X
rotundifolia, 42; spicata, 48, var.
viridis, 48; villosa, B Lamarckii,
42; viridis, 48.

Menyanthes trifoliata, 157, 163, 189,
190.

Meridion circulare, 137; intermedium,
137.

Mertensia, 55.

Mesophylla minor, 58.

Metastelma, 37.

Metastelmatinae, 37.

Metzgeria, 68.

Micrampelis, 55.

Micromelilotus, 37.

Micropterix Poeppigiana, 43.

Microspermae, 37.

Microspora, 78.

Microstylis monophyllos, 160.

Mikania, 55.

Minthe, 49.

Mistletoe, Dwarf, 75; on the south-
eastern Coast of Maine, The dwarf,
208.

Mitrophora, 55.

Monochaete, 52.

Monochaetum, 52.

Monocotyledoneae, 36.

Montia fontana, 219.

Moore, A. H., Alpine Variety of
Houstonia caerulea, 209.

Mormon Weed, 26.

Mosses, 98.

Mount Desert, Arceuthobium pusillum
at, 75.

Muhlenbergia, 17, 23; ambigua, 20;
diffusa, 17; foliosa, 19-21, subsp.
ambigua, 20, 21, subsp. setiglumis,
20; glabrifloris, 22; glomerata, 22,
var. ramosa, 22; gracilis, 20; mexi-
cana, 18, 19, 21, 23, subsp. commu-
tata, 18, 21, var. filiformis, 19; Notes
on, 17; palustris, 17; polystachya,
18; racemosa, 20, 22, var. ramosa,
22, subsp. violacea, 22; Schreberi,
17, 22, subsp. curtisetosa, 17, subsp.
palustris, 17; sobolifera, 17, 18, 22,
subsp. setigera, 18; sylvatica, 18,
20, 21,..29,. var, gracilis, 20, var.
setiglumis, 20; tenuiflora, 18, 21,
22, subsp. variabilis, 18; umbrosa,
20-22, subsp. attenuata, 21; Will-
denowii, 18.

Mulberry, 5.

Rhodora

[DECEMBER

Murdoch, J. Jr., Arceuthobium in
the Rangeley Region, 28.

Myogalum Boucheanum, 43.

Myosotis, 45, 46.

Myriea, 50; asplenifolia, 121 :
fera, 194.

ceri-

Nabalus Boottii, 154. ;

Nardia Geoscyphus, 57, 58; haema-
tosticta, 57, 58; insecta, 58, 59;
minor, 58; repanda, 57; scalaris,
58; Silvrettae, 58.

Nasturtium sylvestre, 12,

Navieula, 131; advena, 132; ameri-
cana, 133; amphigomphus, 133; am-
phipleuroides, 133; amphirhynchus,
126, 133; approximata, 132; ara-
bica, 133; aspera, 133; bacillum,
133; Bartleyana, 133; Boeckii, 135;
bombus, 132; borealis, 132; bra-
siliensis, 132; Brebissonii, 132; cali-
fornica, var. campeachiana, 133; can-
cellata, 132; cardinalis, 132; carri-
baea, 132; cireumsecta, 133; clavata,
132; columnaris, 133; crabro, 132;
crassinervia, 135; crucicola, 133;
cuspidata, 133; dactylus, 132; dela-
warensis, 133; didyma, 132; digito-
radiata, 132; dilatata, 133; dip-
loneis, var. obliquus, 133; directa,
132; distans, 132; divergens, 132;
elegans, 133; elliptica, 126, 132, var.
oblongella, 132; esox, 133; firma,
133; Fischeri, 133; forcipata, 132;
formosa, 133; fortis, 132; fusca, 132;
gibba, 132; gigas, 132; Hennedyi,
132; hibernica, 132; Hitchcockii,
133; humerosa, 133; interposita, 133;
interrupta, 132; iridis, 133, var.
amphigom phus, 133, var. amphirhyn-
chus, 133, var. producta, 133; irro-
rata, 132; kamorthensis, 133; lata,
128, 132; latissima, 133; Legumen,
132; Lewisiana, 130, 135; liber, 133;
limosa, 133; longa, 132; lyra, 130,
132; maeulata. 129, 133; major, 132;

. marina, 133; nobilis, 131, var. dac-
tylus, 132; oblongella, 132; palpe-
bralis, 133; pe 133; peregrina,
132; peripunctata, 131, 133; per-
magna, 129. 130, 133; polyonca,
132; polysticta, 132; Powellii, 133;
praetexta, 132; producta, 133; pu-
silla, 133; pygmaea, 132; rhombieca,

134; rhomboides, 135; rhynco-
cephala, 132; Semen, 128, 132 -
serians, 133; Sillimanorum, 133 E

1907]

Smithii, 132; sphaerophora, 133;
Tabellaria, 132; theta, 134; trinodis,
134; tubulosa, 134; tumescens, 133;
tuscula, 133; viridis, 132; yarrensis,
132; zostereti, 132.

Nazia, 53.

Neckeria, 54.

Needhamia, 54.

Nemopanthus, 54.

Neoplantago, 37.

Nepeta Sieheana, 43.

Nephrodium spinulosum, var. fruc-
tuosum, $84; Thelypteris, forma
Pufferae, 83.

Neves-Armondia, 51.

New England Hepaticae, Notes on,—
V, 56, 65; Plants, Preliminary Lists
of,— XX, Sparganiaceae, 86; Spe-
cies of Penium, 227; Species of
Pleurotaenium, Synopsis of the,
101; Trees, Some new or little
known Forms of, 109.

New Hampshire, The alpine Rhinan-
thus of Quebec and, 23.

New York, New Stations for Chamae-

cyparis on Long Island, 74.

d observed Stations for Massa-
chusetts Plants, 11.

Nicandra, 55.

Nichols, J. T., New Stations for
Chamaecyparis on Long Island,
New York, 74. ©

Nigritella, 48; angustifolia, 48; nigra,
48

Nitzschia, 131; acuminata, 136; angu-
laris, 136; circumsuta, 136; Clos-
terium, 136; curvirostris, var. Clos-
terium, 136; curvula, 131, 136;
fasciculata, 136; granulata, 136;
linearis, var. tenuis, 136; Lorenzi-
ana, 136; marginulata, 136; obtusa,
136; plana, 136; scalaris 130, 136;
Shafferi, 131, 136; sigma, 136; sig-
moidea, 136; tenuis, 136; trybli-
onella, 136, var. maxima, 136.

Nomenclature adopted by the Vienna
Congress, On the Rules of Botanical,
29; chiefly of Vascular Plants,
International Rules for botanical,
33; for Algae, The Basis of, 77.

North America, Ribes vulgare and its
indigenous Representatives in east-
ern, 1.

North American Violets, The older
Types of,— I, 93.

Norton, A. H., The dwarf Mistletoe on
the southeastern Coast of Maine, 208.

Index

245

Note on Cirsium muticum, var. monti-
cola, 28.

Notes on Connecticut Plants, 10; on
Muhlenbergia, 17; on New England
Hepaticae,— V, 56, 65; on Plants of
Chesterville, Maine, 207.

Noteworthy Plants collected at Roque
Bluffs, Maine, in 1907, 218; Plants
of Salisbury, Connecticut, 74.

Notothylas, 219;. orbicularis, 219, in
Massachusetts, 219.

Nuphar advena, 121.

Nymphaea odorata, 121.

Oak, 60; Black, 61; Scrub, 60; White,
61.

Occurrence of Catharinaea crispa in
Maine, 74.

Ocimum, 44.

Odontella aurita, 138; turgida, 138.

Odontochisma denudatum, 73.

Odontidium Harrisonii, 137; hiemale,
137; mutabile, 137.

Oedogonium, 78.

Oenothera biennis, 122.

Older Types of North American Violets,
— I, 93.

Omphalodes Luciliae, 39.

Onobrychus eubrychidea, 43.

Onoclea, 85; sensibilis, 85; Struthiop-
teris, 85.

Ophioglossaceae, 85.

Ophioglossum, 85; vulgatum, 85.

Opulaster, 54.

Orange, Osage, 91, 148.

Orchidaceae, 52.

Ornithogalum, 43; Boucheanum, 43;
undulatum, 43.

Orobanche artemisiae, 49; artemisiepi-
hyta, 49; Columbriae, 49; colum-
arihaerens, 49; Rapum, 49; saro-
thamnophyta, 49.

Orontium aquaticum, 119.

Osage Orange, 91, 148; The Scientific
Name of the, 91.

Osmunda, 85; cinnamomea, 85, var.
frondosa, 85; Claytoniana, 85; rega-
lis, 85.

Oxalis Acetosella, 207, var. subpur-
purascens, 207; corniculata, 121.

Oxyria digyna, 154, 160.

Oxytropis, 54; campestris, var. jo-
hannensis, 162.

Pachycladae, 37.
Palmae, 37.

Palmellococcus, 197; miniatus, 198.

246

Panax nossibiensis, 43.

Panicularia, 53.

Panicum tennesseense, 208; Werneri,
208.

Papaver Rhoeas, 39.

.Paralia sulcata, 140.

Parietales, 37.

Parnassia Kotzebuei, 162, 167; parvi-
flora, 162, 189.

Pease, A. S., Alpine Variety of Hous-
tonia caerulea, 209.

Pedicularis flammea, 163.

Pelargonium zonale, 41.

Pellaea atropurpurea, 187;
74, 154.

Penium, 227; annulare 228, 233, var.
obesum, 233; Clevei, 228, 230, var.
crassum, 230; closterioides, 228,
forma interrupta, 229; cruciferum,
228, 232; curtum, 228, 232; cuticu-
lare, 228, 230; Libellula, 228, var.
intermedium, 229; var. interrup-
tum, 229; margaritaceum, 228-230,
var. punctatum, 231; minutum,
228, 232, 233, var. elongatum, 233;
Navicula, 228, 229; New England
Species of, 227; phymatosporum,
228, 231; polymorphum, 228, 231;
spirostriolatum, 228, 231, var. api-
culatum, 231.

Pentagonia, 55.

Peponia, 52.

Peponium, 52.

Peridermium, 194, 195; Cerebrum, 194;
pyriforme, 194, and its probable
alternate Host, 194.

Periptera tetracladia, 139.

Petasites trigonophylla, 155, 164, 191;
vitifolia, 155, 164.

Peyrousea, 38.

Phaecocephalum, 51.

Phaseolus perennis, 10.

Phegopteris, 82; alpestris, 155, 158;
Dryopteris, 63, 82; hexagonoptera,
82, 208; polypodioides, 82; Roberti-
ana, 158.

Phelps, O. P., Noteworthy Plants of
Salisbury, Connecticut, 74.

Phleum alpinum, 24, 154, 158, 190.

Phragmopedilum caudatum, 50.

Phrynium, 53.

Phyllantheae, 37.

Phyllanthus, 37, 45.

Phyllodoce caerulea, 163, 169, 190..

Physaloides, 55.

Physocarpus, 54.

Physospermum, 42.

Phyteuma Halleri, 39.

gracilis,

Rhodora

Picea,

[DECEMBER

Abies, forma virgata, 110;
alba, 75; brevifolia, 109, var. semi-
prostrata, 110; canadensis, 158,
169; excelsa, var. virgata, 110; *mar-
iana, 110, 158, 169, 174, var. brevi-
folia, 109, 110; nigra, 75, 218, var.
brevifolia, 109, var. virgata, 110,
rubens, 110; rubra, 110, forma vir-
gata, 110, 111.

Pilea, 54.

Pinaceae, 157. Y

Pinguicula, 153; vulgaris, 154, 163,
167, 172, 183, 190.

Pink-petaled Form of Cethra alnifolia,
195.

Pinnularia, 131.

Pinus rigida, 194, 195; virginiana, 195.

Plagiogramma Gregorianum, 138; stau-
rophorum, 138; validum, 138.

Plagiotropis vitrea, 135.

Plant, Is Rhinanthus Crista-galli an
introduced, 26.

Plantago aristata, 122.

Plants collected at Roque Bluffs,
Maine, in 1907, 218; from Maine,
Three, 202; International Rules
for Botanical Nomenclature chiefly
of Vascular, 33; New Stations for
two Vermont, 227; Newly observed
Stations for Massachusetts, 11; Notes
on Connecticut, 10; of Chesterville,
Maine, Notes on, 207; of Salisbury,
Connecticut, 74; Preliminary Lists
of New England,— XX, Spargania-
ceae, 86; Soil Preferences of certain
alpine and subalpine, 149.

Platanthera, 53.

Pleiostylae, 37.

Pleuripetalum, 52.

Pleurococcus marinus, 197, 198; minia-
tus, 198.

Pleurolobus, 54.

Pleuropetalum, 52.

Pleurosigma, 128-130; acuminatum,
134; affine, 130, 134; americanum,
129, 134; angulatum, 130, 134, var.
aestuarii, 134; attenuatum, 134;
balticum, 128-130, 134; Brebissonii,
134; decorum, 129; 134; elongatum,
129, 134, var. gracile, 134; exi-
meum, 134; fasciola, 134; formo-
sum, 134; hypocampus, 134; inter-
medium, 130, 134; latum, 134; lit-
torale, 134; naviculaceum, 134; ne-
becula, 134; paradoxum, 129, 134;
scalproides, 134; simile, 134; Spen-
cerii, 134, var. curvulum, 134; stri-
gile, 129, 134, 234; strigosum, 134;

1907]

subsalinum 135; Terryanum, 129,
134, Wansbeckii, 134.
Pleurostauron acutum, 134.

Pleurotaenium, 101; acutum, 126;
constrictum, 101, 102, 105, 106;
coronatum, 102, 106, var. fluctua-
tum, 102, var. nodulosum, 102;
Ehrenbergii, 102, 103, 106, var.
elongatum, 103, var. undulatum,

103; indicum, 104; maximum, 102,
104: nodosum, 101, 102, 105, 106;
rectum, 104; subgeorgicum, 102, 104,
106; Synopsis of the New England
Species of, 101; Trabecula, 102, 103,
106, forma clavatum, 104, forma
granulatum, 104, var. rectum, 104;
truncatum, 102, 103, 106; verruco-
sum, 101, 102, 105, 106.

Pneumaria, 55.

Poa, 157; alpina, 159; laxa, 156, 159,
166; Sandbergii, 159.

Podocystis adriatica,
cana, 137.

Podosira dubia, 140.

Podostemon ceratophyllus, 220, in
Vermont, Rediscovery of, 220.

Polanisia trachysperma, 75.

Polemonium Van Bruntiae, 75.

Polygala Nuttallii, 121; polygama, 121.

Polygonaceae, 37.

Polygonales, 37.

Polygonastrum, 53.

Polygonum acre, 119; arifolium, 121;
Careyi, 119; dumetorum, var. scan-
dens, 119; hydropiperoides, 119;
pennsylvanicum, 121; Persicaria,
121; punctatum, 121; sagittatum,
121; viviparum, 154, 156.

Polymnia, 62, 63; canadensis, 62.

Polypodiaceae, 82.

Polypodium, 82; vulgare, 82.

Polystichum, 83, 174; acrostichoides,
83, var. incanum, 83, Schweinitzii,
83; Braunii, 154; Lonchitis, 158, 190;
scopulinum, 158, 167, 174, 188.

Polytrichum, 64; gracile, 64, in Maine,
64

137;

ameri-

Pongelion, 54.

Pontederia cordata, 121, var. lancifolia,
121.

Portulaca, 50.

Portulacaceae, 50.

Potamogeton lucens, var. connecticu-
tensis, 74; praelongus, 63.

Potentilla fruticosa, 12; nivea, 162;
palustris, 162, 189; Robbinsiana,
162; tridentata, 156. 162, 169.

Preferences of certain alpine and sub-
alpine Plants, Soil, 149.

Index

247

Preliminary Lists of New England
Plants, —X X, Sparganiaceae, 86.

Prenanthes Boottii, 154, 156, 164, 166;
trifoliolata, var. nana, 164, 169,
171, 191.

Primula americana, 16; denticulata,
47; erosa, 47; farinosa, 15, in north-
eastern America, Variations of, 15,
subsp. eufarinosa, var. genuina, 15,
var. americana, 15, var. incana,
16, var. macropoda, 16, 163, 167,
217, on the Maine Coast, 217; incana,
16; mistassinica, 163, 167, 172.

Primularia cashmiriana, 47.

Protococcus miniatus, 198.

Pseudinga, 37.

Pseudoauliscus radiatus, 139.

Pseudoeunotia flexuosa, 138, bicap-
itata, 138; lunaris, 138.

Pseudofumaria, 54.

Psilosanthus, 55.

Pteridophyta, 36, 152, 157, 187.

Pteris, 82; aquilina, 82.

Pteropsiella, 68.

Purple Raspberry, 5.

Pycnanthemum, 55.

Pyrola grandiflora, 24, 162, 190; mi-
nor, 154.
Pyrus, 202; americana, 63, 203;

americana x arbutifolia, 202.
Pyxilla baltica, 139.

Quebec and New Hampshire, The Al-
pine Rhinanthus of, 283. , ,
Quercus ilicifolia, 60, 61; prinoides,

60, 61, var. rufescens, 61; Prinus,
12.
Quisqualis, 51.

Racomitrum lanuginosum, 173.

Radix, 51.

Ramondia, 38.

Rand, E. L., Arceuthobium pusillum
at Mt. Desert, 75. :
Rangeley Region, Arceuthobium, in

the, 28.

Ranunculus acris, subsp. Friesianus,
40; Allenii, 161, 167; Boreauanus,
39; pygmaeus, 161, 167.

Raphanistrum Raphanistrum, 51. |

Raphoneis amphiceros, 137; belgica,
137, var. intermedia, 137; gemmi-
fera, 137; Surirella, 138.

Raspberry, Black, 4; Flowering, 5;
Purple, 5; Red, 4, Sow-teat, 5.

Razoumowskia, 54.

Reboulia hemisphaerica, 73.

Record of Color Varieties of Gratiola
at Westfield, a clerical Error, 195.

248

Red Algae, 90; Currant, 1; Raspberry,
4; Spruce, 109.

Rediscovery of Podostemon cerato-
phyllus in Vermont, 220.

Rehder, A., Quercus prinoides Willd.,
var. rufescens, n. var. 60; Some new
or little known Forms of New Eng-
land Trees, 109.

Reports on the Flora of the Boston
District,— I, 81.

Retrograde Color Varieties of Gratiola
aurea, 122.

Reynolds, E. S., The Flora of the
great Swamp of Rhode Island, 117.
Rhabdonema adriaticum, 138; arcua-

tum, 138.

Rhamnus alnifolia, 162, 189.

Rhapontieum, 48; subgen. Alfredia,

| 48.

Rhexia virginica, 120.

Rhinanthus, 24, 26; Crista-galli, 23-26,
an introduced Plant? 26; minor, 23 ;
oblongifolius, 24, 25, 163, 166, 190;
of Quebec and New Hampshire,
The alpine, 23.

Rhizoclonium, 200.

Rhizosolenia styliformis, 138.

Rhode Island, Flora of the great
Swamp of, 117.

Rhododendron, 187; canadense, 162,
187, 189; lapponicum, 162, 169, 174,

182; maximum, 120, 187; nudi-
florum, 122; Rhodora, 187.
Rhoiconeis trinodis, 134.
Rhoicosphaenia curvata, 136.
Rhus copallina, 121; glabra, var.
laciniata, 115; hirta, 115, var.

laciniata, 115; typhina, 115, forma
dissecta, 115, forma laciniata, 115,
var. laciniata, 115.

Rhynchospora, 53; capillacea, 159,
189; fusca, 119; macrostachya, 119.

Ribes albinervium, 3, 4; lacustre, 63;
oxyacanthoides, 63, 181, var. calci-
cola, 2; rubrum, 1, 3, var. sativum,
3, var. subglandulosum, 3; tristre, 3,
var. albinervium, 4; vulgare, 1, 3,
and its indigenous Representatives
in eastern North America, 1.

Riecardia latifrons, 66; palmata, 73;
sinuata, 73.

Riccia, 56; canaliculata, 56; fluitans,
56, var. Sullivantii, 56; Huebeneri-
ana, 56; Sullivantii, 56.

Ricciella, 56, 57; crystallina, 57;
fluitans, 57; Sullivantii, 56, 57.

Riddle, L. W., Notothylas orbicularis
in Massachusetts, 219.

Rhodora

[DECEMBER

Robinson, B. L., Maclura pomifera
(Raf.) Schneider, 148; The scientific
Name of the Osage Orange, 91.

Roestelia, 195.

Roque Bluffs, Maine, in 1907, Note-
worthy Plants collected at, 218.

Rosa, 37; Beatricis, 39; glutinosa,
var. leioclada, 40; Jundzillii, var.
leioclada, 40; villosa, 50.

Rosaceae, 37, 78.

Rubi, 4; Connecticut, 4.

Rubia, 52

Rubus, 52; alleghaniensis, o0, 70
Andrewsianus, 6, 10; arcticus, 24,
162, 169, 189, 190; ascendens, 9;
Baileyanus, 6; canadensis, 6, 10;
castoris, 162; Chamaemorus, 150-
152, 157, 162, 166, 177, 180, 181, 218,
219; euneifolius, 5; floricomus, 6;
frondosus, 6; hispidus, 10; invisus,
6; neglectus, 5; nigricans, 8; nigro-
baecus, 5, var. Gravesii, 6; occiden-
talis, 4, 5, X strigosus, 5; odoratus,
5; pergratus, 10; procumbens, 6,
8; recurvans, 6, 8; Rossbergianus,
7; semisetosus, 8, 10; setosus, 8,
9; strigosus, 4, 5; subuniflorus, 6;
triflorus, 5, 162, 169, 190.

Rules for Botanical Nomenclature
chiefly of Vascular Plants, Interna-
tional, 33; of Botanical Nomen-
clature adopted by the Vienna Con-
gress, On the, 29.

Rumex, 37.

Rumicoideae, 37.

Rynchospora, see Rhynchospera.

Sabbatia campestris, 207; chloroides,
14, 119.

Sagina saginoides, 161, 167.

Sagittaria Engelmanniana, 121; lati-
folia, 121.

Salicaceae, 37.

Salicornia, 200, 204; annua, 204;
europaea, 204-206, and its Repre-
sentative in eastern America, 204,
var. fruticosa, 204, var. herbacea,
204, var. pachystachya, 206, var.
prostrata, 206, fruticosa, 205; her-
bacea, 204—206, var. pachystachya,

205, 206; var. prostrata, 206;
prostrata, 205, 206; rubra, 206;
sempervirens, 204.

Salisbury, Connecticut, Noteworthy

Plants of, 74.

Salix, 37, 157; adenophylla, 225, 226;
amplifolia, 222; argyrocarpa, 24,
154, 160, 166, 190; aurita X caprea,

1907]

4l; aurita X cinerea X repens, 42;
balsamifera, 156, 160, 189; Barclayi,
160, 190; 221; Barrattiana, 226;
candida, 179; caprea X daphnoides,
var. pulehra, 42; X capreola, 41;
chlorolepis, 160, 167; coactilis, 203,
204; coactilis x cordata, 203; cor-
data, 203, 204, 224, 226; desertorum,
155, 160, 167, var. strieta, 160;
fuscescens, 221, 224, var. hebecarpa,
224; glauca, 160, 172, 190; glau-
cophylla, 222, 224; herbacea, 160,
166; laurentiana, 221, 222; lucida,

var. intonsa, 222; myrtilloides, 224; .

obtusata, 223; pedicellaris, 160, 189,
224; pellita, 222, 224; phylicifolia,
153, 154, 156, 160, 166, 190; pseudo-
myrsinites, 160, 189, 190, 221;
pyrolaefolia, 223, 224; Richardsoni,
var. Macouniana, 221; rostrata, 222,
var. luxurians, 223; speciosa, 226;
x Straehleri, 42; syrticola, 225, 226;
Uva-ursi, 154, 156, 160, 166; vestita,
24, 160, 172, 190.

Salsola - linearis, 142, 143, 145, 146;
maritima, 144, 146; salsa, 142, 143,
146, var. americana, 143, 144, 146.

Saltwort, 204.

Salvia oxyodon, 42.

Samphire, 204.

Saponaria, sect. Vaccaria, 48.

Sarcoscyphus Ehrharti, var. erythro-
rhizos, 57; sphacelatus, var. medius,
57; Sullivantii, 57.

Sarracenia purpurea, 120.

Satyrium, 48.
Savastana, 53.
Savia, 54.

Saxifraga aizoides, 154, 161, 167, 172;
Aizoón, 154, 161, 166, 172; aspera,
subsp. aspera, 47; autumnalis, 154;
caespitosa, 162, 183; nivalis, 161;
oppositifolia, 154, 161, 166, 172, 183,
185; rivularis, 154, 155, 161; stel-
laris, var. comosa, 155, 161.

Saxifrages, 153, 154.

Scabiosa Olgae, 39.

Scandalida, 54.

Scandix Pecten, 39; Pecten-Veneris, 39.

Scapania apiculata, 71; glaucocephala,
72; umbrosa, 71.

Scheuchzeria palustris, 207.

Schizonema crucigerum, 135; viridu-
lum, 135.

Schizonotus, 54.

Schneider, E. S., Acanthospermum
australe at Lawrence, Massachu-
setts, 26.

Index

249

Schoberia maritima, 144.

Schrebera, 50. .

Sciadophyllum heterotrichum, 43.

Scientific Name of the Osage Orange, 91.

Scirpus, 220; caespitosus, 156, 159,
189, 190; Olneyi, A new Variety of,
220, var. contortus, 220; pauciflorus,
159, 189.

Scoliopleura, 126, 128, 130; latestriata,
135, var. Amphora, 135; tumida,
135.

Scoria, 53.

Scribner, F. Lamson, Notes on Muhlen-
bergia, 17.

Scrophularia leporella, 14; marilandica,
14.

Scrub Oak, 60.

Scutellaria lateriflora, 122; parvula, 75.

Seaweeds, 91.

Sebastiano-Schaueria, 51.

Selaginella selaginoides, 158, 170, 174,
189, 190.

Senecio Balsamitae, 164, var. firmi-
folius, 164; discoideus, 164, 191;
pauciflorus, 164, 191.

Shepherdia, 54, 179; canadensis, 162,
167, 172, 179.

Sibbaldia proeumbens, 154, 162, 177,
178.

Silene acaulis, 161, 169.

Silybum, 55.

Simaruba, 45; amara, var. opaca, 45;
laevis, 45.

Simarubaceae, 45.

Siphonocladus, 200.

Sisymbrium altissimum, 227.

Sium cicutaefolium, 122.

Skunk Spruce, 76.

Smilacina, 53; trifolia, 218.

Snake Spruce, 110.

Society, Bulletin of the Jossel
Botanical, 196, Meeting of the
Josselyn Botanical, 107, 124.

Soil Preferences of certain alpine and
subalpine Plants, 149.

Solidago, 157; ambigua, 164; bicolor,
var. concolor, 164; decumbens, 155,
164, 167; macrophylla, 218, var.
thyrsoidea, 164; multiradiata, 28,

164, 191; odora, 122; puberula,
122; sempervirens, 15; uliginosa,
122; Virgaurea, 154, var. alpina,

156, 164, 166.

Some new green Algae, 197; New or
little known Forms of New England
Trees, 109; New Willows of eastern
America, 221.

Sophronanthe, 123.

250

Sorbaria, 54.

Sorrel, 154.

Sow-teat Raspberry, 5.

Sparganiaceae, Preliminary Lists of
New England Plants, — XX, 86.

Sparganium affine, 89; americanum,
86, 87, 121, var. androcladum, 86,
87, var. Nuttallii, 87; androcladum,
87; angustifolium, 86, 87, 89;
diversifolium, 86-89, var. acaule,
86-89, proles nanum, 88; eurycar-
p 86; fluetuans, 86, 87, 90;
ucidum, 86, 87, 90; minimum, 86,
90; multipedunculatum, 89; nanum,
88; Nuttallii, 87; ramosum, $87;
simplex, 86-90, var. acaule, 88, var.
americanum, 87, var. angustifolium,
89, var. multipedunculatum, 89;
var. Nuttallii, 87.

Spartium biflorum, 51.

Spathyema, 53.

Species of Penium, New England, 227;
of Pleurotaenium, Synopsis of the
New England, 101.

Spergularia, 54; arvensis, 121.

Spermatophyta, 152, 157, 187.

Sphagnum, 120, 183.

Sphenolobus exsectus, 71; minutus, 73.

Spiesia, 54.

Spina, 51.

Spiranthes, 53; gracilis, 121; Roman-
zoffiana, 207.

Spirulina, 131.

Sporobolus, 23.

Spruce, Black, 28, 208; Cat, 76; Red,
109; Skunk, 76; Snake, 110; Swamp,
75; White, 75, 76, 208.

Stachyotypus, 37.

Stachys à Stachyotypus, 41.

Staphylea, 49.

Staphylis, 49.

Statice sibirica, 155, 163, 167, 174, 186.

Stations for Chamaecyparis on Long
Island, New York, New, 74; for two
Vermont Plants, New, 227.

Stauroneis, 125, 126, 131; acuta, 126,
128, 134; gracilis, 134; Gregoryi,
134; nova, var. britanica, 126, 134;
phoenicentron, 134; salina, 134;
spicula, 134; Stodderi, 134; Terryi,
126, 134.

Stellaria borealis, 63.

Stenocladium, 17.

Stephanodiscus niagarae, 139.

Stephanopyxis appendiculata, var. in-
termedia, 139; corona, 139; ferox,
139; turris, 139, var. intermedia, 139.

Stipa, 44.

Rhodora

[DeceMBER:

Streptanthus heterophyllus, 45.

Streptopus, 106; amplexifolius, 106,
107; oreopolus, 106, 107, A possible
Hybrid, 106; roseus, 106, 107.

Strong, M. A., Further information

. regarding the Occurrence of Dryop-
teris Filix-mas in Vermont, 27.

Suaeda, 54, 140, 143, 144; americana,
146; in northeastern America, The
Genus, 140, linearis, 141—146, var. ra-
mosa, 143, 144, 146; maritima, 140—
145, var. vulgaris, 144; micro-
sperma, 145; Richii, 145, 219.

Subularia aquatica, 161.

Sueda, 146.

Sumach, 109.

Surirella, 127, 131; angusta, 137; bi-
seriata, 136; cardinalis, 127, 137;
constrieta, 137; elegans, 127, 131,
136, var. norvegica, 136; fastuosa,
127 137, var. lata, 137; Febigerii,.
128, 137; gemma, 137; gracilis, 127,
137; linearis, 136; Moelleriana, 137;
nobilis, 131; ovalis, 137, var. angusta,
137; recedens, 137; robusta, 136;
saxonica, 127; splendida, 127, 136;
striatula, 127-130, 137, var. tripli-
cata, 137; tenera, 127, 136; Terryi,
127, 137.

Swamp of Rhode Island, The Flora of
the great, 117; Spruce, 75.

Symplocarpus, 53.

Ede si diadema, 139.

Synedra affinis, 137; danica, 137;
pulchella, 137, var. Smithii, 137;
superba, 137; ulna, var. danica, 137.

Synopsis of the New England species of
Pleurotaenium, 101.

Tabellaria flocculosa, 138; fenestrata,.
138.

'Tamus, 49.

Tapeianthus, 43, 50.

Taraxacum, 55; ceratophorum, 164,.
191.

Tephrosia, 54.

Terpsinoe americana, 138; musica, 188.

Terry, W. A., Causes of Variation in
Color of some red Algae, 90; A par-
tial List of Connecticut Diatoms with
some account of their Distribution in
certain Parts of the State, 125.

Tetragonanthus, 55.

Tetragonolobus, 48, 54; Scandalida,
48; siliquosus, 48.

Thalictrum alpinum, 161.

Thamnos, 49.

Thirteenth Annual Field Meeting of

1907]

the Vermont Botanical and Bird
Clubs, 108; Annual Meeting of the
Josselyn Botanical Society, 107.

Thistle, Blessed, 28.

Three Plants from Maine, 202.

Thuspeinata, 43, 50.

Thymus Serpyllum, var. angustifolius,
40.

Tillaea, 49.

Tillia, 49.

Tissa, 54.

Tofieldia glutinosa, 160, 172, 189; pa-
lustris, 160.

Torresia, 53.

Tovaria, 53.

Toxylon, 54; aurantiacum, 91; Mac-
lura, 91; pomiferum, 91. `

Tragus, 53.

Trees, Some new or little
Forms of New England, 109.

Triceratium, 130; alternans,
flavum, 139.

Trichochloa, 17, 18; foliosa, 19; glom-
erata, 22; longiseta, 18; mexicana,
18; sobolifera, 18.

Trichochloa $ Acroxis, 18; § Steno-
cladium, 17.

'Tricoecae, 37.

Trichilia alata, 50; pterophylla, 50.

Trifoliastrum, 37.

Trifolium hybridum, 121.

Trillium cernuum, 121;
121.

Triodon, 53.

Trisetum melicoideum, 159.

Tristegineae, 50.

Tristegis, 50.

Tropidoneis seriata, 135; zebra, 135.

Tuber, 51; cibarium, 51.

Tuberaria, 46.

Tubiflorae, 37.

known

139;

undulatum,

Ubochea, 38.

Umbelliferae, 37.

Unifolium, 53.

Uromyces Fabae, 39.

Uropedium, 50.

Urticaceae, 37.

Urticales, 37.

Urticastrum, 54.

Urvillea, 38, 52.

Utricularia biflora, 119; clandestina,
119; cornuta, 119; gibba, 119; in-
flata, 119; intermedia, 119; resupi-
nata, 119; subulata, 119.

Vaccinium, 187;
eaespitosum, 154,

atrococcum,
156, 163,

119;
190;

Index 251

canadense, 75, 156, 163, 169,
ovalifolium, 163, 177, 178, 188, 190,
191; Oxycoccus, 163, 190, 218; pal-
lidum, 119; pennsylvanicum,
187, var. angustifolium, 156,
uliginosum, 154, 156, 163, 169, 174,
177, 182, 190; Vitis-Idaea,
var. minus, 156, 163, 169, 170, 177,
189, 191. .

Vagnera, 53.

Valentinia, 53.

Valeriana sylvatica, 163, 190;
nosa, 163.

Variations of Primula farinosa in north-
eastern America, 15.

Varieties of Gratiola at Westfield, a
clerical Error, Record of Color, 195;
of Gratiola aurea, The retrograde
Color, 122.

Variety of Houstonia caerulea, Alpine,
209; of Scirpus Olneyi, A new, 220.

Vaucheria, 200; Gardneri, 201, 202,
forma tenuis, 201; geminata, 201,
202; longipes, 201, 202.

Verbena hastata, 122.

Vermont Botanical and Bird Clubs,
108; Further Information regard-
ing the Occurrence of Dryopteris
Filix-mas in, 27; Plants, New Sta-
tions for two, 227; Rediscovery of
Podostemon ceratophyllus in, 220.

Vernonia, 55; noveboracensis, 122.

Veronica alpina, 25, 154, var. una-
lascheensis, 24, 163, 166, 190; Ana-
allis, 39; Anagallis-aquatica, 39.

Viburnum cassinoides, 122; dentatum,
122; pauciflorum, 154, 163, 169, 190.

Vienna Congress, On the Rules of Bo-
tanical Nomenclature adopted by
the, 29.

Vincetoxicum 49; nivale, 43.

Viola, 93, 151; affinis, 93, 94; arenaria,
13; asarifolia, 95, 96; blanda, 93;
canina, var. Muhlenbergii, 151, 162;
carolina, 96, 97; conspersa, 151,
162; cordifolia, 98; cucullata, 93, 94;
cuspidata, 96; Dicksonii, 96: fim-
briatula, 96; hirsutula, 98, 211-213,
215; hirsutula X papilionacea, 98,
211, 213, 214; hirta, 41; labradorica,
162; laetecaerulea, 96; Mendel's
Law of Dominance in the Hybrids of,
211; nephrophylla, 162, 189, 216;
nodosa, 96; obliqua, 93, 94; pal-
mata, var. dilatata, 96; palustris,162;
papilionacea, 93, 94, 96, 98, 211-213,
215, x villosa, 98; pedata, 121;
rotundifolia, 93; sagittata, 13; sep-

uligi-

HR

252

tentrionalis, 95; sororia, 94, 95, 98;
tricolor, var. hirta, 41; villosa, 95-98,
var. cordata, 98, var. cordifolia, 95,

Violets, The older Types of North
American,— I, 93.

Vitis Idaea, 154.

Volvulus, 55.

Wahlenbergia, 48.

Ware, R. A., Reports on the Flora of
the Boston District,— I, 81.

Weed, Mormon, 26.

Weigelas, 147.

Westfield, a clerical Error, Record of
Color Varieties of Gratiola at, 195.

Westford, Massachusetts, Alchemilla

ratensis found at, 92.

Wheeler, L. A., New Stations for two
Vermont Plants, 227.

White Oak, 61; Spruce, 75, 76, 208.

Rhodora

[DECEMBER

Wickstroemia, 49.

Willows, 221; of eastern America,
Some new, 221.

Willugbaeya, 55.

Witches’ Brooms, 28, 75.

Woodsia, 85; alpina, 154, 158, 166, 172;
glabella, 154, 158, 166, 172; ilvensis,
85; obtusa, 85; oregana, 158; sco-
pulina, 158.

Woodward, R. W., Notes on Connecti-
eut Plants, 10.

Woodwardia, 82; augustifolia, 82;
areolata, 82, 83; virginica, 82, 124.

Wormia, 47.

Xyris caroliniana, 119, 120; flexuosa,
120, 121.

Zatarhendi, 44.
Zygadenus, 193; chloranthus, 160, 170.